BTCINO Devices

BTicino SpA
Viale Borri, 231
www.bticino.com
21100 Varese - Italy
BTicino S.p.A. reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet
AD-ITMH14ST/GB - Edition 08/2014 and to communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
Technical sheets 2014
sheets
Technical
Zigbee RADIO SYSTEM
Automation
BURGLAR ALARM
Temperature control
Load control management and Consumption display
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYTEM
SOUND SYSTEM
RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURED CABLING
SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND CONTROL
Contents MyHOME I
Index
ITEM N° PAGE ITEM N° PAGE ITEM N° PAGE

3440 198 3577 13 349313 418
3442 200 3578 15 349320 420
3444 203 3579 17 349321 420
3445 206 3581 20 349340 422
3448 209 4050 245 351200 424
3455 292 4072A 246 351300 427
3456 296 4072L 246 352200 430
3475 42 336904 362 352400 431
3476 44 342991 363 352500 433
3477 46 342992 363 352700 435
3479 211 343001 365 353000 438
3480 213 343002 365 353200 441
3481 221 344082 372 391657 445
3485 225 344163 367 391658 445
3486 233 344165 369 391659 445
3495 452 344252 382 391661 445
3496 453 344400 370 391662 445
3510 238 344401 370 391663 445
3510M 238 345020 386 391670 447
3510PB 238 345021 386 AM5658 164
3511 238 346000 391 AM5659 169
3512 238 346020 392 AM5740 454
3513 238 346030 393 AM5742 456
3514 240 346200 394 AM5786 264
3516 241 346230 399 AM5787 265
3518 242 346250 401 AM5787/4 269
3518/50 242 346260 402 AM5790 273
3518/150 242 346830 405 AM5791 276
3519 242 346833 406 AM5791B 279
3522N 334 346841 408 AM581M2 126
3527N 2 346850 409 AM5832/2 138
3528N 3 346851 411 AM5832/3 142
3529 54 347400 415 AM5834 153
3550 298 3480V12 217 AM5851/1 189
3571 4 3485B 228 AM5851M2 183
3572 5 3485STD 230 AM5860M2 174
3573 6 3489GSM 236 AM5861M2 177
3574 7 348220 223 AM5872 318
3575 8 349311 418 AM5875 327
3576 9 349312 418 AM5890 497
II MyHOME Index
BMDI1001 56 F483 257 HA4589 24
BMSW1002 60 F500N 463 HA4596 34
BMSW1003 64 F502 464 HA4597 35
E46ADCN 67 F503 465 HA4598 36
E47/12 249 F520 336 HA4599 37
E47ADCN 248 F521 339 HA4619 284
E49 68 F522 343 HB4589 24
F401 69 F523 348 HB4596 34
F411/1N 72 F524 352 HB4597 35
F411/1NC 74 F550C6 468 HB4598 36
F411/2 76 F551 470 HB4599 37
F411/2NC 80 F552 472 HB4619 284
F411/4 81 F553 473 HC4070 261
F413N 85 F555 475 HC4560 454
F414 88 F558 477 HC4565 457
F414/127 88 F80CMD 259 HC4577 315
F415 88 GATEWAY 359 HC4578 21
F415/127 88 H4562 456 HC4601 262
F416U1 91 H4570 462 HC4606 264
F417U2 95 H4586 22 HC4607 265
F418 99 H4587 23 HC4607/4 269
F420 480 H4590 25 HC4608 271
F422 482 H4591 26 HC4610 273
F425 103 H4592 27 HC4611 276
F428 104 H4593 28 HC4613 281
F429 112 H4594 29 HC4618 283
F430/2 302 H4595 30 HC4653/2 146
F430/4 306 H4648 120 HC4653/3 146
F430R3V10 312 H4649 123 HC4654 153
F430R8 310 H4651M2 126 HC4657M3 157
F430V10 314 H4652 135 HC4657M4 157
F441 448 H4652/2 138 HC4658 164
F441M 449 H4652/3 142 HC4659 169
F450 492 H4660M2 174 HC4672N 353
F454 493 H4661M2 177 HC4673 357
F461/2 115 H4671/1 189 HC4680 193
F462 118 H4671M2 183 HC4692 318
F481 250 H4678 191 HC4692FAN 321
F482 252 H4691 316 HC4693 324
F482V12 254 H4890 497 HC4695 327
Index MyHOME III

HC4891 499 HS4610 273 L4610 273
HD4070 261 HS4611 276 L4611 276
HD4560 454 HS4613 281 L4611B 279
HD4565 457 HS4618 283 L4613 281
HD4577 315 HS4653/2 146 L4618 283
HD4578 21 HS4653/3 146 L4619 284
HD4601 262 HS4654 153 L4651M2 126
HD4606 264 HS4657M3 157 L4652/2 138
HD4607 265 HS4657M4 157 L4652/3 142
HD4607/4 269 HS4658 164 L4654N 153
HD4608 271 HS4659 169 L4658N 164
HD4610 273 HS4672N 353 L4659N 169
HD4611 276 HS4673 357 L4669 182
HD4613 281 HS4680 193 L4669/500 182
HD4618 283 HS4692 318 L4669HF 181
HD4653M2 146 HS4692FAN 321 L4669KM1 182
HD4653M3 146 HS4693 324 L4669S 290
HD4654 153 HS4695 327 L4671/1 189
HD4657M3 157 HS4891 499 L4672N 353
HD4657M4 157 HW4890 497 L4673 357
HD4658 164 L4560 454 L4678 191
HD4659 169 L4561N 455 L4680 193
HD4672N 353 L4562 456 L4692 318
HD4673 357 L4565 457 L4692FAN 321
HD4680 193 L4566 459 L4693 324
HD4692 318 L4566/10 458 L4695 327
HD4692FAN 321 L4567 460 L4891 499
HD4693 324 L4569 461 LN4586 22
HD4695 327 L4577 315 LN4587 23
HD4891 499 L4578N 21 LN4590 25
HS4070 261 L4589N 24 LN4591 26
HS4560 454 L4596N 34 LN4592 27
HS4565 457 L4597N 35 LN4593 28
HS4577 315 L4598N 36 LN4594 29
HS4578 21 L4599N 37 LN4595 30
HS4601 262 L4601 262 LN4648 120
HS4606 264 L4606 264 LN4649 123
HS4607 265 L4607 265 LN4652 135
HS4607/4 269 L4607/4 269 LN4660M2 174
HS4608 271 L4608 271 LN4661M2 177
IV MyHOME Index
ITEM N° PAGE ITEM N° PAGE
LN4671M2 183 NT4070 261
LN4691 316 NT4560 454
LN4890 497 NT4565 457
LN4890A 497 NT4577 315
MH200N 506 NT4578N 21
MH4892 494 NT4601 262
MH4893 494 NT4606 264
N4070 261 NT4607 265
N4560 454 NT4607/4 269
N4565 457 NT4608 271
N4577 315 NT4610 273
N4578N 21 NT4611 276
N4589N 24 NT4611B 279
N4596N 34 NT4613 281
N4597N 35 NT4618 283
N4598N 36 NT4654N 153
N4599N 37 NT4658N 164
N4601 262 NT4659N 169
N4606 264 NT4672N 353
N4607 265 NT4673 357
N4607/4 269 NT4680 193
N4608 271 NT4692 318
N4610 273 NT4692FAN 321
N4611 276 NT4693 324
N4611B 279 NT4695 327
N4613 281 NT4891 499
N4618 283
N4640 286
N4640B 286
N4654N 153
N4658N 164
N4659N 169
N4672N 353
N4673 357
N4680 193
N4692 318
N4692FAN 321
N4693 324
N4695 327
N4891 499
Index MyHOME V
Technical sheets
This document collects all product Product description;

technical sheets My HOME, broken Related items;

down by system belonging. Dimensional and technical data;

For each device, the corresponding Configuration;

technical sheet offers information on: Wiring diagram, if required.

The technical sheets may also be viewed

by accessing the “Professionals” section of
the www.bticino.com
VI MyHOME Technical sheets

0672 67 MH4892
0672 68 MH4893
Description
Description Front view
1 2
with 16:9 10” LCD screen and new graphic interface:
- management of all My Home and Video door entry system functions
- navigation by rooms
- management of multimedia contents through USB connection, SD Card, LAN network, or IP
- management of customised profiles 9 3
- possibility of customising background images 8 4
Installation: the device is suitable for wall mounted installation using the bracket 7 5
supplied. 6
Available in white and in black. No additional surround plate needed.
Device drawing
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Local power supply (1 – 2): 22–27 Vdc
Local max. absorption (1 – 2): 370 mA Rear view
10 12 14 15
Max. absorption from SCS BUS: 50 mA 11 13
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C
OFF ON
SCS
AUDIO
OUT BUS 2 1
ETH
Configuration
Assembly, Installation
16 17 16
Dimensional data Legend

1. Microphone
A C 2. 10” touch screen colour LCD display
3. Call answer pushbutton
4. Door lock release
5. Switching on/Camera scrolling
6. Monitor off
0672 67 MH4892
7. USB connector
0672 68 MH4893
B 8. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC
9. Secur Digital memory card connector
10. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch Configuration
11. Sound system output connector must be configured using the software.
12. 2 WIRE video BUS/SCS connector In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed, or to update the firmware, connect the device to the PC using one of the following solutions:
13. 1 - 2 power supply connector
- USB-miniUSB cable;
- Ethernet cable.
14. LAN connection signalling LED
A B C 15. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
315 mm 200 mm 24 mm 16. Loudspeakers
17. Safety spring USB connection Ethernet connection
MQ00758-b-EN 24/04/2014
OFF ON
SCS
AUDIO
OUT BUS 2 1
1 ETH
Dimensional data
1 2 3 4 5 6
Technical data Switch

DC - In
Legend
For the configuration download the software from the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com
Wiring diagrams
MQ00758-b-EN 24/04/2014
Technical sheets MyHOME VII

Digital tools SERVICES RANGE
Customer service
Numero Verde
SALES INFORMATION ESTIMATE SERVICE TECHNICAL SERVICE SALES SUPPORT

Toll free number for the request Toll free number for free Authorized Technical Assistance A capillary network of technical-
of technical documentation and estimate service operating from Center for assistance under sales representatives able to
business information available Monday to Friday from 8:30 a.m. warranty and out of warranty on support customers in their
from Monday to Friday from 8.30 to 6:30 p.m. for: products and systems. choice of products.
a.m. to 6.30 p.m. Video door entry system
low voltage electric distribution boards
Video Surveillance and CCTV
MyHome Home Automation
BUILDING BLOG MYOPEN COMMUNITY

The Blog dedicated to installers The community of the home
for insights, information and automation system integrators,
direct contact with BTicino. with insights and services
www.buildingblog.it on the new applications.
www.myopen-legrandgroup.com
PROMOTIONS MY HOME PRO

The website of promotions: enter Join the program dedicated to
www.professionisti.bticino.it your information, see your score home automation installers:
The website with all the information on and choose the gift. courses and dedicated services.
products and technical content
to download.
BTicino mobile
ON-LINE CATALOGUE CATALOGS APP MY HOME GUIDE APP COVER PLATES CONFIGURATION APP
A useful tool for finding all A rich library always up to date The technical design and An APP to configure the light
technical information on products with all the catalogs of the brands installation guide of a MyHome point, combining controls
and much more distributed by BTicino in Italy. home automation system, always and colors of AXOLUTE and
www.catalogo.bticino.it updated on your Ipad and Iphone. LIVINGLIGHT cover plates,
save or share the image obtained.
BTicino on the social media
YOUTUBE - BTICINO PROFESSIONAL FLICKR - IMAGE CHANNEL TWITTER BTICINO

Follow us on Facebook, Twitter, The YouTube channel where you The BTicino channel to view and The fastest way to stay informed
Flickr and YouTube to get can find videos and animations download images of various about new products and
information about new products, for the various product ranges. products. initiatives proposed by BTicino.
initiatives or to download www.youtube.com/user/ www.flickr.com/photos/bticino https://twitter.com/bticinoitalia
and view videos. bticinoprofessional
VIII
Technical sheets - ZigBee Radio system
1
Remote control 5 pushbuttons
0882 32 3527N
Description
Front view
Remote control with 5 scenario control pushbuttons.
The device can be set to operate as an IR remote control (mode not possible for ZigBee®
Radio automation devices).
1
Technical data
Power supply: No. 2 batteries, 1.5 V LR03
Duration of the batteries: 2 years
Technology: 2.4 GHz Radiofrequency ZigBee® standard
Radio frequency capacity: 100 m free field, 10 m in rooms with
concrete walls
Infrared capacity: 10 m free field
Dimensional data
183 mm Rear view
46 mm
17 mm
Configuration 2
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 3

4
Legend
1. Scenario activation pushbutton
2. NETWORK key
3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. LEARNING key
MQ00392-b-EN 29/04/2013
2
Remote control 4 pushbuttons
5738 70 3528N
Description
Front view
Remote control with 4 scenario control pushbuttons.
1
6
5 2
Technical data
3
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery, 3V, CR2032 type
Duration of the batteries: 5 years 4
Capacity: 80 m free field, 15 m in rooms with
concrete walls
Rear view
Dimensional data
7
50 mm 21 mm
8
76 mm
Legend
1. Scenario no. 1 activation pushbutton
Configuration 5. LEARNING LED
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 6. LEARNING key
7. NETWORK LED
8. NETWORK key
MQ00393-b-EN 30/04/2013
3
Integration module switch 1X2500W RF
5738 62 3571

Actuator for the control of a load with maximum power 2500 W, with ON/OFF control
pushbutton for system testing.
In enclosure suitable for installation inside false ceilings.
Technical data 5 1
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 4 2
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 3
concrete walls
Power/absorption of the loads driven: see following table
Incandescent Fluorescent Ferromagnetic

Voltage Halogen lamp
lamp tube lamp transformer
Legend
Voltage
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
3. ON/OFF key
230 Vac 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA
4. LEARNING LED
110 Vac 1250 W 1250 W 625 W 1250 VA
5. LEARNING key
Compact
Electronic
Voltage fluorescent LED lamps Motors
transformer
tube lamp
Wiring diagram
Voltage
230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA

110 Vac 1250 W 625 W 625 W 125 VA
Dimensional data
N L
50 mm
Important:
38 mm – Protect the device with a 10 A fuse.
L
L
N
– Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.

N
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their rated
141 mm power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency of
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of
Configuration 0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
“Push and Learn” self-learning type.
MQ00394-b-EN 30/04/2013
4
Integration module dimmer 1 X 600W all load RF
5738 64 3572
Description
Front view
Dimmer actuator for the control of a load with maximum power 600 W, with ON/OFF
control and adjustment pushbuttons for system testing.
8
7
6 1
Technical data 5 2
4 3
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz
concrete walls
Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic

lamp transformer transformer
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Voltage
3. + key: press and release to switch the load ON at 66% of its power, press and hold
down to increase the power to the maximum value
4. - key: press and release to switch the load ON at 33% of its power, press and hold
Max. 600 W 600 W 450 VA 600 VA down to decrease the power to the minimum value
230 Vac
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA 5. LEARNING LED
Max. 300 W 300 W 225 VA 300 VA 6. LEARNING key
110 Vac 7. Load selection micro-switch: ON / OFF
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
8. ON/OFF key
Dimensional data Wiring diagram
50 mm
38 mm
L
L
141 mm L
Configuration Important:
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. – For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their rated
power must be connected.
0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
MQ00395-b-EN 30/04/2013
5
Integration module dimmer 0-10V 1000W RF
5738 66 3573

Actuator for the control of Ballasts for 0-10 V type Fluorescent tube lamps with power up
to 1000 W max. The device has pushbuttons for ON/OFF control and for the adjustment
of the power to the load for system testing.
7
Technical data
6 1
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 5 2
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 4 3
concrete walls
Ballast 0 – 10 V
Voltage
230 Vac 1000 VA Legend

110 Vac 500 VA 1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Dimensional data down to increase the power to the maximum value
down to decrease the power to the minimum value
50 mm 5. LEARNING LED
6. LEARNING key
7. ON/OFF key
38 mm
141 mm
Configuration
Wiring diagram
Important:
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60% higher than their
rated power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account the efficiency
of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency
of 0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
N L – +
MQ00396-b-EN 30/04/2013
6
Mobile switched dimmer socket RF ZigBee 0883 20
for Schuko Standard 0883 21
0883 22 3574
Description
Front view
Actuator device to be used with an electric socket, for dimmer control of a load with
maximum power 500 W. The mobile socket can be managed with one or more radio
2
controls or locally using an appropriate pushbutton that can be found on the top section
of the device. 1 3
The device is protected from overheating caused by overload through an appropriate
protection circuit that intervenes automatically by reducing the power to the load.
Technical data
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee®
Capacity: 150 m free field;
15 m in rooms with concrete walls
3574_front
Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic Detail point 1

lamp transformer transformer c
d
b e
Voltage a
max. 500 W 500 W 500 VA 500 VA

230 Vac
min. 50 W 50 W 60 VA 60 VA Legend
max. 250 W 250 W 250 VA 250 VA 1. ON/OFF key. The programming pushbuttons and LEDs can be found under the
110 Vac protection:
min. 50 W 50 W 60 VA 60 W
a. CONTROL key
b. LEARNING LED
Dimensional data c. NETWORK LED
d. NETWORK key
e. LEARNING key
82 2. – key: press and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
3. + key: press and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value
Assembly, installation
29
85
46
3574_front 3574_Top
Size in mm
Configuration Socket
3574_montaggio
MQ00701-b-EN 04/07/2013
7
Mobile switch socket RF ZigBee for Schuko Standard 0883 23
0883 24
0883 25 3575
Description
Front view
Actuator device to be used with an electric socket, for ON/OFF control of a load with
maximum power 2500 W. The mobile socket can be managed with one or more radio
controls or locally using an appropriate pushbutton that can be found on the top
section of the device. 1
Technical data
Power supply: 100 - 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
Capacity: 150 m free field;

3575_front
Voltage
Detail point 1
c d
230 Vac 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA
110 Vac 1250 W 1250 W 625 W 1250 VA b e
a f
Electronic Compact fluorescent
Voltage LED lamps
transformer tube lamp
Legend
Voltage 1. ON/OFF key. The programming pushbuttons and LEDs can be found under the
protection:
230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W
a. CONTROL key LED
110 Vac 1250 W 625 W 625 W
b. LEARNING LED
c. NETWORK LED
Dimensional data d. NETWORK key
e. LEARNING key
82 f. CONTROL key
Assembly, installation
29
85
46
3575_front 3575_Top
Size in mm
Configuration
Socket
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 3575_montaggio
MQ00703-b-EN 04/07/2013
8
Individual roller blind controller RF ZigBee for mounting in
technical compartment
0883 27 3576
Description
Front view
Actuator device for the control of rolling shutter and shutter motors with maximum
power 500 VA. 4
The actuator is inside an appropriate enclosure for installation in rolling shutter boxes
or junction boxes.
Related items
Shutter control RF HA/HB4599 (Axolute), L/N4599N (Livinglight), 067264 (Celiane/
Arteor), 078428 e 079128 (Mosaic), 663097 (Nereya) e 665111 (Niloe).
Technical data
3
Power supply: 100 - 240 Vac; 50/60 Hz
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® 2
5
Capacity: 150 m free field; 1
6
Shutter motor
3576_front
Voltage Legend
1. LEARNING LED
2. NETWORK key
230 Vac 500 VA
3. Fixing hook
100 Vac 270 VA
4. Wiring for connection to the power line and to the load
5. NETWORK LED
Dimensional data
6. LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
blue
brown
black
grey
120
35
3576_lato
3576_front
55
27
Size in mm
Important: Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.
Configuration
MQ00491-c-EN 24/09/2013
9
0883 27 3576
Configuration
Select the operating mode
The device may operate in two different modes:
- Bistable (to operate the rolling shutter press and immediately release the UP or
DOWN keys).
- Monostable (to operate the rolling shutter press and hold down the UP or DOWN
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change
the operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than > 4 sec.
4 seconds both the UP and DOWN pushbuttons at the same time.
Use of the device in bistable mode
Opening and closing the rolling shutter:

Press and release the UP and DOWN pushbuttons.
Shutter control Shutter control
Adjustment of the blade position:

Press the UP and DOWN pushbuttons for more than 1 second.
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
+ = + =
50% 50%
MQ00491-c-EN 24/09/2013
10
+ = + =
0883 27 3576
Use of the device in monostable mode

Press and hold down the UP and DOWN pushbuttons until the desired rolling shutter position.
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position) Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;:
The rolling shutter control device for the management of the actuator can also 1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an
be enabled to set the rolling shutters to a preset position, using the appropriate electronic “limit switch”.
pushbutton (Preset).
2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
The procedure for storing the position is performed in two different stages:
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter; 3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the pushbutton shown in the picture
- saving of their positions. . for more than 4 seconds. Press the pushbutton for less than 1 second in case of
electronic limit switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move
to the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time.
Now proceed with saving the desired position (Preset).
50% 50%
> 4 sec. + =
+ =
Shutter control
100% 0% 50%
<1 sec.
Shutter control
MQ00491-c-EN 24/09/2013
11
0883 27 3576
Saving the rolling shutter position:

1. Operate the UP and DOWN pushbuttons of the radio control to move the rolling 2. To save the desired position press the Preset pushbutton of the rolling shutter radio
shutter to the desired position. 50% control for more than 10 seconds.
+ =
>10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset pushbutton of the
control device is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved
position.
MQ00491-c-EN 24/09/2013
12
RF ZigBee transmitter with auxiliary inputs (2 inputs)
0883 31 3577
Description
Front view
This device gives the possibility of integrating traditional control devices (Two-way
switch, switch, or pushbutton) in MY HOME radio systems.
The interface has 3 cables identified with C, 1, and 2 respectively, which connect to a 3
two-way switch, or to a pushbutton.
The definition of the type of device connected (two-way switch, or pushbutton), and
therefore of the interface operating mode, is done using appropriate pushbuttons
found on the device itself; the preset mode (at the factory) requires connection to
a two-way switch.
By configuring the A, PL, and MOD sockets, it will be possible to use this interface,
together with the SCS/ZigBee gateway, for the radio extension of a MY HOME BUS 2 4
system. The device is inside a Basic container with reduced sizes, for installation in
flush mounted boxes, junction boxes, rolling shutter boxes, and trunking. Particularly 1 5
advantageous is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning the item at the
back of the flush mounted box, behind traditional devices.
Related items
8 7 6
Gateway SCS/ZigBee: HC/HD/HS4578 (Axolute),
L/N/NT4578N (Livinglight),
067250 (Arteor/Celiane) Legend
1. LEARNING LED
Technical data 2. SCS My Home Configurator socket
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery, 3V, CR2032 type 3. Local CONTROL key
Duration of the battery: 5 years 4. SCS My Home Configurator socket
2 5. NETWORK LED
1 6. NETWORK key
Capacity: 150m free field; C
15m in rooms with concrete walls 7. Wiring for connection to traditional devices
8. LEARNING key
Dimensional data
Size: basic module
Wiring diagram
2 1
2 2
1 1
C C
Connection to a two-way switch Connection to two pushbuttons
2 1
MQ00492-c-EN 24/09/2013
13
RF ZigBee transmitter with auxiliary inputs (2 inputs)
0883 31 3577
Configuration
Configuration of the ZigBee network
Definition of the interface operating mode

The interface is already configured during production for connection to a two-way
switch or to a switch. If connecting one or more pushbuttons, change the operating
mode as indicated below:
1. Press the two pushbuttons on the interface for at least 5 seconds.

2. When the two LEDs (green on the left and orange on the right) flash slowly,
release the pushbuttons. The interface is now preset for connection to one or more
pushbuttons.
To restore “switch/two-way switch” mode, press the two interface pushbuttons for at
least 5 seconds, and release them when the two LEDs come on steady (not flashing). 1 2 1 1
L L L
Operating test
After completing the wiring and defining the operating mode, the operation of the in- - If the interface is in “pushbutton” mode, use the right pushbutton cyclically to send a
terface can be tested using the traditional devices connected, or the two pushbuttons: cyclic ON and OFF command to the radio actuator associated with the P1 pushbutton.
- If the interface is in “two-way switch” mode, use the left pushbutton to send an ON Use the left pushbutton to send a cyclic ON and OFF command to the radio actuator
command to the radio actuator associated to the two-way switch. Use the right push- associated with the P2 pushbutton.
button to send the OFF command.
MQ00492-c-EN 24/09/2013
14
Open Web Net/Zigbee Gateway
0883 28 3578
Description
Front view
Interface for interaction with the functions of the ZigBee radio system using a Personal
Computer and an Open Web Net communication protocol.
The device must be connected to a USB port of the computer and features a radio
transmitter for sending/receiving data to and from ZigBee devices installed in the
electric system. 1
Technical data
Power supply: From USB 2.0 socket
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete walls
4 2
3
Side view
Legend
1. USB connector
2. Data traffic indicator LED
3. NETWORK key
4. NETWORK LED
MQ00493-b-EN 04/07/2013
15
Open Web Net/Zigbee Gateway
0883 28 3578
Configuration
Connecting the device to the network Disconnecting the interface from the network
1. In the system identify the actuator device with “Zigbee network coordinator” 1. Press the NETWORK key on the interface. The NETWORK LED will flash quickly.
function, and press the NETWORK key for 3 seconds.
3 sec.
2. The NETWORK LED (yellow) will come on steady, and after a few instants will 2. Press the NETWORK key again for at least 10 seconds. The NETWORK LED will
start flashing quickly. flash quickly twice and then will turn off. The interface is no longer connected to
the ZigBee network.
10 sec.
3. Press the NETWORK key on the interface. The NETWORK LED will come on
steady during the network search procedure and then will start flashing slowly.
4. To complete the procedure press the NETWORK KEY of the Coordinator device;
The corresponding NETWORK LED will flash three times while the interface
NETWORK LED will turn off.
MQ00493-b-EN 04/07/2013
16
Wireless movement detector RF ZigBee surface mounting
0882 91 3579
Description
Front view
Each scenario can consist of the timed activation of one or more ON/OFF
and/or Dimmer actuators, depending on the brightness of the room and the presence
(scenario 1), or absence (scenario 2) of people inside the area covered by the IR sensor.
To be used with the ON/OFF radio actuators and dimmers in the «ZigBee radio sys-
tem» range.
1
LEARN
2 DETECT
Technical data
Power supply: No. 2 batteries, AA 1.5V LR06
Timing ON: 15 minutes (1)
Minimum brightness threshold for Rear view
scenario activation: 1000lux (1)
IR sensor sensitivity: 100% (1)
Radio frequency capacity: 100 m free field, 10 m in rooms with
concrete walls 9 3
Note (1): the values can be changed using the BMSO4001 and BMSO4003 remote
controls
IR sensor covering area: see drawings on page 2 8 LEARN NETW 4
DETECT END_DETECT
7 5
Dimensional data
6
82 40
Legend
1. LED:
- Exhausted battery (flashing slowly)
105 - presence of people detected inside the area (flashing)
2. Fresnell lens (the IR sensor is underneath)
3. NETWORK LED
4. NETWORK key
5. END DETECT key for the creation of scenario No. 2
6. Closing screw. Remove to open the sensor and replace the batteries
7. DETECT key for the creation of scenario no. 1
Size in mm 8. LEARNING key
9. LEARNING LED
MQ00520-c-EN 05/06/2014
17
0.4 m
0.2 m
0882 91 3579
0.2 m
3m
Dimensional data - IR sensor covering area Configuration
Configuration of the device inside the network: “Push and Learn” self-learning type.
Configuration of the time period, of the IR sensor sensitivity, and of the
brightness threshold.
90° The device is supplied with the following factory set parameters:
- AUTO mode
- Timing ON: 15 minutes
Passage sensor - IR sensitivity: 100%
- Brightness threshold for activation: up to 1000 lux maximum
Other modes can be configured using remote controls BMSO4001 and BMSO4003 (see
the instruction leaflet for the details).
Creation of scenario 1 – active when people are present in the area controlled by
12 m the sensor.
1. Press the sensor LEARNING key. The LEARNING LED will come on steady, and then will
flash slowly.
Installation height 2.3 m
LEARN
0.4 m
LEARN NETW
DETECT
2.3 m
DETECT END_DETECT
1.5 m
0.2 m
3m
1.2 m
12 m
2. Then press the DETECT pushbutton. The LEARNING LED will flash quickly.
Installation height 0.4 m
90°
LEARN NETW
LEARN NETW
0.4 m
N DETECT END_DETECT
0.2 m
DETECT END_DETECT
0.2 m
LEARN
3m 12 m
DETECT
3. Press the LEARNING key of the actuator used for the scenario.
The LEARNING LED will come on steady, and then will flash slowly.
90°
N
L
N
L
LEARN NETW
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
DETECT END_DETECT LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
12 m
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
N
L N
MQ00520-c-EN 05/06/2014 L
LEARN NETW
18 DETECT END_DETECT
N
L
LEARN NETW
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
DETECT END_DETECT
0882 91 3579
4. Press the ON pushbutton of the actuator. The connected load will come on and the Creation of scenario 2 – active when people leave the area controlled by the
LEARNING LED will flash more quickly. sensor.
1. Repeat
N the operations described for the creation of scenario 1, using the END
N DETECT pushbutton
L to perform the operations described in point 2.
L N
L
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
LEARN NETW
NETW
N
L
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
END_DETECT
DETECT END_DETECT
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
NETW
5. Repeat the procedures at points 3 and 4 for each actuator to associate to the NOTE: For more information on the amendment of the set scenarios (addition
scenario during its creation. and removal of actuators) refer to the instruction leaflet supplied with the
sensor.
6. Press the sensor LEARNING key. The corresponding LEARNING LED and those of all
the associated actuatorsNwill go off.
L N
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
L
DETECT
LEARN
DETECT
LEARN
LEARN NETW
DETECT END_DETECT
TECT
END_DETECT
NETW
END_DETECT
NETW
N
L
N
L
N
L
NETW
END_DETECT
MQ00520-c-EN 05/06/2014
19
Wireless temperature sensor RF ZigBee surface mounting
0883 30 3581

Device capable of activating several actuators (scenarios) based on the measured
temperature.
1
it is possible to manage up to 2 scenarios: the first activates when the temperature falls
below a T1 level, the second when the temperature exceeds a T2 level.
activation of scenario 2
temperatures
T2
Threshold
2
Threshold
T1
activation of scenario 1
The sensor is battery powered, it features an LCD display for the display of the measured
temperature, and a probe with ±0.5°C precision tolerance. It can be easily wall mounted
using screws.
Technical data Internal view

Power supply: No. 2 batteries, 1.5 V AAA type 1
Duration of the battery: 2 years
Measured temperature range: (-25) – (+ 40) ° C
Tripping threshold: 1° C
Precision: ±0.5 °C
Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C 8 3
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® 7 4
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15m in rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data UP
6 - +
DOWN
76 mm
5
116 mm
UP
Legend
- +
1. Battery exhausted LED
DOWN
2. Measurement probe
3. LEARNING LED
4. LEARNING key
5. Probe connection clamp
Configuration 6. Configuration menu navigation joystick
Configuration of the ZigBee network: “Push and Learn” self-learning type. For the 7. NETWORK key
association of the scenarios that can be enabled based on the temperature measured 8. NETWORK LED
refer to the installation manual supplied with the sensor.
MQ00494-b-EN 04/07/2013
20
Gateway SCS/ZigBee®
L/N/NT4578N
0672 50 HD/HC/HS4578

Device for interfacing the ZigBee® radio Automation system with the My Home BUS
Automation system.
It makes it possible to extend a wire Automation system and to management the
corresponding actuators, using the ZigBee® radio controls. .
4 1
Technical data
Absorption: 20 mA
Maximum number of ZigBee® devices that can be managed: 32
3 2
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard
ZigBee®
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in
rooms with concrete walls
Dimensional data Rear view

Size: 2 flush mounted modules
Configuration
5
The interface must be configured by assigning the address following the procedure used
for BUS Automation systems.
A = Room 1 – 9
PL = Light Point 1 – 9 6
M = - (no configurator)
Note: assign an address not used for other Automation devices.
Legend
1. NETWORK LED
2. LEARNING LED
3. LEARNING key
4. NETWORK key
5. Configurator socket (A,PL and M)
6. BUS clamp
MQ00410-c-EN 24/09/2013
21
Transceiver for technical alarms
H4586
0675 25 LN4586

Device to be used together with a detector, for the protection of the home from water,
gas, or smoke. In case of danger, the device will send a radio signal to the radio actuator 1
for the activation of acoustic/luminous indicators, or for the control of a solenoid valve
for the isolation of the water or gas pipes at the entrance of the house.
Related items 2
5
Actuator: 672 33 (Celiane),
H/LN4587 (Axolute), (Livinglight)
4 3
Technical data
Power supply: 12 Vdc (also with 12 Vac L/N/NT4541
transformer)
Legend
concrete walls
1. ON/OFF key
2. NETWORK LED
3. LEARNING LED
Dimensional data
4. LEARNING key
5. NETWORK key
Configuration
Wiring diagram
230 V
Radio interface
H/LN4586 Gas detector
0675 25
+ –
A – +
Aux2 Aux1 + –
12 Vdc 12 Vac transformer
MQ00397-c-EN 24/09/2013
22
Actuator RF for technical alarms
H4587
LN4587
Description
Front view
Radio actuator device with relay output to be used for the notification of an alarm
through the activation of visual/acoustic indicators, or for the control of a solenoid valve
for the isolation of the water or gas pipes at the entrance of the house.
The actuator is used together with the specific Radio interface for technical alarms,
H/LN4586.
5 1
Related items
The actuator is used in conjunction with the specific radio gateway for technical alarms
H4586 (Axolute) and LN4586 (Livinglight). 4 2
3
Technical data
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® Legend
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 1. NETWORK LED
concrete walls 2. LEARNING LED
Power/absorption of the loads driven: 2500 W (240 Vac)
1250 W (100 Vac) 3. Key
4. LEARNING key
5. NETWORK key
Dimensional data
Configuration
Wiring diagram
N L
MQ00398-b-EN 05/06/2014
23
4 scenario control RF
078449 663099 HA/HB4589
079149 0672 40 L/N4589N

Radio control device used for saving and managing up to 4 scenarios max.
1 2
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery, 3 V, CR2032 type
Duration of the batteries: 5 years 10 3
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C M A PL

Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete walls 9 4
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
8 5
Configuration
Radio system: “Push and Learn” self-learning type.
7 6
Wire system: If the device is integrated with the BUS Automation system using the Gateway
SCS/Zigbee interface, it will be possible to manage scenarios saved in the scenario module
item F420, which address must be specified by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and
M housings as indicated: 4
Use with scenario module F420:
A = Room 10 3
PL
PL = Light point A
M = operating mode (1 – 4). It associates to the 4 pushbuttons the scenarios saved by the 2 6
scenario module (max. 16). The correspondence between the 4 control keys and the scenario
numbers saved in the module is as follows:
Configurator in M Scenario saved
1 scenario 1 – 4 1
2 scenario 5 – 8 7
3 scenario 9 – 12 8 M
5
4 scenario 13 – 16
Scenario programming 9
To program, change or delete a scenario, the programming of Module F420 must be enabled.
This is confirmed by the status LED turning green (press the lock/unlock key of the scenario
module for at least 0.5 seconds). After this has been done, proceed as follows:
1. press one of the four control keys to which the scenario should be associated to for 4 Legend
seconds. The corresponding LED starts flashing; 1. LEARNING key
2. Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Temperature
2. NETWORK key
control, Sound system, etc. functions;
3. confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit the 3. Scenario no. 2 key
programming mode; 4. Configurator socket (A, PL)
4. to change a scenario, or to create new ones to use with the other keys, repeat the procedure 5. Scenario no. 4 key
starting from point 1;
To recall an already set scenario, a quick pressure of the corresponding key on the scenario 6. NETWORK LED
control is enough. 7. LEARNING LED
8. Scenario no. 3 key
NOTES:
Once the necessary operations have been completed, lock the programming procedure, 9. Configurator socket (M)
by pressing the lock/unlock key of the scenario module for at least 0.5 seconds, until the 10. Scenario no. 1 key
corresponding LED turns red.
To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
1. The scenario module must be enabled for programming;
2. press the pushbutton of the to delete for at least 10 seconds. The corresponding LED will
flash quickly for approx. 2 seconds, confirming that the scenario has been deleted. If the LED
does not flash, the procedure has been unsuccessful.
To reset the whole memory, press the DEL key of the scenario module for 10 seconds. The yellow
LED, “reset scenarios”, will flash quickly.
MQ00399-c-EN 24/09/2013
24
Switch without neutral 400W
with LEDS status 663088 H4590
665103 0672 31 LN4590
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of loads with maximum power 400 W, with ON/OFF LED. 1
For the connection of the device to the load and to the electric system no neutral
conductor is required.
2
Technical data
concrete walls 4
Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic 5

lamp transformer transformer
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
Voltage
3. LEARNING LED
4. ON/OFF key
Max. 400 W 400 W 400 VA 400 VA 5. Load ON/OFF LED
230 Vac 6. LEARNING key
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
Max. 200 W 200 W 200 VA 200 VA
110 Vac
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
Dimensional data
Configuration
Wiring diagram
Important:
– Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning
procedure.
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60%
higher than their rated power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account
the efficiency of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50
W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78 => power actually absorbed
by the transformer = 64 VA)
L
MQ00400-c-EN 24/09/2013
25
Universal switch RF with neutral 2500W
with LEDS status 078447 663089 H4591
079147 0672 33 LN4591
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of different loads with maximum powers up to 2500 W, with 1
ON/OFF LED.
Technical data
2
concrete walls 6 3
Power/absorption of the loads driven: see following table 4

5
Legend
Voltage
1. NETWORK key
2. NETWORK LED
230 Vac 2500 W 2500 W 1250 W 2500 VA 3. LEARNING LED
110 Vac 1250 W 1250 W 625 W 1250 VA 4. ON/OFF key
5. Load ON/OFF LED
6. LEARNING key
Compact
Electronic
Voltage fluorescent LED lamps Motors
transformer
tube lamp Wiring diagram
Voltage
230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA

110 Vac 1250 W 625 W 625 W 125 VA
Dimensional data N L
Configuration
Important:
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. – Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78
=> power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
MQ00401-c-EN 24/09/2013
26
Universal switch RF with neutral 2 X 1000W
with LEDS status 078448 H4592
079148 0672 34 LN4592

Actuator for the control of 2 different loads with maximum powers up to 1000 W, with 1
ON/OFF LED.
Technical data
Power supply: 100 – 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 2
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with concrete
walls 7 3

6 5 5
Voltage
1
230 Vac 2 x 1000 W 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 1000 VA
2
110 Vac 2 x 500 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 250 W 2 x 500 VA
Compact
Electronic
Voltage fluorescent LED lamps Motors 7 3
transformer
tube lamp 5 5
6 4
Voltage
230 Vac 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 100 VA

110 Vac 2 x 500 W 2 x 250 W 2 x 250 W 2 x 50 VA Legend
1. NETWORK key
Dimensional data 2. NETWORK LED
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 3. LEARNING LED
4. ON/OFF key
Configuration 5. Load ON/OFF LED
“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 6. ON/OFF key
7. LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
Important:
0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA).
N L 1 2
MQ00402-c-EN 24/09/2013
27
All load dimmer RF without neutral
300W with LEDS bargraphe 663092 H4593
0672 37 LN4593
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of different loads with maximum powers 300 W, with ON/OFF
LED. For the connection of the Dimmer to the load and to the electric system no neutral
conductor is required. The selection of the ON/OFF mode based on the load to drive
(resistive or inductive) is performed using a micro-switch.
1
8 2
Technical data
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 4
concrete walls
Incandescent Halogen Ferromagnetic Electronic 6 5

Voltage
lamp lamp transformer transformer
Voltage
1
Max. 300 W 300 W 300 VA 300 VA
230 Vac 8 2
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
Max. 150 W 150 W 150 VA 150 VA 5
110 Vac
Min. 60 W 60 W 60 VA 60 VA
7 3
Dimensional data 6 4
Wiring diagram
Legend
1. + key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 66% of its power; press
and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value.
2. NETWORK LED
3. LEARNING LED
4. - key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 33% of its power; press
and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
5. Load ON/OFF LED
6. ON/OFF key
L
7. LEARNING key
8. NETWORK key
Important:
power must be connected. Configuration
standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50 W lamp with an efficiency of “Push and Learn” self-learning type.
0.78 => power actually absorbed by the transformer = 64 VA)
MQ00403-c-EN 24/09/2013
28
Dimmer RF for ballasts 0-10V 1000W
H4594
573548 LN4594
Description
Front view
Actuator for the control of Ballasts for 0-10 V type Fluorescent tube lamps with power 1
up to 1000 W max , with ON/OFF LED.
Technical data 2
3
concrete walls 8 4
Ballast 0 – 10 V
7 6
Voltage
Legend
1. NETWORK key
2. + key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 66% of its power; press
230 Vac 1000 VA
and hold down to increase the power to the maximum value.
110 Vac 500 VA 3. NETWORK LED
4. LEARNING LED
5. - key: press and release immediately to activate the load at 33% of its power; press
Dimensional data
and hold down to decrease the power to the minimum value.
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 6. Load ON/OFF LED
7. ON/OFF key
Configuration 8. LEARNING key
Wiring diagram
Important:
procedure.
– For conventional type transformers, a load with power 60%
higher than their rated power must be connected.
– For the calculation of the controllable power take into account
the efficiency of standard transformers (e.g.: transformer for a 50
+ – N L W lamp with an efficiency of 0.78 => power actually absorbed
by the transformer = 64 VA)
MQ00404-b-EN 22/04/2014
29
Shutter switch RF with preset function
078427 663096 H4595
0672 63 079127 665112 LN4595

Actuator for the control of electric rolling shutter or shutter motors with maximum
power 500 VA. 1
2
3
Technical data
8
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 5
concrete walls
7 6
Shutter motor
Voltage
Legend
Max. 500 VA 1. NETWORK key
230 Vac
Min. 270 VA 2. UP key
Max. 250 VA 3. NETWORK LED
110 Vac 4. LEARNING LED
Min. 135 VA
5. DOWN key
6. Load ON/OFF LED
7. STOP key
8. LEARNING key
Dimensional data
MQ00405-c-EN 24/09/2013
30
078427 663096 H4595
0672 63 079127 665112 LN4595
Configurazione

DOWN keys).
keys). > 4 sec.
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change the
operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than 4 seconds
both the UP and DOWN keys of the rolling shutter control at the same time. Shutter control

Press and release the UP and DOWN keys.

Press the UP and DOWN keys for more than 1 second.
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
+ = + =
50% 50%
MQ00405-c-EN + 24/09/2013=
+ =
31
078427 663096 H4595
0672 63 079127 665112 LN4595

Press and hold down the UP and DOWN keys until the desired rolling shutter position.
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position) Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
In addition to the operating modes specified, this device can be used to also set the 1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an electronic
rolling shutters to a preset position by only pressing one key. “limit switch”.
The procedure is performed in two different stages: 2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the key shown in the picture for more than 4
- saving of their positions.
seconds. Press the key for less than 1 second in case of electronic limit switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move to
the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time. Now
proceed with saving the desired position (Preset).
50% 50%
+ = + =
> 4 sec.
Shutter control
100% 0% 50%
< 1 sec.
Shutter control
MQ00405-c-EN 24/09/2013
32
078427 663096 H4595
0672 63 079127 665112 LN4595

1. Operate the UP and DOWN keys of the radio control to move the rolling shutter to 2. To save the desired position press the Preset key of the rolling shutter radio control
the desired position. 50% for more than 10 seconds.
+ =
> 10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset key of the control device
is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved position.
Wiring diagram
Important:
procedure.
N L
MQ00405-c-EN 24/09/2013
33
Switch control RF 1 gang
078443 663090 HA/HB4596
0672 35 079143 655101 L/N4596N

Radio control device for the control of an ON/OFF or Dimmer actuator or group of
actuators. 1 2
When controlling Dimmer actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off, but
not to adjust the power level (dimmer function).
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type 7 3
Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee® 4
concrete walls
6 5
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
PL
A
3
Configuration
2 5
Wire system: if the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway
SCS/Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage BUS actuators, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and M housings as indicated. 1 6
A = Room 7 M
4
PL = Light Point
M = Operating mode
Configurator in M Function
Legend
0 Cyclical ON/OFF 1. LEARNING key
1 ON timed - 1 minute 2. NETWORK key
2 ON timed - 2 minutes 3. Configurator socket (A,PL)
3 ON timed - 3 minutes 4. ON/OFF key
4 ON timed - 4 minutes 5. NETWORK LED
5 ON timed - 5 minutes 6. LEARNING LED
6 ON timed - 15 minutes 7. Configurator socket (M)
7 ON timed - 30 minutes
8 ON timed - 500 ms
O/I Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF OFF control
ON ON control
PUL monostable ON/OFF control (key)
MQ00406-c-EN 24/09/2013
34
Switch control RF 2 gangs
078444 665102 HA/HB4597
079144 0672 36 L/N4597N
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of two separate or two groups of ON/OFF or Dimmer
type actuators. 1 2
When controlling Dimmer actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off, but
not to adjust the power level (dimmer function).
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type 8 3
concrete walls
6 5
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
PL1
A
3
Configuration 5
2
Wire system: If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the
Gateway SCS/Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage BUS actuators, which
address must be configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL1, PL2, and M 1 6
housings as indicated.
M
7 PL2 4
A = Room
PL1 = Light Point N°1
PL2 = Light Point N°2 8
M = Operating mode (see table)
Configurator in M Function Legend

0 Cyclical ON/OFF 1. LEARNING key
1 ON timed - 1 minute 2. NETWORK key
2 ON timed - 2 minutes 3. Configurator socket (A, PL1)
4. ON/OFF key No. 2
5. NETWORK LED
6. LEARNING LED
7. ON/OFF key No. 1
8. Configurator socket (PL2, M)
8 ON timed - 500 ms
O/I Cyclical ON/OFF
OFF OFF control
ON ON control
PUL Monostable ON/OFF control (key)
MQ00407-c-EN 24/09/2013
35
Dimming control 1 gang
078409 663094 HA/HB4598
079109 0672 39 L/N4598N
Description
Front view
Radio control device for the control of an ON/OFF or Dimmer actuator, or a group of
actuators. 1 2
When controlling ON/OFF actuators, it will only possible to switch the load on/off.
3
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 8 5
concrete walls
Dimensional data 7 6
Size: 2 modules for surface mounted installation
Configuration
4

If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway SCS/Zigbee PL 3
A
interface it will be possible to manage BUS dimmer actuators, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A and PL. 2 6
1 7
8 5
Legend
1. LEARNING key
2. NETWORK key
down to increase the power to the maximum value
4. Configurator socket (A,PL)
down to decrease the power to the minimum value
6. NETWORK LED
7. LEARNING LED
8. ON/OFF key
9. Configurator socket (not used)
MQ00408-c-EN 24/09/2013
36
Shutter control RF
078428 663097 HA/HB4599
0672 64 079128 665111 L/N4599N
Description Front view 1 2 3

Radio control device for the control of one actuator or of one group of actuators for the
control of motorized rolling shutters or shutters. It has a STOP/PRESET pushbutton to
stop the movement of the rolling shutter/shutter, and to move it to a preset position.
9 4
Technical data
Power supply: No. 1 lithium battery 3 V, CR2032 type
Capacity: 150 m free field, 15 m in rooms with 7 6
concrete walls
4
Dimensional data
3
Size: 2 modules PL
A
2 6
Configuration
If the device is integrated in the BUS Automation system using the Gateway SCS/ 1 7
Zigbee interface it will be possible to manage 2 relay actuator, which address must be
configured by connecting the configurators to the A, PL, and M housings as indicated: 8 M
5
A = Room 9
PL = Light Point
M = operating mode (see below)
Legend
1. LEARNING key
Configurator in M Function
2. NETWORK key
Press and immediately release UP and DOWN 3. UP key
 keys to rise or lower the rolling shutter; to stop
4. Configurator socket (A,PL)
the movement press the STOP key.
5. DOWN key
Press and hold down the UP or DOWN keys to
6. NETWORK LED
send the command to rise or lower the rolling
 M 7. LEARNING LED
shutter; to stop the movement release the
pushbutton. 8. STOP/PRESET key. Stops the rolling shutter during its movement. If pressed when
the rolling shutter is stopped, it activates its movement to a preset position, saved
in the Shutter actuator H/LN4595.
Configuration
9. Configurator socket (M)
DOWN keys).
keys).
The device is supplied configured in bistable mode. It will be possible to change the
operating mode at any time by pressing and holding down for more than 4 seconds
both the UP and DOWN pushbuttons at the same time.
> 4 sec.
MQ00409-c-EN 24/09/2013
37
Shutter control RF
078428 663097 HA/HB4599
0672 64 079128 665111 L/N4599N

Press and release the UP and DOWN pushbuttons.
Shutter Shutter
actuator actuator

Press the UP and DOWN pushbuttons for more than 1 second.
Shutter Shutter
actuator actuator
> 1 sec.
50% 50%
> 1 sec.
Opening and closing the rolling shutter: 50% 50%

+ rolling shutter position.
Press and hold down the UP and DOWN pushbuttons until the desired = + =
50% 50%
Shutter Shutter
actuator actuator
+ = + =
+ = + =
MQ00409-c-EN 24/09/2013
38
Shutter control RF
078428 663097 HA/HB4599
0672 64 079128 665111 L/N4599N
Saving of the PRESET position (opening the rolling shutter to a preset position) Calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
In addition to the operating modes specified, this device can be used to also set the 1. Check if the rolling shutter motor is equipped with a traditional, or with an electronic
rolling shutters to a preset position by only pressing one pushbutton. “limit switch”.
The procedure is performed in two different stages: 2. Fully open the rolling shutter.
- calibration of the up and down movements times of the rolling shutter;
3. In case of traditional limit switch, press the pushbutton shown in the picture for more
- saving of their positions.
than 4 seconds. Press the pushbutton for less than 1 second in case of electronic limit
switch.
4. The rolling shutter will close completely, will open completely, and then will move to
the half open position. During this stage do not operate the device.
5. The device has saved the rolling shutter full opening and full closing time. Now proceed
with saving the desired position (Preset).
> 4 sec.
100% 0% 50%
< 1 sec.

1. Operate the UP and DOWN pushbuttons of the radio control to move the rolling 2. To save the desired position press the Preset pushbutton of the rolling shutter radio
shutter to the desired position. 50% control for more than 10 seconds.
+ =
> 10 sec.
3. From now on, irrespective of its position, when the Preset pushbutton of the
control device is pressed the rolling shutter will move to the previously saved
position.
MQ00409-c-EN 24/09/2013
39
Technical sheets - Automation
41
Basic Actuator
3475
Description
Front view
This actuator can be used in flush-mounted boxes, junction boxes, shutter boxes and
ducts. Particularly advantageous is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning
the item at the back of the flush mounted box, behind lowered control devices. The
actuator has cables for connecting to the BUS and to the load to be controlled and an
LED. L L1 1
4 1
Technical data 230V ˜
2A cosϕ = 0,6
Power supply via SCS BUS: 27 Vdc

2A
2
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Current draw: 13 mA
Power/Consumption of driven loads:
Incandescent lamps LED lamps Ferromagnetic
Halogen lamps Compact fluorescent lamps transformers
Side view
3
230 Vac 460 W 2A 40 W Max. 1 lamp 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA
Size: basic module
Legend
1. Configurator socket
2. LED
3. Cables 0.75 mm2 for load connection
4. Cables for connecting to the BUS
MQ00076-e-EN 05/06/2014
42
Basic Actuator
3475
Configuration
When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the - Push & Learn: procedure for pairing different connected devices or changing the assign-
following ways: ments defined automatically in the Plug & Go procedure. For more details, please refer
- Plug & Go: automatic procedure for pairing devices connected to the inputs and outputs. to the specific document.
The procedure is activated on powering the device. It is only available for Room Control- - Software Configuration: using the Virtual Configurator software; for more details, please
lers or, in the case of other devices, paired with the Room Controllers. refer to the specific manual.
1.1 Addressing
Address type Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical configuration

Point-to-point Room 0-10 A=1-9
Lighting point 0-15 PL=1-9
Group Group 1 - Group 10: 0-255 G=0-9
1.2 Mode
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical configuration

Function Parameter / setting
Master Actuator Master M=0
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator Slave M=SLA
with the same address
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls Master PUL M=PUL
OFF delay: Master actuator with OFF control delayed on the 0 - 255 M=1 1 minute
corresponding Slave actuator. 1) M=2 2 minutes
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and to select the type of load (Actuator, Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via
Lamp, Solenoid Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled Outlet, Lock) and for MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for a point-point type
the "Local button mode" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after
the time set with the configurators has elapsed.
Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates the light
(Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF control
switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with configurator 1
to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
MQ00076-e-EN 05/06/2014
43
Basic Control Actuator
3476
Description
Front view Side view
This device features a compact size and can be used in flush-mounted boxes, junction
boxes, shutter boxes and ducts. Particularly advantageous is the installation inside
junction boxes, positioning the item at the back of the flush-mounted box, behind 3
lowered automation devices or behind conventional devices (pushbuttons, switches,
etc.). This actuator/control accepts a traditional button with N/O contact on input. The
control/actuation device has a BUS input made with blue cables, an input for connecting
L L1 1
2 1
the external pushbutton via the grey and black cables and a relay contact for load control
via the two white cables.
230V ˜
2A cosϕ = 0,6
2A
2
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 4
Current draw: 13 mA
Incandescent lamps LED lamps Ferromagnetic
Halogen lamps Compact fluorescent lamps transformers
Legend
2. LED
3. Cables 0.75 mm2 for load connection
4. BUS
230 Vac 460 W 2A 40 W Max. 1 lamp 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA
Dimensions
Size: basic module
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: more options than the physical configuration.
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions on this
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from sheet and to the "Glossary" section of the Guide to designing and installing My Home.
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many
1.1 Addressing

MQ00077-e-EN 07/06/2014
44
Basic Control Actuator
3476
1.2 Mode

OFF Delay = 0
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", to select the type of load (Actuator,
Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled Outlet, Lock) use MYHOME_
Suite virtual configuration.
1.2.1 ON/OFF control:

Cyclic. M=0
ON M=ON
OFF M=OFF
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button. M=O/I
Timed ON 0.5sec M=8
30sec M=7
1min M=1
2min M=2
3min M=3
4min M=4
5min M=5
15min M=6
Note: For timed ON with period 0 to 255 hours and "Timed OFF" control, use MYHOME_Suite virtual
configuration
MQ00077-e-EN 07/06/2014
45
Basic contacts interface
3477
Description
This device lets you integrate traditional control devices (switches, pushbuttons, etc.) in A
advanced systems with BUS operating logic. PL1
PL2 1
Therefore, it is possible to extend the use of the BUS system in rooms where traditional M
systems are already present or in historic and prestigious rooms whereby the complete SPE
or partial remaking of the electric system would entail heavy masonry work. The old but
valuable switch with its no longer compliant wiring can therefore continue to be used
2
with it, as the connection to the load to be controlled is carried out safely by connecting
it with its respective interface with no-voltage contact.
Contact PL1 controls light point PL1, contact PL2 controls light point PL2. The interface PL1 PL2 C
has a LED for signalling it is working properly and three cables for connecting to
traditional devices. This device is made in a Basic enclosure and therefore features a
compact size and can be used in flush-mounted boxes, junction boxes, shutter boxes and
ducts. Particularly advantageous is the installation inside junction boxes, positioning
the item at the back of the flush-mounted box, behind lowered automation devices or
behind conventional devices (pushbuttons, switches, etc.). 4 3
Legend
1. Configurator seat (note that this must only be used in MyHome systems with the physical
Technical data configuration)
Power supply via SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 2. LED
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 3. Cables for connection to traditional devices
Current draw: 3.5 mA 4. BUS
Dimensions
Size: basic module
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: List of Functions
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position.
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from The device performs the following functions:
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many 1. LIGHT SWITCH
more options than the physical configuration. 2. AUTOMATION CONTROL
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in 3. DEVICE LOCKING/UNLOCKING
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the 4. SCENARIO MODULE CONTROL
MYHOME_Suite software package. 5. PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
When used as a component of the Lighting Management system, use the specific types 6. PLUS PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
of configuration (Plug&go, Project&Download). 7. AUXILIARY CONTROL
The interface consists of two independent control units, which are identified with the 8. SOUND SYSTEM CONTROL
positions PL1 and PL2 in the physical configuration and the term Module 1 and Module 2
in the MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. The two units can send: See the following pages for the configuration procedures.
- commands to two actuators for two independent loads (On, Off or adjustment) identi-
fied with the address PL1 and PL2 and the mode specified in M or;
- a command to the F420 scenario module;
- a double command intended for a single load (motor for blinds Up-Down, curtains
Open-Close) identified with the address PL1=PL2 and specified Configuration mode M.
The interface has an LED for indicating proper operation and three terminals for connec-
tion to traditional devices such as:
- two N/O (normally open) and N/C (normally closed) traditional switches or buttons;
- a switch.
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
46
3477
Function selection
To configure the contact numbers use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing
Lighting point 0-15 PL1, PL2=0-9
Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
General General A=GEN
Installation and destination level:

The special control can also be used in systems where there are SCS/SCS interfaces (F422). or more actuators located on the BUS of another interface (destination level).
By installing the control on the BUS of an interface (installation level), you can control one
Function Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical configuration

Destination level Local bus 1-15 I= 1-9
Riser bus riser I=CEN missing in XLS
Complete system entire system I=0
Note: With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a light
point address for the return of the load status
1.2 Mode

Type of contact to terminals PL1 and PL2 Normally open (N/O) SPE=0
Normally closed (N/C) SPE=7
Cyclic SPE=0, M=0
ON SPE=0, M=ON
OFF SPE=0, M=OFF
Cyclic (N/O contact only) SPE=1, M=7
Button SPE=0, M=PUL
ON with button at PL2, OFF with button at PL1 SPE=0, M=O/I
Timed ON 0.5sec SPE=0, M=8
2sec SPE=8, M=1
30sec SPE=0, M=7
1min SPE=0, M=1
2min SPE=0, M=2
3min SPE=0, M=3
4min SPE=0, M=4
5min SPE=0, M=5
10min SPE=8, M=2
15min SPE=0, M=6
For timed ON with period 0-255 hours, 0-59 minutes and 0-59 seconds use MYHOME_
Suite virtual configuration
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
47
3477
1.2.2 ON/OFF Control and ADJUSTMENT (Point-to-Point only):

Parameter / setting
ON/OFF and cyclic ADJUSTMENT SPE=0, M=O
ON/OFF when pressing briefly and adjustment when holding down
ON with button at PL2, OFF with button at PL1 and DIMMER when held down SPE=0, M=O/I
ON with adjustment at 10% SPE=3, M=1
For the functions of "Cyclic with custom point-to-point adjustment", "Cyclic with adjustment", "Custom dimmer OFF without adjustment", "ON with custom adjustment",
custom adjustment", "Cyclic dimmer without adjustment", "Custom dimmer ON without "OFF with custom adjustment", use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
1.2.3 Blink command

When an actuator receives a blink command, it implements it by closing and opening
the relay for a time equal to T that can be configured as shown in the table.
Combine it with a command configured OFF to switch it off.

Parameter / setting
Blink 0.5 s SPE=2, M=0
Blink 1 s SPE=2, M=1
For blinking with a period of from 5.5 to 8 seconds, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
48
3477
2. Automation control
2.1 Addressing

Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
General general A=GEN


Riser bus riser I=CEN missing in XLS
Note: With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a light
2.2 Mode

Bistable control PL1=PL2 SPE=0 M=
Monostable control PL1=PL2 SPE=0 M=M
3. Device locking/unlocking
3.1 Addressing

Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
49
3477
3.2 Mode

Disable SPE=1 , M=1
Enable SPE=1, M=2
To configure the "Installation level" and the "Destination level" and use MYHOME_Suite
virtual configuration
4. Scenario module control
4.1 Addressing

Room (of the scenario module) 0-10 A=1-9
Light point (of the scenario module) 0-15 PL1, PL2=0-9
Note: PL2 must be equal to PL1, or not be configured (in which case the button connected to
terminal PL2 is disabled)
4.2 Mode

Scenario modification and activation
Scenario No. 1-16 SPE=61), M=1-8
Scenario activation
For Delayed activation of the top/bottom button use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration Note 1): With SPE=6 you can call and program scenarios within module F420. M=1-8: group of
scenarios to be controlled (see table).
Note 2): With SPE=4 it is only possible to call up the scenario saved in module item F420. M=1-8:
group of scenarios to be controlled (see table).
M First contact PL1 Second contact PL2

Scenario programming
1 1 2 To program, change or delete a scenario you need to enable programming module

F420 so that the status LED is green (press the locking/unlocking button on the scenario
2 3 4
module for at least 0.5 seconds) and then continue with the following steps:
3 5 6
1) press one of the four special control buttons to which the scenario should be associated
4 7 8 to for 3 seconds and the corresponding LED will start blinking;
5 9 10
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation,
6 11 12 Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions;
7 13 14 3) confirm the scenario by briefly pressing the corresponding button on the special
8 15 16 control to exit the programming mode;
A=0-9 and PL1=1-9 are the room and the light point of the scenario module to be controlled. PL2 4) to change a scenario, or to create new ones to use with the other buttons, repeat
must be equal to PL1 or not be configured (in which case the second contact is disabled). the procedure starting from point 1. To recall an already set scenario, briefly pressing
the corresponding button on the control is enough. If you want to delete a scenario
completely, press and hold down the corresponding button for approximately 10 seconds.
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
50
3477
5. Programmed scenario activation
Enabling buttons for sending a command to the scenario programmer MH200N. the scenario to be activated. The control can be connected at any point in the system
The address of the assigned command in positions A and PL must be unique and match (local bus or riser).
5.1 Addressing

Addressing type
Room 0-10 A=1-9
Note: If PL1=PL2 the two buttons connected to the interface activate two different scenarios.
If PL1≠PL2 the two buttons activate the same scenario
5.2 Mode

Button PL1 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN
Button PL2 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN
6. Plus Light Management scenario activation
For the configuration please refer to MY HOME_ Suite
7. Plus programmed scenario activation
To configure the address 1 - 2047 of the scenario and the number of buttons 0 - 31 on
the control device, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
8. Auxiliary control
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
51
3477
9. Sound system control
This mode allows you to control the amplifiers and the sources of the Sound System.
9.1 Addressing
You can manage a single amplifier (point-to-point control), some amplifiers (room control) and all the amplifiers in the system (general control).

Addressing type Parameter / setting
Point-to-point Room 0-9 0-9
Sound point 0-9 0-9
Room Room 0-9 A=AMB
PF=0-9
9.2 Mode

ON/volume + SPE=5 , M=0 (for button on PL1)
OFF/volume - SPE=5, M=0 (for button on PL2)
Change track SPE=5, M=1 (for button on PL1)
Click on source SPE=5, M=1 (for button on PL2)
For the “Cyclical ON/OFF” function and to select sources 1-9 use the MYHOME_Suite vir-
tual configuration
Follow Me mode
Enables, upon powering the amplifier, activating the last source switched on.

Switch back on from the last source YES YES M=0
NO Definition of the source 1-4 M=1-4 1)
NOTE 1): indicates the sound source to be activated before switching on the amplifier.
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
52
3477
For example:
By properly configuring the interface, the following functions are performed:
M=0 ON/OFF mode M=1 Cycle source/Cycle track mode
Contact on PL1: Contact N1: cycle source

Briefly pressing sends out the following sequence: Contact N2: cycle track
- ON sources, PL2 indicates the source to be activated before switching on the amplifier.
If PL2=0 source 1 is turned on (follow-me mode) In this operating mode:
- ON amplifier A/PL1
Room controls
On holding down: A=1-9 is the amplifier room
- For point-to-point commands if the amplifier is already on, only the volume is adjusted
(VOL+); if the amplifier is off, the switch-on sequence is sent first. General controls
- For GEN or AMB commands only the volume is adjusted. A=GEN for general controls
PL1=PL2=0
Contact on PL2:
Briefly pressing sends the OFF command for the amplifier A/PL1
Pressing and holding down adjusts the volume (VOL-)
In this operating mode:
Point-to-point command
A=1-9 amplifier room
PL1=0-9 amplifier sound point
Room control
A=AMB
PL1=1-9 room of amplifiers where the command is directed
General control
A=GEN
PL1=0
PL2=1-4 indicates the source to be activated before switching on the amplifier.
If PL2=0 follow-me mode is turned on
Wiring diagram
A
PL1
Basic Interface
PL2
M
SPE
Historical actuator
PL1 PL2 C
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
historical switch C1 C2
SCS BUS
MQ00272-c-EN 07/06/2014
53
IR remote control
3529
Description
The IR remote control is a device capable of performing the following functions:
- directly drive traditional devices with integrated IR receivers currently on our
catalogue;
- interface to the SCS BUS using the receiver My Home, for the creation of controls for 1 2
1 relay actuators for single loads, and for 2 relay actuators for double loads (shutters
3 4
motor etc.), adjust the dimmer, generate or recall scenarios saved in the scenario
module, or operate sound systems and video door entry systems. 5 6
The IR remote control includes:
- 16 keys that may be lit individually by a blue LED. 7 8
When a key is pressed, its light comes on and stays on until released, when the light 9 10
gradually goes off;
- 16 windows for entering an icon representing the function saved by the pushbutton; 11 12
- a buzzer emitting an audible signal when the key is pressed 13 14
- a standard 3.5mm jack input, enabling the remote control to be used through a signal
coming from a sensor for disabled people. 15 16
Related articles:
- L4425 traditional 1-channel receiver with relay output,
- L4426 traditional 2-channel receiver with output having 2 interlocked relays,
- BUS IR receiver L/N/NT4654N and HC/HS4654 and AM5834
Technical data
Power supply: 3 Vdc (2 AAA type, 1.5 V batteries)
Absorption: such to ensure that the batteries will last for a period of
2 years, based on 100 pressures per day
Frequency: 36.7 KHz in PCM modulation
Configuration
Inside the battery housing is a 4-way Dip Switch type changeover switch with two
positions, for selecting the operating modes as indicated in the table.
1 2 3 4
Dip Switch changeover switch

with factory configuration
MQ00109-c-EN 05/06/2014
54
IR remote control
3529
Switch Position Operating mode

Switch 1 Up It lights up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Key lighting = ON
Down It does not light up when the remote control key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Key lighting = OFF
Switch 2 Up An audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Audible signal = ON
Down No audible signal is emitted when a key is pressed.
1 2 3 4 Audible signal = OFF
Switch 3 Up Programming of the key scanning speed for the disabled user function.
1 2 3 4
Down Normal operation.

1 2 3 4
Remote control functions for disabled people

The radio control is provided with a 3.5 mm standard mono jack input for connecting
a detector (for disabled people) and a screw connection for installation on wheelchair
or on bedside. Thanks to signals issued by an external sensor, the main functions of the
remote control can also be recalled by a disabled person (control devices that enable to
recover the residual capacity of movement of a disabled person).
SCANNING OF KEYS - the first signal from the external sensor starts the remote control
keys scanning sequence; the key reached by the scanning sequence may be identified by
a luminous and/or audible signal.
KEY SELECTION - the second signal from the sensor stops the scanning sequence when
the selected key is reached.
CONTROL ACTIVATION - the third signal from the sensor corresponds to a standard
pressure of the selected key. A short pressure corresponds to the key being pressed for a
short time, and then released; in case of extended pressure, the remote control will wait
for a fourth signal from the sensor, which will be interpreted as the key being released.
The time between the third and the fourth signal is interpreted as an extended pressure.
- If the control activation (third closing) does not occur within three times the
! selected scanning time, the scanning procedure starts again.
- Time out due to extended pressure from jack: 1 min.
The scanning time of each individual key may be changed whilst in programming
mode.
1 - Move switch no. 3 to programming mode (UP).
2 - The first four keys light up.
3 - Press one of the lit keys to perform a scanning test to ascertain the associated time.
Scanning times are as follows:
Key 1 = 2 sec.
Key 2 = 1 sec.
Key 3 = 0.5 sec.
Key 4 = 0.3 sec.
4 - Press and hold down the key corresponding to the desired time for at least 2
seconds.
5 - The successful completion of the programming procedure is confirmed by the
pressed key flashing
6 - Move switch no. 3 to normal operation mode (DOWN).
MQ00109-c-EN 05/06/2014
55
SCS Dimmer 1-10V 1x4.3A
BMDI1001
002611
Description
Modular DIN device powered at 100 – 240 Vac for dimming loads interfaced with ballast
1-10 V. The loads can be adjusted via any control device and/or sensor connected and 1 2 3 4 5
properly configured, or by using the button on the device.
The device is a component in the Lighting Management system and can also be installed
in a My Home system.
9
Technical data
Power supply: 100-240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
Maximum current draw: 165 mA
Number of outputs: 1 x 4.3 A
Protection index: IP20
Impact resistance: IK04
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+ 45) °C
Max. number of connectable ballasts: 160
Type of connection: RJ45
clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2
clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2
Power/Consumption of driven loads: Incandescent lamps, halogen lamps, compact 8 7 6
fluorescent lamps and LEDs via Ballast 1-10V:
- 240 Vac 4.3 A / 1000 VA
- 110 Vac 4.3 A / 500 VA
Legend
1. Load status indication LED
Standards, Certifications, Marks
2. Load activation pushbutton
Directive:
3. Learn Mode status indication LED
– Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC
Installation regulations: 4. Learn Mode pushbutton
– CEI 64-8 5. Clamps for the connection to the power supply
Product regulations:
– IEC 60669-2-1 6. Output voltage terminals 1 – 10 V
– EN 50428 7. Contact terminals
Environmental regulations: 8. BUS RJ45 connector
– EU Directive 2002/96/EC: WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment)
– EU Directive 2002/95/EC: RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) 9. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
physical configuration)
Dimensions
Size: 6 DIN modules
MQ00314-f-EN 09/06/2014
56
BMDI1001
002611
Configuration
1. Lighting Management System

When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the - Software Configuration: using the Virtual Configurator software; for more details, please
following way: refer to the specific manual.
2. My Home system
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in this
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the MYHOME_Suite software
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many package.
2.1 Addressing

Point-to-point Room 0-10 A = 0-9
Lighting point 0-15 PL = 1-9
Groups Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G = 0-9
2.2 Mode

corresponding Slave actuator. 1)
M=2 2 minutes
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Selection of the minimum brightness level 2)
1-100 L=0 1 Volt
L=1 1.5 Volt
L=2 2 Volt
L=3 0 Volt
L=4 0.5 Volt
Selection of the type of load used 3) Fluorescent lamps TYPE=0 Fluorescent lamps
LED lamp TYPE=1 LED lamp
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via Note 2): In the physical configuration, the configurator in the L position establishes the minimum
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for point-point control. output voltage between terminals 1 and 2 when the load is on, thus allowing the minimum
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the brightness level to be selected. 5 different voltage levels can be selected, so that the standard
time set with the configurators has elapsed. The ON control activates the Master actuator and the 0-10V is possible as well as the standard 1-10V.
Slave actuator at the same time. The next OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps
the Slave actuator active for the period of time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Note 3): In the physical configuration, the configurator in the TYPE position determines the type
Master actuator as indicated in the table. of load used on the basis of the table. If ballasts for fluorescent lamps with typical switching ON
delay of 1.5s are used, the device will send the soft/start switching ON command taking account of
the delay. If power supply units for LED lamps must be controlled instead, the device will send an
immediate soft/start switching ON command.
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and to adjust the voltage, use
MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00314-f-EN 09/06/2014
57
BMDI1001
002611
Maintenance
Do not use acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene. - Bleach, diluted 10%;
Maintenance using the following products: - Glass detergents.
- Hexane (En 60669-1);
- Methylated spirit; WARNING:
- Soap and water; An initial test is required in order to use other special maintenance products.
- Diluted ammonia;
Operating mode
When in Test mode, by pressing the pushbutton of the actuator it will be possible to enable or disable the associated load.
DIMMING
100 %
0%
ON-OFF
0%
Wiring diagram
L
N
230V 230V
C16 C2
MQ00314-f-EN 09/06/2014
58
BMDI1001
002611
Wiring diagrams with EASYWAY system
DIMMER
DIMMER
BMDI1001
DIMMER
DIMMER
BMDI1001
DIMMER
DIMMER DIMMER
EW2120
EW2122
EW2124
BMDI1001
MQ00314-f-EN 09/06/2014
59
SCS actuator 2x16A
BMSW1002
Description
1 2 3 4
Actuator with 2 independent relays for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac, and installation
inside DIN rail switchboards or distribution boards.
This device is fitted with local load control pushbuttons.
The PL1 and PL2 positions can never have the same configurator, because the device
cannot manage the interlocking of the two relays. This means that it cannot manage
8
motors of rolling shutters, curtains, etc. The device is a component in the Lighting
Management system and can also be installed in a My Home system.
Regulations
Directive:
– Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC 1 2
Installation regulations:
– CEI 64-8
– IEC 60669-2-1
– EN 50428
Environmental regulations:
– EU Directive 2002/95/EC: RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances)
7 6 5
Dimensions
Size: 4 DIN modules Legend
1. L1, L2 load status indication LED
Technical data 2. Learn Mode status indication LED
Power supply: 100 - 240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 3. Learn Mode pushbutton
Number of outputs: 2 x 16 A 4. Clamps for the connection to the 100 – 240 Vac power supply
Current draw in operation: 5 mA 5. L1, L2 load connection clamps
Power consumption on standby: 0.8 W
Operating temperature: (-5 ) – (+45) °C 6. L1, L2 load activation pushbutton
Type of connection: RJ45 7. BUS RJ45 connector
clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2 8. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2 physical configuration)
Cable section: 2.5 mm2
- Halogen lamps - Halogen lamps Compact fluorescent lamps LED lamps

- Incandescent lamps Linear fluorescent lamps - Electronic transformers
- Ferromagnetic transformers
230 V~ 3680 W 10x(2x36 W) 3680 VA 1150 VA 1 x 500 VA

16 A 4,3 A 16 A 5A 2,1 A
110 V~ 1760 W 5x(2x36 W) 1760 VA 550 VA 1 x 250 VA
MQ00312-f-EN 09/06/2014
60
SCS actuator 2x16A
BMSW1002
Configuration
following ways: refer to the specific manual.
- Push & Learn: procedure for pairing different connected devices or changing the
assignments defined automatically in the Plug & Go procedure. For more details, please
refer to the specific document.
2. My Home system
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in this
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the MYHOME_Suite software
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from package.
more options than the physical configuration.
2.1 Addressing

Lighting point 0-15 PL1, PL2 = 1-9
Groups Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G1, G2 = 0-9
2.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via set with configurator 0 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table. This mode is only
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. With the OFF control operative if PL1≠PL2.
the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the
configurators has elapsed. Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON WARNING: The PL1 and PL2 positions must never have the same configurator
control activates the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same
time. The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", to select the "Type of load" (Actuator,
Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled Outlet, Lock) use MYHOME_
MQ00312-f-EN 09/06/2014
61
SCS actuator 2x16A
BMSW1002
Maintenance
Do not use acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene.
Maintenance using the following products:
- Hexane (En 60669-1);
- Methylated spirit;
- Soap and water;
- Diluted ammonia;
- Bleach, diluted 10%;
- Glass detergents.
WARNING:
An initial test is required in order to use other special maintenance products.
1 2
Operating mode
1 2 1 2
Wiring diagram 1 2
L
N
1 2
230V 230V
C16 C2
MQ00312-f-EN 09/06/2014
62
SCS actuator 2x16A
BMSW1002
Wiring diagrams with EASYWAY system
ON/OFF
BMSW1002
ON/OFF
BMSW1002
ON/OFF
EW2120
EW2122
EW2124
BMSW1002
MQ00312-f-EN 09/06/2014
63
SCS actuator 4x16A
BMSW1003
002602
Description
Actuator with 4 independent relays for single loads up to 16 A at 230 Vac, and installation
inside DIN rail switchboards or distribution boards. 1 2 3 4
This device is fitted with local load control pushbuttons.
The device cannot manage the interlocking of the relays. This means that it cannot man-
age motors of rolling shutters, curtains, etc.
The actuator is a component in the Lighting Management system and can also be in- 8
stalled in a My Home system.

Directive:
Installation regulations: µ
– CEI 64-8
– IEC 60669-2-1
– EN 50428
– EU Directive 2002/96/EC: WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) 7 6 5
Dimensions Legend
Size: 6 DIN modules 1. L1, L2, L3, L4 load status indication LED.
2. Learn Mode status indication LED
Technical data
3. Learn Mode pushbutton
Power supply: 110 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz
4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 Vac power supply
Number of outputs: 4 x 16 A
Power consumption in operation: 0.8 W 5. L1, L2, L3, L4 load connection clamps.
Power consumption on standby: (-5 ) – (+45) °C 6. L1, L2, L3, L4 load activation pushbutton.
Type of connection: RJ45 7. BUS RJ45 connector
clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2 8. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2 physical configuration)
Cable section: 2.5 mm2
Halogen lamps Linear fluorescent lamps - Electronic transformers Compact fluorescent lamps LED lamps
- Ferromagnetic transformers
230 V~ 3680 W 10x(2x36 W) 3680 VA 1150 VA 1 x 500 VA

16 A 4,3 A 16 A 5A 2,1 A
110 V~ 1760 W 5x(2x36 W) 1760 VA 550 VA 1 x 250 VA
MQ00313-e-EN 09/06/2014
64
SCS actuator 4x16A
BMSW1003
002602
Configuration
- Push & Learn: procedure for pairing different connected devices or changing the assign-
ments defined automatically in the Plug & Go procedure. For more details, please refer
to the specific document.
2. My Home system
2.1 Addressing

Lighting point 0-15 PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4 = 1-9
To configure the "Groups" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
2.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. With the OFF control the configurator 0 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configu- This mode is only operative if PL1≠PL2≠PL3≠PL42).
rators has elapsed. Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control
activates the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", to select the "Type of load" (Actuator,
Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled Outlet, Lock) and to select the
"Local button mode" (Cyclical, ON/OFF, ON-OFF, Pushbutton, Timed ON) use MYHOME_
MQ00313-e-EN 09/06/2014
65
SCS actuator 4x16A
BMSW1003
002602
Maintenance
- Hexane (En 60669-1);
- Soap and water;
- Diluted ammonia;
- Glass detergents.
WARNING:
Operating mode
Wiring diagram
L
N
MQ00313-e-EN 09/06/2014
66
Power supply
E46ADCN
Description
The power supply must be used to supply power to the MY HOME and Lighting
Management systems. On the output, the unit supplies a 27 Vdc continuous low voltage,
with a maximum current of 1 A (BUS terminals). It is electronically protected (without
fuses) against short circuit and overload.
It’s a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN60065, and can therefore
be used in conjunction with a SELV source in accordance with paragraph 11.1.2.5 of CEI
64-8-4.
The power supply unit is fitted inside a 8 DIN rail module enclosure, and its installation
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
In general, the following requirements must be met:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents.
- A two-pole circuit breaker must be installed, with contact separation of at least 3 mm 1 2
located nearby the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the power
supply from the mains, and to protect it.
Technical data Legend

Power supply voltage: 230 Vac ± 10% @ 50/60 Hz 1. Clamps for connection to the power supply voltage
Input MAX power consumption: 300 mA 2. Clamps (BUS) for the connection of the BUS/SCS
Output voltage: 27 Vdc
Maximum power delivered: 1.2 A
Maximum power consumption: 11 W
Reference standards: EN60065
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
MQ00273-c-EN 04/06/2014
67
Compact power supply unit
SCS BUS
E49
Description 1
The power supply unit can be used to power systems that use the SCS BUS. On the output,
the unit supplies a 27 Vdc continuous low voltage, with a maximum current of 600 mA.
It is protected by a built-in fuse (not replaceable) against short circuit and overload.
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN60065, and can therefore
be used in conjunction with a SELV source in accordance with paragraph 411.1.2.5 of
CEI 64-8-4. The power supply unit is fitted inside a 2 module DIN rail enclosure, and its
installation must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
In general, the following requirements must be met: PRI
- The power supply unit must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents.
- A two-pole circuit breaker must be installed, with contact separation of at least 3 mm PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
located nearby the power supply unit. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the power 50/60 Hz
supply from the mains, and to protect it. SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
Technical data
PRI (AC power input)
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 V
Rated current: 175 – 185 mA
Working voltage range: 187 – 265 V
Working frequency range: 47 – 63 Hz 3
Power consumption at full load: 21.5 W max
Dissipated power: 5.3 W max
Efficiency at full load: 80% typ. Legend
Power on standby: less than 1 W
Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 1. Clamps (PRI) for connection to the power supply voltage
Built-in fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (NOT REPLACEABLE) 2. LED: – green (power supply unit on)
– red (output current overload)
SCS
3. Clamps (SCS) for the connection of the BUS/SCS
Rated voltage: 27 V +/- 100 mV
Rated current: 0 – 0.6 A
Rated power: 16.2 W
dimensional data
2 DIN modules
MQ00260-c-EN 07/06/2014
68
Rolling shutter actuator
F401
Description
Actuator device in DIN enclosure with 2 interlocked relays, 3 pushbuttons, and 3 LEDs.
The actuator has been designed to be used with specific advanced control devices for the
management of shutters.
However, the actuator can also be used with all other control devices, although in that
case the Preset function will not be available.
Preset function:
In addition to the UP/DOWN Monostable and Bistable operating modes, depending on
the configuration of the corresponding control device, it will also be possible to set the
shutter to a specific position (Preset). For further details see the technical sheet of the 8
advanced shutter control.
The Preset function can also be managed using the Scenario Module (enabling of 7 1
scenarios with preset shutter positions). In this case take the shutter into the desired
position when saving the scenario. 6 2
5
Note: The scenario module must have been produced after week 29-2012.
3
Technical data

Max. current draw: 16 mA
Power/consumption of driven loads: 250 Vac - 2 A
Protection index: IK04
Impact resistance: IP20 Legend
1. Push&Learn configuration and shutter position configuration pushbutton

2. LED: on during the calibration procedure
3. Configurator socket (to be used only in My Home systems with physical
Standards, Certifications, and Marks configuration)
4. BUS clamp
• EN50090-2-2: Home and building electronic systems (HBES)
5. DOWN LED: ON when the shutter is moving downwards.
• EN50090-2-3: General functional safety requirements for products
intended to be integrated in HBES 6. UP LED: ON when the shutter is moving upwards. flashing during the virtual
configuration.
• EN50428: Switches and related accessories for use in home and
building electronic systems (HBES) 7. UP shutter pushbutton
8. DOWN shutter pushbutton
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
MQ00593-c-EN 09/06/2014
69
F401
Configuration
1.1 Addressing

1.2 Mode

Master Actuator 1) Master M=0
Pushbutton (ON monostable) the actuator ignores Room and Master PUL M=PUL
General controls
Note 1): Operation based on the mode configured in the control device. After acquiring the posi-
tions of the rolling shutter (open and closed), it will be possible to ensure 100 different positions.
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and to define the Preset positions, use
1.2.1 Type of motor

Type Parameter / setting
Standard with automatic calibration Standard automatic Type=-
Standard with manual calibration Standard Type=1
Pulse Pulse Type=2
Note: To adjust the "Stop pulse duration" and "Up or down pulse duration" use MYHOME_Suite
virtual configuration.
1.3 Operating mode for pulse motors with a 3rd limit switch:
After inserting 2 in the Type socket and 9 in the Pre position of the device, when the
STOP pushbutton of the control is pressed while the shutter is still, the shutter will
move to the position of the 3rd limit switch.
MQ00593-c-EN 09/06/2014
70
F401
Calibration of the shutter position Wiring diagram

This operation is necessary for correct operation of the actuator, which will have to save
the shutter maximum opening and closing positions. Standard motor with electronic limit switch
If no calibration is performed, the actuator cannot be managed by the control devices,
but only locally, by pressing the corresponding front pushbuttons. N
Depending on the type of motor to manage, different procedures will have to be L
followed:
DOWN
pushbutton
Configuration L1
UP
pushbutton
pushbutton
LED M
configuration N
UP LED L2
DOWN LED
Automatic calibration
It applies to standard motors.
1. Press the configuration pushbutton for at least 3 seconds. The corresponding LED comes on.
2. Press and release the “UP” pushbutton. The shutter moves upwards and the “UP” LED
comes on.
3. Once the shutter has reached the maximum opening position, it will automatically
start to move downwards until fully closed. The “DOWN” LED comes on. During this
stage, the actuator measures and saves the time it takes the shutter to close (*).
4. The shutter will then automatically start moving upwards, until the maximum
opening position has been reached. The “UP” LED comes on. During this stage, the
actuator measures and saves the opening time.
5. The switching off of the LED associated to the configuration pushbutton and of the
“UP” LED confirm the completion of the calibration procedure.
Note (*): If what described at point 3 is not automatically completed, proceed with the
manual calibration of the device, and connect configurator 1 to the Type socket of the For standard motors with mechanical limit stop
actuator.
connect the neutral conductor
Manual calibration
It applies to standard or pulse motors.
1. Press the configuration pushbutton for at least 3 seconds. The corresponding LED comes on Pulse motor
2. Press and release the “UP” pushbutton. The shutter moves upwards and the “UP” LED For the connection refer to the indications supplied with the motor interface.
comes on.
3. Once the shutter has reached the maximum opening position, press the “DOWN”
pushbutton. The shutter will move downwards, and the “DOWN” LED will come on.
During this stage, the actuator measures and saves the time it takes the shutter to close
4. When the shutter is fully closed, press the “UP” pushbutton. The shutter moves
upwards and the “UP” LED comes on. During this stage, the actuator measures and
saves the time it takes the shutter to open
5. Once the shutter maximum opening position has been reached, press the “DOWN”
pushbutton again. The “UP” LED will turn off.The calibration procedure has now
been completed; the LED associated to the configuration pushbutton will turn off, to
confirm that the operation has been completed successfully.
WARNING: The calibration precision, and therefore the control of the shutter position,
depends on the accuracy with which the limit switch positions are manually detected
during the calibration itself.
MQ00593-c-EN 09/06/2014
71
1 relay actuator 10A
F411/1N
Description
Actuator for installation in DIN rail distribution boards or switchboards. This device
incorporates a 2-way relay and a local load control pushbutton that is active only when
the actuator is configured.
The device can be installed in a My Home system and use the physical or virtual
configuration, in which case, by configuring positions G1, G2 and G3 it is possible to 1 2 3
assign the actuator to up to three distinct groups. When installed as a component of
the Lighting Management system, specific configuration procedures are used (Plug&go,
Project&Download).
C1
Technical data 4
Current draw: 22 mA
Number of outputs: 1x10 A 1
2
Dissipated power with max. load: 1.5 W
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C
Incandescent lamps LED lamps Linear fluorescent lamps Ferromagnetic
Halogen lamps Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers transformers
Legend
lamps
1. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
2. BUS connector
3. Load status LED
4. Load control button
230 Vac 2300 W 10 A 500 W Max. 10 lamps 920 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 920 VA Dimensions
Protection index: IK04 Size: 2 DIN modules
Impact resistance: IP20
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: When installed in a Lighting Management system, the actuator can be configured in the
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. following ways:
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from - PLUG&GO
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many - PROJECT&DOWNLOAD
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in this
sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the MYHOME_Suite software
package.
1.1 Addressing

Group Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G1, G2, G3 = 0-9
MQ00274-e-EN 07/06/2014
72
1 relay actuator 10A
F411/1N
1.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates the light
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for a point-point type (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF control
control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with configurator 1 to
the time set with the configurators has elapsed. 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and to select the type of load
(Actuator, Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled Outlet, Lock) use
Wiring diagram
N
L
1 2 3
1 2 3 L N
MIN 3 m
C1
MQ00274-e-EN 07/06/2014
73
1 NC relay actuator 10A
F411/1NC
Description
Front view
incorporates a two-way NC relay and a local load control pushbutton. When compared
with actuator F411/1N, the device inverts the relay control logic: at switching ON the
relay contacts are always closed (status ON – LED ON), and open following an OFF control
(LED OFF). In this way, if there is no power input from the BUS, the device will remain
in the ON status, keeping the load ON. In the configurator sockets the device shows the 1 2 3
positions G1, G2 and G3, in additions to positions A, PL, and M, which make it possible
for up to 3 separate belonging groups to be assigned to the actuator.
C1
Technical data 4
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc 3
Current draw: 22 mA 1
Operating temperature: 5 - 35 °C 2
Halogen lamps Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers transformers
lamps
Legend
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Button
230 Vac 2300 W 10 A 500 W Max. 10 lamps 920 W 4A 4 A cosφ 0.5 920 VA

Dimensions
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
1.1 Addressing

Groups Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G1, G2, G3=0-9
MQ00190-e-EN 07/06/2014
74
1 NC relay actuator 10A
F411/1NC
1.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via the time set with the configurators has elapsed. The value of the configurator listed in the table
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for a point-point type defines the final time, after which the actuator deactivates its own SLAVE.
control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", use MYHOME_Suite virtual config-
uration.
Wiring diagram
N
L
1 2 3
1 2 3 L N
MIN 3 m
C1
MQ00190-e-EN 07/06/2014
75
2 relay actuator 6A
F411/2
Description
Actuator for installation in DIN rail distribution boards or switchboards. This device incor-
porates two independent relays for the activation of 2 loads, and includes local control
pushbuttons for each individual load that are active only when the actuator is configured.
The device can be installed in a MY HOME system and configured physically or virtually.
In this case when the PL1 and PL2 positions are configured using the same configurator
the device interlocks the relays, to which it is possible to connect motors of rolling shut-
ters, curtains, etc. When installed as a component of the Lighting Management system,
specific configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Project&Download).
1 2 3 4
Technical data
Current draw: 28 mA C1 C2
Number of outputs: 2x6A 4
Dissipated power with max. load: 1.7 W1)
3
Number of outputs: 2x6A
Power/Consumption of driven loads: 1
Incandescent lamps LED lamps 2
Halogen lamps Compact fluorescent lamps
230 Vac 1380 W 6A 250 W Max. 4 lamps
Legend
Linear fluorescent lamps Ferromagnetic transformers Geared motors for rolling shutters
Electronic transformers 1. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
2. BUS connector
3. Load status LED
230 W 1A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA 460 W 2A

NOTE: 1) The dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the
relays loaded at the maximum load.
With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be calculated by means of
the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[Ic1+Ic2]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: number of loaded relays, IN: load current corresponding
to the N relay.
Dimensions
Size: 2 DIN modules
List of Functions
The device performs the following functions:
1. LIGHT SWITCH
2. AUTOMATION CONTROL
See the following pages for the configuration procedures.
MQ00275-e-EN 07/06/2014
76
2 relay actuator 6A
F411/2
Configuration
package.
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing

Group Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G1 = 0-9
1.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via MY- elapsed. The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which the
HOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates its own Slave.
actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has This mode is only operative if PL1≠PL2.
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and to adjust the "OFF delay", the
"Type of load" (Actuator, Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled
Outlet, Lock) and the "Local button mode" (Cyclical, ON/OFF, ON-OFF, Pushbutton,
Timed ON) use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00275-e-EN 07/06/2014
77
2 relay actuator 6A
F411/2
2.1 Addressing

Group Group 1 - Group 10: 0-255 G1:0-9
Note: If PL1=PL2 the 2 relays are interlocked
2.2 Mode

Timed stop. The actuator switches off after the set time has 1-60 seconds, M=0 1 minute
elapsed. 2-10 minutes,
M=1 2 minutes
This mode is only operative if PL1=PL2. ∞
M=2 5 minutes
M=3 10 minutes
M=4 Until the motor's limit stop
M=5 20 seconds
M=6 10 seconds
M=7 5 seconds
M=8 15 seconds
M=9 30 seconds
"Type of load" (Actuator, Rolling Shutter, Curtain, Gate, Rocker) and the "Local button
mode" (Cyclical, ON/OFF, ON-OFF, Pushbutton, Timed ON) use MYHOME_Suite virtual
configuration.
MQ00275-e-EN 07/06/2014
78
2 relay actuator 6A
F411/2
Wiring diagrams
Diagram for connecting light devices

A
PL
N M
G1
L G2
P L
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 L N L N
MIN 3 m
C1 C2
N L
P L
Diagram for the control of a 230 Vac motor with 2 windings

N
L
L1
M L2
F411/2 actuator M = AC motor

with 2 windings
L1-N = clockwise rotation
L2-N = anticlockwise rotation
MQ00275-e-EN 07/06/2014
79
2 NC relay actuator
in DIN module
F411/2NC
Description
Front view
incorporates two independent relays for the activation of 2 loads, and includes local
control pushbuttons for each individual load.
When compared with actuator F411/2, this device inverts the relay control logic: at
switching ON the relay contacts are always closed (status ON – LED ON), and open
following an OFF control (LED OFF) In this way, if there is no power input from the BUS, 1 2 3 4
the device will remain in the ON status, keeping the loads ON.
Technical data
C1 C2
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc 4
3
Absorption: 28 mA
Power/Absorption of driven loads:
Incandescent lamps Linear fluorescent lamp Ferromagnetic 1
Halogen lamp Electronic transformer transformers 2
Legend
2. BUS
3. LED
4. Pushbutton
230 Vac 1380 W 6A 150 W 0.65 A 1 A cosφ 0.5 230 VA
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
The actuator performs all the basic functions that can directly be configured on the The following table lists the operating modes possible with the configurator connected
control device, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays. to position M of the same actuator.
Possible function Configurator in M

Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls PUL
Actuator as Slave. SLA
Receives a control sent by a Master actuator with the same address
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Slave actuator. 1 – 4 1)
Only for a point-point type control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed 1).
1) The value of the configurator listed in the table defines the final time, after which Configurator Time (minutes)
expiry the actuator deactivates its own SLAVE
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
MQ00191-d-EN 30/04/2014
80
4 relay actuator 2A
F411/4
Description
incorporates four independent relays with a common terminal for the activation of four
loads, and includes local control pushbuttons for each individual load.
The device can be installed as part of a My Home system, and configured physically or
virtually. In this case if two adjoining positions (e.g. PL2 and PL3) are assigned the same
configurator, the actuator may set two of the four relays in interlocking mode, for the
control of loads such as rolling shutter motors, curtain motors, etc. If all the PL positions
have the same configurator, the actuator sets the four relays for the control of motorised
shutters. When installed as a component of the Lighting Management system, specific 1 2 3 4 5
configuration procedures are used (Plug&go, Project&Download).
Technical data
C1 C2 C3 C4
Current draw: 40 mA
Number of outputs: 4x2 A 3
Dissipated power with max. load: 3.2 W1)
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C 1
2
Incandescent Geared motors LED lamps Linear fluorescent lamps Ferromagnetic
lamps for rolling Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers transformers
Halogen shutters lamps
lamps
Legend
2. BUS connector
3. Load status LED
230 Vac 460 W 2 A 460 W 2A 70 W Max. 2 lamps 70 W 0.3 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA
NOTE: 1) The dissipated power indicated is that corresponding to the device with all the
relays loaded at the maximum load.
With lower loads also the dissipated power is lower and may be calculated by means of
the following formula: P[mW]=140+400*N+10*[Ic1+Ic2+...IcN]
P: dissipated power in mW, N: number of loaded relays, IcN: load current corresponding
to the N relay.
Dimensions
Size: 2 DIN modules
List of Functions
1. LIGHT SWITCH
2. SHUTTER AUTOMATION CONTROL
3. ROLLING SHUTTER AUTOMATION CONTROL
MQ00276-e-EN 07/06/2014
81
4 relay actuator 2A
F411/4
Configuration
package.
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing

Note: To configure the "Group" address use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
1.2 Mode

"Type of load" (Actuator, Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, Irrigation, Controlled
Outlet, Lock) and the "Local button mode" (Cyclical, ON/OFF, ON-OFF, Pushbutton,
Timed ON) use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
2. Shutter automation control
2.1 Addressing

Note: To configure the "Group" address use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00276-e-EN 07/06/2014
82
4 relay actuator 2A
F411/4
2.2 Mode

Timed stop for shutter motor drives. The actuator switches 1-60 seconds, PL1=PL2=PL3=PL4 M=0 20 seconds
off after the set time has elapsed. 2-10 minutes,
M=1 15 seconds
This mode is only operative if PL1=PL2=PL3=PL4 with relay ∞
interlocking in pairs. M=2 25 seconds
M=3 60 seconds
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and for the "Local button mode" (Cyclical, ON/
OFF, ON-OFF, Pushbutton, Timed ON) use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
3. Rolling shutter automation control
3.1 Addressing

Note: To configure the "Groups" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
3.2 Mode
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical con-

figuration
Timed stop for rolling shutter motor drive. 1-60 seconds, PL...=PL+1 M=0 1 minute
The actuator switches off after the set time has elapsed. This 2-10 minutes,
M=1 2 minutes
mode is only operative if PL...=PL...+1 (same configurators), ∞
therefore with the two relays interlocked. M=2 5 minutes
M=3 10 minutes
M=4 Until the motor's limit stop
M=5 20 seconds
M=6 10 seconds
M=7 5 seconds
M=8 15 seconds
M=9 30 seconds
MQ00276-e-EN 07/06/2014
83
4 relay actuator 2A
F411/4
Wiring diagrams
Diagram for connecting light devices
N
L
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5 L N L N L N L N
MIN 3 m
C1 C2 C3 C4
Diagram for shutter movement control
M1 M2
Ap C ˜ Ch Ap C ˜ Ch
N
PL1 PL2PL3 PL4
1 2 3 4 5
M1 = motor controlling the internal rabbet shutter

M2 = motor controlling the external rabbet shutter
C1 C2 C3 C4
PL1 and PL2 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each
other and must always be fitted to the
internal rabbet shutter
PL3 and PL4 = contacts: they must be interlocked to each
other and must always be fitted to the
external rabbet shutter
WARNING: configure PL1 = PL2 = PL3 = PL4
BUS
Operation:
- The opening of the shutter with external rabbet must start before the one with internal
rabbet. The opening of PL1 will start 3 seconds after the start of PL3.
- The closing of the shutter with external rabbet must start after the one with internal
rabbet. The closing of PL4 will start 3 seconds after the start of PL2.
- The total time for the full opening/closing of the shutters must be adjustable between 15
and 25 seconds. This adjustment is possible during installation, based on the size of the
shutters, to allow for strong winds.
MQ00276-e-EN 07/06/2014
84
Dimmer for Electronic Ballast 1-10V
F413N
Description
Control device for electronic ballast or driver power supply units with dimmer function; it
can supply fluorescent lamps or LED lamps and adjust their brightness depending on the
voltage, with values between 1 and 10V (max. 6mA), with which they are driven. From
any specially configured control point and connected to the BUS system one can switch
the lights connected on and off or set their brightness. Briefly pressing the control button
1 2 NC 3 4
is enough to switch the load on or off, while holding it down will adjust the brightness. -+
0-10V
The minimum brightness level and the type of load connected (Ballast for fluorescents or
driver for LEDs) can be selected during the configuration.
C1
4
Technical data
Power supply via SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 3
1
Current draw: 30 mA 2
Linear fluorescent lamps: 2A
460W@230Vac
220W@110Vac
Max 10 ballast type T5, T8,
compact or driver for LEDs Legend
Dissipated power with max. load: 1W 1. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
Protection index: IK04 physical configuration).
2. BUS connector
3. Load status LED
Dimensions 4. Load on/off button
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
1. My Home system
1.1 Addressing

Group Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G = 0-9
MQ00277-e-EN 07/06/2014
85
F413N
1.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Selection of the minimum brightness level 2) 1-100 L=0 1 Volt
L=1 1.5 Volt
L=2 2 Volt
L=3 0 Volt
L=4 0.5 Volt
Selection of the type of load used 3) Fluorescent lamps TYPE=0 Fluorescent lamps
LED lamp TYPE=1 LED lamp
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via Note 2): In the physical configuration, the configurator in the L position establishes the minimum
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for point-point control. output voltage between clamps 1 and 2 when the load is on, thus allowing the minimum
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the brightness level to be selected. 5 different voltage levels can be selected, so that the standard
time set with the configurators has elapsed. The ON control activates the Master actuator and the 0-10V is possible as well as the standard 1-10V.
Slave actuator at the same time. The next OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps
the Slave actuator active for the period of time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Note 3): In the physical configuration, the configurator in the TYPE position determines the
Master actuator as indicated in the table. type of load used on the basis of the following table. If ballasts for fluorescent lamps with typical
switching ON delay of 1.5s are used, the device will send the soft/start switching ON command
taking account of the delay. If power supply units for LED lamps must be controlled instead, the
device will send an immediate soft/start switching ON command.
To use the “Actuator as a slave with PUL function”, for additional options of the “Type of
load” (Dali standard, DSI, Halogen lamp, Trailing edge LED / electronic transformers) and
for adjusting the voltage, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
- Push & Learn: procedure for pairing different connected devices or changing the
assignments defined automatically in the Plug & Go procedure. For more details, please
refer to the specific document.
MQ00277-e-EN 07/06/2014
86
F413N
Wiring diagram
≥ 3m
L N + –
Ballast
1 2 NC 3 4
-+
0-10V
– + NC NO L LED driver
Fluorescent lamp
LED lamp
C1
1 2 NC 3 4
1 2 NC 3 4
0 10 V
SCS BUS MAX 6mA 036 56
C1
MQ00277-e-EN 07/06/2014
87
Dimmer 1000VA
F414 F414/127
F415 F415/127
Description
Item F414 and item F414/127 control resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers 1
while item F415 and item F415/127 control electronic transformers. After connecting
the dimmer directly to the BUS and the load, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the
light from any appropriately configured control point. Briefly pressing the control button
is enough to switch the load on or off, while holding it down will adjust the brightness.
The actuator is able to signal any load faults such as, for example, lamp failure. It is also
protected by a fuse, easily replaceable should it blow.
T5H 250V
6
Technical data
Current draw F414-F414/127: 9 mA 4
Current draw F415-F415/127: 22 mA
Number of outputs F414-F414/127: 1x4 A (9 A for F414/127)
Number of outputs F415-F415/127: 1x1.7 A (3.6 A for F415/127)
Dissipated power with max. load F414: 10 W
Dissipated power with max. load F415: 11 W 3 2
F414 Power/Consumption of driven loads: Legend

Incandescent lamps - Halogen lamps - Ferromagnetic transformers 1. Load connection clamp
3. BUS connector
5. Load status LED
F414 230 Vac 50 Hz 0.25 – 4.3 A / 60 – 1000 VA
F414/127 110 Vac 50 Hz 0.5 – 9 A / 60 – 1000 VA 6. Fuse
F415 Power/Consumption of driven loads:

Electronic transformers *)
F415 230 Vac 50 Hz 0.25 – 1.7 A / 60 – 400 VA

F415/127 110 Vac 50 Hz 0.9 – 3.6 A / 60 – 400 VA
Note *): For incandescent lamps (eg halogen) at low voltage
Dimensions
Size: 4 DIN modules
MQ00278-e-EN 07/06/2014
88
Dimmer 1000VA
F414 F414/127
F415 F415/127
Configuration
1.1 Addressing

Group Group 1 - Group 10 = 0-255 G = 0-9
1.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via The ON control activates the Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. The next
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for point-point control. OFF control deactivates the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period of
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time time set with configurator 1 - 4 connected to M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
set with the configurators has elapsed.
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and adjust the "Minimum brightness
level at power-on" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00278-e-EN 07/06/2014
89
Dimmer 1000VA
F414 F414/127
F415 F415/127
Wiring diagram
L L
N N
Lamp
Electronic transformer
T5H 250V
T5H 250V
F414 F415
SCS BUS SCS BUS
MQ00278-e-EN 07/06/2014
90
SCS Dimmer 1x4.3A
F416U1
002621
Description
1 2 3 4
Control device powered at 100 – 240 Vac for dimming resistive loads, ferromagnetic
transformers and electronic transformers. The loads can be adjusted via any control
device and/or sensor connected and properly configured, or by using the button on the
device. The device is able to signal any load faults such as, for example, lamp failure.
The device is a component in the Lighting Management system and can also be installed 11
10 ON/+ RL/C
Standards, Certifications, Marks 9

OFF/-
4,3 A
Directive:
ε
– CEI 64-8
– IEC 60669-2-1
– EN 50428
Environmental regulations: 8 7 6 5
Legend
1. Learn LED
Dimensions
2. Button for forcing the type of load
Size: 6 DIN modules
3. Button for manual load forcing
4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 Vac power supply
Technical data
5. Load connection clamps
Power supply: 100 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 6. Load adjustment/ON control button
Number of outputs: 1 x 4.3 A
7. Load adjustment/OFF control button
Power consumption on standby: 0.3 W
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C 8. BUS RJ45 connector
Type of connection: – RJ45 9. Load type indicator:
– clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2 Green: Inductive
– clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2 Orange: Capacitive
Protection index: IP20 10. Load indicator:
LED OFF: load OFF
Weight: 327 g
Cable section: 2.5 mm2 LED ON green: load ON from 1% to 100%.
LED ON orange: fault with load
Incandescent lamp Halogen lamps Ferromagnetic transformers Electronic transformers
+ +
230 V~ 1000 W 1000 W 1000 VA 1000 VA

4.3 A 4.3 A 4.3 A 4.3 A
110 V~ 600 W 600 W 600 VA 600 VA
WARNING: Devices that operate with an electronic transformer or a ferromagnetic transformer cannot be connected on the same line
MQ00315-e-EN 09/06/2014
91
SCS Dimmer 1x4.3A
F416U1
002621
Configuration
When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the - Push & Learn: procedure for pairing different connected devices or changing the
following ways: assignments defined automatically in the Plug & Go procedure. For more details, please
- Plug & Go: automatic procedure for pairing devices connected to the inputs and refer to the specific document.
outputs. The procedure is activated on powering the device. It is only available for Room - Software Configuration: using the Virtual Configurator software; for more details, please
Controllers or, in the case of other devices, paired with the Room Controllers. refer to the specific manual.
2. My Home system
2.1 Addressing

2.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates the light
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for a point-point type (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF control
control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with configurator 1
the time set with the configurators has elapsed. to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
level at power-on" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00315-e-EN 09/06/2014
92
SCS Dimmer 1x4.3A
F416U1
002621
Maintenance
- Hexane (En 60669-1);
- Methylated spirit; ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
- Soap and water;

- Diluted ammonia;
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A

- Glass detergents.
WARNING:
ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
Operating mode
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
ON-OFF DIMMING
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 OFF/-
4,3 AA OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C
OFF/-
OFF/-
ON/+ RL/C OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 4,3
A A
4,3
4,3 AA
OFF/-
4,3 A
Manual forcing of the type of load
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3
4,3 AA
OFF/-
4,3 A OFF/-
OFF/- 4,3 A
4,3 A
<1s CAPACITIVE
<1s
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C
< 1 s = ON OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3
4,3 AA
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C ON/+

FORCED
RL/C
FORCED ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
INDUCTIVE CAPACITIVE
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ RL/C
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
OFF/-
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 A
4,3 A
OFF/- 4,3 A
4,3 A
OFF/- 4,3 A4,3 A
4,3 A 4,3 A
<1s
10 s = confirm changes
INDUCTIVE < 1 s = exit without saving changes
MQ00315-e-EN 09/06/2014
93
SCS Dimmer 1x4.3A
F416U1
002621
Wiring diagram
L
N
ON/+ RL/C
026 11
100-240V~
OFF/-
230V 4,3 A
C16 50-60Hz
MQ00315-e-EN 09/06/2014
94
SCS Dimmer 2x1.7A
F417U2
002622
Description
16 1 2 3 4
Control device powered at 100 – 240 Vac for dimming resistive loads, ferromagnetic
transformers and electronic transformers. The loads can be adjusted via any control
device and/or sensor connected and properly configured, or by using the button on the 14
device. The actuator is able to signal any load faults such as, for example, lamp failure.
PL1
PL2
G1
G2
M
A
The device is a component in the Lighting Management system and can also be installed
15 ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
OFF/- OFF/-
2x400 VA

ε ε
Directive:
– CEI 64-8
Product regulations: 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
– IEC 60669-2-1
– EN 50428
Legend
– EU Directive 2002/96/EC: WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) 1. Learn LED
– EU Directive 2002/95/EC: RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) 2. Learn pushbutton
3. Button for manual load forcing
4. Clamps for the connection to the 230 V ac power supply
Dimensions 5. Load 2 connection clamps
6. Load 1 connection clamps
Size: 6 DIN modules
7. Load 2 adjustment/ON control button
8. Load 2 adjustment/OFF control button
Technical data 9. Load 2 malfunctioning LED
Power supply: 100 -240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz 10. Load 1 adjustment/ON control button
Number of outputs: 2 x 1.7 A 11. Load 1 adjustment/OFF control button
Power consumption on standby: 0.9 W 12. Load 1 malfunctioning LED
Operating temperature: (-5) – (+45) °C 13. BUS RJ45 connector
Type of connection: – RJ45 14. Configurator socket (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
– clamp input 2 x 2.5 mm2 physical configuration)
– clamp output 2 x 1.5 mm2 and 1 x 2.5 mm2 15. Load 1 indicator: LED OFF: load OFF
LED ON green: load ON from 1% to 100%.
Cable section: 2.5 mm2 LED ON orange: fault with load
16. Load 2 indicator: LED OFF: load OFF
LED ON green: load ON from 1% to 100%.
LED ON orange: fault with load
Incandescent lamp Halogen lamps Ferromagnetic transformers Electronic transformers
+ +
230 V~ 2 x 400 W 2 x 400 W 230 V~ 2 x 400 VA 2 x 400 VA

2 x 1.7 A 2 x 1.7 A 1.7 A 2 x 1.7 A
110 V~ 2 x 200 W 2 x 200 W 110 V~ 2 x 200 VA 2 x 200 VA
WARNING: Devices that operate with an electronic transformer or a ferromagnetic transformer cannot be connected on the same line
MQ00316-e-EN 09/06/2014
95
SCS Dimmer 2x1.7A
F417U2
002622
Configuration
When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the - Push & Learn: procedure for pairing different connected devices or changing the
following ways: assignments defined automatically in the Plug & Go procedure. For more details, please
- Plug & Go: automatic procedure for pairing devices connected to the inputs and refer to the specific document.
outputs. The procedure is activated on powering the device. It is only available for Room - Software Configuration: using the Virtual Configurator software; for more details, please
Controllers or, in the case of other devices, paired with the Room Controllers. refer to the specific manual.
2. My Home system
2.1 Addressing

Group 1-255 G1, G2=1-9
2.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via using the physical configuration. Only for point-point control. The ON control activates the Master
MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. In the Master and Master actuator and the Slave actuator at the same time. The next OFF control deactivates the Master
PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period of time set.
level at power-on" with values 1-100, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00316-e-EN 09/06/2014
96
SCS Dimmer 2x1.7A
F417U2
002622
Maintenance
- Hexane (En 60669-1);
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+
ON/+ RL/CRL/C
- Soap and water; 2x400 VA VA

OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
2x400
- Diluted ammonia;
- Glass detergents.
WARNING:
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
OFF/- OFF/-
Operating mode
OFF/- OFF/-
2x400 VA VA
2x400
ON-OFF DIMMING
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
2x400VA
2x400 VA
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
2x400 VA VA OFF/-
2x400
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/CRL/C
ON/+
ON/+ RL/C
RL/C ON/+
OFF/-
ON/+ 2x400VA
2x400 VA RL/C
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/- 2x400 VA VA
2x400
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
OFF/-
4,3 A
Manual forcing of the type of load
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
2x400 VA OFF/-
2x400VA OFF/- OFF/-
2x400 VA OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/- 2x400 VA
2x400 VA
<1s CAPACITIVE
<1s
ON/+
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ RL/C
< 1 s = ON
OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/-
ON/+ 2x400VA
2x400 VA
RL/C ON/+ RL/C
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C ON/+

FORCED
ON/+ RL/C
FORCED ON/+ ON/+ RL/C ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
INDUCTIVE CAPACITIVE
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
OFF/- OFF/- OFF/- OFF/- OFF/-

OFF/-
2x400 VA OFF/-
4,3 A 4,3 A
OFF/- OFF/-
OFF/- 2x400 VA 2x400 VA OFF/-
OFF/- OFF/- 2x400 VA
2x400 VA OFF/-
2x400 VA
<1s
10 s = confirm changes
INDUCTIVE < 1 s = exit without saving changes
MQ00316-e-EN 09/06/2014
97
SCS Dimmer 2x1.7A
F417U2
002622
Wiring diagram
L
N
PL1
PL2
G1
G2
M
A
ON/+ ON/+ RL/C
F417U2
OFF/- OFF/-
F881NA/16
230V 2x400 VA
C16
ε ε
MQ00316-e-EN 09/06/2014
98
Dimmer for energy saving lamps
F418
Description 1
Dimmer for the management of LEDs, dimmable lamps, dimmable compact fluorescent
lamps (CFL), halogen energy saving lamps and electronic transformers. After connecting
the dimmer to the BUS and to the load, it is possible to adjust the intensity of the light
from any control point, properly configured.
By briefly pressing the local control key, it is possible to turn on or off the load, while with
a long press it is possible to adjust the light intensity.
The dimmer can adjust the load with 100 different levels of light intensity, and it is
possible to set the switch-on time and the minimum level of power dimmed.
T1,6H 250V
6
Technical data
Power supply via SCS BUS: 27 Vdc ID
Operating power supply with BUS SCS: 18 – 27 Vdc

Max. consumption: 10 mA 5
300VA
Number of outputs: 1x 0.9 A 4

Dissipated power with max. load: 2.5 W (230 Vac)
1.9 W (127 Vac) 2
Level of robustness: IP20
Driven loads power/absorption:
Incandescent lamps Dimmable LED lamps 3

Halogen lamps
50 and 60 Hz Legend
1. Load
2. Configurator seat (to be used only in My Home systems with
@ 230 Vac 1 W - 300 W 1 VA - 300 VA* physical configuration)
3. BUS
Compact dimmable fluorescent Halogen lamps with
lamps electronic transformers 4. ON/OFF button and light intensity adjustment
5. Led
50 and 60 Hz
• off: BUS not present
• green on: load off
• orange on: load on
@ 230 Vac 1 VA - 300 VA* 1 VA - 300 VA • orange/green fast flashing: device not configured
Note (*): for the most common dimmable and CFL LEDs available on the market, the 300VA power • orange/green slow flashing:device in configuration or
corresponds to about 200W.
For the choice of LED lamps compatible with the dimmer refer to the table shown after the malfunction of the load
«Wiring diagram» chapter 6. Fuse
Standards, Certifications and Marks
• EN 60669-2-1: Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations;
• EN 50090-2-2: Home and building electronic systems (HBES);
• EN 50090-2-3: Home and building electronic systems (HBES), general functional
safety;
• EN 50428: Switches for household and similar fixed electrical installations.
Dimensions
Overall size: 4 DIN modules
MQ00594-d-EN 05/08/2014
99
F418
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instruc-
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. tions in this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from MYHOME_Suite software package.
1.1 Addressing

1.2 Mode

which has the same address
Button (On monostable) ignores Room and General controls Master PUL M=PUL
Delay OFF: Master actuator with OFF control delayed on the 0 - 255 M=1 1 minute
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Selection of the type of load Switching on at the minimum Inductive LED TY=0 min default level=10%
used level and then it sets to the
stored level
Switching on at the maximum Inductive CFL TY=1 min default level=37%
level and then it sets to the
stored level
Switching on at the minimum Capacitive LED/electronic transformers TY=2 min default level=10%
stored level
Switching on at the maximum Capactive CFL TY=3 min default level=37%
stored level
Switching on at the minimum Halogen lamp TY=4 min default level=1%
stored level
Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode it is possible to set a 0-255 seconds OFF delay The ON control activates at the same time the Master actuator and the Slave actuator. The fol-
(through MYHOME_Suite) and 1-4 minutes delay through the physical configuration. Only for lowing OFF control disables the Master actuator and keeps the Slave actuator active for the period
point-to-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator is disabled, the Slave actuator is of time set by the configurator 1 - 4 inserted in M of the Master actuator as shown in the table.
disabled after the time set with the configurators has elapsed.
To use the "Actuator as slave with PUL function " use the MYHOME_Suite virtual confi-
guration.
MQ00594-d-EN 05/08/2014
100
F418
1.3 Minimum advanced level

The configurator in this position defines the minimum value 0-100 MIN=0 O1)
of the light intensity obtainable by means of the dimmed MIN=1 1%
adjustment.
MIN=2 5%
MIN=3 10%
MIN=4 15%
MIN=5 20%
MIN=6 25%
MIN=7 30%
MIN=8 35%
MIN=9 40%
Note 1): The default value is set to ensure the best performance according to the configurator in
TY position.
Warning:
For proper operation of the actuator set the type of lamp to be driven using the level of light intensity until to obtain the value that allows the proper operation of the
configurator in TY position. If the lamp does not turn on or shows unstable operation, lamp.
select, using the configurator in the MIN or virtual configuration position, the minimum
Wiring diagram
L
N
T1,6H 250V
ID
230V
C16
BUS SCS
MQ00594-d-EN 05/08/2014
101
F418
Dimmable LED bulbs compatible with dimmer art. F418
This list is intended to be used as a guide when selecting bulbs to be used with My Home
dimmers; they have been tested by Legrand for dimming compatibility with bulbs
contained on the list. Please be aware that bulb manufacturers can modify their bulbs
at any time, without notice to Legrand, and therefore Legrand cannot ensure future
compatibility.
Max number
Brand Base Code Power Dimmer mode
of lamps
MLGU537FXW24R
MLGU537FWW24R
MLGU537FCW24R
GU5.3 (1) MASTER LED spot LV 7W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
MLGU537FXW36R
MLGU537FWW36R
MLGU537FCW36R
MLR11110XW24R
PHILIPS (2)
MLR11110WW24R
10W
MLR11110XW40R
MLR11110WW40R
G53 LEDSpot LV AR111 Inductive (TY=1) Up to 10
MLR11115XW24R
MLR11115WW24R
15W
MLR11115XW40R
MLR11115WW40R
GU10 LDRC0640MU1EUD2 7,1 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
GU10 LDRC0627WU1EUD 6,5 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
E27 LDRC0927WE7EUD 9W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
E27 LDRC1627ME7EUD 16 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
TOSHIBA E27 LDRC2027ME7EUD 19,7 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
E27 LDAC0627E7EUD 6W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
E27 LDAC0827WE7EUD 7,5 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
E14 LDGC0627CE4EUD 6W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
E14 LDCC0627CE4EUD 6W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
GU10 98174 6W Capacitive (TY=2) Up to 10

GE
GU10 97266 4,5 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
OSRAM GU10 902251 5,2 W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 10
SYLVANIA GU10 26365 5,5 W Capacitive (TY=2) Up to 10
VISION-EL GU10 7411C 4W Inductive (TY=0) Up to 6

Note (1): To have good results put MIN=1
Nota (2): Lamps tested in collaboration with Philips.
MQ00594-d-EN 05/08/2014
102
Memory Module
F425
Description
The memory module is connected to the system and saves the status of all the devices.
This device is very useful in case of a black-out or short power cuts (minimum 400 mS),
because it can reset the status of all the lamps controlled by the system once the power
returns. The reset operations take about 10 seconds.
Just one memory module can be connected to the BUS for each system installed (i.e.
one for each power supply unit), unless two or more systems are being connected using
the SCS/SCS gateway (item F422) configured in physical expansion mode. In this case
just one is needed for all the systems connected together. The device must be put into
operation once the system is already installed and powered.
The multicolour LED indicates the status of the device: 4

- OFF: device too far from the power supply unit 3
- steady green: normal operation
- steady orange: system not yet acquired
- steady red: device exclusion phase 1
- blinking red: acquisition phase in progress 2
- blinking orange: incorrect or missing configuration
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc from the BUS Legend
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
- Current draw: 5 mA 1. Configurator socket
- Operating temperature: 0 - 40 °C 2. BUS
3. Multicolour LED
Dimensions 4. Button
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many MYHOME_Suite software package.

Programming
- Connect the memory module, switch the BUS ON and make sure that the loads of the programming procedure).
dimmers are connected and powered (all the loads must be OFF). - Switch off, simulating a black-out, for at least 15 seconds.
- Press the button on the front for at least five seconds, when the red LED comes on with - Switch back on again; after a few seconds the status of the controlled loads must be
a steady light release the button. Release the button. reset (i.e. those which were ON before the black-out must switch back ON), while the
- Switch the loads which are not to be managed ON one by one (all the loads left OFF unmanaged loads must however remain OFF.
will be managed). NOTES:
- Press the device button within 30 minutes, the red LED will start to flash quickly to - The rolling shutter actuators are not managed.
show that the device is performing the learning procedure. - The timed switchings ON will be activated as simple switchings ON.
- After about 30 seconds the LED turns steady green to signal that the learning procedure - It is important to configure the Memory module with a different A and PL address
has ended and the memory module is operative. to that of an actuator.
- If the programming procedure has not been completed within 30 minutes, the LED - For modifications to the system, repeat the save procedure.
shines orange to signal that the system status has not been saved. At the end of the WARNING:
programming procedure a test should be performed to check that the device is set The memory module is installed near the power supply unit (possibly in the same electri-
correctly. cal panel); the distance must however be no greater than 10 metres.
- Switch on some of the controlled loads (i.e. those not explicitly excluded during the
MQ00281-c-EN 07/06/2014
103
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
Description
This device lets you integrate traditional control devices (switches, pushbuttons, etc.) in
advanced systems with BUS operating logic.
Therefore, it is possible to extend the use of the Lighting Management system in rooms 1
where traditional systems are already present or in historic and prestigious rooms where-
by the complete or partial remaking of the electric system would entail heavy masonry C N1 N2
work. The old but valuable switch with its no longer compliant wiring can therefore con-
tinue to be used with it, as the connection to the load to be controlled is carried out safely
by connecting it with its respective interface with no-voltage contact.
Contact N1 controls light point PL1, contact N2 controls light point PL2.
It is possible to connect:
- Two N/O (normally open) and N/C (normally closed) traditional switches or buttons; 5
- A switch. 4
The device is fitted with 2 LEDs to signal contact closure, programming/deletion, and the N1 N2
status of the control devices.
2
Technical data
Current draw: 9 mA
Dissipated power with max. load: 0.2 W Legend
1. Clamps for connection to traditional devices
Dimensions physical configuration).
Size: 2 DIN modules 3. BUS
4. LED
5. Button
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: - two N/O (normally open) and N/C (normally closed) traditional switches or buttons;
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. - a switch.
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many List of Functions
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in The device performs the following functions:
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the 1. LIGHT SWITCH
MYHOME_Suite software package. 2. AUTOMATION CONTROL
When used as a component of the Lighting Management system, use the specific types 3. DEVICE LOCKING/UNLOCKING
of configuration (Plug&go, Project&Download). 4. SCENARIO MODULE CONTROL
The interface consists of two independent control units, which are identified with the 5. PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
positions PL1 and PL2 in the physical configuration and the term Module 1 and Module 2 6. PLUS LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SCENARIO ACTIVATION
in the MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. The two units can send: 7. PLUS PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
- commands to two actuators for two independent loads (On, Off or adjustment) identi- 8. SOUND SYSTEM CONTROL
fied with the address PL1 and PL2 and the mode specified in M or;
- a command to the F420 scenario module; See the following pages for the configuration procedures.
- a double command intended for a single load (motor for blinds Up-Down, curtains
Open-Close) identified with the address PL1=PL2 and specified Configuration mode M.
The interface has an LED for indicating proper operation and three terminals for connec-
tion to traditional devices such as:
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
104
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
Physical configuration
The interface includes two independent control units, identified with positions N1 and N2. The two units can send:
- Commands to two actuators for two independent loads (On, Off or adjustment) identified with the address PL1 and PL2 and the mode specified in M
A PL1 PL2 M SPE or;
- A command to the F420 scenario module;
- A double command intended for a single load (motor for rolling shutter Up/Down, Open/Close curtains) identified with the address PL1 = PL2 and mode
specified M.
Function selection
To configure the contact numbers use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing
Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a level" and the "Destination level".
light point address for the return of the load status You can also configure the "Installation
1.2 Mode
1.2.1 ON/OFF control: missing in XLS

Type of contact to terminals N1 and N2 Normally open (N/O) SPE=0
Cyclic SPE=0, M=0
ON SPE=0, M=ON
OFF SPE=0, M=OFF
Cyclic (N/O contact only) SPE=1, M=7
Button SPE=0, M=PUL
ON with button at N2, OFF with button at N1 SPE=0, M=O/I
2sec SPE=8, M=1
30sec SPE=0, M=7
1min SPE=0, M=1
2min SPE=0, M=2
3min SPE=0, M=3
4min SPE=0, M=4
5min SPE=0, M=5
10min SPE=8, M=2
15min SPE=0, M=6
For timed ON with period 0-255 hours, 0-59 minutes and 0-59 seconds use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
105
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428

Parameter / setting
ON with button at N2, OFF with button at N1 and DIMMER when held down SPE=0, M=O/I
For the functions of "Cyclic with custom point-to-point adjustment", "Cyclic with "OFF with custom adjustment", use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
custom adjustment", "Cyclic dimmer without adjustment", "Custom dimmer ON without
adjustment", "Custom dimmer OFF without adjustment", "ON with custom adjustment",
1.2.3 Blink command

Combine it with a command configured OFF to switch it off.

Parameter / setting
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
106
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
2.1 Addressing

Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a
light point address for the return of the load status You can also configure the "Installation
level" and the "Destination level".
missing in XLS
2.2 Mode

Bistable control PL1=PL2 SPE=0 M=
Monostable control PL1=PL2 SPE=0 M=M
3.1 Addressing

Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
3.2 Mode

Disable SPE=1 , M=1
Enable SPE=1, M=2
To configure the "Installation level" and the "Destination level" and use MYHOME_Suite
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
107
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
4.1 Addressing

Light point (of the scenario module) 0-15 PL1, PL2=0-9
Note: PL2 must be equal to PL1, or not be configured (in which case the button connected to
terminal PL2 is disabled)
4.2 Mode

Scenario activation
Note: For Delayed activation of the top/bottom button use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration Note 2): With SPE=4 it is only possible to call up the scenario saved in module item F420. M=1-8:
Note 1): With SPE=6 you can call and program scenarios within module F420. M=1-8: group of group of scenarios to be controlled (see table).
scenarios to be controlled (see table).
M First contact PL1 Second contact PL2 Scenario programming

1 1 2
To program, change or delete a scenario you need to enable programming module F420
2 3 4 so that the status LED is green (press the
3 5 6 locking/unlocking button on the scenario module for at least 0.5 seconds) and then
continue with the following steps:
4 7 8
5 9 10 1) press one of the four special control buttons to which the scenario should be associated
6 11 12 to for 3 seconds and the corresponding LED will start blinking;
7 13 14 2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation,
8 15 16 Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions;
A=0-9 and PL1=1-9 are the room and the light point of the scenario module to be controlled. PL2 3) confirm the scenario by briefly pressing the corresponding button on the special
must be equal to PL1 or not be configured (in which case the second contact is disabled).
control to exit the programming mode;
4) to change a scenario, or to create new ones to use with the other buttons, repeat the
procedure
starting from point 1. To recall an already set scenario, briefly pressing the corresponding
button on the control is enough. If you want to delete a scenario completely, press and
hold down the corresponding button for approximately 10 seconds.
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
108
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
5.1 Addressing

Addressing type
Room 0-10 A=1-9
Note: If PL1=PL2 the two buttons connected to the interface activate two different scenarios.
If PL1≠PL2 the two buttons activate the same scenario
5.2 Mode

Button N1 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN
Button N2 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN
To configure the address 1 - 2047 of the scenario and the number of buttons 0 - 31 on
the control device, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
109
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
8.1 Addressing
You can manage a single amplifier (point-to-point control), some amplifiers (room control) and all the amplifiers in the system (general control).

SPE=8
Point-to-point Room 0-9 0-9
Sound point 0-9 0-9
Room Room 0-9 A=AMB
PF=0-9
8.2 Mode

Type of contact to terminals N1 and N2 Normally open SPE=7
Normally closed SPE=0
ON/volume + SPE=5 , M=0 on button N1
OFF/volume - SPE=5, M=0 on button N2
Change track SPE=5, M=1 on button N1
Click on source SPE=5, M=1 on button N2
Follow me YES SPE=5, M=0
PL2=0 follow me, PL2=1-4 source
NO
For the “Cyclical ON/OFF” function and to select sources 1-9 use the MYHOME_Suite
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
110
Contact interface
in DIN module
F428
Wiring diagram
M
Interface Actuator
DIN module
C N1 N2
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C1 C2
N1 N2
SCS BUS
MQ00283-c-EN 07/06/2014
111
SCS/DALI
gateway
F429
Description
1_ 2_ 3 4 5 6 7 8
The device is an interface between My Home/Lighting Management systems and devices + + + _ + _ OUTPUT + _ + _ + _ + _
driven using the DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) protocol. It has 8 indepen-
dent outputs to which up to 16 DALI devices can be connected for each output. Three
pushbuttons with notification LEDs set the operating mode. Key P1 sets up the device
for the virtual configuration, key P2 is used to select one of the 8 outputs which connect
with the DALI devices and key P3 is used to switch the output which has been selected
with key P2 ON, OFF and to dim it. On pressing key P3 quickly one can switch the load ON
or switch it OFF cyclically,
5
while pressing it for a long time adjusts the brightness. 1
The device can be installed in a My Home system and use the physical or virtual con- 2
figuration, or as a component of the Lighting Management system and use the specific
configuration types (Plug&go, Project&Download).
N L
Technical data
Power supply: 110 – 240 Vac @ 50/60 Hz; 110 – 240 Vdc
Current draw: 5 mA 4 3
Dissipated power: 4W
No. of DALI outputs: 8 x 16 ballast
Legend
Dimensions 1. Push-buttons
2. LED
Size: 6 DIN modules
3. Power supply
4. BUS
Configuration

When installed in a Lighting Management system, the actuator can be configured in the
following ways:
- PLUG&GO
- PROJECT&DOWNLOAD
2. MyHome System
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the
2.1 Addressing

Lighting point 0-15 takes the PL number from the output number to which the load
is connected
MQ00284-c-EN 07/06/2014
112
SCS/DALI
gateway
F429
Depending on the configurator connected to A, the outputs will take the following address:
OUTPUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1 A=1
1
PL=1 PL=2 PL=3 PL=4 PL=5 PL=6 PL=7 PL=8
A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2 A=2
2
A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3 A=3
3
A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4 A=4
4
A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5 A=5
A= 5
A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6 A=6
6
A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7 A=7
7
A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8 A=8
8
A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9 A=9
9
Note: The PL configurator is not required for the physical configuration, as the value is same group connected to G.
set by the output to which the DALI device is connected. All the outputs belong to the
1.2 Mode

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", to change the "Minimum level" of Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via
the brightness (1 to 100) for additional options of the “Type of load” (Dali standard) use MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for a point-point type
MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after
MQ00284-c-EN 07/06/2014
113
SCS/DALI
gateway
F429
Wiring diagram
DALI DALI
DEVICE DEVICE
DALI DALI
DEVICE DEVICE
MAX. 16 DEVICES
PER OUTPUT
DALI
DEVICE
1_ 2_ 3 4 5 6 7 8
+ + + _ + _ OUTPUT + _ + _ + _ + _
N L
L
SCS BUS
N
MQ00284-c-EN 07/06/2014
114
Telephone actuator
F461/2
Description
The telephone actuator enables remote control of two users (e.g. boilers, garden
watering, staircase light, garden light, rolling shutters, etc.) using the fixed, or the Front view
mobile telephone line. 11 1
Remote control and programsng are protected by a password consisting in a 4 digit
code that can be customised by the customer; the default code is 1234. During the
programsng procedure, it is possible to select three operating modes:
- LIGHTING 2
10
It can be used to enable/disable users such as staircase lights, garden lights, boilers, etc. 3
- AUTOMATISMS 9
It can be used to activate the rolling shutter motors (up/down movement), as well as 4
other motors.
- TEMPERATURE CONTROL 8 5
To enable or disable the boilers; used together with the BTicino timer thermostat.
The activation, deactivation, check and programsng controls must be sent from the
actuator using only a DTMF telephone; if other types of telephones are used, the
actuator does not work. In order to control more than two users, it is possible to install
on the same telephone line up to four actuators, in parallel on the line. 7 6
The operation of the actuators is guaranteed even if an answering machine is installed
on the telephone line.

Network Power supply: 230 Vac ± 10 % 50Hz 1. Screw clamps (C2): uscita contatti in scambio del relè 2
Dissipated power: 11 VA 2. Yellow LED: relay (C2) status. ON = relay active
Absorption: 50 mA 3. RJ8 female connector: to connect the actuator to the telephone using the cable
Operating temperature: 0 – 35 °C supplied, and activate the programming procedure
Telephone network: analogue (PSTN) 4. Pushbutton (C2) for local activation of relay 2
Weight: 270 grams 5. PROG/LINE selector:
Connection to the - in PROG position: operation in programming mode
telephone network: two-wire with telephone pair - in LINE position: normal operation
Connection to the PABX two-wire with telephone pair 6. Screw clamps (LU): telephone line input
Dialling system: only with touch tone dialling (DTMF) 7. Screw clamps (PRI): power supply 230 Vac
Relay number: 2 with independent control and changeover contacts 8. Green LED : operating mode:
Relay output contacts: 230 Vac 6A resistive, 2A inductive both between N-NC and N-NO OFF = actuator faulty or incorrectly powered
On steady = powered and normal operation
Dimensional data ON flashing = powered and in programming mode operation
9. Pushbutton (C1) for local activation of relay 1
3 DIN modules.
10. Yellow LED: relay (C1) status. ON = relay active
11. Screw clamps (C1): output of changeover contacts of relay 1
MQ00380-b-EN 22/04/2014
115
Telephone actuator
F461/2
Configuration
The programming procedure is performed using a standard touch tone telephone, connected LIGHTING MODE
to the RJ8 socket of the actuator, using the appropriate cable, supplied as standard. In this mode the two relays can be enabled independently, and can also be programmed
with different functions.
A user can be activated with “impulsive” monostable operation using relay 1 (Example
1: timed switching on of the staircase light), and with “ON/OFF” bistable operation using
relay 2 (Example: boiler activation/deactivation).
1.............. 4.............. 7..............
TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE

2.............. 5.............. 8..............
3.............. 6.............. 9..............
To program the telephone actuator move This mode enables to combine the telephone actuator to the operation of the BTicino
the selector (3) to “PROG”, and enter the timer thermostat, item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4451 and item AM5721.
commands on the telephone connected to Using this mode, it is possible to remotely change the operation of the timer thermostat.
the connector (4). The programming cable If the timer thermostat is in any AUTO, MAN, ANTIFREEZE, PARTY, HOLIDAY, or OFF
is supplied as standard. condition, by activating the following controls on the actuator:
- ANTIFREEZE, the timer thermostat will switch to the antifreeze condition, until an
unlocking command is received;
- AUTO, the timer thermostat will switch to the automatic condition.
The actuator can be programmed to operate in three different modes:
AUTOMATISM MODE
- lighting: to enable or disable lights, boilers, etc.;
In this mode, the two relays are both controlled using the same command and cannot be
- automation: to activate the rolling shutter motors (closing – opening), or other motors;
activated independently from each other.
- temperature control: to activate or deactivate the heating or the air conditioning
Therefore, when relay 1 is programmed, the actuator will automatically also manage
system to be used with the BTicino timer thermostat item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4451 and
relay 2.
item AM5721.
The AUTOMATISM mode is recommended for controlling users interlocked with each other,
Also, in the three operating modes the two relays can themselves be programmed to
such as the operation of a rolling shutter (up/down), motors (forward/backwards), etc.
operate with the monostable function (once timed, the relay closes for the programmed
time; ideal, for example, when timed switching on of the staircase lights is required), or
For more details see the instruction leaflet supplied with the device.
bistable (ON - OFF, at every command the relay changes its status and keeps it until a new
command is received, behaving as a switch).
The actuator can also be connected to an internal telephone extension (shunted), when
a PABX BTicino telephone switchboard is present (to expand the number of relays that
can be selected remotely); it is also possible to connect in parallel to each other on the
same telephone line up to 4 actuators, even if an answering machine is also installed.
At the end of each programming operation the actuator sends to the telephone receiver a
confirmation (programming correct) or an error (programming failed) tone.
MQ00380-b-EN 22/04/2014
116
Telephone actuator
F461/2
Wiring diagrams
max. 230 V
6 A resistive
2 A inductive U
User 2 Telephone line
max. 230 V
6 A resistive
2 A inductive U
User 1
a b
IN
Telephone PLT1
actuator Telephone
protection
OUT It is possible to connect up to 4 devices on the same

a b telephone call. The devices must be numbered
progressively. It is very important that each device
has its own unique identification number.
230 Vac
50 Hz
NOTE:
The devices must be numbered
progressively during the programming
V˜ V˜
procedure. It is very important that each V˜
device has its own unique identification
Telephone line
number.
U1 U2 U7 U8
C1 C2
Actuator No. 1 Timer thermostat

a b 230V 0,5A 5A cos=0,5
IN (main) 2A 6A
Telephone
protection
OUT NA C NC
PLT1 a b
Actuator No. 4 230V 50 Hz
50 mA
Remote ext NTC
(secondary)
PRI
LU
a b
To the loads
2 2
230 Vac to be controlled
50 Hz
Remote Contact open
activation automatic program
(last one selected)
Contact closed
manual antifreeze
program
MQ00380-b-EN 22/04/2014
117
GSM telephone actuator
F462
Description
The F462 GSM actuator is a GSM terminal suitable for the remote management of all the
heating systems, particularly if there is no fixed telephone line. Front view 1 2 3
It is also possible to control two remote inputs and one remote output.
The communication is between a mobile phone and the GSM modem of the device, using
an SMS message.
The F462 GSM actuator connected to a timer thermostat, item L/N/NT4450 enables,
using appropriate SMS messages, to read the status of the timer thermostat (measured
room temperature, program set, etc.), to change the set program, and change certain 4
5
temperature control parameters; In alternative, it can be used with the timer thermostat,
6
item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4451 , with the ON-OFF function only. 7
1 2
The device is capable of sending an SMS message to the telephone numbers saved inside
the device itself, when an alarm situation caused by the closing/opening of the contacts
occurs.
Technical data
Power supply: 10 – 20 Vac/Vdc
Absorption: Idle 30mA 500mA MAX
Contact output: 4(2)A-250Vac
Contacts free from voltage 11 10 9 8
Quad band: E GSM850/900/1800/1900 MHz
Output power: Class 4 (2W) for 850/900 MHz
Class 1 (1W) for 1800/1900 MHz
Legend
Sensitivity: 107dBm@ 850/900MHz
106dBm@ 1800/1900MHz 1. Outdoor antenna connector
Protection index: IP40 (when correctly installed) 2. Alarm input connections
3. Relay or HC/HS/L/N/NT4451 timer thermostat output connections
Dimensional data 4. Network status LED: OFF = Not powered
FLASHING QUICKLY = Searching for network
4 DIN modules
FLASHING SLOWLY = Standby
5. Input 1 (alarm 1) status LED, and field intensity notification
6. Relay status LED, and field intensity notification
7. Input 2 (alarm 2) status LED, and field intensity notification
8. L/N/NT4450 timer thermostat connections
9. Power supply input
10. Battery connector
11. SIM card housing (remove the bottom cover)
MQ00379-b-EN 22/04/2014
118
GSM telephone actuator
F462
Configuration
The device configuration operations consist in defining the coded SMS messages
following several criteria depending on the control to actuate remotely, or remote status
information for the managed devices. As a coding example here is the message for the
control of the timer thermostat (item L/N/ NT4450).
– #STATUS to know the status of the timer thermostat, the alarms and the relays
– #FROST to set the antifreeze program
– #ECONOMY to set the MANUAL program with temperature T1
– #COMFORT to set the MANUAL program with temperature T3
– #AUTO to set the automatic program
– #RESUME to return to the program set on the timer thermostat.
For the full list of codes see the instruction manual supplied with the device
Wiring diagrams
ALARM
NOTIFICATIONS
ELECTRIC USER
OR ITEM
HC/HS4451
L/N/NT4451
EXTERNAL BATTERY
Power supply
Timer thermostat
Item L/N/NT4450
*NC = NOT CONNECTED
MQ00379-b-EN 22/04/2014
119
BUS SCS 0 675 66 H4648
RFID key card switches 5 727 36 LN4648
5 722 36

RFID key card switch for the connection of the power supply to the hotel room
(13.56 MHz frequency key card detection). Thanks to the LED backlit slot, the device
can be found in the dark. An automatic switch off delay can also be set.
It can be used with key cards with sizes between 45 mm and 54 mm (ISO).
The device can be configured in two different ways:
- Physical configuration, by inserting the configurators in the appropriate housings.
- Configuration using the MyHOME_Suite software, which can be downloaded from
the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this last type of configuration 3
1
has the advantage of offering many more options when compared with the physical
configuration.
Technical data
Rear view
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18-27 Vdc
Max. absorption: 6 mA
Stand-by absorption: 5 mA
RFID key card frequency: 13.56 MHz
4

EN 60669-2-1
EN 50090-2-2 5
EN 50090-2-3
EN 50428

Size: 2 flush mounted modules 1. Programming key: Learn IN
2. Programming key: Learn OUT
3. LED
5. SCS BUS connector
MM00771-a-EN 03/10/2013
120
BUS SCS 0 675 66 H4648
RFID key card switches 5 727 36 LN4648
5 722 36
Physical configuration Ethernet connection to the system
Two modes: Ethernet

- CENTRALIZED, to recall scenarios managed by the scenario programmer. When network
HUB Switch
the key card is inserted and removed, the device forwards a signal to the scenario
MH201
programmer, which depending on the scenarios set will activate the corresponding
functions programmed.
A = 1-9 (CEN command address)
1 2 3 4 5 6
PL = 1-9 (CEN command address) MH201
M1 = CEN DC - In
DEL1 = no configurator
M2 = no configurator Ethernet network
Note: the insertion of the key card corresponds to “Pushbutton 1” of the control, while
the removal of the key card corresponds to “Pushbutton 2” of the control BUS-SCS
- SCENARIO, where by inserting the key card a group of actuators is enabled, and an
entrance scenario is activated (through the scenario module), and by removing the
key card an exit scenario is activated (through the scenario module), thanks to which PC for configuration
all the group actuators will switch off and then disable after a set time delay.
A = 1-9 (as scenario module)
PL = 1-9 (as scenario module) SCENARIO mode programming
M1 = 1-8 (activation of the corresponding scenario: see table B)
SCENARIO mode programming
DEL1 = 0 - 9 (switching on time delay at the insertion of the key card: see table A)
This operation is performed to create a link between the key card switch and the
M2 = no configurator
scenario module. The procedure is as follows:
DEL2 = 0 - 9 (switching off time delay after the removal of the key card: see table A)
1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming
Table A mode, with the green LED on;
2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn OUT) until the LED
Configurator value Time
starts flashing (approximately 3 seconds);
0 0
3) Create the scenario using the system controls and actuators;
1 1 min 4) Once the scenario has been saved, briefly press programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2
2 2 min (Learn 2) to exit the programming status;
3 3 min 5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario
4 4 min module technical information).
5 5 min
6 10 min Cancelling the programming in SCENARIO mode:
7 15 min 1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming
8 15 sec mode, with the green LED on:
2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn 2) for 8 seconds.
9 30 sec
after 3 seconds the LED will turn on, after a further 5 seconds it will turn off again;
3) Release the key;
4) The LED flashing, followed by the LED switching off, indicates that the programming
Table B has been cancelled;
Configurator value Scenario - Group 5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario
1 Scenario-group (Sce1=1, Sce2=9, Gr=1) module technical information).
2 Scenario-group (Sce1=2, Sce2=10, Gr=2)
3
Note: Sce 1 = scenario activated on insertion 1
Sce 2 = scenario activated on removal
Gr = group of actuators
2
Configuration using the MyHOME_Suite software
This is performed using the appropriate MyHOME_Suite application. This mode has
the advantage of offering many more options when compared with the physical 1. Programming key: Learn IN
configuration. The software configuration requires Ethernet connection between the 2. Programming key: Learn OUT
system and the PC, through the IP MH201 scenario module. 3. LED
MM00771-a-EN 03/10/2013
121
L
L N
230 V
50 Hz N
N
L
BUS SCS
V1 To the fan-coil
or temperature
V2 control system
Wiring diagrams
V3
TM2 TM1 TM3
Heating
A B C D Cooling
Ethernet
network GS (TM+EL) Magnet Contact
RFID key card switches
Magnet F430R8
HUB Switch Contact
E
Principle and configuration diagram for a hotel room
1 2 3 4 5 6 ZA = 2
MH201
Protection ZB = 7
To other line NC contact
room services N = 1
DC - In LOAD = –
MH201 3513
Ethernet PRI
network ROOM
Other rooms E49
E49 PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
ZA = 2 CORRIDOR
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA MODE ZB = 7 RECEPTION
F +
MM00771-a-EN
SCS
TYPE = 1
– HEAT = 7 ITEM DESCRIPTION
COOL = CEN E49 Power supply
WINDOW ON FAN
CLOSED PUMP = – Key card reader outside the door and

H4691 LN4651
indicators
LN4691 IN = 3
0 674 59 348210 Key card
WINDOW ECO LN4648 Key card switch
PC for room management
03/10/2013
OPEN LN4653 DND and MUR controls
LN4652 8 key scenario control
LN4691 Thermostat with display
MH201 IP scenario module
BUS SCS
F430R8 Air conditioning actuator
H4648 To other F411/1N DIN module 1 relay actuator
230 Vac LN4648 devices
0 675 66 H4653 H4652
Bell Transformer Transformer 5 727 36 LN4653 LN4652 General note: the devices listed in the legend are for
12 Vac/dc – 230 Vac 5 722 36 0 675 93 0 675 92 the LivingLight series.
max 1A Room door
electric lock
The general switch GS (TM+EL) must
L1 L A
H4651 be selected based on the absorption of
R1 = 2 the services installed.
LN4651 DND MUR
R2 = 7 0 675 91 The TM switch must be selected based
M = 2 2 sec. B on the power supply used.
L = 0 A =9 R1 = 2 A = 9
C D The TM switch must be selected based
A = 1 PL = 9 R2 = 7 PL = 8 on the loads connected.
5 722 36
PL = 1 M1 = CEN M = – M = CEN The actuator to be used depends on

348210 F411/1N
T = 2 0 675 89 DEL1= – LED = – E the type of air conditioning system
A = 1 M2 = – installed.
PL = 1 DEL2= – If the current supplied by the E49
M = PUL
F is not sufficient to power the SCS
system, it is possible to use the
122
5 727 36 LN4648
0 675 66 H4648
E46ADCN power supply.

BUS-SCS 0 675 65 H4649
key card switches 5 727 35 LN4649
5 722 35

Hotel room power supply key card switch. Thanks to the LED backlit slot, the device can
be found in the dark. An automatic switch off delay can also be set.
It can be used with key cards with sizes between 45 mm and 54 mm (ISO).
The device can be configured in two different ways: 1
the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this last type of configuration 2
has the advantage of offering many more options when compared with the physical.
configuration.
3
Technical data
Stand-by absorption: 5 mA Rear view

EN 60669-2-1 5
EN 50090-2-2
EN 50090-2-3
EN 50428
6
Dimensional data
Legend
1. Programming key: Learn IN
3. LED
4. Key card detection microswitch
6. SCS BUS connector
MM00496-b-EN 02/10/2013
123
BUS-SCS 0 675 65 H4649
key card switches 5 727 35 LN4649
5 722 35
Physical configuration Ethernet connection to the system
Two modes: Ethernet

- CENTRALIZED, to recall scenarios managed by the scenario programmer. When network
HUB Switch
the key card is inserted and removed, the device forwards a signal to the scenario
MH201
programmer, which depending on the scenarios set will activate the corresponding
functions programmed.
A = 1-9 (CEN command address)
1 2 3 4 5 6
PL = 1-9 (CEN command address) MH201
M1 = CEN DC - In
M2 = no configurator Ethernet network
Note: the insertion of the key card corresponds to “Pushbutton 1” of the control, while
the removal of the key card corresponds to “Pushbutton 2” of the control BUS-SCS
- SCENARIO, where by inserting the key card a group of actuators is enabled, and an
entrance scenario is activated (through the scenario module), and by removing the
key card an exit scenario is activated (through the scenario module), thanks to which PC for configuration
all the group actuators will switch off and then disable after a set time delay.
A = 1-9 (as scenario module)
PL = 1-9 (as scenario module) SCENARIO mode programming
M1 = 1-8 (activation of the corresponding scenario: see table B)
DEL1 = 0 - 9 (switching on time delay at the insertion of the key card: see table A) SCENARIO mode programming:
M2 = no configurator This operation is performed to create a link between the key card switch and the
DEL2 = 0 - 9 (switching off time delay after the removal of the key card: see table A) scenario module. The procedure is as follows:
1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming
Table A mode, with the green LED on;
Configurator value Time 2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn OUT) until the LED
0 0 starts flashing (approximately 3 seconds);
1 1 min 3) Create the scenario using the system controls and actuators;
2 2 min 4) Once the scenario has been saved, briefly press programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2
(Learn 2) to exit the programming status;
3 3 min
5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario
4 4 min
module technical information).
5 5 min
6 10 min Cancelling the programming in SCENARIO mode:
7 15 min 1) Power the key card switch. Check that the scenario module is in programming
8 15 sec mode, with the green LED on:
9 30 sec 2) Press and hold down programming key 1 (Learn IN) or 2 (Learn 2) for 8 seconds.
after 3 seconds the LED will turn on, after a further 5 seconds it will turn off again;
3) Release the key;
Table B 4) The LED flashing, followed by the LED switching off, indicates that the programming
Configurator value Scenario - Group has been cancelled;
1 Scenario-group (Sce1=1, Sce2=9, Gr=1) 5) The scenario module will also have to exit programming status (see the scenario
2 Scenario-group (Sce1=2, Sce2=10, Gr=2) module technical information).
5 Scenario-group (Sce1=5, Sce2=13, Gr=5) 1
2
Note: Sce 1 = scenario activated on insertion
Sce 2 = scenario activated on removal 3
Gr = group of actuators
4
Configuration using the MyHOME_Suite software

This is performed using the appropriate MyHOME_Suite application. This mode has
1. Programming key: Learn IN
the advantage of offering many more options when compared with the physical
configuration. The software configuration requires Ethernet connection between the
3. LED
system and the PC, through the IP MH201 scenario module.
4. Key card detection microswitch
MM00496-b-EN 02/10/2013
124
L
125
230 V L
N
50 Hz N N
L
BUS-SCS
To the fan-coil
V1 or temperature
V2 control system
Wiring diagrams
V3
TM2 TM1 TM3 Heating
key card switches
A B C D Cooling
Ethernet
network GS Magnet Contact
(TM+EL) F430R8
Magnet
HUB Switch Contact
E
Principle and configuration diagram for a hotel room
1 2 3 4 5 6 ZA = 2
MH201
Protection ZB = 7
To other line NC contact
room services N = 1
DC - In
3513 LOAD = –
MH201
Ethernet
network
Other rooms E49 ZA = 2
MODE
PRI ZB = 7 ROOM
F +
MM00496-b-EN
E49
TYPE = 1 CORRIDOR
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz – HEAT = 7 RECEPTION
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
WINDOW ON FAN
COOL = CEN
SCS PUMP = –
CLOSED ITEM DESCRIPTION
H4691
LN4691 IN = 3 E49 Power supply
0 674 59 LN4650 Outside the door indicator
WINDOW ECO LN4649 Key card switch
02/10/2013
OPEN
LN4653 DND and MUR controls
LN4652 8 key scenario control
LN4691 Thermostat with display
BUS SCS MH201 IP scenario module
To other
F430R8 Air conditioning actuator
H4649
230 Vac LN4649 devices General note: the devices listed in the legend are for
0 675 65 H4653 H4652
5 727 35 LN4653 LN4652 the LivingLight series.
Transformer
Bell 5 722 35 0 675 93 0 675 92
12 Vac/dc – 230 Vac
max 1A
The general switch GS (TM+EL) must
A be selected based on the absorption of
L1 L the services installed.
R1 = 2 DND MUR
B The TM switch must be selected based
R2 = 7 on the power supply used.
M = 2 A =9 R1 = 2 A = 9
C D The TM switch must be selected based
L = 0 H4650 PL = 9 R2 = 7 PL = 8 on the loads connected.
5 722 35
A = 1 LN4650 M1 = CEN M = – M = CEN The actuator to be used depends on

PL = 1 0 675 90 DEL1= – LED = – E the type of air conditioning system
T = 2 M2 = – installed.
DEL2= – If the current supplied by the E49
F is not sufficient to power the SCS
system, it is possible to use the
5 727 35 LN4649
0 675 65 H4649
E46ADCN power supply.

Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
Description
1
Special control, flush-mounted with two modules, equipped with 4 buttons and a
two-colour LED that can be adjusted/switched off with the button on the control. The
control allows you to create both standard and special functions (timed On, scenario con-
trol, dimmer, sound system and video door entry functions). 2
Technical data
Current draw at maximum LED brightness: 6 mA for H4651M2 5
7.5 mA for 067553
8.5 mA for L4651M2
and AM5831M2
Operating temperature: 5 – 35°C 4
Dimensions
Size: 2 flush-mounted modules
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways:
A
PL/PF
6
M
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. LIV1/AUX
LIV2
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from SPE
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many I

For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the 7
MYHOME_Suite software package.
Legend
List of Functions 1. LED
2. Top buttons
1. LIGHT SWITCH 3. Bottom buttons
2. AUTOMATION CONTROL 4. LED
3. DEVICE LOCKING/UNLOCKING 5. LED control/off button
4. SCENARIO MODULE CONTROL
5. PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
6. PLUS PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
7. VIDEO DOOR ENTRY FUNCTIONS 7. BUS
8. SOUND SYSTEM CONTROL
LED Adjustment PUSH
30%
DEFAULT
60% 0%
PUSH t > 2 s 100%
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
126
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
Function selection
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing
Room 0-10 A=AMB, PL=1-9
Group 1-255 A=GR, PL=1-9
General general A=GEN, PL=-


Riser bus riser I=CEN
To configure the installation level use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
1.2 Mode

Cyclic SPE=0, M=0
ON SPE=0, M=ON
OFF SPE=0, M=OFF
Button SPE=0, M=PUL
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button. SPE=0, M=O/I
2sec SPE=1, M=7
30sec SPE=0, M=7
1min SPE=0, M=1
2min SPE=0, M=2
3min SPE=0, M=3
4min SPE=0, M=4
5min SPE=0, M=5
10min SPE=1, M=8
15min SPE=0, M=6
For custom timed ON with period 0 to 255 hours use MYHOME_Suite virtual configu-
ration.
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
127
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242

Parameter / setting
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button and DIMMER when held down SPE=0, M=O/I
1.2.3 ON/OFF Control and ADJUSTMENT (custom Point-to-Point only).

Switch-on Switch-on level 1
Parameter / setting
time (s) to 99%
1 SPE=5 M=0
2 SPE=5 M=1
3 SPE=5 M=2
5 SPE=5 M=3
ON/OFF and cyclic ADJUSTMENT 10 SPE=5 M=4
Soft-start and soft-stop setting from 0 to 255 seconds LIV1=0 – 9,
ON/OFF when pressing briefly and adjustment
and switch-on level from 0 to 100%. 20 LIV2=0 – 9 1) SPE=5 M=5
when holding down.
40 SPE=5 M=6
60 SPE=5 M=7
120 SPE=5 M=8
255 SPE=5 M=9
1 SPE=9 M=0
2 SPE=9 M=1
3 SPE=9 M=2
5 SPE=9 M=3
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button Soft-start and soft-stop setting from 0 to 255 seconds, 10 LIV1=0 – 9, SPE=9 M=4
and DIMMER when held down. switch-on level from 0 to 100% 20 LIV2=0 – 9 2) SPE=9 M=5
40 SPE=9 M=6
60 SPE=9 M=7
120 SPE=9 M=8
255 SPE=9 M=9
Note 1: Selection of fixed adjustment level from 1% to 99% via positions LIV1=0 – 9 and LIV2=0 Note 2: selection of fixed adjustment level from 1% to 99% via positions LIV1=0–9 and
– 9. The management is cyclic with ON at the selected level and OFF. If LIV1=LIV2=0, the control LIV2=0–9. The control is ON at the selected level with the top button and OFF with the bottom
allows cyclically switching ON (at the last saved level) and OFF when pressing briefly. In the case of button. If LIV1=LIV2=0, the control allows switching ON (at the last saved level) by briefly press-
point-to-point controls the adjustment is made by pressing and holding down. ing the top button and OFF with the bottom button; only in the case of point-to-point controls
will pressing and holding down enable making the adjustment (upwards with the top button and
downwards with the bottom button) on 100 levels.
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
128
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
1.2.4 Blink command

When an actuator receives a blink command, it implements it by closing and opening Combine it with a command configured OFF to switch it off.

Parameter / setting
2.1 Addressing



2.2 Mode

Parameter / setting
Bistable control SPE=0 M=
Monostable control SPE=0 M=M
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
129
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
3.1 Addressing



3.2 Mode

Parameter / setting
Disable (bottom button) SPE=1 , M=1
Enable (bottom button) SPE=1, M=2
Disable (top button) - Enable (bottom button) SPE=1, M=3
4.1 Addressing

Light point (of the scenario module) 0-15 PL=1-9

The special control can also be used in systems where there are SCS/SCS interfaces control one or more scenario modules located on the BUS of another interface (destina-
(F422). By installing the control on the BUS of an interface (installation level), you can tion level).

MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
130
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
4.2 Mode

Scenario activation and Scenario top button 1-16
modification SPE=6, M=1-4 1)
Scenario bottom button 1-16
Scenario activation Scenario top button 1-16
SPE=4, M=1-9 2)
For Delayed activation of the top/bottom button use MYHOME_Suite virtual configu-
ration
Note 1): With the special control you can retrieve, create, or modify 4 scenarios saved in the Note 2): Repeating scenario 1 – 9 of the scenario module F420 whose address is indicated in
scenario module F420. Each button on the control can be linked with one of the saved scenarios by positions A and PL of the control (complete the control with a double button cover).
configuring position M, as shown in the table.
Value of configurator M Button 1 (T1) Button 2 (T2) Button 3 (T3) Button 4 (T4)
1 scenario 1 scenario 2 scenario 3 scenario 4
Note: M = 1-4 identifies the group of scenarios to be controlled with the four buttons T1, T2, T3
and T4.
To program, change or delete a scenario you need to enable programming module F420
so that the status LED is green (press the locking/unlocking button on the scenario mod- Buttons for managing scenarios
ule for at least 0.5 seconds) and then continue with the following steps:
1) press one of the four special control buttons to which the scenario should be associat- Button 1 Button 2
ed to for 3 seconds and the corresponding LED will start blinking;
Button 1 LED Button 2 LED
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Tem-
perature Control, and Sound System functions;
3) confirm the scenario by briefly pressing the corresponding button on the special con-
trol to exit the programming mode; Button 3 LED Button 4 LED
4) to change a scenario, or to create new ones to use with the other buttons, repeat the Button 3 Button 4
procedure starting from point 1. To recall an already set scenario, briefly pressing the cor-
responding button on the control is enough. If you want to delete a scenario completely,
press and hold down the corresponding button for approximately 10 seconds.
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
131
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
5.1 Addressing

Addressing type
Room 0-10 A=1-9
5.2 Mode T2
T1
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_ Physical configuration
Suite) T4
Top button 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN T3
Bottom button 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN
To configure the number 1 - 2047 of the scenario and of the buttons 0 - 31 on the
control device, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
7. Video door entry functions
7.1 Unlocking control
7.1.1 Addressing T2
Addressing type Virtual configuration (MYHOME_ Physical configuration
T1
Suite)
Address of the external unit 0-95 A=1-9 PL=1-9 1)
T4
Note 1): Define the address P (two digits) of the external unit whose lock is to be controlled with T3
button T3 (bottom left).
Button T4 (bottom right) controls the lock of the external unit P+2. Button T1 (top left) controls
the lock of the external unit P+1 and button T2 (top right) that of the external unit P+3.
Destination level

Same command level SPE=7 M=1
To set the Riser or Backbone destination level use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
132
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
7.2 Floor call control T1
7.2.1 Addressing
Define the address (two digits) of the internal unit to call by using the control device.
Addressing type Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical configuration

Address of the internal unit 0-99 A=1-9 PL=1-9
Type of call: T2

Function
Point-to-point SPE=7 M=2
To configure the "General" call use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
7.3 Control for stair lighting
7.3.1 Addressing
The device takes on the function of the stair lights power button of the internal unit identified by its address (two digits).

Address of the internal unit from which the lights are controlled. 0-99 SPE=7 M=3
A=1-9, PL=1-9
8.1 Addressing
You can manage a single amplifier (point-to-point control), some amplifiers (room
control) and all the amplifiers in the system (general control).

SPE=8
Sound point 0-9 PL=0-9
Room Room 0-9 A=AMB
PF=0-9
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
133
Special control
067553 L4651M2 573987
H4651M2 AM581M2 067242
Follow Me mode

Switch back on from the last source YES YES M=0
NO Definition of the source 1-4 M=1-4 1)
NOTE 1): indicates the sound source to be activated before switching on the amplifier.
For example:
- if A=1, PL/PF = 1 and M=3 the command will control the amplifier with address A=1
and PF=1 and activate source number 3.
The buttons on the special control perform the following functions:
1) Briefly pressing T1 sends out the following sequence: T1 ON T2

- sources ON, source 1 is turned on only if M=0;
- amplifier ON
2) Pressing and holding down T1:

- for point-to-point commands if the amplifier is already on only
the volume (VOL+) is controlled; if the amplifier is switched off T3 OFF T4
the switch-on sequence is sent first;
- for Room, Group and General controls only the
volume is controlled.
3) Pressing and holding down T3 controls the volume (VOL-).

Briefly pressing it sends the OFF command to the amplifier.
4) Pressing button T2 changes the source.
5) Button T4 is the control for the active source
MQ00285-c-EN 09/06/2014
134
8 key multifunction control 0 675 92 H4652
BUS SCS LN4652

Flush mounted multifunction control, with 8 backlit keys in the centre section, where
the icons indicating the functions allocated to the keys can be found.
The device can be configured in two different ways:
the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this last type of configuration
has the advantage of offering many more options when compared with the physical.
configuration. 1 1
Irrespective of the mode implemented, an A/PL address must always be assigned to
the control.
In can be programmed in 4 operating modes:
- The self-learning mode (cyclical or non cyclical) gives the possibility of associating
to each key the majority of the typical controls of the automation, sound, and video
door entry (staircase lights, door lock, call to the floor, door lock and camera cycling) 2
systems, in addition to the auxiliary controls.
- The scenario mode gives the possibility of recalling, programming and deleting 8
scenarios of a scenario module. Rear view
- The swivelling mode gives the possibility of driving 4 light points of shutters in
succession (room or group).
- CEN mode gives the possibility of using the control together with scenario
programmer MH200N or MH201.
5
3
Related items
4
3541 - 0 675 95 A5 sheets with symbol customisations, BLACK
3542 - 0 675 96 A5 sheets with symbol customisations, WHITE

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1. Kyes
Absorption: with LEDs Off: 5 mA 2. Customisable labels
with LEDs On at 100%: 20 mA
3. Clamps for connection to the SCS BUS
5. Programming pushbutton for self-learning and scenario modes

EN 60669-2-1
EN 50090-2-2
EN 50090-2-3
EN 50428
Dimensional data
MM00778-a-EN 16/09/2013
135
BUS SCS LN4652
Physical configuration 3) Scenario module M = 1 – 2

This operating mode can only be used if the system includes a scenario module F420;
the matching is achieved by assigning to both the items the same address, identified
A by A=0-9 and PL=1-9. The user can create, cancel, or modify the scenarios found in the
PL scenario module, and can recall them using the keys.
The procedure gives the possibility of saving up to 16 scenarios using two devices.
M
LED The following table shows the correspondence between the number of the scenario
A room saved in the scenario module, and the keys of the control in the possible configurations:
PL light point
M mode (see the dedicated section)
LED backlight setting
(see the dedicated section) Key 1 Key 2
Configurator A Key 3 Key 4

room address
Key 5 Key 6
Configurator PL
light point address
Key 7 Key 8
Configurator M
1) Self-learning mode M=0
This mode of operation gives the possibility of associating an individual control to any Key number M=1 M=2
key of the device. It is possible to create, delete or modify each control. The device Key 1 Scenario 1 Scenario 9
may be configured using any A/PL address already present in the system, or a unique Key 2 Scenario 2 Scenario 10
address not used by other devices. Key 3 Scenario 3 Scenario 11
Programming the keys Key 4 Scenario 4 Scenario 12
The procedure to associate each key to a different control is as follows: Key 5 Scenario 5 Scenario 13
1) Press and release the programming key on the back of the device; the backlighting Key 6 Scenario 6 Scenario 14
LEDs will flash slowly: Key 7 Scenario 7 Scenario 15
2) Press the key to program within 20 seconds: the LEDs start flashing much quicker, Key 8 Scenario 8 Scenario 16
indicating the activation of the programming mode;
3) Set the control to associate to the key using the controls and/or the corresponding Programming a scenario with the F420 module
actuator; the LEDs will start flashing slowly; For the programming of the scenario, the procedure is as follows:
4) At this point it is possible to repeat points 2 and 3 for all the keys, including those 1) The F420 scenario module must be configured with self-learning enabled (it is
that have already been associated, to change their association association; necessary to press the self-learning key so that the corresponding LED turns green; if
5) Quickly press the programming pushbutton, or wait 20 seconds to exit the the LED is red, self-learning is disabled);
programming procedure. 2) Press and release the programming key on the back of the multifunction control; the
Cancelling the programming of the keys LEDS start flashing slowly (1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF);
1) Press and release the programming key; the backlight LEDs will flash slowly: 3) Within 20 seconds press the key corresponding to the scenario to program on the
2) Within 20 seconds press and hold down for 4 seconds the key to cancel; from now multifunction control; its LEDs start flashing quickly, indicating the activation of the
on the key cancelled will no longer activate any control until programmed again; programming mode;
3) The LEDs come on at full power for 4 seconds, after which it will be possible to 4) Set the scenario, using the controls and/or actuators of the system;
repeat point 2 to cancel the programming of other keys; 5) Press the programming key of the multifunction control again to exit programming
4) Press and quickly release the programming pushbutton, or wait 20 seconds to exit and complete the procedure: the LEDs start flashing slowly again; it is now possible to
the programming procedure.
repeat points 2, 3, and 4 for all the scenarios; the same procedure must also be used to
NOTE: To delete the programming of all the keys at the same time, press and quickly
release the programming key; the LEDs start flashing slowly; press and hold down change the scenarios already set;
again for 10 seconds the pushbutton on the back: the LEDs come on for approximately 6) Press and quickly release the self-learning pushbutton on the F420 module, or wait
4 seconds, confirming the cancellation of all programming. 20 seconds to complete the procedure (red LED on).
F420
2) Non-cyclical self-learning mode M=6
This mode is a variation of the self-learning mode (M=0), where, however, the keys
never operate cyclically. Therefore, if for example the ON of an actuator or dimmer
is acquired, the pair of keys is automatically configured to switch on, or increase the
intensity level, for the left key, and switch off, or decrease the intensity level, for the ART.F420
right key. If, on the other hand, a single function is learnt (e.g. recalling of a scenario),
the other key of the pair remains without function, or retains the previous function. The
DEL
device may be configured using any A/PL address already present in the system, or a programming block/ scenario cancellation
unique address not used by other devices. release key key
scenario/learning
reset LED
programming status LED
MM00778-a-EN 16/09/2013
136
BUS SCS LN4652
Deleting a scenario LED configurator

To delete the scenario, the procedure is as follows: Setting the backlight intensity
1) The F420 scenario module must be in configuration mode with self-learning enabled; The configurator in the LED housing gives the possibility of setting the backlight at the
2) Press and release the programming key of the multifunction control; the LEDS start desired level; see table:
flashing slowly (1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF);
3) Within 20 seconds press and hold down for 4 seconds the key of the scenario to be LED configurator Brightness level
cancelled on the multifunction control;
0 default setting = 30%
4) The LEDs flash quickly for 4 seconds, after which it will be possible to repeat point 2 to
delete the other programming. 1 level 10 %
5) Press and quickly release the programming pushbutton on the back of the control, or 2 level 15 %
wait 20 seconds to exit the deleting procedure.
3 level 20 %
NOTE: to reset the whole memory, it will be necessary to directly act on the
scenario module: press “DEL” for ten seconds, after enabling the scenario module for 4 level 25 %
programming. 5 level 30 %
6 level 40 %
4) Swivelling modes M=0/I; ↑↓; ↑↓M 7 level 50 %
These modes ensure quick installation without the need for further learning, or
scenario modules, enabling the control of 4 light points or shutters with consecutive 8 level 60 %
addresses. 9 level 80 %
The A PL address is the light point or shutter controlled by the first pair of keys (the OFF level OFF
keys are paired horizontally), the subsequent pairs controls the subsequent light points
or shutters. ON level 100 %
If the Amb or Gr configurators are connected to A, in the same way, the 4 pairs of
keys control consecutive rooms or groups starting from the one indicated by the PL
configurator.
Possible function Value of M configurator Configuration using the software in a typical hotel system
ON/OFF control: On control with the left key, Off control 0/I This is performed using the appropriate MyHOME_Suite application. This mode has
with the right key. the advantage of offering many more options when compared with the physical
For point-to-point controls the key perform the On/Off configuration. The software configuration requires Ethernet connection between the
function with a short pressure and system and the PC, through the IP MH201 scenario module.
the adjustment with an extended pressure: for the other Ethernet connection to the system
controls, only On/Off are performed
Ethernet
Control (UP/DOWN for shutters): up and down control, ↑↓ network
until fully open or closed
Monostable control (UP/DOWN for shutters): up and ↑↓ M HUB Switch

MH201
down control, for the time the key is pressed
1 2 3 4 5 6
MH201
5) Scenario programmer mode, M=CEN DC - In
The matching between a scenario configured in the scenario programmer MH200N or

MH201, and the corresponding controls keys of the multifunction control, is completed Ethernet
during the programming of the scenario itself using the dedicated software. network
Always assign to the control a unique A/PL address on the system (it must not be BUS-SCS
used by any other device installed on the BUS); the A=0, PL=0 configuration is not
acceptable. This operating mode can only be used if the system includes a scenario
programmer (MH200 or MH201).
MM00778-a-EN 16/09/2013
137
Basic control for
2 independent loads 067552 H4652/2
L4652/2 AM5832/2
Description
1
Two-module flush-mounted control equipped with four buttons and a two-colour LED.
The LEDs can be controlled/switched off with the button on the control. The device can
drive a single actuator for single or double loads or two actuators for single loads or for
independent double loads. 2
The device can be installed in a My Home system and use the physical or virtual con-
figuration, or as a component of the Lighting Management system and use the specific
configuration types (Plug&go, Push&Learn, Project&Download).
3
5
Technical data
Operating power supply with BUS SCS: 18 – 27 Vdc 4
Current draw at maximum LED brightness: 6 mA for H4652/2
8.5 mA for L4652/2,
AM5832/2 and 067552
Dimensions 6
Overall size: 2 flush-mounted modules
A1
PL1
M1
A2
PL2
M2
Configuring My Home
The device can be configured in two ways:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. 7
- Configuration via the MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from www.
homesystems-legrandgroup.com: this mode has the advantage of offering many Legend
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in this 1. LED
sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the MYHOME_Suite software 2. Top buttons
package. 3. Bottom buttons
4. LED
5. LED control/off button
List of Functions 6. Configurator seat (note that this must only be used in My Home systems with the
The device performs the following functions: physical configuration)
1. LIGHT SWITCH 7. BUS
LED Adjustment
30%
DEFAULT
60% 0%
PUSH t > 2 s 100%
MQ00286-d-EN 20/01/2014
138
Basic control for 2 independent loads
067552 H4652/2
L4652/2 AM5832/2
Function selection
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing
Point-to-point Room 0-10 A1, A2=1-9
Room 0-10 A1, A2=AMB, PL1, PL2=1-9
Group 1-255 A1, A2=GR, PL1, PL2=1-9
General General A1, A2=GEN
1.2 Mode

Cyclic. M1, M2=0
ON M1, M2=ON
OFF M1, M2=OFF
Button M1, M2=PUL
Timed ON 0.5sec M=8
30sec M=7
1min M=1
2min M=2
3min M=3
4min M=4
5min M=5

Parameter / setting
ON/OFF and cyclic ADJUSTMENT. M1, M2=0
ON/OFF when pressing briefly and adjustment when holding down.
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button and DIMMER when held down M1, M2=0/1
For the “ON/OFF with adjustment” function, “Timed ON” with parameter 2sec, 10min, dimmer with no adjustment” use virtual configuration via MYHOME_Suite
15min, “Blinking”, “Cyclic with custom point-to-point adjustment”, “ON/OFF with
custom point-to-point adjustment”, “Cyclic with custom adjustment” and “Custom cyclic
With the virtual configuration, for the room, group or general controls, you can set a
lighting point address for the return of the load status
MQ00286-d-EN 20/01/2014
139
Basic control for 2 independent loads
067552 H4652/2
L4652/2 AM5832/2
2.1 Addressing
Point-to-point Room 0-10 A1, A2=1-9
Room 0-10 A1, A2=AMB, PL1, PL2=1-9
Group 1-255 A1, A2=GR, PL1, PL2=1-9
General general A1, A2=GEN
Note: With the virtual configuration, for the room, group or general controls, you can set a
lighting point address for the return of the load status
2.2 Mode

Parameter / setting
Bistable control M1, M2=
Monostable control M1, M2=M
Bistable control and lath control M1, M2=6
3.1 Addressing

Addressing type
Room 0-10 1-9
Lighting point 0-15 1-9
3.2 Mode T2
T1
Top button 0-31 M1, M2=CEN T4
Bottom button 0-31 M1, M2=CEN T3
Note: If used only for CEN controls (M1=M2=CEN), do not configure A2, PL2.
T1-T4= scenario buttons 1-4
To configure address 1 - 2047 of the scenario and number 0 - 31 use MYHOME_Suite

MQ00286-d-EN 20/01/2014
140
Basic control for
L4652/2 AM5832/2
Lighting Management Configuration
If the device is installed in a Lighting Management system it can be configured in the

following ways:
- Plug&go (see dedicated technical guide)
- Push&Learn
- Project&Download, with the Virtual Configurator software you can perform all the
functions listed below:
- dual light control
- dual CEN control
- dual CEN PLUS control
- dual AUX control
MQ00286-d-EN 20/01/2014
141
Basic control for
AM5832/3 L4652/3
Description
Three module flush mounted control, with six pushbuttons and LEDs, which signal the 1
status of the control.
List of Functions

1. LIGHT SWITCH
2. AUTOMATION CONTROL 2
See the following pages for the configuration procedures. 3
Technical data
Current draw: 9 mA A1
PL1
A2
PL2
A3
4
PL3
M
Dimensions
5
Configuring My Home
more options than the physical configuration. Legend
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in 1. Top buttons
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the
2. Bottom buttons
3. LED
5. BUS
MQ00290-c-EN 01/08/2013
142
Basic control for
AM5832/3 L4652/3
Function selection
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing

Point-to-point Room 0-10 A1, A2, A3=1-9
Lighting point 0-15 PL1, PL2, PL3=1-9
Room 0-10 A1, A2, A3=AMB, PL1, PL2, PL3=1-9
Group 1-255 A1, A2, A3=GR, PL1, PL2, PL3=1-9
General General A1, A2, A3=GEN
1.2 Mode

Cyclic. M=0 See table for functions/button covers
For custom timed ON with period 0 to 255 hours use MYHOME_Suite virtual configu-
ration.

Parameter / setting
ON/OFF and cyclic ADJUSTMENT. See table for functions/button covers
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button and DIMMER when held down See table for functions/button covers
To configure the mode as Cyclic, Timed ON, Cyclic Dimmer, ON/OFF, with adjustment, OFF, keys on the front of the control. From left to right, the three buttons correspond to control
ON and PUL, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. You can also set a reference ad- 1 (A1, PL1), control 2 (A2, PL2), and control 3 (A3, PL3). See table at end of sheet.
dress for the load status for a room or group control.
For the physical configuration, the device consists of three independent controls and on
the back of the device there are three separate A and PL positions, which relate to the
2.1 Addressing

Point-to-point Room 0-10 A1, A2, A3=1-9
Lighting point 0-15 PL1, PL2, PL3=1-9
Room 0-10 A1, A2, A3=AMB, PL1, PL2, PL3=1-9
Group 1-255 A1, A2, A3=GR, PL1, PL2, PL3=1-9
General general A1, A2, A3=GEN
With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a
light point address for the return of the load status
MQ00290-c-EN 01/08/2013
143
Basic control for
AM5832/3 L4652/3
2.2 Mode

Parameter / setting
Bistable control M=3 and see table for function/button cover at end of sheet
Monostable control M=6 and see table for function/button cover at end of sheet
Note: For the physical configuration, the device consists of three independent controls and on the of the control. From left to right, the three buttons correspond to control 1 (A1, PL1), control 2 (A2,
back of the device there are three separate A and PL positions, which relate to the keys on the front PL2), and control 3 (A3, PL3). See table at end of sheet.
3.1 Addressing

Addressing type
Room 0-10 A=1-9 (do not configure A2, A3)
Lighting point 0-15 PL=1-9 (do not configure PL2, PL3)
T2
3.2 Mode T3
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical configuration T1

Top button 0-31 M=CEN
T6
Bottom button 0-31 M=CEN
T4
T1-6= scenario buttons 1-6
T5
To configure address 1 - 2047 of the scenario and of the number of 0 - 31 use MYHOME_
Suite virtual configuration
MQ00290-c-EN 01/08/2013
144
Basic control for
AM5832/3 L4652/3
Table for function/ button cover to use
Value of configurator in position M Button covers used/function Value of configurator in position M Button covers used/function
no configurator Cyclic ON-OFF 1 Cyclic ON-OFF up-down

Note: If the control is assigned to a dimmer actuator with operating modes cyclical 4 monostable up-
Cyclic ON-OFF
ON-OFF, ON (upper key) and OFF (lower key) the brightness can also be adjusted. down
7 ON (top button)
Cyclic ON-OFF OFF (bottom
button)
Value of configurator in position M Button covers used/function
Value of configurator in position M Button covers used/function
3 up-down
6 2 Cyclic ON-OFF up-down
monostable up-down
ON (top button) 5 monostable up-
9 Cyclic ON-OFF
OFF (bottom button) down
CEN enabling the T1-T2-T3 (upper) and T4- 8 ON (top button)
T5-T6 (lower) keys to manage scenarios of Cyclic ON-OFF OFF (bottom
the programmer MH200N.* button)
Note (*): Do not configure positions A2, PL2 and A3, PL3.
MQ00290-c-EN 01/08/2013
145
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3
Description
Touch control with two or three modules with which you can send commands for
automation, sound system, and manage scenarios stored in the scenario module. 1
Technical data
Operating temperature: 5 – 35°C
Size: 2 flush-mounted modules for HC/HS4653/2
Size: 3 flush-mounted modules for HC/HS4653/3
Configuration

- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. Legend
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from 1. Luminous indicator
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many 2. Hot spot
A room
A
PL/PF PL/PF lighting point / sound point
M
M2 M mode
SPE
INT M2 mode 2
SPE special
INT LED brightness adjustment
List of Functions

1. LIGHT SWITCH
3. DEVICE LOCKING/UNLOCKING
6. PLUS LIGHT MANAGEMENT SCENARIO ACTIVATION
8. VIDEO DOOR ENTRY FUNCTIONS
9. SOUND SYSTEM CONTROL
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
146
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3
Function selection
1. Light switch
1.1 Addressing
Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR
With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a You can also configure the "Installation level" and the "Destination level".
light point address for the return of the load status
1.2 Mode

Cyclic (point-to-point) SPE=0, M=0
ON SPE=0, M=ON
OFF SPE=0, M=OFF
Cyclic SPE=1, M=7
Button SPE=0, M=PUL
2sec SPE=8, M=1
30sec SPE=0, M=7
1min SPE=0, M=1
2min SPE=0, M=2
3min SPE=0, M=3
4min SPE=0, M=4
5min SPE=0, M=5
10min SPE=7, M=2
15min SPE=0, M=6
For the timed ON control with period 0-255 hours, 0-59 minutes and 0-59 seconds use
MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
147
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3

Parameter / setting
ON/OFF and cyclic ADJUSTMENT. SPE=0, M=O
ON and point-to-point dimmer SPE=0, M=ON
OFF and point-to-point dimmer SPE=0, M=OFF
For the functions of "Cyclic with custom point-to-point adjustment", "Cyclic with custom with custom adjustment", "ON and dimmer" and "OFF and dimmer" use MYHOME_Suite
adjustment", "Cyclic dimmer without adjustment", "Custom dimmer ON without adjust- virtual configuration
ment", "Custom dimmer OFF without adjustment", "ON with custom adjustment", "OFF
1.2.3 Blink command


Parameter / setting
Blink 4s SPE=2, M=7
For blinking with a period of from 5.5 to 8 seconds, use MYHOME_Suite virtual config-
uration
To configure use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. - DOWN bistable control

The possible single functions are: - UP monostable control
- UP bistable control - DOWN monostable control
To configure use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
148
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3
4.1 Addressing

Lighting point (of the scenario module) 0-15 PL=0-9
4.2 Mode

Scenario modification and activation 1-16 SPE=61), M,M2=1-16
To configure the "Installation level" and the "Destination level" and for Button activation The scenario number can be selected using the configurators 1 - 9 in positions M and M2,
delays use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration as in the following table. In positions A and PL you need to indicate the address of the
Scenario Module to be controlled.
Note 1): By setting configurator 6 in position SPE, the touch control allows you to recall, program
and delete any one of the 16 scenarios contained in a Scenario Module F420. M M2 Scenario number
0 1 1
0 2 2
... ... ...
1 6 16
Programming a scenario Deleting a scenario

1) Programming the Scenario Module requires enabling programming; 1) The Scenario Module must be enabled for programming;
2) Move your hand toward the area of t he control sensors (the LEDs will come on at full 2) Move your hand toward the area of the control sensors (the LEDs will come on at full
brightness) and hold your hand in place, after 3 seconds the LEDs will lower their brightness) and hold your hand in place, after 3 seconds the LEDs will lower their
brightness level; now move your hand away from the control; brightness level; keep you hand in position for approximately another 5 seconds;
3) The LEDs will start flashing at a very low frequency, indicating activation of the 3) The LEDs will start flashing at a high frequency, indicating deletion of the scenario,
programming mode; and will then return to the lower brightness level.
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or the corresponding actuators;
5) Briefly move your hand toward the control to exit programming mode, the LEDs will NOTE: To delete all the scenarios of the Scenario Module use the reset button directly on
stop blinking and return to the lower brightness level. the Scenario Module.
Enabling the device for sending a command to the scenario programmer MH200N. addresses assigned to the actuators. The control can be connected at any point in the
The address of the assigned command in positions A and PL must be different to the system (local bus or riser).
5.1 Addressing

Addressing type Room 0-10 1-9
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
149
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3
5.3 Mode

Button 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN Button No.1
To configure in "only press/release" and "press/hold/release" mode use MYHOME_Suite

See MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
8.1.1 Addressing
Address of the external unit 0-95 A=1-9 PL=1-9 1)
To configure the "External unit address" and the "Riser", "Building" and "Backbone" levels Note 1): Define the address (two digits) of the external unit whose lock is to be controlled.
use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
Destination level
Same command level SPE=9 M=1
To set the Riser or Backbone destination level use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
8.2 Control for stair lighting
8.2.1 Addressing
The device takes on the function of the stair lights power button of the internal unit identified by its address A and PL (two digits).

Address of the internal unit from which the lights are controlled. 0-99 SPE=9 M=3
A=1-9, PL=1-9
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
150
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3
8.3 Floor call control
8.3.1 Addressing
Define the address (two digits) of the internal unit to call by using the control device.

Address of the internal unit 0-99 A=1-9 PL=1-9
Type of call:

Function
Point-to-point SPE=9 M=2
Note: To configure the "General" call use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
9.1 Addressing
You can manage a single amplifier (point-to-point control), some amplifiers (room control) or all the amplifiers in the system (general control).

Sound point 0-9 PF=0-9
Room Room 0-9 A=AMB
PF=0-9
Follow Me mode

Switch back on from the last source YES YES SPE=8 M=0
NO Definition of the source 1-4 SPE=8 M=1-4 1)
Note: For the “ON/volume +”, “OFF/volume -”, Change track”, Click source”, “Cyclic ON/OFF” NOTE 1): indicates the sound source to be activated before switching on the amplifier.
function, to switch back on from the last source and to select sources 1-9 use MYHOME_Suite virtual
configuration
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
151
Touch control
HD4653M2 HC4653/2 HS4653/2
HD4653M3 HC4653/3 HS4653/3
Selecting LED brightness (INT configurator)

At rest and with the load off the LEDs are illuminated at 30%, 0 - 10 INT = -
with the load on (only for point-to-point light controls) at
60%
At rest and with the load off the LEDs are illuminated at 45%, 0 - 10 INT = 1
with the load on (only for point-to-point light controls) at
70%
At rest and with the load off the LEDs are off, with the load 0 - 10 INT = OFF
on (only for point-to-point light controls) at 30%
Note: There could be a difference in brightness and colour from one device to another (even in
the same production batch) due to the construction technology.
MQ00065-d-EN 05/06/2014
152
IR Receiver
573900 067216 HC4654 HS4654 L4654N
573901 HD4654 N4654N NT4654N AM5834
Description
The receiver allows you to add or replace the manual control with the remote control via
the remote controls 3527N and 3529.
The buttons on the remote control can be paired with: commands intended for actuators
with 1 relay for single loads, commands for actuators with 2 relays for double loads
(rolling shutter motor, etc.), scenario controls, and sound system and video door 1
entry controls. On the front of the device, in addition to the IR receiving lens, there is
a programming button and a LED to indicate reception of the IR signal sent from the
remote control and the programming phase. 8 2
Technical data Front view

Current draw: 8.5 mA
7 A
Operating temperature: 5 – 35°C PL1/PF1
PL2/PF2
PL3/PF3
3
PL4/PF4
6 M
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: 5 4
Rear view
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com.
Depending on the configuration of the positions A, PL1, PL2, PL3, PL4 and M it is possible
to set the IR receiver for 5 different operating modes.
Legend
1. Receiving lens
2. Programming/reset button
3. Channel selection
4. BUS
5. Switch to enable programming
6. Operating modes
7. Control destination room number
8. LED
Mode M Possible functions

A - remote control 1–4 repeat 4 generic controls (On/Off, Up/Down) with 4 buttons on the remote control. The required commands are saved by the receiver
during installation by inserting the configurators in positions A, PL1 - PL4 and M. Changing the preset functions requires reconfiguring
the IR receiver.
B - advanced scenarios CEN activate scenarios managed by the MH200N scenario programmer.
C - self-learning remote none repeat generic controls (On/Off, Up/Down) with the buttons on the remote control. In this case the commands are saved by the
receiver with a self-learning procedure. The customer can at any time change the order and the saved commands to be called via the
remote control.
D - scenario module control 6 control, via the remote control, up to 16 scenarios saved in the scenario module F420.
E - sound system 9 control, via the remote control, the amplifier you want to control.
MQ00071-d-EN 05/06/2014
153
IR Receiver
573900 067216 HC4654 HS4654 L4654N
573901 HD4654 N4654N NT4654N AM5834
1) Mode “A” (remote control) M = 1 – 4

This mode allows you to pair the remote control buttons with generic controls (ON/ - commands intended for actuators for single and double loads, belonging to the
OFF, UP/DOWN) intended for single or double loads. The correspondence between the room defined by the configurator 1 – 9 in position A. In this case, the operating
remote control buttons and the controlled loads is determined during installation by the modes are defined by the configurators marked with the graphics of the function
configuration of positions A and PL1 - PL4 of the IR receiver, as shown in the table below. performed, set in positions PL1 – PL4.
The buttons on the remote control can be paired with:
- point-to-point controls, ie for single or double loads (rolling shutter motor) whose
address is specified by the configurator 1 – 9 in positions PL1 – PL4. The different
operating modes are determined by pairing the configurators with the respective PL
positions.
Function Type of control Position A Position PL1/PF1 Position PL2/PF2 Position PL3/PF3 Position PL4/PF4
Cyclical ON/OFF when lighting point in the room 1 – 9 1–9 1–9 1–9 1–9
pressing briefly + indicated in A
adjustment
(dimmer)
Cyclical ON/OFF control for 1–9 AMB AMB AMB AMB
Room 2)
up-down lighting point in the room 1 – 9 1–9 1–9
rolling shutters 1) indicated in A 1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
1–9 1–9
up-down rolling control for 1–9 ↑↓ M ↑↓ M
shutters monostable1) Room 2) ↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
↑↓ M ↑↓ M
up-down rolling control for 1–9 ↑↓ ↑↓
shutters until limit Room 2) ↑↓ ↑↓
stop1)
↑↓ ↑↓
↑↓ ↑↓
↑↓ ↑↓
↑↓ ↑↓
control for ON control for 1–9 ON ON ON ON
Room 2)
control for OFF control for 1–9 OFF OFF OFF OFF
Room 2)
1) The two PL positions must have the same configurator. The "Up" control is paired 2) The control is intended for the devices belonging to the room
with the first PL position and the "Down" command with the second PL position. indicated in A.
Example 1: If positions PL2 and PL3 on the receiver have configurator 7, the remote Example 2: If positions PL2 and PL3 on the receiver have configurator ↑↓ and position
control operates the double actuator No. 7 of the room indicated in A, raising the rolling A has configurator 2, the remote control operates all the actuators in room 2, raising the
shutters with button 2 and lowering them with button 3. rolling shutters with button 2 and lowering them with button 3.
MQ00071-d-EN 05/06/2014
154
IR Receiver
573900 067216 HC4654 HS4654 L4654N
573901 HD4654 N4654N NT4654N AM5834
In this room it is possible to install up to 4 IR receivers, which enables managing up to Configurator in M Remote control channel
a maximum of 16 separate commands. The correspondence between the channels of a
remote control and the respective IR receiver is established by configuring position M 1 CH1 to CH4
of the IR receiver. 2 CH5 to CH8
3 CH9 to CH12
4 CH13 to CH16
2) Mode “B” (advanced scenarios) M=CEN

In this mode, the remote control IR 3529 is used as a "scenario control" to activate one
or more advanced scenarios stored in the Scenario Programmer MH200N. The IR receiver
must also be configured in positions A and PL with the numeric configurators to define
the respective address in the system. Pairing one or more buttons on the remote control
(up to 6) with the scenarios created and stored in the Scenario Programmer MH200N is
done when creating the scenario with the MyHOME_Suite software package.
3) Mode “C” (self-learning remote) M=0

This mode allows you to pair a single command with any button on the remote control. To clear the programming of one of the remote control channels, the procedure is as
With a single receiver you can pair up to 16 commands with a remote control. Configure follows:
the receiver with address A=0 and PL = 1 – 9 that cannot be used by actuators. 1) Press the programming button for at least 8 seconds: after 3 seconds, the LED will
come on with a steady light; after another 5 seconds it will turn off; release the
Commands that the receiver can learn: button within 4 seconds: the LED will come on steady;
- Actuator ON/OFF (cyclical ON/OFF operation for briefly pressing and adjustment for 2) Within 20 seconds, press the remote control button for the channel you want to
holding down) clear: the LED will start flashing quickly for approximately 4 seconds, confirming
- Timed ON deletion;
- Flashing 3) From this moment onward, the cleared button will no longer activate any command
- Rolling shutters UP and DOWN (up-down until the limit stop) until it is reprogrammed. To clear the programming of all the remote control
- Actuator Lock/Unlock channels at the same time, press the programming button for approximately 12
- Lights auxiliary ON/OFF (cyclical ON/OFF operation) seconds: after 3 seconds, the LED will come on with a steady light; after another 5
- Rolling shutters auxiliary UP/DOWN (up-down until the limit stop) seconds it will go out; after another 4 seconds it will flash quickly for approximately
- Video door entry system (lock and stair lights) 4 seconds, confirming deletion of all programming.
- Sound system (managing the amplifier to be controlled)
NOTE: With the switch in the "padlock closed" position, programming and clearing the
To pair each remote control channel with a different command, the procedure is as IR receiver is disabled.
follows:
1) Press the programming button on the receiver for 3 seconds: the LED will come on
with a steady light;
2) Within 20 seconds, press the remote control button for the channel you want to
program: the LED will start flashing, indicating activation of the programming
mode;
3) Set the command you want to assign to the remote control button, using the
controls and/or the corresponding actuator: the LED will come on with a steady
light;
4) You can now repeat steps 2 and 3 for all the buttons, including any button that you
have already assigned in case you want to change it;
5) Press the button to exit the programming mode: the LED will go out;
MQ00071-d-EN 05/06/2014
155
IR Receiver
573900 067216 HC4654 HS4654 L4654N
573901 HD4654 N4654N NT4654N AM5834
4) Mode "D" (scenario module control) M=6 To cancel a scenario, the procedure is as follows:
This mode enables creating, deleting or modifying the scenarios contained in the 1) Press the programming button on the receiver for 8 seconds: after 3 seconds, the LED
scenario module F420 and calling them up using the remote control. The procedure will come on with a steady light; after another 5 seconds it will turn off; release the
allows saving up to 16 scenarios, using all 16 channels of the remote control. button within 4 seconds: the LED will come on steady;
2) Within 20 seconds, press the remote control button for the scenario you want to
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the cancel; when the scenario module sends confirmation of the cancellation, the LED
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the programming status LED is will blink quickly for approximately 2 seconds and then go out;
green (press the lock/unlock button for at least 0.5 seconds) and the switch on the back 3) Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all the scenarios you want to cancel.
of the IR receiver must be in the "padlock open" position. The procedure is as follows:
1) Press the programming button on the receiver for 3 seconds: the LED will come on To reset the entire memory you must act directly on the scenario module. If you want to
with a steady light; release the button; disable the ability to program or cancel scenarios with the IR receiver, set the switch on
2) Within 20 seconds, press the remote control button for the scenario you want to the back in the "padlock closed" position.
program: the LED will start flashing, indicating activation of the programming
mode; NOTE: Configure the device with address A=0 and PL=1 – 9 that cannot be used by
3) Set the scenario using the controls and/or the corresponding actuators; actuators. For example, if the scenario module is configured with A=0 and PL=3, the IR
4) Press the button to exit the programming mode: the LED will go out; receiver must be set to A=0; PL=3 and M=6.
5) Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all the scenarios you want to program.
5) Mode “E” (sound system) M=9 Buttons A-B-C-D are paired with the remote control buttons as shown in the table:
In the sound system, the IR receiver can manage up to 4 amplifiers. The command is Button A Button B Button C Button D
always in “follow me (*)” mode and the functions that can be performed are:
- Button A: pressing briefly runs the “On” command, whereas holding it down PF1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4
adjusts the volume up PF2 Ch 5 Ch 6 Ch 7 Ch 8
- Button B: pressing briefly runs the “Off” command, whereas holding it down PF3 Ch 9 Ch 10 Ch 11 Ch 12
adjusts the volume down
- Button C: cycles through the saved radio stations or changes CD track PF4 Ch 13 Ch 14 Ch 15 Ch 16
- Button D: cycles through the sources
Where:
- PF1 = 0 – 9 address of the 1st amplifier to control
- PF2 = 0 – 9 address of the 2nd amplifier to control
- PF3 = 0 – 9 address of the 3rd amplifier to control
- PF4 = 0 – 9 address of the 4th amplifier to control
- A = 1 – 9 destination room of the control
NOTE (*): Follow Me mode allows you to have the same music in another room after
turning off the amplifier in the room you previously occupied and switching on the one
in the room where you are now.
MQ00071-d-EN 05/06/2014
156
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
Description front view Button 1 Button 3 Button 5 Button 7

The touch control is a device in which conventional buttons are replaced by capacitive
sensors. The device can then carry out some typical functions of a SCS control when you
simply touch its surface. It is available in flush-mounted versions with 3 or 4 modules,
with respectively 6 and 8 buttons. Each zone corresponding to a button is marked in
the centre by a light-blue LED. When the user brings a finger near to it, the brightness
increases significantly and remains bright until the finger is moved away. You can
change the level of brightness of the LEDs with the adjustment button. The control can
operate in four different modes: self-learning, scenarios, rocker, CEN.
- The self-learning mode (cyclic or non-cyclic) allows you to pair each button with
most of the typical controls of automation, sound and video door entry systems (stair
lights, door openers, floor calls, lock and camera cycling), as well as the auxiliary
controls. Available only with the physical configuration. With MYHOME_Suite virtual
Button 2 Button 4 Button 6 Button 8
configuration you can associate each button with a specific function.
- Scenario mode: allows you to recall, program and delete 6 or 8 scenarios of a scenario
rear view 1
module.
- Rocker mode: enables piloting 3 or 4 consecutive lighting points or roller shutters (or
rooms or groups).
- Scenario programmer mode: allows you to use the control with the scenario
programmer MH200N.
To enable cleaning the device you can temporarily disable the sensitive areas by pressing 2
two end zones diagonally. The LEDs will start flashing in sequence and normal operation
will be returned after 10 seconds have elapsed without any further pressing.
3
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Legend
Maximum current draw HD/HC/HS4657M3: 20 mA
Maximum current draw HD/HC/HS4657M4: 25 mA 1. Button for programming and setting LED brightness
Maximum current draw 573912/13: 35 mA 2. Configurator socket
Operating temperature: 0–40°C 3. BUS
Configuration
List of Functions
A room
PL lighting point The device performs the following functions:
M mode 1. LIGHT SWITCH
SET LED display mode 3. DEVICE LOCKING/UNLOCKING
The device can be configured in two ways: 5. PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. 6. PLUS PROGRAMMED SCENARIO ACTIVATION
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from 7. VIDEO DOOR ENTRY FUNCTIONS
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many 8. SOUND SYSTEM CONTROL
MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
157
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
Function selection
1. Self-learning mode
This mode is available only with the physical configuration. With MYHOME_Suite virtual
configuration you need to associate each button with the specific function. For both modes,
you will have to configure the addresses of the device.
1.1 Addressing

Room 0-10 A=AMB
Group 1-255 A=GR


To configure the installation level use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. Note: With the virtual configuration, for the room, group and general controls, you can set a light
1.2 Configuration

Associating the buttons on the touch control with the single
- 1) M=0
commands performed by the control devices and/or actuators
Cyclic self-learning:
This mode is a variant of the self-learning mode (M=0), in
which, however, the buttons never work cyclically. So if, for
example, ON is learned for an actuator or dimmer, the pair of
buttons is automatically configured to turn on or increase the
level of brightness for the top button, turn off or decrease the
level of brightness for the bottom one. Whereas, if a single - 1) M=6
function is learned (e.g. calling up a scenario), the other button
of the pair will remain without any function or keep the function
it had previously. The device can be configured either with any
A/PL address already in the system or with a unique address not
used by other devices.
Note 1): MYHOME_Suite allows you for each button to define all the operating modes for the
functions: light switch, automation control, scenario module control, programmed scenarios, PLUS
Lighting Management scenario, PLUS programmed scenario, sound system and video door entry
functions.
MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
158
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
1.3 Programming the buttons
To associate each button with a different command, the procedure is as follows:

1) Briefly press the button on the back, the LEDs will light up in rotation;
2) Within 20 seconds, touch the button you want to program: the LED will start
flashing, indicating activation of the programming mode;
3) Set the command you want to assign to the button, using the controls and/or the
corresponding actuator, the LEDs will start to rotate;
4) You can now repeat steps 2 and 3 for all the buttons, including any button that you
have already assigned in case you want to change it;
5) Briefly press the programming button or wait 20 seconds to exit programming.
Deleting button programming

2) Within 20 seconds, press the button you want to delete and hold it for 4 seconds;
from this moment onwards the deleted button will no longer activate any command
until it is reprogrammed;
3) The corresponding LED will blink for 4 seconds alternately with the others, after
which you can repeat step 2 to delete other programming;
4) Briefly press the button or wait 20 seconds to exit deletion.
NOTE: To delete the programming for all the buttons simultaneously, briefly press the
button on the back, the LEDs will light up in rotation; press again and hold down the
Note: Use only the screwdriver supplied to operate the P button for programming and LED
button on the back for 10 seconds: the LEDs will blink for approximately 4 seconds, thus brightness adjustment.
confirming deletion of all the programming.
To configure use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
This operating mode is only used if the system has a scenario module F420, the up using the buttons. The procedure allows you to save up to 16 scenarios using two
combination is made by assigning the same address to both items. The user can create, devices with 8 buttons, or three devices with 6 buttons.
delete or modify the scenarios contained in the scenario module and is able to call them
3.1 Addressing

Lighting point (of the scenario module) 0-15 PL=0-9
To configure the "Installation level" and the "Destination level" and for Button activation
delays use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
159
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
3.2 Mode

Modifying and activating a scenario, Scenario button 1-16 M=1-4 1)
Note 1): Match between the number of the scenario stored in the scenario module and the control buttons in the possible configurations:
3-module control (6 scenarios)
Button number M=1 M=4 M=3
Button 1 Scenario 1 Scenario 7 Scenario 13
Button 5 Scenario 5 Scenario 11
4-module control (8 scenarios)

Button number M=1 M=2
Programming a scenario
To program the scenario, the procedure is as follows:
1) The F420 scenario module must be configured with self-learning enabled (you need
to press the self-learning button so that the corresponding LED is green, self-learning
is not enabled if it is red);
2) Briefly press the button on the back, the LEDs for the buttons enabled for the scenario
with programming function will blink 1 sec. ON and 1 sec. OFF;
3) Touch the button corresponding to the scenario to be programmed: the LED will begin
to flash (on receiving the update of the scenario module) indicating activation of the
programming mode; programming button
4) Set the scenario using the controls and/or the corresponding actuators; locking/unlocking deleting scenarios
5) Touch the button to exit programming: the LEDs will start flashing in rotation and you button reset LED
can now repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 for all the scenarios, including any button that you scenarios/learning
have already assigned in case you want to change it; programming
6) Briefly press the button or wait 20 seconds to exit programming. status LED
Deleting a scenario F420

1) The F420 scenario module must be configured with self-learning enabled;
3) Within 20 seconds, press the button corresponding to the scenario that you want to
delete and hold it for 4 seconds;
4) The deleted device button LEDs will blink for 4 seconds, after which you can repeat
step 2 to delete other programming.
5) Briefly press the button or wait 20 seconds to exit deletion.
NOTE: To reset the entire memory you need to act directly on the scenario module:
hold down the "DEL" button for 10 seconds after enabling the scenario module for
programming.
MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
160
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
Enabling buttons for sending a command to the scenario programmer MH200N. addresses assigned to the actuators. The control can be connected at any point in the
The address of the assigned command in positions A and PL must be different to the system (local bus or riser).
4.1 Addressing

Addressing type Room 0-10 1-9
4.2 Mode

Button 1) 0-31 M=CEN
The association between a scenario configured in the programmer MH200N and the relation and 0-31 with MYHOME_Suite) is made when programming the device MH200N.
ted touch control activation buttons (identified with 1-6 or 1-8 with physical configura-
control device, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
To configure the Address for the external unit of the level use MYHOME_Suite virtual
configuration.

To configure the Address for the external unit of the level use MYHOME_Suite virtual
configuration.
7.2 Stair lights switch
7.3 Floor call control

MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
161
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
Selecting LED brightness
With the physical configuration, you can adjust the brightness of the varies every 2 seconds showing the 3 settable levels, as shown in the following
LEDs by holding down (t>2s) the button on the back. The button works drawing. To select the desired level simply release the button. With the virtual
on 3 levels of brightness: from a default value (25%) the brightness configuration you can adjust the brightness of the LEDs on 10 different levels.
40%
DEFAULT
25%
0%
If you have chosen to illuminate the buttons when they are pressed (status return), the
brightness level depends on the setting of the LEDs, as indicated below:

Function Parameter / setting LED brightness level Fade brightness
LED brightness 1-10 25 % 65 %
LED fade 40 % 70 %
0% 20 %
Note: There could be a difference in brightness and colour from one device to another (even in
the same production batch) due to the construction technology.
MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
162
Touch control
573912 HD4657M3 HC4657M3 HS4657M3
573913 HD4657M4 HC4657M4 HS4657M4
Selecting the LED display mode
You can choose:

- whether at rest to keep the LEDs that are not used/configured off or on;
- whether to illuminate the LEDs or not when you press the corresponding button
(status return); to obtain an optimal status return effect it is recommended to set a
low LED brightness level.
- whether or not to give the illuminating buttons a "fade" effect.

Feedback update YES, NO SET=0-7 1)
Note 1): To choose the configurator, see the following table:
Configurator in SET position Behaviour

0 • LED ON even if button not configured
• No status return
• Fade effect on
• Fade effect off
2 • LED ON only if configured (not configured -> LED OFF)
• Fade effect on
• Fade effect off
• Status return on
• Fade effect on
• Fade effect off
• Fade effect on
• Fade effect off
After installing the device wait two minutes for auto-calibration to end.
! During this time, commands may be automatically sent to the system.
MQ00110-f-EN 07/06/2014
163
PIR+US flush-mounted SCS Green Switch
574048 067226 HD/HC/HS4658
574098 AM5658 L/N/NT4658N

This devices features a PIR and US (ultrasound) movement detector, and a brightness 8
sensor for automatic activation of various types of loads following the detection of a
movement, and a brightness level lower than the set level.
The enabling/disabling of the load can also be performed manually using the 7
appropriate front pushbutton and/or using an external BUS control device. 6
It is possible to configure several operating modes; for the detailed descriptions see 1
page 4.
5 2
Standards, Certifications, Marks 3
Directive:
– CEI 64-8
– IEC 60669-2-1 4
– EN 50428
– EU Directive 2002/96/EC: WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Legend
1. PIR sensor
2. LEARN LED
Dimensional data
3. US sensor
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 4. ON-OFF button
A C 5. LEARN button
6. Movement detector sensor (under the lens)
7. Infrared transmitter (under the lens)
8. Brightness sensor
A B C
45 45 51
Technical data
Voltage: 27 V=
Current draw: 17 mA
Connection between sensor and actuator: SCS BUS connector
Sensor type: movement detector (PIR+US) with 180°
detection angle and brightness sensor.
Flush mounted box depth: 40 mm
Weight: 60 g
Penetration of solids and liquids: IP20
Time delay: from 5 sec to 59 min. 59 sec
Brightness: from 20 lux to 1275 lux
Operating temperature: from - 5 °C to + 45 °C
Storage temperature: from - 20 °C to + 70 °C
MQ00473-f-EN 09/06/2014
164
574048 067226 HD/HC/HS4658
574098 AM5658 L/N/NT4658N
Installation
Positioning the sensor
PIR US
1m Position the sensor so

that it is not affected by
the artificial light already
2,5 m
present in the room.
≥ 2,5 m
Settings
Sensor parameters Default value Adjustable parameters Configuration remote control

88230 88235
BMSO4001 BMSO4003
3,5,10,15,20 min −
Time delay 15 mn
30s - 255 h 59 min 59s −
Sensitivity PIR (very high) / US (high) Low, medium, high, very high
20, 100, 300, 500, 1000 lux −
Brightness threshold 300 lux
0 - 1275 lux −
Auto Not active ON/OFF

Operating
mode
Walkthrough ON ON/OFF
Eco Not active ON/OFF
Initial PIR and US PIR and/or US, PIR, US −
Detection
mode
Holding PIR or US PIR and/or US, PIR, US −
Retrigger PIR or US PIR and/or US, PIR, US, OFF −
Alarm Not active ON/OFF −
Calibration − 0 - 99995 lux −

Advanced
mode
Adjustment Not active ON/OFF −
Contribution of light Automatic Automatic - 1275 lux −
Time delay Operating mode:

The period of time after which the load is switched off if no movement is detected. Auto
The time restarts whenever the sensor detects a movement. The load is automatically switched on:
- upon detection of a movement if the level of natural light is insufficient.
Sensitivity The load is automatically switched off:
Adjustment of the sensitivity of the detection technology used. - if no movement is detected at the end of the set time delay + standby time.
- or if the level of natural light is insufficient (adjustment on).
Brightness threshold Each new detection causes automatic switching on if the light is insufficient.
Lighting level below which the sensor activates the load and above which it Walkthrough
switches it off.
MQ00473-f-EN 09/06/2014
165
574048 067226 HD/HC/HS4658
574098 AM5658 L/N/NT4658N
If a movement is detected for a time of less than 20 s, the sensor will decrease Advanced mode:
the set time delay to 3 minutes. If the set delay time set is already less than three Calibration
minutes, it will remain as such. To calibrate the sensor, it is necessary to measure the lighting level present using
a lux meter and send the value to the sensor using a configuration remote control
Eco
(BMSO4001).
The load is switched on manually while switching off is automatic:
Calibration procedure:
- if no movement is detected at the end of the set delay time.
After switching off the load, if any movement is detected within 30 s, the load is Step 1: with only artificial light.
automatically switched back on (retrigger function on). At the end of this time Switch the load on at maximum intensity and close the shutters (if you cannot do
interval, the load must be switched back on manually. this then wait for sunset).
Measure the level of lighting and send it to the sensor via the remote control.
Detection mode Step 2: with only natural light.
Set of technologies used for detection. Turn off the load and open the shutters.
Initial: set of technologies used for the first detection. Adjustment
Holding: set of technologies used after the first detection. This function allows the sensor to switch off the load 10 minutes (plus a safety
threshold to avoid inappropriate switching off) after the lighting level exceeds the
Retrigger: set of technologies used for the Retrigger function.
brightness threshold, even though movement has been detected.
After switching off, any new detection within 30 seconds will cause the load to switch
back on automatically. After 30 seconds, the load must be switched back on manually.
Available only in Eco mode. Contribution of light: amount of supplementary light supplied by switching on the
Alarm: before switching off the load the sensor emits an audible warning signal. load.
Intervals: 1 minute, 30 seconds, and 10 seconds. When the contribution of light parameter is set to "auto" the sensor automatically
calculates the contribution of light.
Modification of the parameters using the configuration remote controls
• BMSO4001 - 088230: advanced configuration remote control

• BMSO4003 -088235: simplified configuration remote control
When the sensor receives an IR command from a configuration remote control, it
beeps to confirm that the modification has been acquired.
For more information on the parameters please refer to the technical info sheet of the
remote control BMSO4001.
Restoring the factory settings:

1st press: Briefly press LEARN, the LED will blink slowly.
2nd press: Press and hold LEARN for 10 seconds until the LED flashes quickly.
Performance
Height
≈6m 3m
(PIR/ (PIR/
1,2 m US) US)
4 5 6 8 m
5 m (PIR/US)
Small movements Large movements
8 m (PIR/US)
MQ00473-f-EN 09/06/2014
166
574048 067226 HD/HC/HS4658
574098 AM5658 L/N/NT4658N
Configuration
2. My Home system
3. Physical configuration
The sensor parameters are defined by 6 configurator sockets and the functions depend on the operating mode:
Local: A = 1 – 9 Sensitivity of the movement sensor: S = 0 – 3
Light point: PL = 1 – 9 Control timer: T = 0 – 9
Mode: M = 0 – 4 Sensitivity of the lights sensor: D = 0 – 5
Warning: the addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist
Available functions Configurator mode

The sensor controls the light unit, the address of which defined in A and PL. When a movement is detected, and if the measured brightness is below
the configured value, the system switches on the specified light unit and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator on
T (automatic mode). The Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector is configured using the configurator on S. For appropriate operation, the sensitivity 0
of the light sensor must be configured using the configurator on D. If a user manually switches off the lights, a control action can be used to disable the
movement detector until a movement is detected, for a period set by T.
In this mode, the sensor only works based on the light conditions, and the movement sensor is disabled. When the brightness falls below the threshold
configured, the system switches on the light unit, switching it off again when the brightness exceeds the set threshold (automatic mode). Configure A = 1 1
-9 and PL = 1 - 9, configurators GEN, AMB and GR cannot be connected. In this mode, configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the sensor does not manage the lights directly, but sends movement and brightness signals to the scenario programmer MH200N. In this
case, the sensor address is entered in A and PL and must be unique inside the system. Therefore it is not possible to connect configurators GEN, AMB, and 2
GR. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected because these parameters are directly managed by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the system directly manages a light unit, ensuring a consistent brightness level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages
the dimmer). The system switches the lights on when a movement is detected and keeps them on based on the presence of people and the lighting threshold
configured (automatic mode). When a movement is detected, and if the measured brightness is below the configured threshold, the sensor switches the
specified light unit on and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator on T. During operation, the sensor keeps a constant 3
brightness level, depending on the configurator on D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the brightness of the
light unit controlled. For appropriate operation, the brightness sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D configurator. The threshold
value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the next activation.
In this mode, the sensor only operates on the basis of the brightness conditions, and directly manages a light unit to ensure a constant brightness level
inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages the dimmer). The movement sensor is disabled. The lights are manually switched on,
and automatically switched off by the sensor, based on the configured brightness threshold (eco mode). Therefore, when the lights are off, the sensor
does not switch them on; but it waits for the user to switch them on manually. During operation, the sensor keeps a constant brightness level, depending
4
on the configurator on D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled.
When the lights are off, if the level of natural light decreases, the sensor does not switch them on, but it waits for the user to switch them on manually.
For appropriate operation, the brightness sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D configurator. The threshold value can be
modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the next activation.
Warning: To manage scenarios using the sensor signals, via the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured in Mode 2.
MQ00473-f-EN 09/06/2014
167
574048 067226 HD/HC/HS4658
574098 AM5658 L/N/NT4658N
1) Duration of the lights timer depending on the configurator on T: 2) Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector depending on the
configurator on S:
Configurator on T Lights timer in minutes Configurator on S Sensitivity

No configurator 15 No configurator Low
1 0.5 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5
5 10 3) Sensitivity of the lights sensor depending on the configurator on D:
6 15
7 20 Configurator on D Sensitivity in lux
8 30 No configurator 300
9 40 1 20
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000
Maintenance Wiring diagram

Keep the lenses clean.
Clean the surface with a cloth.
Do not use: acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene.
Maintenance using the following products: - Hexane (En 60669-1)
- Methylated spirit
- Soapy water
- Diluted ammonia
- Bleach, diluted 10%
- Glass detergents
BUS/SCS
MQ00473-f-EN 09/06/2014
168
PIR flush-mounted SCS Green Switch
574046 067225 L/N/NT4659N
574096 AM5659 HD/HC/HS4659

4
This devices features a PIR movement detector and a brightness sensor for automatic
activation of various types of loads following the detection of a movement and a
brightness level lower than the set level.
It is possible to configure several operating modes; for the detailed descriptions see 6
page 4. 5
1
Standards, Certifications, Marks 3 2
Directive:
– CEI 64-8
– IEC 60669-2-1
– EN 50428
Legend
1. PIR sensor
2. LEARN LED
3. LEARN button
Dimensional data
4. Brightness sensor
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 5. Movement sensor (under the lens)
6. Two-way IR transmitter (under the lens)
45 mm 51 mm
45 mm
Technical data
Voltage: 27 V=
Connection between sensor and actuator: SCS BUS connector
Sensor type: PIR movement detector with 180° detec-
tion angle and brightness sensor.
Flush mounted box depth: 40 mm
Weight: 60 g
Penetration of solids and liquids: IP20
Time delay: from 5 sec to 59min. 59 sec
Brightness: from 20 lux to 1275 lux
Operating temperature: from -5°C to +45°C
Storage temperature: from -20 °C to +70 °C
MQ00474-e-EN 09/06/2014
169
574046 067225 L/N/NT4659N
574096 AM5659 HD/HC/HS4659
Installation
Positioning the detector
1m Position the sensor so

that it is not affected by
the artificial light already
2.5 m
present in the room.
≥ 2.5 m
Settings
Sensor parameters Default value Adjustable parameters Configuration remote control

88230 88235
BMSO4001 BMSO4003
3,5,10,15,20 min −
Time delay 15 mn
30s - 255 h 59 min 59s −
Sensitivity PIR (very high) Low, medium, high, very high

20, 100, 300, 500, 1000 lux −
Brightness threshold 300 lux
0 - 1275 lux −
Auto Not active ON/OFF

Operating
mode
Walkthrough ON ON/OFF
Eco Not active ON/OFF
Initial PIR Cannot be modified −
Detection
mode
Holding PIR Cannot be modified −
Retrigger PIR PIR/OFF −
Alarm Not active ON/OFF −
Calibration − 0 - 99995 lux −

Advanced
mode
Adjustment Not active ON/OFF −
Contribution of light Automatic Automatic - 1275 lux −
Time delay Operating mode:

The period of time after which the load is switched off if no movement is detected. Auto
The time restarts whenever the sensor detects a movement. The load is automatically switched on:
- upon detection of a movement if the level of natural light is insufficient.
Sensitivity The load is automatically switched off:
Adjustment of the sensitivity of the detection technology used. - if no movement is detected at the end of the set time delay + standby time.
- or if the level of natural light is insufficient (adjustment on).
Brightness threshold Each new detection causes automatic switching on if the light is insufficient.
Lighting level below which the sensor activates the load and above which it
switches it off.
MQ00474-e-EN 09/06/2014
170
574046 067225 L/N/NT4659N
574096 AM5659 HD/HC/HS4659
Walkthrough Advanced mode:

If a movement is detected for a time of less than 20 s, the sensor will decrease Calibration
the set time delay to 3 minutes. If the set delay time set is already less than three To calibrate the sensor, it is necessary to measure the lighting level present using
minutes, it will remain as such. a lux meter and send the value to the sensor using a configuration remote control
(BMSO4001).
Eco
Calibration procedure:
The load is switched on manually while switching off is automatic:
- if no movement is detected at the end of the set delay time. Step 1: with only artificial light.
After switching off the load, if any movement is detected within 30 s, the load is Switch the load on at maximum intensity and close the shutters (if you cannot do
automatically switched back on (retrigger function on). At the end of this time this then wait for sunset).
interval, the load must be switched back on manually. Measure the level of lighting and send it to the sensor via the remote control.
Step 2: with only natural light.
Detection mode Turn off the load and open the shutters.
Set of technologies used for detection.
Adjustment
Initial: set of technologies used for the first detection. This function allows the sensor to switch off the load 10 minutes (plus a safety
Holding: set of technologies used after the first detection. threshold to avoid inappropriate switching off) after the lighting level exceeds the
brightness threshold, even though movement has been detected.
Retrigger: set of technologies used for the Retrigger function.
After switching off, any new detection within 30 seconds will cause the load to switch
back on automatically. After 30 seconds, the load must be switched back on manually. Contribution of light: amount of supplementary light supplied by switching on the
Available only in Eco mode. load.
Alarm: before switching off the load the sensor emits an audible warning signal. When the contribution of light parameter is set to "auto" the sensor automatically
Intervals: 1 minute, 30 seconds, and 10 seconds. calculates the contribution of light.
Modification of the parameters using the configuration remote controls
• BMSO4001-088230: advanced configuration remote control

• BMSO4003-088235: simplified configuration remote control
When the sensor receives an IR command from a configuration remote control, it
beeps to confirm that the modification has been acquired.
For more information on the parameters please refer to the technical info sheet of the
remote control BMSO4001.
Return to factory settings:

1st press: Briefly press LEARN, the LED will blink slowly.
2nd press: Press and hold LEARN for 10 seconds until the LED flashes quickly.
Performance
Height
≈6m 3m
(PIR) (PIR)
1,2 m
4 5 6 8 m
5 m (PIR)
Small movements Large movements
8 m (PIR)
MQ00474-e-EN 09/06/2014
171
574046 067225 L/N/NT4659N
574096 AM5659 HD/HC/HS4659
Configuration
2. My Home system
3. Physical configuration
The sensor parameters are defined by 6 configurator sockets and the functions depend on the operating mode:
Local: A = 1 – 9 Sensitivity of the PIR movement sensor: S = 0 – 3
Light point: PL = 1 – 9 Control timer: T = 0 – 9
Mode: M = 0 – 4 Sensitivity of the lights sensor: D = 0 – 5
Warning: the addresses A = 0 and PL = 0 do not exist
Available functions Configurator mode

The sensor controls the light unit, the address of which defined in A and PL. When a movement is detected, and if the measured brightness is below
the configured value, the system switches on the specified light unit and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator on
T (automatic mode). The Sensitivity of the PIR movement detector is configured using the configurator on S. For appropriate operation, the sensitivity 0
of the light sensor must be configured using the configurator on D. If a user manually switches off the lights, a control action can be used to disable the
movement detector until a movement is detected, for a period set by T.
In this mode, the sensor only works based on the light conditions, and the movement sensor is disabled. When the brightness falls below the threshold
configured, the system switches on the light unit, switching it off again when the brightness exceeds the set threshold (automatic mode). Configure A = 1
1 -9 and PL = 1 - 9, configurators GEN, AMB and GR cannot be connected. In this mode, configurators S and T are not connected.
In this mode the sensor does not manage the lights directly, but sends movement and brightness signals to the scenario programmer MH200N. In this
case, the sensor address is entered in A and PL and must be unique inside the system. Therefore it is not possible to connect configurators GEN, AMB, and 2
GR. In this mode the S and T configurators are not connected because these parameters are directly managed by the scenario programmer.
In this mode the system directly manages a light unit, ensuring a consistent brightness level inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor
manages the dimmer). The system switches the lights on when a movement is detected and keeps them on based on the presence of people and the
lighting threshold configured (automatic mode). When a movement is detected, and if the measured brightness is below the configured threshold, the
sensor switches the specified light unit on and keeps it on until the expiry of the period configured using the configurator on T. During operation, the
3
sensor keeps a constant brightness level, depending on the configurator on D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor
reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled. For appropriate operation, the brightness sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using
the D configurator. The threshold value can be modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until
the next activation
In this mode, the sensor only operates on the basis of the brightness conditions, and directly manages a light unit to ensure a constant brightness level
inside the room (this mode is only effective if the sensor manages the dimmer). The movement sensor is disabled. The lights are manually switched on,
and automatically switched off by the sensor, based on the configured brightness threshold (eco mode). Therefore, when the lights are off, the sensor
does not switch them on; but it waits for the user to switch them on manually. During operation, the sensor keeps a constant brightness level, depending
4
on the configurator on D. For example, when the brightness of the natural light increases, the sensor reduces the brightness of the light unit controlled.
When the lights are off, if the level of natural light decreases, the sensor does not switch them on, but it waits for the user to switch them on manually.
For appropriate operation, the brightness sensitivity threshold of the sensor must be configured using the D configurator. The threshold value can be
modified using a brightness control. The new value is then configured as the new sensor threshold, until the next activation.
Warning: To manage scenarios using the sensor signals, via the MH200N scenario programmer, the sensor must be configured in Mode 2.
MQ00474-e-EN 09/06/2014
172
574046 067225 L/N/NT4659N
574096 AM5659 HD/HC/HS4659
1) Duration of the lights timer depending on the configurator on T: 2) Sensitivity of the PIR and US movement detector depending on the
configurator on S:
Configurator on T Lights timer in minutes Configurator on S Sensitivity

No configurator 15 No configurator Low
1 0.5 1 Medium
2 1 2 High
3 2 3 Very high
4 5 When using the configurators it is not possible to distinguish between the sensitivity of
5 10 the detection technologies, both of which will have the value set by the configurator S.
6 15
7 20 3) Sensitivity of the lights sensor depending on the configurator on D:
8 30 Configurator on D Sensitivity in lux
9 40 No configurator 300
1 20
2 100
3 300
4 500
5 1000
Maintenance Wiring diagram

Keep the lenses clean.
Clean the surface with a cloth.
Do not use: acetone, detergents for removing tar, or trichloroethylene.
Maintenance using the following products: - Hexane (En 60669-1)
- Methylated spirit
- Soapy water
- Diluted ammonia
- Bleach, diluted 10%
- Glass detergents
BUS/SCS
MQ00474-e-EN 09/06/2014
173
Rolling shutter management control
067558 H4660M2
AM5860M2 LN4660M2
Use Front view 1

Two-module flush-mounted lowered control with 3 pushbuttons and 3 two-colour LEDs
designed to be used ONLY with advanced actuators (flush mounted or DIN module)
specifically intended for rolling shutter management.
Preset function:
2
In addition to the Monostable and Bistable UP/DOWN operating modes, by pressing the
STOP pushbutton the control gives the possibility of moving the shutter to a specific
position (Preset) saved by the actuator. It is also possible to set a different position as
required by the user.
The function can only be set with the configuration of “control-actuator” addresses of
the Point-Point type, or with Room, Group, and General controls, after configuring the
7 3
reference actuator (position Ar and PLr). For more details see the Configuration chapter
on the following page.
6 5 4
Related items
Rear view
Actuator item F401, H/LN4661M2 and AM5861M2
Technical data
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc
Power consumption on standby: 7 mA max 8
9
Standards, Certifications, and Marks
• EN50090-2-2: Home and building electronic systems (HBES);
• EN50090-2-3: General functional safety requirements for products intended to be Legend
integrated in HBES;
• EN50428: Switches and related accessories for use in home and building electronic 1. UP LED: orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) when the shutter is moving up.
systems (HBES). Green or blue when the shutter is still or moving down;
2. UP shutter pushbutton;
3. DOWN shutter pushbutton;
4. DOWN LED: orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) when the shutter is moving
down. Green or blue when the shutter is still or moving up;
Dimensional data 5. Push&Learn configuration pushbutton and LED brightness adjustment (see page 2);
Size: 2 flush mounted modules 6. Preset LED: ON orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue), when the shutter is
moving to the saved position (Preset). Flashing during the virtual configuration;
7. STOP button: Press when the shutter is still, to move it to the Preset position. Press
when the shutter is moving, to stop it at the current position;
8. Configurator socket;
9. BUS cable clamp.
MQ00591-c-EN 09/06/2014
174
067558 H4660M2
AM5860M2 LN4660M2
Configuration
1.1 Addressing
1.2 Definition of the reference actuator for updating the control status
Room 0-10 Ar=1-9
Lighting point 0-15 PLr=1-9
Note: Ar and PLr = configure these two positions only when needing to manage several ac- address of the reference actuator for control status update.
tuators with a General, Room or Group type control. The Ar and PLr positions correspond to the

Installation level Local bus 1-15 not configurable
Riser bus riser not configurable
Standard standard not configurable
1.3 Mode
Parameter / setting
Bistable control M= 
Monostable control M= M
Lath control and bistable control 1) M=1
Bistable control and lath control 2) M=2
Note 1): Bistable mode when pressed for longer than 1.5 s.
Note 2): Lath control when pressed for longer than 1.5 s.
MQ00591-c-EN 09/06/2014
175
067558 H4660M2
AM5860M2 LN4660M2
1.3 Selecting the Preset position

Rolling shutter opening 10% 1 Pre=1
Operating mode for pulse motors with a 3rd limit switch.

After inserting the configurators 2 in the Type socket and 9 in the Pre position of the device, when
the STOP pushbutton of the control is pressed while the shutter is still, the shutter will move to
the position of the 3rd limit switch. If there is no Configurator, the "Preset" function is not active.
G1 = defines the 1 to 9 group of actuators it belongs to.
Saving the rolling shutter position (preset) LED ADJUSTMENT

Irrespective of the device configuration mode used, it is possible to change the Preset 1. Press the configuration pushbutton for at least 2 seconds.
position based on the needs of the user. The procedure is as follows:
2. Hold down the pushbutton; the brightness of the LED will change every 2 seconds as
1. Use the control device, or the flush mounted actuator, to move the shutter to the shown in the drawing.
desired position.
3. Once the desired brightness level has been reached, release the pushbutton.
2. Press the STOP pushbutton for at least 10 seconds. The actuator assigned to the control
saves the position of the shutter.
3. To confirm that the position has been saved correctly, the two LEDs, UP and DOWN,
come on orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) for 2 seconds.
Irrespective of the shutter position, once this has been stopped by pressing the STOP 30%
pushbutton, it will be possible to move it to the preset position.
DEFAULT
60% 0%
PUSH t > 2 s 100%
MQ00591-c-EN 09/06/2014
176
H4661M2 LN4661M2
067557 AM5861M2
Use 1
Front view
Flush-mounted two-module actuator device with 2 internal relays with 3 buttons and 3
two-colour LEDs, designed to work in conjunction with specific control devices for rolling
shutters (UP, DOWN and lath position).
However, the actuator can also be used with all other control devices, although in that
2
case the Preset function will not be available.
Preset function:
In addition to the Monostable and Bistable UP/DOWN operating modes, by pressing
the STOP pushbutton the actuator enables moving the shutter into a specific position 7 3
(Preset). When operating in this mode, the Preset LED will light up.
The device is supplied with 9 preset positions, which can be selected by connecting the
numeric configurators 1 to 9 to the “Pre” socket on the back of the actuator.
It is also possible to set a different position as required by the user; for the configuration
modes see the next page. 6 5 4
Rear view
The Preset function can also be managed using the Scenario Module (enabling of
scenarios with preset shutter positions). In this case take the shutter into the desired
position when saving the scenario.
Note: The scenario module must have been produced after week 29-2012.
8
10
Technical data
9
Max. current draw: 16 mA
Power/consumption of driven loads: 250 Vac – 2 A
Legend
1. UP LED: orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) when the shutter is moving up.
Green or blue when the shutter is still or moving down.
Standards, Certifications, and Marks
2. UP shutter pushbutton
• EN50090-2-2: Home and building electronic systems (HBES) 3. DOWN shutter pushbutton
• EN50090-2-3: General functional safety requirements for products intended to be 4. DOWN LED: orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) when the shutter is moving
integrated in HBES down. Green or blue when the shutter is still or moving up.
• EN50428: Switches and related accessories for use in home and building electronic 5. Push&Learn configuration and shutter position configuration pushbutton
systems (HBES)
6. Preset LED: ON orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) when the shutter is
moving into the Preset position. Flashing during virtual configuration.
7. STOP button: Press when the shutter is still, to move it to the Preset position. Press
Dimensional data when the shutter is moving, to stop it at the current position.
8. Configurator socket (to be used only in My Home systems with physical
Size: 2 flush-mounted modules configuration)
9. BUS clamp
10. Clamps (3 x 2.5 mm2) for connection to the load
MQ00592-c-EN 19/06/2014
177
H4661M2 LN4661M2
067557 AM5861M2
Configuration
1.1 Addressing

1.2 Mode

Master Actuator 1) Master M=0
Pushbutton (ON monostable) the actuator ignores Room and Master PUL M=PUL
General controls
Note 1): Operation based on the mode configured in the control device. After acquiring the posi-
tions of the rolling shutter (open and closed), it will be possible to ensure 100 different positions.
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function" and to define the Preset positions, use
1.2.1 Type of motor

Type Parameter / setting
Standard with manual calibration Standard Type=1
Pulse Pulse Type=2
Note: To adjust the "Stop pulse duration" and "Up or down pulse duration" use MYHOME_Suite
virtual configuration.
1.2.2 Control mode via actuator button

Parameter / setting
Bistable control 1) M= 
Monostable control M= M
Lath control and bistable control 2) M=1
Bistable control and lath control 3)
M=2
Note 1): After acquiring the two positions, closed and open shutter, it will be possible to ma- Note 2): Bistable mode when pressed for longer than 1.5 s.
nage 100 different positions. Note 3): Lath control when pressed for longer than 1.5 s.
MQ00592-c-EN 19/06/2014
178
H4661M2 LN4661M2
067557 AM5861M2
1.2.3 Selecting the Preset position

Operating mode for pulse motors with a 3rd limit switch Note: The proper operation of the PRESET function with shutters provided with adjustable louver
After inserting the configurators 2 in the Type socket and 9 in the Pre position of the device, when blades, can only be guaranteed by using pulse motors.
the STOP pushbutton of the control is pressed while the shutter is still, the shutter will move to
the position of the 3rd limit switch. If there is no Configurator, the "Preset" function is not active.
To set the "Preset P1-P9: 0-100" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
Mode of operation of the contacts L1 and L2 of the actuator configured TYPE=2 for the management of the 3° end of stroke.
Default operation TYPE=2 PRE=1-8 Operation TYPE = 2 PRE = 9
STOPPED SHUTTERS STOPPED SHUTTERS

Press ON  L1 closes for 0.5 s Press ON  L1 closes for 0.5 s
Press DOWN  L2 closes for 0.5 s Press DOWN  L2 closes for 0.5 s
Press STOP  PRESET control sending Press STOP  L1 + L2 close for 0.5 s
MOVING SHUTTERS MOVING SHUTTERS

Press ON  L1 closes for 0.5 s Press ON  L1 closes for 0.5 s
Press DOWN  L2 closes for 0.5 s Press DOWN  L2 closes for 0.5 s
Press STOP  L1 + L2 close for 0.5 s Press STOP  L1 + L2 close for 0.5 s
MQ00592-c-EN 19/06/2014
179
H4661M2 LN4661M2
067557 AM5861M2
Calibration of the shutter position 3. To confirm that the position has been saved correctly, the two LEDs, UP and DOWN,
come on orange (green + red) or purple (red + blue) for 2 seconds.
UP LED Irrespective of the shutter position, once this has been stopped by pressing the STOP
pushbutton, it will be possible to move it to the preset position.
UP pushbutton LED ADJUSTMENT
30%
DOWN pushbutton
DOWN LED
DEFAULT
Configuration 60% 0%
pushbutton
PUSH t > 5 s 100%

Manual calibration of the shutter position
This operation is necessary for correct operation of the actuator and enables saving the
shutter opening and closing positions. 1. Press the configuration pushbutton for at least 5 seconds. All the LEDs will come on
orange (green + red), or purple (red + blue) after 3 seconds, and after another 5
If no calibration is performed, the actuator cannot be managed by the control devices,
seconds will turn green or blue again;
but only locally, by pressing the corresponding front pushbuttons; in this case, it will
send controls at 5-second intervals to the motor. 2. Hold down the pushbutton, the brightness of the LED will change every 2 seconds as
shown in the drawing;
1. Press the configuration pushbutton for at least 3 seconds. All the LEDs will come on
orange (green + red), or purple (red + blue). 3. Once the desired brightness level has been reached, release the pushbutton.
2. Release the configuration pushbutton. The LED indicating the “UP” position will start
flashing quickly.
3. Press and release the “UP” pushbutton. The shutter will move upwards and the “UP”
LED will flash slowly. Wiring diagram
4. Once the shutter has reached the maximum opening position, press the “DOWN”
pushbutton. The shutter will move downwards and the “DOWN” LED will flash slowly. Traditional motor:
During this stage, the actuator measures and saves the time it takes the shutter to
close. N
5. When the shutter is fully closed, press and release the “UP” pushbutton. The shutter L
will move upwards, and the “UP” LED will flash slowly to enable the actuator to
measure and save the time it takes the shutter to open.
6. When the shutter maximum opening position is reached, press the “OWN”
pushbutton again to complete the calibration procedure. The “UP’” position LED will
become green or blue.
WARNING: The calibration precision, and therefore the control of the shutter position,
depends on the accuracy with which the limit switch positions are manually detected
during the calibration itself. L1
M
Saving the new rolling shutter position (preset) N
The Preset function lets you set the shutter in one of the 9 positions that can be selected L2
with the configurator in the Pre socket. It is in any case possible to set a different position
as required by the user. The procedure, which can be performed from the control device,
or the actuator, is as follows:
Pulse motor
For the connection refer to the indications supplied with the motor interface.
1. Press the “UP” and “DOWN” pushbuttons to move the shutter into the desired position.
2. Press the STOP pushbutton for at least 10 seconds. The actuator saves the position
of the shutter.
MQ00592-c-EN 19/06/2014
180
Halogen-free (white) AV SCS/BUS cable
L4669HF
Description
This white SCS-BUS cable has been purposely designed and built for the installation of
systems in rooms with a high risk of fire. Produced without halogens, the cable will burn
without releasing toxic substances or heavy, dense smoke, significantly increasing the
safety level.
This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to
all system BUS devices.
It consists of a white external sheath and two twisted conductors, of cross-section 0.50
mm2, brown and brown/white in colour. It is sold in coils of 200 m.
It is therefore ideal for use in:
- Free way inside trunking, walkways and conduits
- Inside walls via suitable conduits
- Underground via suitable conduits.
Installation notes
The white SCS-BUS cable is suitable for underground installation. Cable burying
The SCS BUS 336904 cable can be buried (protected by suitable conduits) along with
other signal cables if the voltages are < 50 V.
Technical data It is absolutely forbidden to run the cable 336904 together with power cables, where the
Insulation voltage: 450/750 V voltages are > 50 V. Failure to comply with the installation rules authorises BTicino to
Can be buried: YES protected by suitable conduits disclaim all liability for the operation of existing plants.
External sheath colour: white (RAL 9010)
External sheath diameter: 5.2 +/- 0.1 mm Installation with other cables
External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm Although the white cable constructively ensures the electrical insulation necessary
External sheath material: LDFRPE Thermoplastic quality M1, hardness 95 A Shore for installation with 450/750 V cable systems, there is no assurance of immunity from
Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with sheath electromagnetic interference that could occur if the cable were to be laid in the same
Colour of internal conductors: brown – brown/white conduits through which the power cables run.
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.45 mm It is highly recommended to install the SCS-BUS white cable and the power cables in
Sheath material of internal conductors: LDPE Polyethylene different conduits.
Conductor material: red electrolytic copper
Conductor section: 0.52 mm2 (7 x 0.308 mm2)
Maximum short circuit temperature: 150°C
Coil length: 200 m

Reference standards: The cable complies with the tests required by the following
regulations: UL13, UL1581, EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, EN50265-2-1,
EN50395, EN50396 as described in document IMQ CPT 062.
Marks obtained:
MQ00522-c-EN 22/11/2013
181
BUS cable
L4669/500
L4669 L4669KM1
Description
This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals
to all system devices.
The cable consists of a grey external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors
with a section of 0.35 mm2, one blue and one white.
The cable is sold in 2 different type of coils:
- 100 m coil, item L4669
- 500 m coil, item L4669/500
- 1000 m coil, item L4669KM1
The cable has 300/500 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all
the devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and ducts as the power
lines (110 Vac, 127 Vac and 230 Vac).
Warning
The grey BUS/SCS cable is not suitable for underground installation.
Although the construction of the grey cable ensures 300/500 V category electric
Technical data insulation, correct system operation is not guaranteed when installed together with
the power cables in the following cases:
nsulation voltage: 300/500 V - industrial environments,
Can be buried: NO In residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power
External sheath colour: grey (RAL 7001) supply to:
External sheath diameter: 5.5 +/- 0.1 mm - lift,
External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm - inverters,
External sheath material: PVC (RZ) - pumps,
Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with - motors and controlled motors,
sheath - metal iodines lamps.
Colour of internal conductors: white and blue
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.60 mm
Sheath diameter of internal conductors: PVC (R2)
Conductor material: red electrolytic copper
Conductor section: 0.35 mmq (12 x 0.20 mmq)
Operating temperature: 15 - 70 °C
Maximum short circuit temperature: 150 °C
Coil length: 100 m or 500 m
Standard, Certification, Marks

Reference standards: It complies with the tests required by the following regulations:
EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,EN50395, EN50396 as described
inside the IMQ CPT 062 document
MQ00289-c-EN 08/01/2013
182
Control/actuator
067556 AM5851M2
H4671M2 LN4671M2
Description Front
1
This device, with 4 pushbuttons and 4 two-colour LEDs at the front, is fitted with 2 inde-
pendent relays to control:
- 2 loads or 2 groups of loads that are independent;
- 1 single load (rolling shutter motor). 2
The actuator may also be configured for the management of the connected load, whilst
at the same time operating as a “control device” for the management of one or more
remote actuators, with operating modes typical of a 2-module basic control.
More specifically, after the configuration, it is possible to set the following modes of
operation: 3
1. Actuator for single load (lighting or shutter automation) with local control.
4
2. Actuator for 2 independent loads (lighting) with 2 local controls.
3. Actuator for 1 load (lighting) with local control by the left button and remote actuator
or scenario control by the right button.
4. Actuator for 1 load (shutter automation) with local control by the left button and re-
mote actuator or scenario control by the right button. 1
Rear
5
7
6
Technical data
Power supply from BUS: 27 Vdc
Power consumption on standby: 14 mA max
Power/consumption of driven loads: Legend
1. LED:
Incandescent lamps - Geared motors for rolling LED lamps
LIVING LIGHT: green with motor stopped, or orange (green + red) with motor in
Halogen lamps shutters Compact fluorescent lamps
operation
green with light OFF, and orange with light ON
AXOLUTE: blue with motor stopped, or blue + red with motor in operation
blue with light OFF, or blue + red with light ON
230 Vac 460 W 2A 460 W 2A 70 W Max. 2 lamps 2. Top buttons
3. Bottom buttons
4. LED control/off button
Linear fluorescent lamps - Electronic transformers Ferromagnetic transformers
6. BUS
7. Clamps (3 x 2.5 mm2) for connection to the load
70 W 0,3 A 2 A cosφ 0,5 460 VA
Dimensions
MQ00411-e-EN 19/06/2014
183
Control/actuator
067556 AM5851M2
H4671M2 LN4671M2
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: With the virtual configuration, the functions performed by the front buttons are
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. independent of the functions of the local actuators.
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from The software lets you configure 4 independent addresses: 2 for the actuators and 2 for
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many the front controls.
more options than the physical configuration. For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in this
sheet and to the «Function Descriptions» help section in the MYHOME_Suite software
package.
Function selection
1. Lighting Actuator Mode (1 load) or shutter automation with local control
Configure A1, M1 and PL1 to define the local actuator address and mode.
1.1 Addressing

Apartment Room 0-10 A1=0-9
Lighting point 0-15 PL1=1-9
To configure the group address (1-10) from 0 to 255, use MYHOME_Suite virtual con-
figuration.
1.2 Lighting

Master Actuator - Cyclical ON/OFF Master M1=0
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button - M1=0/I
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator Slave M1=SLA
Light management
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls Master PUL M1=PUL “actuator” button cover
OFF Delay = 0
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Master PUL M1=1 1 minute
Slave actuator.1) OFF Delay = 1 - 255 M1=2 2 minutes
M1=3 3 minutes
M1=4 4 minutes
To define the type of load (lamp, solenoid valve, etc.), use MYHOME_Suite virtual con- Note 1): Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the
figuration. Slave actuator deactivates after the time set on the Master actuator has elapsed. Typical function
for use in bathrooms without windows where the ON control activates the light (Master actuator)
and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF control switches the light off
immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the
Master actuator as indicated in the table.
MQ00411-e-EN 19/06/2014
184
Control/actuator
067556 AM5851M2
H4671M2 LN4671M2
1.3 Automation

Rolling shutter UP/DOWN with STOP after 2 minutes. The Master PUL M1=OFF
actuator ignores the Room and General controls
Rolling shutter UP/DOWN with STOP after the set time Master, Slave M1=5 1 minute
M1=6 2 minutes
Copritasto “attuatore”
M1=7 5 minutes gestione tapparella
M1=8 infinite
UP/DOWN monostable - M1= M
UP/DOWN bistable - M1=
To use the “Actuator as a slave with PUL function”, the “Load Type” (Actuator, Rolling HOME_Suite virtual configuration.
Shutter, Curtain, Gate, Rocker) and define the STOP time 1-60 sec., 2-10 min., use MY-
2. Lighting Actuator Mode (2 separate loads) with local controls
In this mode, the actuator manages two separate loads, connected to the contacts C-L1 and C-L2) and left (load connected in C-L1).
C-L2 of the two relays, locally controlled with both front buttons, right (load connected in
2.1 Addressing

Apartment Room 0-10 A1, A2=0-9
To configure the group address (1-10) from 0 to 255, use MYHOME_Suite virtual con-
figuration.
2.2 Lighting

Master Actuator - Cyclical ON/OFF Master M2=0 M1=CEN
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button - M2=0/I M1=CEN
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator Slave M2=SLA M1=CEN
with the same address Lights 1
management
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls Master PUL M2=PUL M1=CEN “actuator” button
OFF Delay = 0 cover
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Master PUL M2=1 M1=CEN 1 minute
Slave actuator.1) OFF Delay = 1 - 255 Lights 1 management
M2=2 M1=CEN 2 minutes
“actuator” button cover
To define the type of load (lamp, solenoid valve, etc.), use MYHOME_Suite virtual con- Note 1): Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the
figuration. Slave actuator deactivates after the time set on the Master actuator has elapsed. Typical function
and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF control switches the light off
immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the
Master actuator as indicated in the table.
MQ00411-e-EN 19/06/2014
185
Control/actuator
067556 AM5851M2
H4671M2 LN4671M2
3. Actuator for 1 load (lighting) with local control by the left button and remote actuator or scenario control by the right button
3.1 Addressing
Configure A1, M1 and PL1 to define the local actuator address and mode of operation (con-
Light management “actuator”
trolled by the left button) as specified in paragraphs 1.1 and 1.2.
button cover
Configure A2 PL2 to define the address of the remote actuator to be managed, according
to the following table:

Point-to-point Room 0-10 A2=1-9
Room 0-10 A2=AMB, PL2=1-9
Group 1-255 A2=GR, PL2=1-9
General General A2=GEN
3.2 Mode of operation of the remote control
See chapter 5.
4. Actuator for 1 load (shutters automation) with local control by the left button and remote actuator or scenario control by the right button
4.1 Addressing
Rolling shutter
Configure A1, M1 and PL1 to define the local actuator address and mode of operation (con- management “actuator”
trolled by the left button) as specified in paragraphs 1.1 and 1.3. button cover
Configure A2 PL2 to define the address of the remote actuator to be managed, according
to the following table:

Point-to-point Room 0-10 A2=1-9
Room 0-10 A2=AMB, PL2=1-9
Group 1-255 A2=GR, PL2=1-9
General General A2=GEN
To configure the reference addresses for the Room and the Light Point of an actuator use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
4.2 Mode of operation of the remote control
See chapter 5.
MQ00411-e-EN 19/06/2014
186
Control/actuator
067556 AM5851M2
H4671M2 LN4671M2
5. Mode of operation of the control by the right button
5.1 ON/OFF control

Remove actuator “control”
Function Parameter / setting button cover
Cyclic. M2=0
ON M2=ON
OFF M2=OFF
Button M2=PUL Or
Timed ON 0.5sec M2=8

30sec M2=7
1min M2=1
2min M2=2
3min M2=3
4min M2=4
5min M2=5
15min M2=6

Parameter / setting
ON/OFF and cyclic ADJUSTMENT. M2=0
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button and DIMMER when held down M2=0/I
For the “ON/OFF with adjustment” function, “Timed ON” with parameter 2sec, 10min, point-to-point adjustment”, “Cyclic with custom adjustment” and “Custom cyclic dimmer
15min, “Blinking”, “Cyclic with custom point-to-point adjustment”, “ON/OFF with custom with no adjustment” use virtual configuration via MYHOME_Suite
5.2 Automation

Remove actuator “control”
Parameter / setting button cover
Bistable control M2=
Monostable control M2=M
For bistable control + lath control use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
MQ00411-e-EN 19/06/2014
187
Control/actuator
067556 AM5851M2
H4671M2 LN4671M2
5.3 Programmed scenario activation
5.3.1 Addressing
Scenarios activation
Addressing type key cover
Room 0-10 A2=1-9
5.3.2 Mode
Top button 0-31 M2=CEN
Bottom button 0-31 M2=CEN
The scenarios can only be activated with the button on the right. If the device is configured in
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION mode, the activated scenarios will be 1 and 2.
5.4 Plus programmed scenario activation

Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram for light connection Wiring diagram for rolling shutter connection
NN NN
LL LL
L1L1
MM
NN
L2L2
MQ00411-e-EN 19/06/2014
188
Flush-mounted 1-relay actuator
H4671/1 L4671/1
64390 AM5851/1
Description
Front view
Device to control a single load with a built-in electromechanical relay.
1
Technical data
Power supply via SCS BUS: 27 Vdc from the BUS
Operating power supply with BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 2
Current draw: 16.5 mA
Power/Consumption of driven loads: 3

Compact fluorescent Electronic transformers transformers
Rear view
Halogen lamps
lamps
PL
G1 4
G2
5
L L1
6
Legend
230 Vac 1380 W 6A 150 W Max. 3 lamps 150 W 0.65 A 2 A cosφ 0.5 460 VA
1. Top button
Dissipated power with max. load: 0.9 W
2. Bottom button
3. LED
5. Power line (max 2x2.5 mm2)
6. BUS
Configuration
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com.
1.1 Addressing
Address type Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) / Physical configuration

Point-to-point Room 1-9
Lighting point 1-9
Group G1, G2=0-9
MQ00072-e-EN 05/06/2014
189
Flush-mounted 1-relay actuator
H4671/1 L4671/1
AM5851/1
1.2 Mode
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) / Physical configuration

Master Actuator - Cyclical ON/OFF M=0
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button M=O/I
Actuator as Slave. Receives a command sent by a M=SLA
Master actuator with the same address
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls M=PUL
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding M=1 1 minute
Slave actuator. 1) M=2 2 minutes
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): Only for point-point control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the
Slave actuator deactivates after the time set on the Master actuator has elapsed. Typical function
Use 2-module button cover with dual function and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator) at the same time. The OFF control switches the light off im-
mediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master
actuator as indicated in the table. The control must be configured in socket M = 0/1.
MQ00072-e-EN 05/06/2014
190
Dimmer actuator 300VA
H4678
L4678
Description
Front view
The device is a dimmer for controlling resistive loads and ferromagnetic transformers. It
is used to turn on and off and adjust the brightness of the load. It can be controlled via
the BUS or the local button. Briefly pressing the button turns the load on or off, while
holding it down adjusts the brightness. 1
The actuator is able to signal any load faults such as, for example, lamp failure. It is also
protected by a fuse, easily replaceable should it blow.
The LED on the actuator changes colour depending on the status of the device:
2
- green/blue: power ON, load OFF
3
- red: load ON
- blinking: incorrect configuration
Rear view
Technical data
Current draw: 9 mA
Incandescent lamps Ferromagnetic transformers
Halogen lamps
5
Legend
1. Top button
2. Bottom button
3. LED
230 Vac 60 - 300 W 0.25 - 1.30 A 0.25 - 1.30 A 60 - 300 VA 4. Configurator socket
5. Fuse
Dissipated power with max. load: 3W
Dimensions
Configuration
Connection
N If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in their sockets marked on the
back of the device:
L
terminal
white = adjusted brown = line For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions on this
sheet and to the "Glossary" section of the Guide to designing and installing My Home.
A
PL
M
G
configurators
fuse
MQ00075-d-EN 05/06/2014
191
Dimmer actuator 300VA
H4678
L4678
1.1 Addressing

Groups G=0-9 G=0-9
1.2 Mode
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) and physical configuration

Master Actuator (Cyclical ON/OFF) M=0
ON with top button, OFF with bottom button. 1) M=O/I
Actuator as Slave. Receives a control sent by a Master actuator M=SLA
Pushbutton (ON monostable) ignores Room and General controls M=PUL
OFF delay: Master actuator with OFF control delayed on the M=1 1 minute
corresponding Slave actuator. 2)
M=2 2 minutes
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
Note 1): Note 2): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via
Use 2-module button cover with dual function MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for point-point control.
With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time
set on the Master actuator has elapsed. Typical function for use in bathrooms without windows
where the ON control activates the light (Master actuator) and the ventilation fan (Slave actuator)
at the same time.
The OFF control switches the light off immediately and leaves the fan working for the time set with
configurator 1 to 4 in M of the Master actuator as indicated in the table.
MQ00075-d-EN 05/06/2014
192
Scenario control
HD4680 HC4680 HS4680 L4680 N4680 NT4680
067217 067218 574504 574503 573902 573903
Description
Control device to activate, create and change 4 scenarios stored in the scenario module
item F420 or activate the ones saved in the scenario programmer MH200N. 1 2
Pausa Riunione
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Conferenza Proiezione
Current draw: 9 mA
3 4
Dimensions
HD4680 - HC4680 - HS4680 - L4680
N4680 - NT4680 - 574504 - 574503
1 2
3 4
067217 - 067218 - 573902 - 573903
Legend
1. Button 1
2. Button 2
3. Button 3
4. Button 4
6. BUS
MQ00288-c-EN 09/06/2014
193
Scenario control
HD4680 HC4680 HS4680 L4680 N4680 NT4680
067217 067218 574504 574503 573902 573903
Configuration
When installed in a Lighting Management system, the device can be configured in the - double CEN control
following ways: - double PLUS scenario control
- Project&Download, with the Virtual Configurator software you can perform all the - double CEN PLUS control
functions listed below: For more information on the functions see the glossary before the Technical sheets
- double scenario control chapter.
2. My Home system
Function selection
1.1 Addressing

Light point (of the scenario module) 0-15 PL=1-9


Note: Positions A and PL of the scenario control must correspond to those in the scenario module the scenario to be activated with a delay (from 15s to 15m).
item F420. The association of each key of the control to one of the scenarios stored by the module is
made by configuring socket M. It is possible to configure positions N and DEL to set the number of
1.2 Mode

Scenario top button 1-16
M=1-4 1)
Note 1): Correspondence between the 4 keys of the control and the scenarios stored in the module
item F420:
MQ00288-c-EN 09/06/2014
194
Scenario control
HD4680 HC4680 HS4680 L4680 N4680 NT4680
067217 067218 574504 574503 573902 573903
Value of configurator M Button 1 (T1) Button 2 (T2) Button 3 (T3) Button 4 (T4)
1.2.1 Defining scenario activation delay
It is possible to set a delay to be assigned to one or all the scenarios before actuation is
performed:

Delay activation
Top button delay 0, 1-60s , 90s, 2-10m, 15m DEL=0-9, N=0-5 *)
Bottom button delay 0, 1-60s , 90s, 2-10m, 15m DEL=0-9, N=0-5 *)
Note (*): The Configurator in the DEL position determines the scenario activation delay. Selecting scenarios to delay
Value of configurator DEL Delay Value of configurator N Button 1 (T1) Button 2 (T2) Button 3 (T3) Button 4 (T4)
0 No delay 0 None None None None
1 1 minute 1 Delay ON None None None
2 2 minutes 2 None Delay ON None None
3 3 minutes 3 None None Delay ON None
4 4 minutes 4 None None None Delay ON
5 5 minutes 5 Delay ON Delay ON Delay ON Delay ON
6 10 minutes
7 15 minutes
8 15 seconds
9 30 seconds
In this mode, pressing a button activates a scenario stored in the scenario programmer
MH200N.
2.1 Addressing

Addressing type
Room 0-10 A=1-9
MQ00288-c-EN 09/06/2014
195
Scenario control
HD4680 HC4680 HS4680 L4680 N4680 NT4680
067217 067218 574504 574503 573902 573903
2.2 Scenario number

T2
T1
Top button 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN T4
Bottom button 0-31 SPE=0 M=CEN
T3
Note: T1-T4 = scenario buttons 1-4
3. PLUS programmed scenario activation
To configure address 1 - 2047 of the scenario and of the number of buttons 0 - 31 use
MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the program- To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
ming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the lock/
unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the following 1) The scenario module must be enabled for programming.
operations:
2) Press the pushbutton of the scenario you want to cancel for at least 10 seconds: the
1) Press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 4 seconds. corresponding LED will start flashing quickly for about 2 seconds, thus indicating that
The corresponding LED starts flashing. the scenario has been cancelled. If the LED does not flash, it means that the control has
failed.
2) Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, Tem-
perature control, Sound system, etc. functions. To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed for
10 seconds, the yellow “reset scenarios” LED flashes quickly.
3) Confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit
programming mode. Buttons for managing scenarios
Button 2
4) To change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
starting from point 1. To recall an already set scenario, briefly pressing the corresponding Button 2 LED
button on the control is enough. Button 1
Button 1 LED
NOTES:
Once the operations have been performed lock the programming, pressing the lock/
unlock pushbutton, of the scenario module, for at least 0.5 seconds, so that the corre- Button 4 LED
sponding LED becomes red.
Button 3 LED Button 4
Button 3
MQ00288-c-EN 09/06/2014
196
Technical sheets - Burglar alarm
197
Radio IR detector
3440
Description
This device, sensitive to the movement of warm bodies, is suitable for the protection
of interiors. The configuration can be changed to adjust the tripping sensitivity and set
the system to perform typical Automation functions, such as, for example, the delayed
switching on of lights, when the person crosses the protected area.
The sensor is powered by a 3.6V AA battery and is self protected against opening. Its free
field range is 100 m.
After some detections, these sensors automatically deactivate for 3 minutes, to prevent the
intruder to guess the sensor covering area. It also permits to save energy, thus extending
the life of the battery.
Technical data 1
- Power supply: 3.6 V lithium battery - type 1/2 AA

- Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C (indoor use)
- Minimum battery duration: 3 years
- Radio frequency: 868.35 MHz Front view
- Range: 100 metres free field 2
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage)
- Modulation: FSK Legend
1 - Fresnel lens;
CONFORMITY DECLARATION
2 - LED: Two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
Item 3440 meets the essential requirements of directive 1999/5/CE, as it complies with
exhausted.
the following standards:
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3.
Year of approval of the CE mark in accordance with the above directive: 2007
Dimensional data Covering range
12
105
10
8
6
4
2
Mt
105°
65 45 2,00
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
MQ00055-c-EN 21/10/2013
198
Radio IR detector
3440
Configuration M A Configurator
Z N O U
Infrared radio detectors require assigning of the zone they belong to, of the progressive D X socket
sensor number within the zone, setting of the detection mode and the allocation of an
auxiliary prealarm channel.
WARNING: the configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected.
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector.
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to
a maximum of 8 zones.
N Tamper/learning
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the detector inside the appropriate
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on ON timed control
to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 zones.
For this mode, configure in the Z and N positions of the detector the addresses A and PL
MOD of the actuator to control respectively.
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode. To the MOD position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
It can be used, for EXAMPLE, when the device is directed towards a possible source of The switching ON period is set by connecting numerical configurators 1 to 9 to the AUX
disturbance (window or radiator), and its position cannot be changed. position as shown in the following table:
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Configurator Mode
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
0 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
AUTOMATION mode – GENERIC CONTROL USING AUXILIARY CHANNELS
1 1st level of sensitivity (pulse counter1 - high sensitivity) In this case, the control intended for the actuator is managed by a control device, item
2 2nd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2, which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M
position, activates the actuator with address set in A and PL.
3 3rd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
The communication between the detector and the associated control device item
4 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2 H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
configured in the IR detector by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position
5 1st level of sensitivity (pulse counter1 - high sensitivity) delayed2
and specifying, with numeric configurators 1-9 in the AUX position, the number of the
6 2nd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2 auxiliary channel. Obviously, in order to univocally set the auxiliary channel, also the
7 3rd level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse) delayed2 AUX position of the control must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
9 The device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified Pairing IR radio sensors
channel in the AUX position only when the system is armed 1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red
NOTE: LED comes on.
1) Use the pulse counter function to avoid false alarms caused by thermal variations 3. Press the sensor tamper contact twice.
(radiators etc.). 4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio
2) Feature available on central units produced starting from week 08W06. receiver will go off.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means
that the device memory is full.
AUX 5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2.
This configurator activates the prealarm function and assigns an auxiliary channel (AUX). 6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit.
To enable and use the AUX channels, refer to the description for wired IR detectors. 7. Exit “maintenance” mode.
Cancelling the IR radio sensors
NOTE: When the system is armed, the detector generates a normal burglary alarm.
1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
AUTOMATION – Timed control mode: 2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
Passive IR detectors can generate and send an ON timed control directly to one or more 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
actuators of the automation system. to the radio receiver.
4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
the remote controls are cancelled. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly.
If the pushbutton is released now, only the sensors are cancelled.
5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
off, cancellation has been completed.
6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance” mode.
MQ00055-c-EN 21/10/2013
199
Radio glass-breaking detector
3442
Description
This sensor protects doors and windows and generates an alarm signal in case of unwanted
opening. The device consists of two elements:
- a magnet, to be installed on the window /door, with corresponding bracket/spacer;
Magnet Radio transmitter
- a battery powered radio transmitter with NC contact to be installed on the window/door
frame.
The alarm is generated when, by opening the door or the window, the magnet is moved away
from the corresponding radio transmitter. Up to 3 NC additional contacts can be connected to
the device, protecting 3 more units (doors/windows).
Technical data 1
- Operating temperature: +5 – +40°C (indoor use)
- Radio frequency: 868.35 MHz
- Range: 100 metres free field 5
- Modulation: FSK
Item 3442 meets the essential requirements of directive 1999/5/CE, as it complies with 2
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3 6
3
Dimensional data
120 32
25
Radio transmitter 4
30
Transmitter internal view
Legend
12
37
1 - Additional contact line clamp;
45
Magnet 2 - Configurator socket;
3 - Magnetic contact;
4 - Tamper/learning;
5 - Battery housing;
6 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
exhausted.
MQ00052-c-EN 28/04/2014
200
3442
Configuration
The device requires allocation of the zone it belongs to, the progressive number of the
sensors within the same zone, and the setting of the detection mode, as well as the
possible allocation of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
WARNING: the configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected.
Z
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8
zones. M A
Z N O U
D X
MOD
Configurator
The configurator connected to this socket specify the detection mode associated to the socket
NC contact supplied and any other, max. 3, NC contacts connected to the internal clamp.
Configurator Operating mode

0 Not delayed
2 Delayed(1)
9 The device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position only when the system is armed.
AUX Prealarm function. With the system armed or disarmed, the
device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position. If the zone it belongs to is
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled. Transmitter internal view
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/
HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
The configurator in the AUX socket activates the auxiliary function of the corresponding
auxiliary channel. It therefore enables controlling auxiliary actuator devices, provided
that they have been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
Note: to complete the activations using the relay actuator type HD/HC/ HS/L/N/NT4614
and AM5794 see the appropriate technical sheet.
MQ00052-c-EN 28/04/2014
201
3442
Configuration
Pairing magnetic contacts Cancelling magnetic contacts
1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode. 1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red 2. Remove the power supply from the radio receiver.
LED comes on. 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply to
3. Press the tamper contact twice. the radio receiver.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the receiver 4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED the remote controls are cancelled.
flashes, it means that the device memory is full. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If the pushbutton is released now,
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. only the sensors are cancelled.
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
7. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. off, cancellation has been completed.
8. Exit “maintenance” mode. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
In addition to the standard NC magnetic contact, the sensor can also control the opening
of other optional NC contacts (max. of 3) connected to an appropriate clamp of the Tamper line *
T
transmitting unit, as shown in the following diagram. C
-
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the corresponding magnetic contact, or
any additional magnetic contacts, must be activated within 12 hours from the moment
the device starts operation.
N.C.
Balance resistance
68K Ω
Note (*): short circuit contacts – and T if no tamper line is installed
MQ00052-c-EN 28/04/2014
202
3444
Description
This device generates an alarm signal when the sensor detects the vibrations cause by
the breaking of door or window glass. It consists of two elements:
- a vibration sensor, to be installed on the glass of the door or window to protect;
- a battery powered radio transmitter, to be installed on the frame;
Also supplied is an NC contact with additional magnet for the protection of doors and
windows.
Technical data
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C (indoor use)
Radio Sensor
- Range: 100 metres free field transmitter
- Modulation: FSK
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3
Year of approval of the CE mark in accordance with the above directive: 2007 1
Dimensional data 5
120 32
2
25
6
Radio transmitter
32 9 3
4
32
Sensor
Transmitter internal view
Legend
1 - Sensor connection clamp;
2 - Configurator socket;
3 - Additional Magnetic contact;
4 - Tamper/learning;
6 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is exhausted.
MQ00053-c-EN 28/04/2014
203
3444
Configuration
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected
Z
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 M A
zones. Z N O U
D X
Configurator
MOD socket
The configurator connected to this socket specifies the detection mode associated to the
glass-breaking sensor supplied and the NC contact with additional magnet.

0 Not delayed
2 Delayed(1)
device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified
channel in the AUX position. If the zone it belongs to is Transmitter internal view
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled.
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/
HS/L/N/NT4601.
AUX
MQ00053-c-EN 28/04/2014
204
3444
Configuration
Pairing detectors Cancelling detectors
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the 2. Remove the power supply from the radio receiver.
red LED comes on. 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply to
3. Press the tamper contact twice. the radio receiver.
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED the remote controls are cancelled.
flashes, it means that the device memory is full. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If the pushbutton is released now,
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. only the sensors are cancelled.
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
7. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. off, cancellation has been completed.
8. Exit “maintenance” mode. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
Glass-breaking detector
The sensor must be connected using the transmitting unit as shown in the figure.
Do not extend the probe cable. 1m
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the glass-breaking detector, or any T
additional magnetic contacts, must be activated within 12 hours from the moment the C
-
device starts operation.
Tamper line (*)

T
C
-
To the glass-breaking detector
Note (*): short circuit contacts – and T if no tamper line is installed
MQ00053-c-EN 28/04/2014
205
Radio rolling shutter
opening detector
3445
Description
This device is the radio version of the wired detector, item 3514. It generates an alarm if
anyone attempts to open a rolling shutter.
It consists of two elements:
- a coil guide type rope detector to be fitted to the rolling shutter;
- a battery powered radio transmitter to be installed inside the box of the rolling shutter
or on the frame of the window to be protected.
Also supplied is an NC contact with additional magnet for the protection of doors and
windows.
The alarm is generated when the rope of the detector changes length following an Rope rolling shutter detector
attempt to open the rolling shutter.
Radio transmitter
Technical data
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C (indoor use)
- Range: 100 metres free field
- Modulation: FSK
ETSI EN300 220-3 ETSI EN301 489-3 EN60950 EN50090-2-2 EN50090-2-3
Dimensional data
100 15
120 32 90
ø4
25
Radio transmitter
93
77
Rope rolling shutter detector 17
MQ00054-c-EN 28/04/2014
206
opening detector
3445
Configuration
1
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery
disconnected
Z
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to 2
N
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and M A
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 Z N O U
D X
zones.
Configurator
3 socket
MOD
The configurator connected to this position, specifies the detection mode associated to
the rolling shutter sensor.

0 Not delayed
2 Delayed(1)
device sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified Transmitter internal view
divided, the auxiliary command is disabled.
NOTE(1): function available only with central units item 3485/B, item 3486 and HC/HD/ Legend
HS/L/N/NT4601. 1 - Rope rolling shutter detector connection clamp;
AUX 3 - LED: two red flashes signal an alarm; only one flash indicates that the battery is
The configurator in the AUX socket activates the auxiliary function of the corresponding exhausted.
MQ00054-c-EN 28/04/2014
207
opening detector
3445
Configuration
Pairing detectors Cancelling detectors
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red 2. Remove the power supply from the radio receiver.
LED comes on. 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
2. Press the tamper contact twice. to the radio receiver.
will go off. If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED the remote controls are cancelled. After 10 seconds the LED starts flashing quickly. If
flashes, it means that the device memory is full. the pushbutton is released now, only the sensors are cancelled.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
6. Close the sensors to deactivate the tamper. off, cancellation has been completed.
7. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
8. Exit “maintenance” mode. mode.
Tamper/learning
Wiring diagram
WARNING: For correct operation of the device the rolling shutter detector must be
1,5m activated within 12 hours from the moment the device starts operation.
+
C
-
Rope rolling
shutter detector
battery
Red Green Black

wire wire wire
NOTE: do not extend the cable of the detector.
MQ00054-c-EN 28/04/2014
208
Radio remote control for teleassistance
3448
Description
1
Radio device with three pushbuttons, for sending remote assistance requests.
Pressing the larger pushbutton a radio signal is sent, which is transferred on the BUS of
the Burglar-alarm system through the radio receiver item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618.
The two round pushbuttons are used to configure the device and for resetting (silencing)
the current alarm.
3
Technical data
- Power supply: 3 V lithium battery - type CR2032
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 2
- Range: 100 metres free field Front view
- Modulation: FSK
Legend
Dimensional data 1 - LED: when pressing one key:
• it flashes twice if the battery is charged;
• it flashes once if the battery is exhausted;
2 - Generates an alarm;
48 13
3 - Alarm reset (press for 5 seconds for learning to be performed on the receiver).
60
Configuration
Cancelling remote controls
Pairing remote controls 1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode. 2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply
LED comes on. to the radio receiver.
3. Press one of the round pushbuttons for 5 seconds. 4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio the remote controls are cancelled.
receiver will go off. 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means off, cancellation has been completed.
that the device memory is full. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. mode.
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit.
7. Program the remote controls on the central unit.
8. Exit “maintenance” mode.
MQ00051-c-EN 21/10/2013
209
Radio remote control for teleassistance
3448
Battery replacement
1 2
4 5
6 7 8
MQ00051-c-EN 21/10/2013
210
Relay actuator
3479
Description 1
This device allows to repeat various types of alarms by means of a relay voltage-free
contacts, depending on its configuration.
It can be activated by a technical alarm interface, or by another signal through the
auxiliary channel (AUX).
Normally used for the control of gas/water safety solenoid valves, or third party devices
(telephone diallers, optical notifications, etc.). 2
The internal relay is in positive safety; this means that, in case of tampering, it switches
over the contacts. By modifying the configuration, it is possible to change the safety
mode of the internal relay.
3
Related items
Technical alarm interfaces: 3841 and F483
4
5

Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
Max. absorption: 20 mA 2. Configurator socket
Contact output: 24 V 1 A cosφ 0.4 3. LED indicating activated relay.
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C 4. Relay contact
5. Tamper line
Configuration
The relay actuator requires the allocation of the progressive number within the group of
auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface) installed within the
system, of the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit.
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so
on for a maximum of 9 auxiliaries.
AUX and MOD

In combination the configurators in the AUX and MOD sockets assign the operating
mode on the basis of the following table.
Opertating mode
Configurators Description It activates by... It resets by...

AUX MOD
none none Repetition of the siren alarm Siren activation Silencing
none 1 System fault notification Activators red LED notification
none 2 System status notification Activation Deactivation
MQ00483-b-EN 22/04/2014
211
Relay actuator
3479
“Auxiliary” operating mode

AUX MOD
none 3 Signalling with memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical alarm
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling with interface with AUX configurator from 1 to 9
memory of any technical alarm.
1-9 3 Signalling with memory of the activation of the corresponding Technical alarm interface with pressure of the needle key on the interface of the
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling with memory of corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
a specific technical alarm.
none 4 Signalling without memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical alarm
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling without interface with AUX configurator from 1 to 9
memory of any technical alarm.
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling without memory corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
of a specific technical alarm.
5 As mode 3 but with relay normally not excited.
NOTES
- Modes 5 and 6 give the same operating results of modes 3 and 4. Their difference is that the relay is - The “S” key of the 3 module flush-mounted central unit or the disabling of the central unit with display,
normally not excited. This enables an opposite behaviour in case of tampering (cutting of the wire which main function is that of silencing the sirens during a technical alarm, disables the relay if this has
or BUS short circuit). In fact in mode 3 and 4 a tampering excites the device (modes indicated in been activated by the technical alarm interface configured in mode “0” or “4” (technical alarm).
the case of actuation of alarms such as the siren, the telephone communicator, etc.); however, in
mode 5 and 6 the same tampering does not cause any actuation (modes indicated in case of safety - In all modes there is an auxiliary activation also in case of pre-alarm (IR detector and contact interface
actuations such as electrical door locks etc.). The selection of the appropriate mode ensures total with AUX configurators). Attention must therefore be paid when using the relay actuator (in modes with
system safety. memory or with sensitivity to any auxiliary channel) to avoid unwanted activations.
EXAMPLE: Activation of the solenoid valve in case of gas leak

Relay actuator configuation: Technical alarm interface configuration
Configurator position Value Configurator position Value
N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Burglar alarm BUS
Technical alarm
interface
Gas detector
Axolute
Livinglight
Matix
A – +
Relay
actuator
Alarm reset
Transformer
12 Vac
to the gas detector

Solenoid valve
MQ00483-b-EN 22/04/2014
212
Contact interface
3480
Description
1
This interface is used to connect 2 independent contact lines that can be balanced by
means of a resistance, and which tripping can be delayed, as well as one tampering
protection line. It can be used to achieve centralisation of all interfaces inside junction
7 2
boxes. A LED on the interface confirms appropriate operation of the device during the
system test procedure, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm system, when the system
is armed. This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to a sensor 3
line (that can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed)
requiring 12V V power supply.
4
6
5
Front view

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. BUS;
- Max. absorption: 5 mA 2. Configurator socket;
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 3. Line activated LED;
4. Contact line 2;
5. Contact line 1;
Dimensional data
6. Tamper line;
- Size: 2 Basic modules 7. Anti-tamper device.
Configuration
This interface module requires - for each of the two contact lines separate from each Z1
other - the allocation of the assigned zone Z, the progressive number N of the detectors N1
situated in the same zone, the setup of the MOD protection mode of the contact line. MOD1
Z2
Z1 N2
T - C1 - C2
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC/NO magnetic MOD2
contact connected to line 1.
Configurator 1 gives the contact the assignment to zone 1, configurator 2 gives the
assignment to zone 2 and so forth, up to a maximum of 8 zones.
Z2
As above, for contacts connected to line 2.
T C2 C1
N1
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the NC magnetic contact within the
zone determined in position Z1.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 contacts for each of the 8 zones.
N2
As above, for contacts connected to line 2 (zone Z2).
MOD1 and MOD2

In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines.
The interface can operate in two modes:
- as interface for the management of alarm contacts, system connection
pushbutton, and auxiliary channel generation;
- as interface for the management of technical alarms.
MQ00045-d-EN 28/04/2014
213
Contact interface
3480
Configuration
Managing alarms/system arming/auxiliary channel generation management
In this mode, two independent contact lines can be connected to the interface. The
corresponding addresses must be specified in positions Z1, N1, and Z2, N2. 1
The configurator in position MOD1 and MOD2 specifies the type of contact for the 9
generation of the alarm, as per the following table:
Configurator Sensor connected
none NC contact
1 NC contact - balanced
Tamper line
2 NC contact - delayed (1)
3 NC contact – delayed and balanced (1)
4 Contact NC and contact status forwarding
5 Contact NC balanced and contact status forwarding N.C. 68 Kohm
6 Contact NC delayed and contact status forwarding P

7 Contact NC delayed balanced and contact status forwarding N.O.
8 NO contact
9 NO contact for system arming from remote N.O. pushbutton (2) Alarm contacts mode: management of a balanced NC contact line with N.O.
system arming pushbutton
AUX NC contact – forwarding of contact status (3)
Notes:
(1) Follows the delay set on the central unit:
this function is only available with central units item 3486, 3485/B, item
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601, 067520 and 573934/35. With central units item
L/N/NT4600/4 the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set (see
the central unit configuration).
(2) The system is activated when the pushbutton is pressed for a minimum period of 3
seconds.
(3) This operating mode does not generate an alarm signal, but a contact status signal,
useful for Automation and Temperature control applications (automatic switching
off of the heating system when a window is open).
Technical alarms management

8
In this mode, the interface can only manage one contact line connected to the C1 3
and clamp, to which the NC or NO contact for the generation of the technical alarm
is connected. A NO pushbutton for resetting the generated technical alarm, can be
connected to the - and C2 clamps of the second line. The Z and N address of the interface
must only be specified in the positions Z1 and N1.
Selection of the alarm contact:
Water detector
(N.O. contact)
Configurator Type of contact
in MOD1 position
none NC contact P
8 NO contact
Alarm reset
When a technical alarm with intermittent sound of the indoor siren is generated, it will Technical alarms mode: management of a water detection probe. If flooding occurs,
also be possible to generate an Auxiliary signal. The channel of the Auxiliary signal is a sound alarm will be generated by an internal siren, and a signal will be sent to
defined by the numeric value of configurator 1 to 9 entered in the position MOD2. If the auxiliary channel no. 3. To reset the alarm press the P pushbutton.
OFF configurator is entered in this position, no auxiliary channel is generated (only the
technical alarm with intermittent sound of the siren).
MQ00045-d-EN 28/04/2014
214
Contact interface
3480
Energy saving management with Temperature control

- Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control
If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to optimise system: in this case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system
energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: BUS only, and communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the
F422 interface.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
connected to the temperature control BUS. It autonomously and independently features of the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
manages the two C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used must be configured, and not be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
both of them. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD1 and/or MOD2 contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
sockets. Then configure the [Z1/2] and [N1/2] sockets, in order to assign the address actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control
from 1 to 99 to the device within the system. zone must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer
The coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
must be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to
the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
BUS
Tamper line
N.C. N.C. N.C.
Balance resistance
68 kΩ ±5% 1/4 W
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded
cable.
N.C. N.C. N.C.
Balance resistance NOTE: It is recommended to install the

68 kΩ ±5% 1/4 W Unshielded 68 kΩ ±5% 1/4 W balancing resistance in
twisted cable correspondence with the last line contact.
Used for managing a technical alarm
(*) The N.C. pushbutton can be replaced by a NO pushbutton. The type of BUS
pushbutton activating the alarm is defined through the configuration of the MOD1
position of the device.
It is possible to also connect a water detection probe, as well as NC/NO contacts for
smoke or gas detectors. For the water detection probe use item 3482.
N.C. pushbutton (*)
N.O. pushbutton
Technical alarm activation
Alarm Reset
MQ00045-d-EN 28/04/2014
215
Contact interface
3480
Flooding alarm management
BUS
N. O. pushbutton
Tamper line
Alarm Reset
Probe item 3482
MQ00045-d-EN 28/04/2014
216
12 v contact interface
3480V12
Description
1
This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to a sensor line (that
can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed) requiring
12 V power supply.
Produced in the basic modular version, the device can be used when centralizing all the
interfaces in junction boxes. A LED on the device confirms the appropriate operation
of the same during the system test procedure, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm 2
system, when the system is armed.
7
Technical data
3
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
Max. absorption: 5 mA to which the absorption of the sensor
connected must be added
Output: 12 V Max 50 mA
6 4
Dimensional data 5
Size: 2 Basic modules
Configuration Legend
The interface requires the allocation of the zone Z it belongs to, of the N progressive 1. BUS;
number of the sensors within the same zone, and the setting of the MOD contact line 2. Configurator socket;
protection mode. 3. Line activated LED;
4. 12 V power line;
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC magnetic contact 5. C contact line;
connected to line 1. 6. Tamper line;
7. Device tamper protection against opening
N1
MOD
In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the line. it is possible
to create a balanced and unbalanced protection line, with the possibility of generating
the alarm with a delay, as for zone 1. For the details of the various operating modes, refer
to the table below.
MOD
MQ00480-b-EN 24/04/2014
217
3480V12
Configuration
Configurator Sensor connected Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors
none NC contact Configurator Sensor connected Pulses (*)
1 NC contact - balanced 8 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 12 (approx 20 cm)
2 NC contact - delayed * delayed*
3 NC contact - delayed * - balanced 9 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 25 (approx 45 cm)
4 NC contact and AUX event generation delayed*
5 Balanced NC contact and AUX event generation
Note (*): Follows the delay set on the central unit:
6 Delayed NC contact and AUX event generation this function is operative only with central units with display. With flush mounted 3
7 Balanced delayed NC contact and AUX event generation module central units, the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set
(see central unit configuration).
Note (**): pulses generated by the sensor depending on the degree of opening of the
window, in cm, before the alarm is generated.

If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to - Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control system: in this
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system BUS only, and
communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the F422 interface.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly connected The interface must be configured in Z and N following the requirements and features of
to the temperature control BUS It autonomously and independently manages the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must be connected to
the contact line. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD sockets. the MOD position, corresponding to the management of NC contacts with generation
Then configure the Z and N sockets, in order to assign the address from 1 to 99 to of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the actual coupling between the
the device within the system. The coupling between the interface contact line and interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using the
the temperature control zone must be performed using the TiThermo application. TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control
For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide. guide.
Wiring diagram
1
Twisted, unshielded cable, with 30 metre

maximum length.
Sensor tamper
N.C. N.C. N.C.
Balance resistance
100 kΩ ± 5% 1/4 W * N.C. N.C. N.C.
* Do not install more than 3 rope sensors on each line
MQ00480-b-EN 24/04/2014
218
3480V12
Connection with IR 3518 - 3518/50 - 3518/150 - 3519 barriers
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
Reset
JP10
LED COM T COM C + -
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to one interface only.
WARNING: use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded cable.
MQ00480-b-EN 24/04/2014
219
3480V12
Installation
The maximum length of the interface connection line depends on the absorption of the connected loads, as for the following table
Siren Siren
4072L 4072A
Power supply Power supply

E46ADCN E47ADCN
B
A
Interface Interface
Absorption of the loads connected to the interfaces Maximum distance

A B
50 mA
100 mA 175 (*)
(2 interfaces with maximum load on the same line)
150 mA 175
150 (*)
200 mA
Note (*): this configuration requires the use of 2 sirens, item 4072L.
In case of extension of an existing system (for which it is not possible to know the exact
distances, and how many devices are connected to the BUS line the interface must be
connected to), it is necessary to perform the following test, to check that it is suitable
to install the interface:
1 Switch the system to maintenance mode

2 Connect the interface to the load to power
3 Measure the BUS voltage at the extremities of the interface
4 If the voltage exceeds 25 V, installation is possible
5 If the voltage is below 25 V, a dedicated cable must be connected to the interface.
MQ00480-b-EN 24/04/2014
220
Technical alarm interface
3481
Description
1
The technical alarm interface is used to receive signals from the outside (normally
analogue signals, like the closing/opening of a contact), converting them into digital
information for the BUS.
This information gives the possibility of differentiating between alarm notifications,
like the activation of the siren, or the telephone dialler, or the closure of the gas/water
solenoid valve. 2
The functions described can be obtained using a dedicated communication line between
the devices of the burglar alarm system, called auxiliary channel.
Up to 9 auxiliary channels are available for each system.
They are assigned by configuration of the device(s).
3
Related items
Relay actuator: F481 and 3479
Technical data
Max. absorption: 6 mA 6 4
5
Dimensional data
The technical alarm interface module requires the allocation of the progressive number 1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
within the group of auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface), 2. Configurator socket
the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes. 3. Line activated LED
N° 4. External sensor connection clamp
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit. 5. Traditional external sensor connection clamp
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on 6. Reset pushbutton connection
for a maximum of 9 auxiliaries.
AUX and MOD
In combination the configurators in the AUX and MOD sockets assign the operating mode
on the basis of the following table.
Activation from the technical alarm interface
Configurators
Description
AUX MOD
none none Technical alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
Internal siren (MOD 0 or 2) sounds intermittently until one of the following events occurs:
a) there is no longer an alarm;
b) the alarm is reset using the menu of central units with display (with central unit L/N/NT4600/4 press “S”);
c) the reset pushbutton connected to the interface is pressed.
none 2 Anti-panic alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition.
Is silenced with the remote control.
none 4 Technical alarm with normally open (NO) contact
MQ00485-b-EN 22/04/2014
221
3481
Configurators
Relay opertating mode (description)
AUX MOD
1-9 none Technical alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel.
1-9 1 Anti-burglary automation with NC contact
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel without interfering with the status of the burglar-alarm system, therefore without
generating signals or alarms.
1-9 2 Anti-panic alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition. Is silenced with the remote control.
1-9 3 Connection between burglar-alarm and auxiliary channels (LINK)
It generates and activation of the corresponding auxiliary channel following a burglary/tampering alarm.
1-9 4 Technical alarm with NO contact and activation of the auxiliary channel

Relay actuator configuration: Technical alarm interface configuration
N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Burglar alarm BUS
Technical alarm
interface
3481
Gas detector
Relay actuator
A – +
3479
Alarm reset
Transformer
12 Vac
To the gas detector
Solenoid valve
Note: It is recommended that the GAS sensor and the interface are checked for correct installation and wiring, following the instructions supplied with the sensor itself;
the interface sends the alarm notification within the timescales set for the activation of the alarm repeater.
If a technical alarm is generated upon powering the sensor while the interface is already powered, there is a wiring error in lines + A
MQ00485-b-EN 22/04/2014
222
Alarm radio remote control
348220
Description
Radio wave control device recommended for all those installations where an exposed control
4
device is not desired.
It can also used with the video door entry system, to control accesses. 1 2
The remote control must be used with the radio receiver item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4618.
Technical data
- Power supply: 3 V lithium battery - type CR2032
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C
- Minimum battery duration: 2 years Front view
- Radio frequency: 868.35 MHz 3
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage) Legend
- Modulation: FSK 1 - Arming pushbutton;
2 - Disarming pushbutton;
3 - Key-ring;
4 - Control forwarding notification LED.
Dimensional data
48 13
60
Configuration
Pairing remote controls Cancelling remote controls
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red 2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
LED comes on. 3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply to
3. Press the arming pushbutton for 5 seconds. the radio receiver.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio 4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
receiver will go off. the remote controls are cancelled.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means 5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
that the device memory is full. off, cancellation has been completed.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2. 6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit. mode.
7. Program the remote controls on the central unit.
MQ00050-c-EN 28/04/2014
223
Alarm radio remote control
348220
Battery replacement
1 2
4 5
6 7 8
MQ00050-c-EN 28/04/2014
224
Advanced central unit
with telephone communicator 573935 (White) 067520
573934 (Magnesium) 3485
Description
1
The central unit has the function of supervising the burglar-alarm system, enabling the
management of the zone sensors independent from one another.
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs.
It’s fitted with built-in telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case
of alarm, or to check the status of the system using a fixed or mobile phone, when away
from home. Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement
devices, it is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the
intruder. 5 6
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an 7
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection of the property (for this service
consult the installer).
Main functions 3 8
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator;
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 2
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad;
- independent management of each sensor;
- can be programmed by PC;
- detailed event memory and alarm only memory;
- customisation of alarm messages; Front view 4
- phone book for sending alarms;
- connection with surveillance central unit using the “Ademco Contact ID” protocol, with
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters; Legend
- blocking for 1 minute the possibility of arming or disarming, or access to the navigation
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or 1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
transponder); and the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones; 2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit commands directly from the transponder keys.
keypad; 3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
the surveillance central unit; 4 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by means
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon of telephone.
is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; 5 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad. 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
programming operations.
Management of burglar-alarm functions 7 - OK key: to confirm the programming operations.
8 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages.
The central unit manages a total of 10 zones:
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9);
Telephone communicator
- zones from 1 to 8 are reserved for the sensors;
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.). - Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home automation
It performs the following functions: system;
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to - if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone
give the alarm; numbers previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what
- zones from 1 to 8 can be separated as the user requires; type of event has happened;
- up to 16 division scenarios can be created and activated depending on needs; - it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the the automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
use of the key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band; - the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system telephone;
has recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion - it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service
alarm); available, for example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display. download the history of events;
- it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units,
using the Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.
MQ00022-c-EN 24/04/2014
225
573934 (Magnesium) 3485
Legend
1 2 - Tamper line (see note);
3 - T1 local tamper;
4 - Reset key;
5 - Serial connector for PC programming;
9 6 - Burglar alarm BUS;
8 7 - ON/OFF slide switch;
8 - Telephone line OUT;
9 - Telephone line IN.
2
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for the use
3 of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
7 4
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
6 5 - Max. absorption: 55 (stand by) – 90 mA
Rear view
- Installation: wall mounted
Articoli correlati:
681 82 (White Cover)
Dimensional data
684 82 (Titanium Cover)
801 24 (Flush-mounting box) Size (H,L,D): 128x125x25 mm
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the Ademco Contact ID functionality
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, TiSecurity POLYX. Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
Software configuration bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID
modification, or save it as a backup copy. The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit. - Anti-panic alarm
- Anti-burglary alarm
- General intrusion alarm
- Tamptest (device interconnection alarm)
- Device tampering alarm
- No power supply
- System battery faulty
- Activation / deactivation / cancellation*
- Sensor deactivation
- Periodical functionality test (routine check of the telephone line and the installation)
NOTE*: cancellation is the silencing of an alarm following the disarming of the system itself.
In this case the event is sent to the vigilance body, which can therefore check if it’s been
caused by a tampering attempt.
Relating to the technical alarms:

- Fire alarm (AUX=8)
- Gas leak alarm (AUX=1)
- Freezer alarm (AUX=2)
- Flooding alarm (AUX=3)
- Remote assistance alarm (AUX=9)
- Auxiliary device tampering (Z=9)
For every event, where required, the origin of the alarm is also forwarded, in terms of zone
and device.
MQ00022-c-EN 24/04/2014
226
573934 (Magnesium) 3485
Wiring diagram
It is good practice to protect the system from lightning by using surge protective devices, connect the corresponding earth clamp with the “earth” reference of the SPD discharger
SPD, belonging to class II, as per the diagram shown. installed in the apartment distribution board (see diagram). The connection shall have as
In particular, to protect the burglar-alarm central unit from overvoltage from the low an impedance as possible, and will be performed using a conductor with minimum
telephone line, the use of the appropriate PLT1 device is recommended, taking care to section of 2.5 mm2, and maximum length of 30 metres.
Riser distribution board Apartment distribution board

Power meter
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
to the electric
S type earth system
leakage SPD1 SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
Advanced central unit with telephone communicator
MQ00022-c-EN 24/04/2014
227
Base central unit
3485B
Description
1
It is possible to save up to 4 activation scenarios and use them based on actual needs.
The device can manage up to 10 automations split as follows:
- 1 actuated using an internal relay and coupled with intrusion events, technical alarms,
or system status;
- 9 coupled with arming, disarming, date and time events, to generate separation 4 6
scenarios.
5
Main functions 3
- System self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 2

- can be controlled by transponder and keypad (20 keys maximum);
- local contact in addition to those already present on the system (configurable);
Front view
- possibility of updating the firmware using the PC;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times; Legend
- association of a user set name to scenarios (max. 4), sensors and zones;
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations and
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit
the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
keypad;
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off commands
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling
directly from the transponder keys.
icon is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated;
3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
- division of the zones directly from the central unit keypad;
operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
- presence of a local automation and signalling relay.
4 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
5 - OK key: to confirm the programming operations.
Management of burglar-alarm functions 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
The central unit manages a total of 6 zones;
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9); Technical data
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.).
- Max. absorption: 50 mA
Performs the following functions:
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to
- Load of local relay contacts: 12/24 V – 1 A
give the alarm;
- zones from 1 to 4 can be separated as the user requires;
- up to 4 division scenarios can be created and activated depending on needs;
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display; Dimensional data
- an automation can be coupled to the detection of a certain alarm, using the local relay: Size (H,L,D): 128x125x25 mm
for example, the switching on of a light, to confuse the intruder.
MQ00023-c-EN 24/04/2014
228
Base central unit
3485B
Legend
1 2 - Local contact;
3 - Tamper line (see note);
4 - T1 local tamper;
5 - Reset key;
6 - Firmware update serial connector;
7 - Burglar alarm BUS;
8 - ON/OFF slide switch;
2
9 - Relay for automation in case of alarm.
9 3
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for
4 the use of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
8 5
7 6
Rear view
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, either TiSecurity Example
Basic. Example of configuration performed on the central unit.
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. - Detection of devices
MAINTENANCE
Language
Software configuration Key program
The program enables acquiring the configuration on the central unit, saving it in a file to System test
Learning
be used to reinstate the configuration of the same, or to configure other central units. It
is also possible to update the permanent software of the central unit using new versions Select
published by BTicino. Learning
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Press OK to confirm
LEARNING
After pressing OK, the
zone: 0 num.: 1 following screen appears
type: not exist
tamper: OFF
automatic
Press OK to start learning
Learning
ended
no problem
Vuoi inviare la
c o n f i g uNEXT
razione a
dispositivi di
(See
v i sthe
u amanual
l i z z aof
z ithe
o ncentral
e? unit)
invia = OK
non invia = CLEAR
Predisporre
l’impianto
MQ00023-c-EN 24/04/2014
alla
configurazione
invia = OK
non invia = CLEAR 229
Standard burglar-alarm central unit
with telephone communicator
3485STD
Description 1
management of the zone sensors independent from one another. The device has two rear
terminals for connecting 2 separate contact lines.
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs.
It’s fitted with built-in telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case
of alarm, or to check the status of the system using a fixed or mobile phone, when away
from home. Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement
devices, it is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the 5 6
intruder. 7
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection.
3 8
Main functions
2
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator;
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display;
- local contact programming via menu;
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad;
Front view 4
- customisation of alarm messages; Legend
- phone book for sending alarms;
- connection with surveillance central unit using the “Ademco Contact ID” protocol, with 1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters; and the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
- blocking for 1 minute the possibility of arming or disarming, or access to the navigation 2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or commands directly from the transponder keys.
transponder); 3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones; operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols.
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit 4 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by
keypad; means of telephone.
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to 5 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
the surveillance central unit; 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon programming operations.
is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; 7 - OK key: to confirm the programming operations.
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad. 8 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages.
Management of burglar-alarm functions Telephone communicator PSTN
The central unit manages a total of 10 zones: - Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9); automation system;
- zones from 1 to 8 are reserved for the sensors; - if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.). numbers previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what
It performs the following functions: type of event has happened;
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to - it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to
give the alarm; the automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
- zones from 1 to 8 can be separated as the user requires; - the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by
- up to 16 division scenarios can be created and activated depending on needs; telephone;
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the - it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service
use of the key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band; available, for example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system download the history of events;
has recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion - it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units,
alarm); using the Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display.
The central unit can be paired with the GSM/PSTN gateway (Art. 3489GSM) if you want
to use the telephone communicator via a GSM network, as an alternative to a traditional
phone line connection.
BQ01001-a-EN 05/06/2014
230
3485STD
Legend
2 - Tamper line (see note);
1 3 - T1 local tamper;
4 - Reset key;
5 - Serial connector for PC programming;
6 - Burglar alarm BUS;
9 b
a 7 - ON/OFF slide switch;
8 b
9 - Telephone line IN.
_
10 - Local contacts terminal
C
2
10 1 T1
2
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for the
3 use of the T1 local tamper (wall mounted installation on metal base).
7
OFF
4
Technical data
ON
BUS

- Max. absorption: 55 (stand by) – 90 mA
6 5
Rear view
Dimensional data
Size (H,L,D): 128x125x25 mm
Configuration
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, TiSecurity Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
Standard. with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
Software configuration available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
modification, or save it as a backup copy. - Anti-panic alarm
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit. - Anti-burglary alarm
- No power supply

and device.
BQ01001-a-EN 05/06/2014
231
3485STD
Wiring diagram

Power meter
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
to the electric
S type earth system
leakage SPD1 SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
a b
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
b
a
b
C1 _
C
1 T1
2
C2
OFF
ON
BUS
Standard central unit with telephone communicator
BQ01001-a-EN 05/06/2014
232
3486
Description
1 2 3 9
management of the zone sensors independent from one another. It is possible to save up
to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the needs. It’s fitted with built-in
telephone communicator for sending a telephone message in case of alarm, or to check the
status of the system when away from home, using a fixed or mobile phone.
Thanks to the integration with rolling shutter and light switching on movement devices, it
is possible to program automations that activate in case of alarm, to confuse the intruder.
The central unit is also capable of communicating with vigilance bodies through an
appropriate protocol, further increasing the level of protection of the property (for this service
consult the installer).
Main functions 8 OK
- Burglar-alarm central unit with combined telephone communicator (on GSM and PSTN line); 7 CLEAR
- system self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 1 2 3

- can be controlled by IR remote control, transponder and keypad; 4 5 6
- independent management of each sensor; 7 8 9
6 0
- customisation of alarm messages;
- phone book for sending alarms; Front view 5 4
- connection with surveillance central unit using the “Ademco Contact ID” protocol, with
the possibility of remote setting of Ademco parameters;
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times (from keypad or Legend
transponder); 1 - Loudspeaker: can listen to the recorded messages and play voice messages in the
- association of a set user name to scenarios, sensors and zones; room by means of the telephone;
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit 2 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
keypad; and the events which have occurred;
- possibility of sending a test call, with programmable delay, to the MY HOME Portal, or to 3 - IR receiver: receives the switching on and off commands sent by the burglar-alarm
the surveillance central unit; system remote control;
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling icon is 4 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; commands directly from the transponder keys;
- division of the zones directly from the Central unit keypad. 5 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
operations which require the use of numbers and/or symbols;
Management of burglar-alarm functions 6 - Microphone: used to record the messages and listen to the room remotely by means
of telephone;
The central unit manages a total of 10 zones:
7 - CLEAR key: exit the current menu and the programming;
- Zone 0 is reserved for the acivators (max. 9);
8 - Navigation keypad: navigate inside the menu, confirms or cancels the
programming operations;
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/auxiliaries (gas detector etc.);
9 - GSM antenna with cable L = 1.5 metres: to be positioned upon verification of
Performs the following functions:
GSM signal reception.
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to give the
alarm; Telephone communicator
- zones from 1 to 8 can be separated as the user requires;
- Allows two-way communication between the user and the My Home home automation system:
- if the burglar-alarm system has detected an alarm, it automatically dials the telephone numbers
- a specific division can be coupled to each key (max. 50). It is also possible to limit the use of the
previously programmed by the user and gives a voice message to say what type of event has
key to certain days of the week, and to a specific time band;
happened;
- automatic devices can be operated as the user requires, if the burglar-alarm system has
- it can be called by the user who, by means of predefined codes, can send commands to the
recorded an event (e.g. switch on the lights in the zone where there is an intrusion alarm);
automation system and to the burglar-alarm system;
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display.
- the user can find out the state of the burglar-alarm and automation system by telephone;
- it lets you connect to the My Home portal and makes the My Home web service available, for
example the remote assistance service as well as the possibility to download the history of events;
- it enables automatic forwarding of alarm and event signallings to surveillance units, using the
Contact ID protocol, as well as the request and setting of its parameters.
MQ00021-c-EN 24/04/2014
233
3486
Legend
1 3 - Telephone line IN;
4 - Reset key;
12 5 - T1 local tamper;
2
3 6 - Tamper line (see note);
11 7 - Burglar alarm BUS;
4 8 - MY HOME sound system BUS;
9 - SIM card housing;
10 - Serial connector for PC programming (with cable item 335919 or item 3559);
10 11 - Battery housing (item 3507/6);
5 12 - GSM antenna connector.
NOTE: The central unit is supplied with the clamps (-/T1) of the Tamper line shorted for
6 the use of the local tamper T1 (wall mounted installation on metal base); For installations
inside MULTIBOX boxes ensure the connection of a NC circuit breaker to the -/T1 clamps for
7 the tamper function; alternatively, short clamps -/T2. In this case the central unit will not be
protected from tampering.
Technical data
8 - Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
9
- Max. absorption: 50 (stand by) – 120 mA
- Installation: wall mounted or Multibox switchboard
Rear view
Dimensional data
Size (H,L,D): 210x210x30 mm
Configuration
device itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software, either TiSecurity Ademco contact ID is a particular communication protocol operating on a telephone line
GSM. For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the with DTMF touch tone. Using this protocol, it is possible to set a one-way communication
products. between the burglar-alarm central units and the vigilance bodies. In this way, vigilance
bodies can receive information concerning the type of event/alarm generated and, if
Software configuration available, the details of the peripheral from where it generated.
The program can be used to easily customise all parameters of the Central unit. It is Events that can be managed using the Ademco Contact ID
possible to receive the current configuration from the Central unit, change it and send The Ademco Contact ID events managed by the central unit are the following:
any changes made to the Central unit, save the configuration to a file for subsequent Relating to the burglar-alarm system:
modification, or save it as a backup copy. - Anti-panic alarm
For further information refer to the software manual supplied with the central unit. - Anti-burglary alarm
- No power supply
and device.
MQ00021-c-EN 24/04/2014
234
3486
Wiring diagram

Power meter
SPD coordination
(if necessary)
to the electric
S type earth system
leakage SPD1 SPD2
max. 30 m
Local line
Advanced central unit with telephone

communicator
MQ00021-c-EN 24/04/2014
235
GSM/PSTN gateway
3489GSM
Description front view

This device, thanks to the GSM telephone network, enables using the functions of the
PSTN telephone communicator, which equips the burglar-alarm central units, even in
places where the analog telephone network is not available or it is not cost-effective
to activate it.
The gateway is connected to the "Phone Line OUT" terminal of the burglar-alarm central
unit and simulates a PSTN analog telephone line, forwarding alarm calls via the GSM
network to the numbers stored in the central unit.
3 LEDs indicate the operating status of the gateway after powering up:
Correct Roaming / 5 1
LED PIN prompt
state Virtual Operator
ity
s
Statu
Activ
GSM
Activity On On Flashing
GSM Flashing / On 1
Off Flashing
Status Flashing On Flashing 4 3 2
1
Indicates the quality of the GSM signal.
side view 6 7 8 9
The device, regardless of whether there is an alarm central unit, can also be used for
telephone or fax devices if there is no analog telephone line.
TEL1 TEL2 USB PWR
Main functions:
- conversion of the quad-band GSM telephone line into PSTN;
- back-up battery for operation in the event of the main power supply failing;
- configuration of SMS warning messages; ANTENNA
- battery status notices via SMS (charge, low battery warning, main power failure
warning).
Legend
Technical data 1. side socket for SIM
2. Status LED: indicates the operating status of the device.
Power supply: 12VDC / 1A via power supply unit provided
3. GSM LED: gives information on the quality of the GSM signal.
Operating temperature: from 0°C to +45°C
4. Activity LED: indicates the back-up battery status.
Back-up battery life: 3 hours (standby)
5. side ON/OFF switch
1.5 hours (talk time)
6. RJ11 connectors for burglar-alarm central unit connection
7. SMA/f connector for GSM antenna
8. USB connector for updates
9. Power supply connector
Dimensions
Height: 115 mm
Width: 80 mm
Depth: 45 mm
BQ01000-a-EN 05/06/2014
236
GSM/PSTN gateway
3489GSM
Wiring diagram
GSM antenna
RJ11
3489GSM
PRI
gateway
E49
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
185 – 175 mA
50/60 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
SCS
SIM
ity
Status
Activ
GSM
3485STD burglar-alarm central unit
b
a
PSTN line b
telephone C
1
_
T1
devices 2
Magnetic contacts line

OFF
ON
BUS
Burglar alarm BUS
Warning: It is recommended to use only one RJ11 jack for the 3489GSM gateway to
ensure calling in the event of an alarm.
The telephone devices, such as telephones or fax units must be connected "down-
stream" of the burglar-alarm central unit (see wiring diagram).
BQ01000-a-EN 05/06/2014
237
Magnetic contacts
3510M 043100 043101 043108
3510 3510PB 3511 3512 3513
Description
Magnetic sensors are normally installed on the top side of windows or doors, opposite Magnet Contact
Magnet
to the hinges, so that even with small forced openings, the distance created between
the two components (magnet and reed contact) will be enough to cause an alarm. The
electromagnetic sensors included in the offer are of the NC contact and protection line
type. Contact
Protection
line
Flush mounted installation sensor, item 3510 and item 3510M
These cylindrical sensors have been purposely designed for Flush mounted installation,
as shown in the figure, for doors and windows with small sections. Sensor item 3510
is suitable for wooden doors and windows; sensor item 3510M is made of brass, has NC contact
high mechanical resistance, and is suitable of all types of non ferromagnetic doors and
windows (wood, PVC, aluminium).
Flush mounted installation sensor, item 3510PB Magnet Contact

These cylindrical sensors of large diameter (20 mm) have an enhanced magnet, and have
been purposely designed for Flush mounted installation in reinforced doors, doors, and Magnet
large entrance doors, of any material. Contact
Sensor for exposed installation, item 3511 Protection

When Flush mounted installation is not possible, this type of sensor may be used. White line
in colour, and very small in size, it is designed for exposed installation. It can be used
both on wood and plastic, but also on non ferrous metal doors and windows, such as
aluminium ones. This magnetic sensor has a NC contact and protection line. NC contact
Sensors for doors made of ferrous metal, item 3512 and 3513
Made of metal, and intended for installation on ferrous metal doors and windows. The
item 3512 sensor is suitable for the protection of sliding or tilting garage doors. thanks to
its die-cast aluminium structure capable of withstanding the passage of vehicles, it can Contact
be set on the floor. The connection cables are protected by steel sheathing.
item 3513 sensor can be used on sheet steel doors, such as those of cellars and
warehouses, and on ferrous metal doors and windows.
Protection
line
Configuration
Sensors do not require configuration.
NC contact
Contact
Contatto
Magnet
MQ00041-c-EN 21/10/2013
238
Magnetic contacts
3510M 043100 043101 043108
3510 3510PB 3511 3512 3513
Dimensional data
Magnet
3511
Reed
contact
enclosure
3513 3510
3510PB
3510M
Maximum distances from the magnet and the contact

Steel door Other doors
A 40 40
B 35 50
3512
MQ00041-c-EN 21/10/2013
239
Rolling shutter detector
3514
Description
This device can protect rolling shutters, or similar winding devices, and is made up of a 1
reel-type cable detector to be positioned in the shutter box.
The end of the cable, which can be extended up to 3.1 metres, is fastened to the base of
the rolling shutter. The device features a “movement/time excursion” cycle designed to
avoid false alarms due to accidental movements of the rolling shutter due to vibrations,
slow sliding and blasts of wind.
This detector is recommended to provide perimeter protection because it offers the
advantage of giving the alarm when the thief tries to lift the rolling shutter and thus
before he enters the home.
In order to use the detector, use the contact interface item HC/HS/HD/L/N/NT4612/12 or 2
item F482, which can control the impulses generated by the detector itself in case the
rolling shutter is forced open.
3
Configuration Front view

The sensor does not require configuration.

1 - Cable detector;
100 15
2 - BUS;
90 3 - Cable to be fastened to the rolling shutter.
ø4
93
77
3514 17
Wiring diagram
Balanced line
Max. 3 detectors
item 3514
Possible
Tamper
line
10.5 V
burglar alarm BUS Max. 30m
35mA
MQ00042-c-EN 21/10/2013
240
Glass-breaking detector
3516
Description
This glass breaking detector is positioned on the window to be protected using the
double-sided adhesive tape supplied. The break, or even a strong shock against the glass,
causes the emission of a noise with characteristic frequency which the piezoelectric
detector captures. A specific electronic circuit generates the alarm signal which is
interpreted by the contact interface (any for flush mounted installation or 3480 or F482)
to which the detector must be connected. Sensor
For proper operation, do not connect more than three detectors in series to the clamps item 3516
of the interface.
Technical data
- Resistance: typical (normally closed): 14 Ω (max. 24)
in alarm (open): min. 1 MΩ
- Opening in alarm: 1-10 sec.
- Max. circuit voltage: 15 Vcc
- Max. circuit current: 15 mA
- Lightning suppression: 400 W per 1 m/sec.
- Operating temperature: (-18) – (50)°C
- Sensitivity: factory-set
- Fastening method: High adherence acrylic tape Contact interface
Configuration Burglar alarm BUS

40
The sensor does not require configuration.
Wiring diagram Dimensional data
120 32
Max 32 9
105
20m
Z
N°
25
32
AUX
T C
BUS
Max. no. 3
detectors in series
MQ00040-c-EN 21/10/2013
241
IR barriers for windows
3518 3518/150
3519 3518/50
Description
The device consists of 2 columns, one operating as a transmitter (TX), and the other
as a receiver (RX). Both have a microprocessor for the management of the alarm and 1
the synchronisation of the infrared beams. The table that follows shows the alarm 2
tripping times based on the rays broken:
OR: alarm with at least one ray broken (maximum sensitivity) AND: alarm with at least
two rays broken (minimum sensitivity).
Tripping Microswitch setting
time
OR AND
Rays
broken 100 200 100 200
only 1 2 sec. 2 sec. - -
2 not adjoining 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec.
2 adjoining or all 100 ms 200 ms 100 ms 200 ms 3
Anti insects
For installations with distance between the RX and the TX greater than 1 m, the interruption
of a single beam, if it takes place directly on one of the barriers (for example due to the
presence of an insect), does not cause alarm. The alarm, however, is immediate if other
beams are interrupted.
Range and connection
The barriers have a maximum range of 12 m indoors outdoors and 6 m outdoors. They
connect to the rest of the burglar-alarm system through contact interfaces. If
the maximum absorption of the burglar-alarm system allows it, it is possible to connect
one or more barriers through interface 3480V12 or F482V12. Alternatively, to limit the total
absorption of the system or due to the limit of current supplied from the interfaces 3480V12
and F482V12 (50 and 100mA), it is necessary to use the contact interfaces 3480 or F482
for connection to the burglar-alarm system and a power supply E47/12 the for the barriers
power supply.
WARNING: To improve the false alarms immunity, it is recommended to install also the barriers
microwave accessory item 3518MW (see wiring diagram). In this way, a dual technology (IR + Legend
MW) “AND” mode protection is created. 1 - Receiver;
2 - Transmitter;
Technical data 3 - IR emission zone.
- Range: 12 m high power indoors and 6 m outdoors, 3 m low
power both indoors and outdoors.
- Power supply: 12 Vdc +/- 2 Vdc
- Max. absorption: 35mA (art.3518/50)
40mA (art.3518)
45mA(art.3518/150)
50mA (art.3519)
- Operating temperature: (-25) – (+55)°C
- Protection index: IP44
Dimensional data
10
Item Lenght A (mm)

A 3518 1080
3518/50 580
22,5
3518/150 1580
3519 2080
23
MQ00039-e-EN 03/06/2014
242
3518 3518/150
3519 3518/50
Configuration
The barriers are sold configured for operation in “AND” mode, with tripping time: 200ms.
To change the mode use the internal microswitch as shown in the following table:
OR 100ms OR 200ms
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
AND 100ms AND 200ms *
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
* default
Wiring diagram
Connection of the barrier to the item 3480V12 or F482V12

3480V12
(or DIN F482V12 version)
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
JP10
LED COM T COM C + -
If the max. consumption of the system allows it, it is possible to connect the 3518 or 3518/50 barrier directly to only one interface item 3480V12 or F482V12.
Connection table
MS1 Receiver (RX) MS1 Transmitter (TX)
1 +13.8V 1 +13.8V
2 GND 2 GND
3 PT0 Tamper C 3 PT0 Tamper C
4 PT1 Tamper N.C. 4 PT1 Tamper N.C.
5 All0 Alarm C
6 All1 Alarm N.C.
MQ00039-e-EN 03/06/2014
243
3518 3518/150
3519 3518/50
Wiring diagram
Use of barriers with gateway 3480 or F482

E47/12
Power supply unit in addition to the one already
in the burglar-alarm system. Used to power the
barriers. TO BE CONNECTED TO THE BUS only to have
the EXHAUSTED BATTERY indication for the central
unit with a display.
RX TX 230V ˜
S1 +
+ Battery
13, 8 13,8
GND GN D
PT0 PT 0
PT1 PT 1
ALL0
3480 Z1
ALL1
(or DIN F482 N1
Reset J P10
MOD 1
LED version) Z2
N2
MOD 2
For multiple barriers connect the alarm line and tamper line in series and the power supply WARNING: Use a 30 m max twisted, unshielded cable.
in parallel. Connect no more than 3 pairs of barriers for each gateway
Use of barriers with sensor item 3518MW
Contact interface
3518MW RX TX
F482V12
S1 S1
MS1 MS1
Red
13,8 13,8
GND GND
Grey PT0 PT0
PT1 PT1
Yellow
ALL0
ALL1
Green
LED JP10
JP2
T C +
Cable colour Clamp
Red 13,8
Grey GND
Yellow ALL0
Green ALL1
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to the interface only
NOTE: If Z1 and N1 are configured, while leaving sockets Z2 and N2 empty, contact C2 will operate as a tamper line.
MQ00039-e-EN 03/06/2014
244
Alarm IR remote control
4050
Description
This easy to use IR remote control enables performing all the system arming and 1
disarming operations, and to confirm the settings. It’s coded automatically by the control
unit and has 4,000,000 code combinations. The specific programming procedure makes 2
it impossible to detect the code, thus assuring full safety. In any case, the user can easily
modify this code. Every system can recognise up to 30 remote controls when item L/N/ 3
NT4600/4 control unit is installed, or up to 50 remote controls with control unit item
3486. The remote controls can be programmed to work with several installations, thus
permitting, for instance, to control both the home and the office systems with a single
4
remote control.
With systems with control units item 3485/B and item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601, the
remote control does not operate. Front view

- Power supply: 3 Vdc (2 CR1616 battery) 1 - IR transmission zone;
- Max. no. of manoeuvres: 50.000 2 - LED for transmission confirmation;
3 - Control pushbutton;
4 - Key-ring.
Battery replacement
To replace the 2 remote control batteries proceed as shown in the following figures.
Note: dispose of exhausted batteries following current regulations. Do not insert a fully
charged battery and a partly charged battery inside the same remote control.
1
-
-
-
- - +
CR1616
-
+
+
K
CLAC
–
–
–
MQ00031-c-EN 24/04/2014
245
Outdoor siren
4072L 4072A
Description
These sirens have been designed so that they can be installed easily, are tamper resistant
and withstand atmospheric agents.
A tamper screw protects the sirens against pulling off/opening; when installing make
sure that the tamper screw is correctly positioned. 1
Outdoor siren item 4072L

If there is a power cut the battery inside the siren gives the whole system a minimum life 2
of 24 hours (as required by standard CEI 79-2).
This solution means that only one battery need to be used instead of the two of 3
traditional systems, thus reducing maintenance and increasing system reliability. The
central unit can be miniaturised with no effect on safety.
Front view
Outdoor siren item 4072A
This siren is a system optional and can only be installed in combination with power
supply item E47ADC.
It is useful for identifying which room the alarm is coming from but is not obligatory 4
because the system back-up battery will be connected to the power supply. The housing
inside the siren holds the self-power supply 12V 7Ah battery.
Technical data 5
- Max. absorption: 5 mA (item 4072A)
- Operating temperature: (-25) – (+55)°C
- Level of the signal emitted: 105 dB(A) at 3 metres Front view of the siren without external cover
- Frequency: 1500 Hz.
- Alarm autonomy: 15 min.
- Flashes per minute: 30 - 60 Legend
- Weight (without battery): 2.5 kg
- Protection index: IP34 1 - Plastic external cover;
- Self-protected from removal and opening 2 - Sound signaller;
- Battery protection fuse: F1: F5AL 3 - Sight signaller;
4 - Internal metal protection;
5 - Anti-foam grid to prevent penetration inside the casing.
Dimensional data
220 128
300
MQ00057-c-EN 29/04/2014
246
Outdoor siren
4072L 4072A
Configuration
Control card internal view
The external siren requires configuration of the progressive number. This is done by
means of the jumper (1) of the internal control card. A 1
If the system has 2 external sirens the jumper (1) of the second siren must be cut.
Internal siren card - connections

A Power supply-BUS twisted pair- (WHITE CABLE) B
B battery:
battery positive (RED cable)
battery negative (BLACK cable)
C loudspeaker (GREY cable)
C
Yellow LED Red LED
Yellow LED: if on check the Tamper Red LED: if on invert the BUS
protection polarity.
Installation procedure
1 - Remove the two screws (1) and take off the external cover (2). 3
2 - Remove the four screws (3) and pull out the internal protection cover (4). 3
3 - By using the drilling template (5), position the hole (6) near the wire-outlet pipe and 1
4
1
mark the position of the 5 holes. 2
NOTE: use a Ø 6 mm bit for drilling the holes.
3
3
5 7
8 4 - Insert the screw plastic plugs into the holes and partly tighten the top screws (7) and the
“tamper” screw (8).
6
5 - Adjust the “tamper” screw by using the notch (9) on the drilling template, as shown in the
picture.
If the installation or the adjustment of the tamper screw is carried out incorrectly, the
10 system will not work.
Wall 9 Wall 6 - Attach the siren to the two top screws (10).
Template
Tighten the two bottom screws (11). Tighten the four screws completely.
7 - Place the battery (12) 12V - 6.5-7.2 Ah (for item 4072A and 77673) or 12V - 12 Ah (for item
4072L) into the special housing without connecting the Faston clamps.
11 8 - On the siren internal board, connect the power supply pair (BUS) to the white wires (A), the
battery to the Red and Black wires (B) and the siren to the Grey wires (C).
12 A
B
Connections to the wires of the electronic card
If the red LED lights up, reverse
Colour Connection
the polarity of the BUS
White Telephone pair (BUS)
Before performing any White Telephone pair (BUS)
Yellow LED C operations on the siren, Red + Battery positive
Red LED switch the system to Black + Battery negative
maintenance mode. Grey Sound signaller
High voltage present near the Grey Sound signaller
flasher lamp.
MQ00057-c-EN 29/04/2014
247
Alarm power supply 230 V
E47ADCN
Description
The power supply must be used to power the burglar-alarm system.
It supplies continuous 27 Vdc low voltage with a maximum current of 1 A, and is electronically
protected (without fuse) against short circuit and overload.
It’s a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065, which provides
power supply to all the system devices connected to the system using the twisted 2-wire
SCS/BUS cable, creating a SELV system (Safety Extra - Low Voltage) as described in the CEI 64-8
standards (ref CEI 64-8-4 par 411.1.2.5).
The power supply must be connected to the 12 Vdc 7.2 to 24 Ah battery to ensure the operation
of the system in case of power cut, to be installed inside an item F115/8B enclosure, protected
against unwanted opening.
To guarantee physical protection, the power supply unit must be installed in appropriate
electric switchboards, with opening protected using the appropriate Tamper device, item
L4630. 4 3 2 1
The device is enclosed in an 8 module DIN rail container, and its installation must be in
Front view
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures, item F115/8A;
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays; Legend
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents;
1 - Back-up battery connection clamps;
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3 mm
2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS;
must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to disconnect the
3 - Tamper protection device socket;
power supply from the mains, and to protect it.
4 - Network voltage connection clamps.
Technical data Maximum current delivered by the devices

- SELV double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065 standard type of battery installed
- Power supply: 230 Vac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz 7.2 Ah 12 Ah 24 Ah
- Maximum current supplied: 1A 24 h 110 mA(*) 190 mA(*) 380 mA
Duration in case of
- Battery charging current: 400 mA 15 h 180 mA 300 mA 600 mA
power line failure
- Dissipated power: 15 W 8h 340 mA 560 mA 700 mA
- Protection index: IP30 (*) In these cases the system complies with level 2 of CEI 79-2 standard.
Dimensional data
Size: 8 DIN modules
MQ00059-c-EN 12/12/2012
248
12 V output power supply
E47/12
Description
Device for the power supply of 12 V devices (e.g. IR barriers), designed for connection to
a 12 V - 6.5 - 24 Ah back-up battery.
The power supply can be installed in flush mounted switchboards item F115/8A,
or in suitable electric switchboards, with opening protected using the appropriate
1
anti-tampering device L4630.
For the 7.2 Ah battery it is recommended that the item F115/8B container is used, preset
for opening protection.
The twisted pair of the burglar-alarm system can be connected to the BUS clamps,
enabling the status of the battery to be read from the control unit display.
The power supply is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI EN 60065,
which creates a SELV system (Safety Extra – Low Voltage) as described in the CEI 64-8
standard (ref. CEI 64-8-4 part 411.1.2.5).
The installation must be performed in accordance with current local regulations. 6 5 4 3 2
In general, the following rules must be followed:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures; Front view
- The device must be kept away from water drips and sprays;
- Care must be taken not to obstruct the air vents;
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
Legend
3 mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it. 1 - Battery status LED;
2 - 12 V device power supply connection clamps;
3 - Back-up battery connection clamps;
Technical data 4 - SCS BUS connection clamps (optional);
- Power supply: 230 Vac +/- 10% 50/60 Hz 5 - Tamper protection device socket;
- Max. absorption: 300 mA 6 - Network voltage connection clamps.
- Output voltage: 10.4-13.8 Vdc
- Maximum current supplied: 2 A Maximum current delivered by the devices
- Battery charging current: 400 mA
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C type of battery installed
- Protection index: IP30 7.2 Ah 12 Ah 24 Ah
duration in case 24 h 300 mA(*) 500 mA(*) 1A

Dimensional data of power line 15 h 480 mA 800 mA 1.6 A
Size: 8 DIN modules failure 8h 900 mA 1.5 A 2A
(*) In these cases the system complies with level 1 of CEI 79-2 standard.
MQ00194-c-EN 21/10/2013
249
Relay actuator
F481
Description
This device allows to repeat various types of alarms by means of a relay voltage-free con-
tacts, depending on its configuration.
It can be activated by a technical alarm interface, or by another signal through the auxi-
liary channel (AUX). 3
Normally used for the control of gas/water safety solenoid valves, or third party devices
(telephone diallers, optical notifications, etc.).
The internal relay is in positive safety; this means that, in case of tampering, it switches
over the contacts.
By modifying the configuration, it is possible to change the safety mode of the internal
relay.
Related items
Technical alarm interfaces: 3841 and F483 1

Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
Max. absorption: 20 mA 2. Relay active notification LED
Contact output: 24 V 1 A cosφ 0.4 3. Clamp for the connection of alarm devices
Configuration
The relay actuator requires the allocation of the progressive number within the group of
auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface) installed within the
system, of the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit.
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
AUX and MOD

Operating mode

AUX MOD
none none Repetition of the siren alarm Siren activation Silencing
none 1 System fault notification Activators flashing red LED notification
none 2 System status notification Activation Deactivation
MQ00482-b-EN 22/04/2014
250
Relay actuator
F481
“Auxiliary” operating mode

AUX MOD
none 3 Signalling with memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical alarm
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling with memory interface with AUX configurator from 1 to 9
of any technical alarm.
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling with memory of a corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
specific technical alarm.
none 4 Signalling without memory of the activation of any auxiliary Any AUX device of the system Pressure of the needle key on any technical
channel of the system. Typical example: signalling without alarm interface with AUX configurator from
memory of any technical alarm. 1 to 9
auxiliary channel. Typical example: signalling without memory corresponding AUX channel active technical alarm
of a specific technical alarm.
6 Come modo 4 con relé normalmente non eccitato
NOTES
- Modes 5 and 6 give the same operating results of modes 3 and 4. Their difference is that the relay is - The “S” key of the 3 module flush-mounted central unit or the disabling of the central unit with display,
normally not excited. This enables an opposite behaviour in case of tampering (cutting of the wire which main function is that of silencing the sirens during a technical alarm, disables the relay if this has
or BUS short circuit). In fact in mode 3 and 4 a tampering excites the device (modes indicated in been activated by the technical alarm interface configured in mode “0” or “4” (technical alarm).
the case of actuation of alarms such as the siren, the telephone communicator, etc.); however, in
mode 5 and 6 the same tampering does not cause any actuation (modes indicated in case of safety - In all modes there is an auxiliary activation also in case of pre-alarm (IR detector and contact interface
actuations such as electrical door locks etc.). The selection of the appropriate mode ensures total with AUX configurators). Attention must therefore be paid when using the relay actuator (in modes with
system safety. memory or with sensitivity to any auxiliary channel) to avoid unwanted activations.

N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Transformer
Axolute Gas detector
Livinglight
Matix
Solenoid A - +
valve
12 Vac
Relay Technical alarm

actuator interface
Burglar alarm BUS
MQ00482-b-EN 22/04/2014
251
Contact interface
F482
Description
These interfaces are used for connecting 2 independent contact lines - which can be
balanced with a resistance, delayed on operation - and a protection Tamper line.
1
Made in the modular version with 2 DIN modules these devices can be used in case it is
necessary to centralise all interfaces in a board or in junction boxes.
LED indicators inside the devices indicate proper operation of the interface when testing T - C1 - C2
the system and when the burglar-alarm starts operating while the system is on. 2
8
In order to install the interface item F482 safely, it is recommended to use protected DIN
switchboards on the opening of a tamper contact to be connected to the appropriate
clamps on the interface.
For level 2 systems (CEI 79-2) the central unit must also be protected from removal 7 3
(tearing protection).
T C2 C1
4
6
Technical data
5
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C Front view

- Size: 2 DIN modules 1. Contact line 2;
2. Contact line 1;
3. Line 2 activated LED;
6. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS;
7. Tamper active LED;
8. Tamper line.
Configuration
This interface module requires - for each of the two contact lines separate from each
other - the allocation of the assigned zone Z, the progressive number N of the detectors
situated in the same zone, the setup of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
You will not need to configure both lines if one is not used.
T - C1 - C2
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC/NO magnetic
contact connected to line 1.
Configurator 1 gives the contact the assignment to zone 1, configurator 2 gives the
assignment to zone 2 and so forth, up to a maximum of 8 zones.
Z2
T C2 C1
N1
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so
forth, up to a maximum of 9 contacts for each of the 8 zones. Z1 MOD2
N1 N2
N2 MOD1 Z2
MQ00046-d-EN 28/04/2014
252
Contact interface
F482
Configuration
MOD1 and MOD2 Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors
A configurator is connected to this position for selecting the operating mode of the Configurator Sensor connected Pulses (*)
interface according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines. It
is possible to have balanced and unbalanced protection lines with the possibility to 8 Flush detector for rolling shutters 12 (about 20 cm)
produce the alarm with a delay as with zone 1. For details concerning the different - delayed**
operating modes, please refer to the table below. 9 Flush detector for rolling shutters 25 (about 45 cm)
- delayed**
none NC contacts Note (*): impulses generated by the detector according to the opening range, in cm, of
1 NC contacts - balanced the window before producing the alarm.
2 NC contacts - delayed *
** Follows the delay set up in the central unit:
3 NC contacts - delayed * - balanced this function operates only on central units item 3486, 3485/B, item HC/HD/HS/L/N/
4 NC contact and AUX event generation NT4601, 067520 and 573934/35. With central unit item L/N/NT4600/4 the interface
5 NC contacts - balanced and AUX event generation must be allocated to ZONE 1 with a time delay set (see central configuration).
6 NC contacts - delayed and AUX event generation
7 NC contacts - balanced delayed and AUX event generation
* Follows the delay set up in the central unit:
this function operates only on central units item 3486, 3485/B, item HC/HD/HS/L/N/
NT4601, 067520 and 573934/35. With central unit item L/N/NT4600/4 the interface
must be allocated to ZONE 1 with a time delay set (see central configuration).

If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to - Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: system: in this case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system
BUS only, and communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly F422 interface.
connected to the temperature control BUS. It autonomously and independently The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
manages the two C1 and C2 lines. Only the line used must be configured, and features of the burglar alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
not both of them. Follow by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD1 and/ be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
or MOD2 sockets. Then configure the [Z1/2] and [N1/2] sockets, in order to assign contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the
the address from 1 to 99 to the device within the system.The coupling between the actual coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control
interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be performed using zone must be performed using the TiThermo application.
the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
For more information refer to the MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
Note: It is recommended to install the

* N.C. N.C. N.C. 10 kΩ ±5% 1/4W balancing resistance in
Balance resistance correspondence with the last line contact.
10 kΩ ± 5% 1/4 W
C2 C1
T - C1 - C2
* N.C. N.C. N.C.

T
Balance resistance
10 kΩ ± 5% 1/4 W Twisted, unshielded cable with
maximum length 30 metres
Tamper line
* It is recommended that no more than 3 rope sensors are installed on each line
MQ00046-d-EN 28/04/2014
253
12 V contact interface
F482V12
Description
This interface gives the possibility of connecting the alarm system to two sensor lines
(that can be balanced with resistance, and/or which intervention can be delayed) requi-
ring 12 V power supply. 1
Produced in the DIN modular version, the device can be used for centralizing all the inter-
faces inside a cabinet. Two LEDs confirm the correct operation of the interface during sys-
tem testing, and the tripping of the burglar-alarm system, when the system is armed. To 7 2
ensure that the interface is installed safely the use of DIN switchboards is recommended,
with their opening protected by a tamper contact connected to another interface.
Technical data 6 3
Power supply: 27 Vdc from the BUS
Max. absorption: 6 mA to which the absorption of the sensor
connected must be added 4
Output: 12 V Max 100 mA

Size: 2 Basic modules 1. Contact line 2 or tamper;
2. Contact line 1;
5. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS;
7. Output 12 V
Configuration
For each of the two contact lines, independent from each other, the interface requires
the assigning of the Z zone it belong to, the N progressive number of the sensors present
within the same zone, and the setting of the MOD protection mode of the contact line.
- If the address of contact 2 is not configured, a Tamper line can be connected to
clamps C2 and COM; If not required, the C2 clamp must be shorted at the COM
contact.
Z1
This configurator assigns the number of the assigned zone of the NC magnetic contact
connected to line 1.
Z2
N1
Z1 MOD2
N1 N2
N2 MOD1 Z2
MQ00481-b-EN 24/04/2014
254
F482V12
Configuration
MOD1 and MOD2 Specific mode for connection to wired rolling shutter sensors
In this position a configurator is inserted for selecting the operating mode of the interface Configurator Sensor connected Pulses (**)
according to the type of contact or detector connected to the two lines.
It will be possible to create both balanced and non balanced protection lines, with the 8 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 12 (approx 20 cm)
possibility of generating a delayed alarm as for zone 1. For the details of the various delayed*
operating modes, refer to the table below. 9 Rolling shutter rope sensor - 25 (approx 45 cm)
delayed*
none NC contact Note (*): Follows the delay set on the central unit:
this function is operative only with central units with display. With flush mounted 3
1 NC contact - balanced
module central units, the interface must be allocated to ZONE 1, with a time delay set
2 NC contact - delayed *
(see central unit configuration).
3 NC contact - delayed * - balanced Note (**): pulses generated by the sensor depending on the degree of opening of the
4 NC contact and AUX event generation window, in cm, before the alarm is generated.
5 Balanced NC contact and AUX event generation
6 Delayed NC contact and AUX event generation
7 Balanced delayed NC contact and AUX event generation

If the contact interface is used in conjunction with the temperature control system to - Use of a burglar-alarm system integrated with the Temperature control system: in this
optimise energy saving, two different types of configurations will be possible: case, the contact interface is connected to the burglar-alarm system BUS only, and
communicates with the temperature control system BUS through the F422 interface.
- Use in the temperature control system only: The contact interface is directly connected The interface must be configured in Z1/2 and N1/2 following the requirements and
to the temperature control BUS e gestisce in modo autonomo ed indipendente le due features of the burglar-alarm system; only configurators with values 4 to 7 must
linee C1 e C2. Non è obbligatorio configurare entrambe le linee ma solo quella utilizzata. be connected to the MOD1/2 position, corresponding to the management of NC
Inserire poi nella sede MOD1 e/o MOD2 il configuratore AUX. Then configure sockets contacts with generation of AUX event (see tables above). Also in this case, the actual
[Z1/2] and [N1/2] to assign the address 1 to 99 of the device within the system. The coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone must
coupling between the interface contact line and the temperature control zone must be be performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the
performed using the TiThermo application. For more information refer to the MY HOME MY HOME Temperature control guide.
Temperature control guide.
Wiring diagram
N.C. N.C. N.C.

*
Twisted, unshielded cable, with 30 Balance resistance

metre maximum length. 100 k ± 5% 1/4 W
N.C. N.C. N.C.

*
Balance resistance
100 k ± 5% 1/4 W
NOTE: it is recommended that the

100 k ± 5% 1/4 W balancing resistance
is installed by the last line contact.
* Do not install more than 3 rope sensors on each line
MQ00481-b-EN 24/04/2014
255
F482V12
Connection with IR 3518 - 3518/50 - 3518/150 - 3519 barriers
RX TX
S1
13,8 13,8
GND GND
PT0 PT0
PT1 PT1
ALL0
ALL1
Reset
JP10
LED
T C +
If the max absorption of the system allows it, it will be possible to directly connect the barrier to the interface only.
NOTE: If Z1 and N1 are configured, while leaving sockets Z2 and N2 empty, contact C2 will operate as a tamper line.
MQ00481-b-EN 24/04/2014
256
F483
Description
The technical alarm interface is used to receive signals from the outside (normally
analogue signals, like the closing/opening of a contact), converting them into digital
information for the BUS.
5
This information gives the possibility of differentiating between alarm notifications,
like the activation of the siren, or the telephone dialler, or the closure of the gas/water
solenoid valve.
The functions described can be obtained using a dedicated communication line between
the devices of the burglar alarm system, called auxiliary channel.
Up to 9 auxiliary channels are available for each system. They are assigned by
configuration of the device(s).
Related items 4
Relay actuator: F481 and 3479 3
Technical data
1
Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 2
Dimensional data
Size: 2 DIN modules
The technical alarm interface module requires the allocation of the progressive number 1. Configurator socket
within the group of auxiliary devices (relay actuator and auxiliary channels interface), 2. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS
the auxiliary channel number, and the operating modes.
3. Operation indication LED
N° 4. Reset key
This configurator assigns the progressive number inside the auxiliary unit. 5. Clamp for the connection of external devices
Configurator 1 identifies the first auxiliary, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
AUX and MOD

Configurators
Description
AUX MOD
none none Technical alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
none 2 Anti-panic alarm with normally closed (NC) contact
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition.
Is silenced with the remote control.
none 4 Technical alarm with normally open (NO) contact
MQ00484-b-EN 22/04/2014
257
F483

Configurators
Relay opertating mode (description)
AUX MOD
1-9 none Technical alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
1-9 1 Anti-burglary automation with NC contact
It activates the corresponding auxiliary channel without interfering with the status of the burglar-alarm system, therefore without
generating signals or alarms.
1-9 2 Anti-panic alarm with NC contact and activation of the auxiliary channel
Generates a burglar-alarm even with the system switched off and in any division condition. Is silenced with the remote control.
1-9 3 Connection between burglar-alarm and auxiliary channels (LINK)
It generates and activation of the corresponding auxiliary channel following a burglary/tampering alarm.
1-9 4 Technical alarm with NO contact and activation of the auxiliary channel

N° 1 N° 2
AUX 1 AUX 1
MOD 6 MOD 4
Wiring diagram
Transformer
Gas detector
A - +
Solenoid valve
12 Vac
Relay actuator Technical alarm

003591 interface
Burglar alarm BUS
Note: It is recommended that the GAS sensor and the interface are checked for correct installation and wiring, following the instructions supplied with the sensor itself;
the interface sends the alarm notification within the timescales set for the activation of the alarm repeater.
If a technical alarm is generated upon powering the sensor while the interface is already powered, there is a wiring error in lines + A
MQ00484-b-EN 22/04/2014
258
Signalling interface
F80CMD
Description
Item F80CMD is a signalling and control interface for the associated device, for example 1
the Stop&Go device item F80/SG.
It consists of two signalling relays, two contacts for the connection of two pushbuttons,
and one mode selector. 4
5 3
3 2 1
Technical data
RL2 RL1
- Power supply: from the associated device
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C P1 P2
4 5 6
Dimensional data
2
Configuration 6
Front view
Warning: All the configuration operations must be performed with item F80CMD
disconnected.
Configuration
1 - Open item F80CMD.
2 - Select the desired mode using a flat screwdriver. 1 - Mode selector, from 0 to 9;
2 - Contacts of pushbuttons P1 and P2;
3 - Contacts of signalling relays RL1 and RL2
RL2 RL1 (A1 load; maximum voltage 230 Vac);
4 - Signalling LED flashing red: data transfer;
3 2 1 5 - Signalling LED green: interface ON.
6 - Stop&Go connector.
3 2 1
RL2 RL1
ART. F80CMD
Signalling
P1 relayP2
4 5 6
Relay status depending on the signalled event
Mode Relay 1 Relay 2

0 Faulty Blocked
1 Faulty Not faulty
2 Blocked Not blocked
3 Open Closed
NOTE: if the set configuration mode is different from the expected ones, Stop&Go enters
mode =0
3 - Close item F80CMD.

4 - Wire the relays and the pushbuttons.
5 - Connect item F80CMD to the associated device.
MQ00258-c-EN 30/04/2014
259
Signalling interface
F80CMD
Wiring diagram
1 - Connection for use with Stop&Go device, item F80/SG; 2 - Connection for use with Stop&Go device, item F80/SG and alarm event signalling
through the burglar-alarm system.
ASSOCIATED
ASSOCIATED DEVICE
DEVICE
Control Burglar alarm BUS

interface Aux channel interface
item F80CMD item HC/hd/HS/L/N/NT4615
3 2 1
6 5 4 N°
ART. F80CMD RL2 RL1 AUX
MOD
P1 P2
ART. F80CMD T - 1 0 2
4 5 6
1 2 3
A
Normally Normally
Open Closed
pushbutton pushbutton
MQ00258-c-EN 30/04/2014
260
Indoor siren
573984 067515 HD4070 N4070
HC4070 HS4070 NT4070
Description
This siren is fitted with battery (item 3507/6); up to a maximum of 3 indoor sirens can be
installed inside the protected area.
It can be installed in flush mounted boxes. The indoor siren can be programmed for
signalling intrusion alarms through a continuous sound (frequency 1880Hz) and/or
auxiliary alarms through a modulated sound.
This siren is self-protected against opening and rip-off by means of a self-adjusting
tampering device. Do not use batteries different from the ones indicated.
Related articles:
801 24 (Flush-mounting box)
89379 (Flush-mounting box)
Front view
89130 (Flush-mounting box)
Technical data Dimensional data

- Self powering battery: item 3507/6 128 (item 067515-573984) 56 (item 573984)
115 44
128 (item 067515-573984)

- Level of the signal emitted: 105 dB(A) at 3 metres
- Frequency: 1880 Hz.
115
Configuration
The indoor siren requires assignment of the progressive number and the operating
mode. It gives an intermittent sound to signal the activation of any one of the auxiliary
channels generated by an auxiliary channel interface in mode 0 and 4 (technical alarm).
N°
N°
N°
MOD MOD
This configurator assigns the progressive number in the internal siren unit.
No configurator or configurator 1 identifies the first siren, configurator 2 the second and
configurator 3 the third.
NOTE: Systems with external siren 4072A and 084424:

If the system has an external siren, it must be considered as siren No. 1; if there are two,
they must be considered as No. 1 and No. 2.
The internal sirens will be counted in sequence. There must be a maximum of 3 sirens Rear view
(internal and external).
MOD
This configurator assigns the signalling mode based on the type of alarm received.
No configurator: anti-intrusion alarm and technical alarm enabled.
Configuratore 1: anti-intrusion alarm enabled and technical alarm disabled. Configurator 5: anti-intrusion alarm enabled and technical alarm disabled.System
Configurator 2: anti-intrusion alarm disabled and technical alarm enabled. ON/OFF sound signal.
Configurator 4: anti-intrusion alarm and technical alarm enabled. System ON/OFF Configurator 6: anti-intrusion alarm disabled and technical alarm enabled. System
sound signal. ON/OFF sound signal.
MQ00058-c-EN 21/10/2013
261
Base central unit
L4601 N4601 NT4601
HD4601 HC4601 HS4601
Description
1
It is possible to save up to 16 activation scenarios and use them based on actual the
needs.
The device can manage up to 10 automations split as follows:
- 1 actuated using an internal relay and coupled with intrusion events, technical alarms,
or system status;
- 9 coupled with arming, disarming, date and time events to generate separation
scenarios.
1 2 3
4 5 6
6
Main functions 3 7 8 9 C OK
- System self-learning and configuration on-screen display; 0 P

5
- can be controlled by transponder and keypad (20 keys maximum); 2
- independent management of each sensor; 4
- local contact in addition to those already present on the system (configurable);
- possibility of updating the firmware using the PC;
- detailed event memory and alarm only memory; Front view
menu, if the wrong key is entered for three consecutive times;
- association of a set user name to scenarios (max. 4), sensors and zones;
Legend
- each individual sensor can be deactivated by sending a command from the central unit
keypad; 1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations and
- signalling of failed connection with: sensors, with the system disarmed, a signalling the events which have occurred (more information on the following page).
icon is displayed, with the system armed, an alarm is generated; 2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off commands
- division of the zones directly from the central unit keypad; directly from the transponder keys.
- presence of a local automation and signalling relay. 3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
Management of burglar-alarm functions 4 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
The central unit manages a total of 6 zones: 6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
- zone 0 is reserved for the activators (max. 9);
- zone 9 is reserved for the technical alarms/ auxiliaries (gas detector etc.). Technical data
Performs the following functions: - Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc
- manages the events communicated by the sensors and can determine if and when to - Max. absorption: 50 mA
give the alarm; - Operating teamperature: 5 – 40°C
- zones from 1 to 4 can be separated as the user requires; - Installation: wall mounted
- all the customising phases are guided and shown by means of the display; Dimensional data
- an automation can be coupled to the detection of a certain alarm, using the local relay:
for example, the switching on of a light, to confuse the intruder. Size: 3+3 modules
MQ00189-c-EN 29/04/2014
262
Base central unit
L4601 N4601 NT4601
HD4601 HC4601 HS4601
Legend
1 - Serial connector for the update of the firmware using a PC;
1 2 - Reset key;
8 PROG
3 - Local contact;
RESET 5 - Burglar alarm BUS;
2 6 - Relay for automation in case of alarm;
7 - Socket for tamper device item L4630;
8 - Battery housing.
7 _
C BUS 3
_
NC NA
ON
6 4
OFF
5
Rear view
Configuration
The central units do not need configurators. The functions can be set directly on the device
itself (keypad and display), or using the appropriate software TiSecurity Basic. Example
For detailed information refer to the corresponding manuals supplied with the products. Example of configuration performed on the central unit.
- Detection of devices
Software configuration
MAINTENANCE
The program enables acquiring the configuration on the central unit, saving it in a file to Language
be used to reinstate the configuration of the same, or to configure other central units. It Key program
System test
is also possible to update the permanent software of the central unit using new versions Learning
published by BTicino.
Select
Learning
MAINTENANCE
Language
Key program
System test
Learning
Press OK to confirm
LEARNING
After pressing OK, the
zone: 0 num.: 1 following screen appears
type: not exist
tamper: OFF
automatic
Press OK to start learning
Learning
ended
no problem
Vuoi inviare la
c o n f i g uNEXT
razione a
dispositivi di
(See
v ithe
s umanual
a l i z zof
a zthe
i ocentral
n e ? unit)
invia = OK
non invia = CLEAR
Predisporre
l’impianto
MQ00189-c-EN 29/04/2014
alla
configurazione
invia = OK
non invia = CLEAR 263
Keypad activator
5739 44 (White) 67506 HD4606 L4606 NT4606
5739 45 (Magnesium) HC4606 HS4606 N4606 AM5786
Description
1 2 3
This device arms or disarms the system by keying a secret code previously stored in burglar-
alarm systems central units with display, or in three module flush mounted central units.
4 5 6
By pressing two pushbuttons (”o¬” and ”P”) and entering the secret code, the system can
be disarmed, while at the same time sending a silent alarm (robbery function).
7 8 9
Related articles:
681 86 (White Cover) 0 P 1
684 86 (Titanium Cover) 2
Front view
Indications supplied by the LED and the Buzzer
(sound signalling device)
Event Green LED Red LED Buzzer
Keying-in Flashing - Active
Code entering - - Active 5 3
System armed OFF OFF -

System disarmed ON OFF -
Wrong code entered Flashing (5s) ON - 4
Intrusion alarm OFF ON -
Rear view
24 hour alarm ON/OFF ON -

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1 - Red LED: alarm status;
- Max. absorption: 5.5 mA 2 - Green LED: system status
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C OFF: ON, ON: OFF;
3 - Configurator socket;
Dimensional data 4 - BUS;
Size: 2 modules 5 - Anti-tamper device socket.
Configuration Configuration for use with central unit item L/N/NT4600/4

Z In order for the keypad to operate as activator of the system with three-module central
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone (from 1 to 8) in the “group” unit, it will be necessary to first program the code in the central unit itself following the
of devices (any free zone in the system). procedure below:
To configure it as belonging to the activator group, no configurator must be connected. 1. Place the central unit in maintenance mode by moving the back slide switch to the
Configurator 9 assigns the device to the “group” of auxiliary devices (Aux channel OFF position;
interface or Relay actuator). 2. Press P and check that the yellow LED comes on (PROG);
3. Program the remote controls first (see chapter STARTING AND TESTING);
N° 4. Enter ”o¬” + the desired 5 digit code;
This configurator assigns the progressive number to the activator within the group. 5. Ensure that a long beep is emitted by the keypad, and that the central unit responds
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so with a short beep;
forth, up to a maximum of 9 activators (dividers, expanders or activators). 6. To memorize further codes, or several keypads with different codes, repeat 4 and 5;
7. Once the last code has been set, press S on the central unit (the yellow PROG LED goes
MOD off) and move the central unit slide switch back to the ON position;
The configurator of this location specifies the type of control unit installed in the system. 8. Send a pulse signal using the IR remote control;
9. Perform some arming/disarming tests.
Central unit used Configurator value
3486 - 3485/B - LG-573934 - 573935 0 Disabling the keypad BUZZER when keys are pressed
HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 - 067520
Irrespective of the type of central unit installed, the keypad sound can be enabled/
L/N/NT4600/4 1 disabled. To do this press key 1 for 5 seconds, until the activator beeps and flashes
quickly twice.
NOTE: When used with central units with display, the secret code is the one saved in To switch the sound back on repeat the same procedure.
the central units themselves (maximum 25 or 50 codes depending on the type of central
unit). If used with the flush mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4, the code must be
programmed in the central unit itself. In this case, up to 29 codes must be saved.
MQ00026-c-EN 24/04/2014
264
Transponder reader
067508 HC4607 HD4607 L4607 NT4607
573948 573949 HS4607 N4607 AM5787
Description
The transponder reader is a device which activates when the Transponder badge (3530S
or 3540) is in its immediate vicinity (1-2 cm). The signal generated by the approach of the
badge is then transferred to the bus (BUS cable item L4669S). The transponder reader is
fitted in the wire burglar-alarm system and works like a traditional activator; it is thus
connected to the BUS cable like any other burglar-alarm device.
The transponder does not need a power supply battery. When compared with the
1 2
traditional remote control, the “transponder reader/transponder system offers better
safety due to the code encryption system. Also, the possibility of saving up to 50 badges Front view
(depending on the central unit used) offers better flexibility in the management of
the system, particularly in those environments (companies, offices, shops), where the
number of people enabled to use the system is high and changes regularly.
Related articles:
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc Legend
- Max. absorption: 12 mA 1 - Three-colour LED for operation indications;
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 2 - Reset pushbutton (NOT ACTIVE).
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Z Z
N°
MOD No.
AUX
Configuration MOD
BURGLAR-ALARM mode: Clamp for burglar
The transponder reader used as burglar-alarm system activator/disconnector must be alarm BUS
assigned to the group of activator; it thus requests the assignment of the “group” number
attributed (see below) and the progressive number of the devices in the “group”.
Rear view
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone in the “group” of devices
(any free zone in the system). To configure it as belonging to the group of activators, no NOTE: when all the 9N°Z devices allowed have already been inserted in the group of
MOD
configurator must be inserted. activators, a value between
AUX 1 and 9 could be assigned to configurator Z (appropriate
- Configurators 1, 8 instead would assign the transponder reader to the sensor (IR zone) taking account of the progressive No.
detectors or contact interface) “group” while configurator 9 would assign it to the
“group” of auxiliary devices (auxiliary channel interface or relay actuator).
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the transponder reader inside the
zone attributed. Configurator 1 identifies the first reader-transponder, configurator 2 the
second and so on until a maximum of 9 receiver devices for each of the zones.
Z
N°
MOD
MOD AUX
Assigns the operating mode. It assigns the operating mode. In order for it to operate
as activator, use configurator 1 with flush mounted central units item 4600/4, and
configurator 0 for other central units.
The transponder is saved in the burglar-alarm central unit. The maximum number that
can be managed is:
- 29 with flush mounted central unit, item L/N/NT4600/4.
- 50 with central unit with display, item 3486 or 3485, 573935, 573934, 067520.
- 20 with central unit with display, item 3485B or HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601.
Z
N°
MOD
AUX
MQ00033-c-EN 24/04/2014
265
AUX
Transponder reader Z
N°
MOD
067508 HC4607
Z
HD4607 AUX L4607 NT4607
573948 573949
N°
MOD
AUX
HS4607 N4607 AM5787
Configuration
Night function: when the system is disconnected, it is possible to activate the zones up
to the numeric value of the configurator in AUX position. This function can be enabled
with configurator 7 in MOD position if central units with a display are used or with
Z
configurator 8 if flush mounted central units item L/N/NT4600/4 are used. N°
MOD
AUX
AUX
Z
Example: MOD = 7, AUX = 3 N°
MOD
In this case, when the burglar-alarm with the central unit and communicator are AUX
Z
activated, only the first three zones will be enabled. N°
MOD
AUX
AUX Z
N°
This configurator activates the activator auxiliary modes of operation, assigning an MOD
AUX
auxiliary channel.
To use the activator as auxiliary device, refer to the My Home application guide.
Example Example
configured in this way the transponder reader works as 4th device of the activator group. Z
N° 4
MOD
AUX
Configurator position Value Z
N°Z
N°
4 1
MOD
MOD
Z none AUX
AUX
Z 1
N 4 N°
MOD
AUX
MOD 1
AUX none
Use with central unit item L/N/NT4600/4

Z
The transponder (badge) programming operation is necessary in order for it to work as a 2) Program the IR remoteMODN°controls first;
normal infrared remote control, item 4050. 3) Now, move the badgesAUXtowards the transponder reader;
Z
The initial programming - which is carried out when installing the Transponder reader – 4) Make sure that two short MODtones
N° are emitted: the first is emitted from the transponder
shall be carried out with the central unit in MAINTENANCE mode (selector switch located reader, the second is emitted
AUX from the central unit.;
on the back in OFF position). 5) Repeat points 3 and 4 for all available badges;
Proceed as indicated below: 6) When you have finished programming the last badge, press the S pushbutton on the
1) With central unit in maintenance mode, press the P key and check if the yellow LED central unit (the yellow PROG LED turns off) and flip the back selector switch to ON.
PROG lights up.;
AUTOMATION mode – ON/OFF TIMED:

Z
It can be used for the actuation of an ON/OFF control lasting 1 second. N°
MOD
AUX
Z Z Z
N°
This configurator coincides with A (room) of the automation system; (it assigns the MOD N°
AUX
homogeneous room where the actuation is performed – from 1 to 9 -). MOD
AUX
N°
It coincides with the PL of the automation system (it assigns the point where the
actuation must be performed – from 1 to 9 -).
Example
MOD 3
Assigns the operating mode. For the automation functions connect configurator 2.
2
Z
N°
MOD
AUX AUX
No configurator. Z
N°
2 4
MOD
AUX
Example: If Z=3, N=2 and MOD=2 the device sends an ON/OFF control lasting 1 second 1
(e.g. electrical door lock release) to an actuator with address A=3 and PL=2.
MQ00033-c-EN 24/04/2014
266
Transponder reader
067508 HC4607 HD4607 L4607 NT4607
573948 573949 HS4607 N4607 AM5787
Configuration
F420
AUTOMATION mode – SCENARIO MANAGEMENT:
Z
It coincides with the room of the scenario module item F420 where the actuation is
performed – from 0 to 9 – (reference socket A on the scenario module). Z 3
3
2
N° 2
MOD 2
4
N° AUX
It coincides with the PL position (configurator from 1 to 9) of the scenario module.

Transponder reader Scenario module
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. For the automation functions connect configurator 2.
Example: configured in this way the control activates scenario no. 4 of the scenario
AUX module item F420 with address A=3, PL=2.
It assigns the correspondence between the required scenario and the scenario module.
The configurators that can be used are those between 1 and 9 and coincide with the
corresponding scenario of the scenario module, item F420.
AUTOMATION mode – Timed control:

It enables the actuation of an ON timed control
Z =
This configurator coincides with A (room) of the automation system (it assigns the 1
02'
homogeneous room where the actuation is performed – from 1 to 9). $8;
N°
It coincides with the PL of the automation system (it assigns the point where the Transponder reader
actuation must be performed – from 1 to 9).
Example: configured in this way, the transponder reader sends to an actuator with
MOD
address A = 1 and PL = 3 an ON control with a delay of 5 minutes (e.g. switching on a
It assigns the operating mode. To obtain an ON timed control connect configurator 6.
service light).
AUX
It assigns the duration of the time delay based on the value of the configurator used, as SLAVE control
shown in the following table. It enables reproducing an enabled control on a “Master” transponder reader. The
transponder keys used must only be saved in the “Master” device.
Aux Time
Z
0 It coincides with the Z configurator of the master device.
1 1 min.
2 2 min. N°
It coincides with the N° configurator of the master device.
3 3 min.
4 4 min. MOD
5 5 min. Assigns the operating mode. To obtain SLAVE devices connect the SLA configurator.
6 15 min. AUX
7 30 sec. It coincides with the AUX configurator of the master device.
8 0.5 sec.
9 (not used) ---
MQ00033-c-EN 24/04/2014
267
Transponder reader
067508 HC4607 HD4607 L4607 NT4607
573948 573949 HS4607 N4607 AM5787
Configuration
3479/F481
AUTOMATION mode – AUXILIARY CONTROL:
This mode can be obtained by connecting the AUX configurator to MOD. This will generate
a 1 sec. ON/OFF control on the assigned auxiliary channel. The difference when compared 1 1
2 2
with the auxiliary function generated with the reader connected to the burglar-alarm Z Z 3 3
6 6
system (MOD=1) is that in this case the codes of the transponders are saved in the reader N° N° 1 1
MOD MOD AUX AUX
itself, with the possibility of managing 120 badges at the same time. AUX AUX 2 2
Z
It assigns the no. of the zone it belongs to, form 0 to 9. Transponder reader Relay actuator
N°
It assigns the progressive no. inside the zone. Example: when configured in this way, as auxiliary device no. 1 (N=1) in zone 3 (Z=3),
the control sends an ON/OFF command on auxiliary channel 2 (AUX=2) intended for the
MOD relay actuator item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4614 configured with AUX = 2.
It assigns the operating mode. For the auxiliary functions connect the AUX configurator.
AUX
It assigns the auxiliary channel.
MQ00033-c-EN 24/04/2014
268
1-4 zone transponder
divider HD4607/4 N4607/4 NT4607/4
HS4607/4 HC4607/4 L4607/4 AM5787/4
Description
1
This device is used to arm, disarm, and separate the zones of the system by placing a
transponder badge (item 3530S and item 3540 previously stored in the central unit) in
front of the zone transponder badge receiver.
When used in an automation system it performs the control function for the management
of scenarios. 7 2
By pressing one of the pushbuttons, the corresponding zone is armed/disarmed.
Within four seconds from the last pressure, the separation performed must be confirmed 6 3
by moving a transponder saved in the central unit close to the device.
Should this not take place, then the previous condition is automatically restored. Red LEDs
on indicate that the zones are active, whereas red LEDs off show that they are disarmed.
Front view 5 4
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc Legend
- Max. absorption: 15 mA 1 - Transponder badge receiver zone;
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C 2 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 2;
3 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 4;
4 - Indication “System ON/OFF”;
Dimensional data 5 - Alarm warning;
Size: 2 modules 6 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 3;
7 - LED and pushbutton for controlling of zone 1.
Configuration
BURGLAR-ALARM mode:
Since this item belongs to the activator group, it needs to be set up with the number of Z
the “group” assigned and the progressive number of the devices in the “group”. It can also = No.
1
be programmed to perform Automation functions (scenario management). 02' MOD
See Automation “MY HOME” guide for details. $8;
AUX
Z Clamp for burglar
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone (from 1 to 8) in the “group” alarm BUS
of devices (any free zone in the system). To configure it as belonging to the activator
group, no configurator must be inserted. Rear view
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number within the group of activators.
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 identifies the second, and so =
Central unit Configurator
1 LED ON Enabling
forth, up to a maximum of 9 activators (dividers, expanders or activators). 02'
used value
$8; BEEP
NOTE: If all 9 permitted devices have already been assigned to the activator group,
it could be possible to assign to configurator Z (zone it belongs to) a value between 3486 none YES YES
1 and 9, taking into account the progressive number. 3485/B 1 NO YES
HD/HC/HS/L/N/
NT4601 2 YES NO
MOD
It assigns the modes of the audible signals (BEEP) and luminous signals (LED ON) 3 NO NO
provided by the divider when controlled by the transponder; it is used as a activators/ L/N/NT4600/1 4 YES YES
disconnector of the “Burglar-alarm” system. A/AM5780/1 5 NO YES
=
6 1 YES NO
02'
7 $8; NO NO
AUX
Position not configurable for the “Burglar-alarm” function; configure only if it is necessary
to enable the device for Automation functions (management of the scenarios stored in
the unit or scenario module).
MQ00028-c-EN 24/04/2014 =
1
02'
$8;
269
1-4 zone transponder
divider HD4607/4 N4607/4 NT4607/4
HS4607/4 HC4607/4 L4607/4 AM5787/4
Configuration
AUTOMATION mode – SCENARIO MANAGEMENT:
Z
=
1 No.
Z 02'
$8; MOD
This configurator with value 0-9 coincides with the A position of the scenario module.
AUX
N° Clamp for burglar
This configurator with value 1-9 coincides with the PL position of the scenario module. alarm BUS
MOD
Assigns the operating mode. Connect configurator 9.
AUX
It assigns one of the scenarios programmed on the scenario module to the four =
1
pushbuttons (SCE = 1-9) as per the table. 02'
$8;
Pushbutton no. Associated scenario no.

pushbutton 1 SCE
pushbutton 2 SCE + 1
Example
=
If configurator 3 is connected to AUX, use pushbutton 1 to recall scenario no. 3, pushbutton 1
02'
2 to recall scenario no. 4, pushbutton 3 to recall scenario no. 5, and pushbutton 4 to recall $8;
scenario no. 6
Pairing transponders Erasing the memory

1. Move the “programming block” switch to the open padlock and then: 1. Move the “programming block” to the open padlock.
2. Press pushbuttons 1 and 4 at the same time for more than 5 seconds until the alarm 2. Press pushbuttons 1 and 4 at the same time for more than 10 seconds and check that
LED status comes on for 0.5 second and an audible signal is heard. the LED flashes slowly 4 times, and that there is an audible signal.
=
3. Release pushbuttons 1 and 4. 3. Release pushbuttons
1 1 and 4.
02'
$8;
4. Move the transponder being programmed close to the device: 4. The transponder zones activator will remain in programming mode, ready for a new
- if the transponder has been correctly saved the alarm status LED will slowly flash programming sequence.
twice and an audible signal will be heard. Go to step 6.
- if the code is already in the memory there will be 2 audible signals and the led will 5. Move the switch back to the closed padlock position to exit the erasing procedure.
flash quickly twice.
- if the memory is full there will be 5 audible signals and the LED will flash quickly 5
times.
5. To store other transponders repeat the procedure in step 4, otherwise go to step 6.
6. Move the “programming block” switch back on the closed padlock to exit
programming. Otherwise the device will exit programming mode after 1 minute of
inactivity.
MQ00028-c-EN 24/04/2014
270
Display keypad
5739 46 (White) HC4608 L4608 N4608
067507 5739 47 (Magnesium) HD4608 HS4608 NT4608
Description
1
Using the transponder key, or a secret code set on the central unit, this device with
display and digital keypad can be used to arm/disarm the system and separate the zones
with the same flexibility and using the same procedure as for burglar-alarm central unit
with display, or three module flush mounted central units.
In this way the central units can be installed in an appropriate equipment room, out of
sight.
All system status details are shown of the large backlit display.
Related articles:
681 82 (White Cover) 1 2 3
684 82 (Titanium Cover) 4 5 6 6

801 24 (Flush-mounting box) 3
7 8 9 C OK
0 P
5
Technical data 2
4
Dimensional data Front view
Size: 3+3 modules
Legend
1 - Graphic display: displays the messages which guide the programming operations
and the events which have occurred.
2 - Transponder reader: receives the burglar-alarm system switching on and off
commands directly from the transponder keys.
3 - Alphanumeric keypad: allows the manual switching on of all those programming
4 - C key: exit the current menu and the programming.
6 - Navigation keypad: navigate the menu.
MQ00025-c-EN 28/10/2013
271
Display keypad
5739 46 (White) HC4608 L4608 N4608
067507 5739 47 (Magnesium) HD4608 HS4608 NT4608
Configuration
The activator with display must be configured by assigning a zone address (Z), indicating Selecting the central unit installed in the system
the activator group it belongs to, and a progressive number (N) within the group.
To configure it as belonging to the activators group, no value must be entered in Z. 1. Select “type of central unit”.
The configuration is performed using a specific menu shown on the display, following
the procedure below: 2. Select the type of burglar-alarm central unit installed:
- “Display” for central unit item 3486, item 3485/B, 573935, 573934, 067520 and
1. Ensure that the system is in “maintenance” mode. item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4601 -
“No display” for central unit item L/N/NT4600/4 and AM5780/4.
2. Upon switching on the activator, the “SETTING” screen appears in Italian language.
3. Press OK to confirm.
3. Select “Address” (address).
4. Enter the other settings or return to the main page, and start the learning procedure
4. Enter the Z and N address to assign to the activato and press OK to confirm. on the central unit.
5. Enter the other settings or return to the main page, and start the learning procedure For further device customisation procedures refer to the information on the CD supplied
on the central unit. with the product.
Address configuration menu Address configuration menu
SETTINGS SETTINGS
Language Language
Address Address
Central unit type Central unit type
Address-- Display
SETTINGS SETTINGS
Language Language
Address Address
Address 12 No display
WARNING
Modified address
run system in progress...
learning
SETTINGS SETTINGS
Language Language
Address Address
Address12 No display
MQ00025-c-EN 28/10/2013
272
Passive IR detector
5739 36 (White) 067511 HD4610 L4610 NT4610
Description
The passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with fixed lens, sensitive to the
movement of warm bodies. The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams
distributed on 3 levels. The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with
impulse calculation, in order to reduce the possibility of false alarms.
It can also be used in the automation system for timed ON/OFF functions, or to activate 1
auxiliary controls.
Related articles:
Front view 2
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA Legend
1 - Fresnel lens;
2 - Alarm warning LED.
Covering range
30° 30°
105°
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
A +2°
0°
B -6°
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
MQ00035-c-EN 28/04/2014
273
Passive IR detector
5739 36 (White) 067511 HD4610 L4610 NT4610
Configuration
Infrared ray detectors require assignment of the appropriate zones and the progressive Z
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly Z
N° No.
assignment of an auxiliary channel. MOD
AUX MOD
AUX
Z
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector. Clamp for burglar
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to alarm BUS
Rear view
N°
zone. Z
N°
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on MOD
AUX
MOD
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode.
It can be used, for EXAMPLE, when the device is directed towards a possible source of
disturbance (window or radiator), and its position cannot be changed.
Configurator Mode Z
N°
MOD
0 1 level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
st
AUX
1 1st level of sensitivity (2 high sensitivity impulses)

2 2nd level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse)
3 3rd level of sensitivity (1 low sensitivity impulse)
4 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse),
but with delay.
5 1st level of sensitivity (2 high sensitivity impulses),
but with delay. Z
N°
MOD
6 2 level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),
nd
AUX
but with delay.
7 3rd level of sensitivity (1 low sensitivity impulse),
but with delay.
AUX auxiliary function activation. The device, in any system
status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary alarm
to the channel specified in the AUX position. If the
assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command will
be disabled.
2
High sensitivity = maximum coverage 9 metres
Z
Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres N° 1
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres MOD
AUX
1
AUX
If the AUX configurator has been connected to the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of
the configurator in this position activates the auxiliary function assigned to the 1 to 9
number of the auxiliary channel.
If no configurator, or one of the 1 to 7 configurators, is connected to the MOD position,

the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
For further information and advanced functions contact Technical Support Centre.
MQ00035-c-EN 28/04/2014
274
Passive IR detector
5739 36 (White) 067511 HD4610 L4610 NT4610
Configuration
Passive IR detectors can generate and send an ON timed control directly to one or more
actuators.
of the actuator to control respectively.
To the MOD position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
The switching ON period is set by connecting numerical configurators 1 to 9 to the AUX
position as shown in the following table:
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec. 2 sec.
Example of configuration
IR detector Actuator
Z A
1 4 NO 5
41
N° PL
MOD M
AUX G1
G2
L L1
AUTOMATION mode – GENERIC CONTROL USING AUXILIARY CHANNELS:

In this case, the actuator is managed by a control device, item H/L4651M2, 067553 or
AM5831M2, which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M position, activates
the actuator with address set in A and PL.
The communication between the detector and the associated control device is
established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been configured in the IR detector
by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position, and specifying, with numeric
configurators 1-9 in the AUX position, the number of the auxiliary channel. Obviously, in
order to univocally establish the auxiliary channel, also the AUX position of the control
must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
MQ00035-c-EN 28/04/2014
275
Passive IR detector
573938 (White) 067502 HD4611 N4611 NT4611
573939 (Magnesium) HC4611 HS4611 L4611 AM5791
Description
The passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with tilting lens, sensitive to the Horizontal adjustment
movement of warm bodies. The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams
distributed on 3 levels. The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with 30° 30°
impulse calculation, in order to reduce the possibility of false alarms. It is available 1
for installation in the high sections of rooms, at heights between 1.2 and 2 metres. 28°
Vertical adjustment
The position of the lens should then be adjusted based on the characteristics of the room
to protect. 2
It is also possible to change the sensitivity threshold, and to generate auxiliary functions
when the system is disarmed. 25°
3
Technical data
Front view
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA
Covering range Legend

1 - Fresnel lens;
Horizontal adjustment 2 - Covering reducing lid;
3 - Alarm warning LED.
30° 30°
105°
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
Vertical adjustment
0°

C B A -25°
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A +2° 28°
0°
B -6° 25°
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
MQ00036-c-EN 29/04/2014
276
Passive IR detector
573938 (White) 067502 HD4611 N4611 NT4611
Configuration
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly Z
N° No.
assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel. MOD
AUX MOD
Z AUX
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector. Clamp for burglar
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to alarm BUS
Rear view
N°
zone. Z
N°
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator Mode Z
N°
MOD
0 1 level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
st
AUX

but with delay.
but with delay. Z
N°
MOD
6 2 level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),
nd
AUX
but with delay.
but with delay.
AUX pre-alarm function activation. The device, in any
system status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary
alarm to the channel specified in the AUX position. If
the assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command
will be disabled
2
Z
Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres N° 1
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres MOD
AUX
1
AUX
If the AUX configurator has been connected to the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of
If no configurator, or one of the 1 to 7 configurators, is connected to the MOD position,

the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
For further information and advanced functions contact Technical Support Centre.
MQ00036-c-EN 29/04/2014
277
Passive IR detector
573938 (White) 067502 HD4611 N4611 NT4611
Configuration
actuators.
To the MOD position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec 2 sec.
Z A
1 4 NO 5
41
N° PL
MOD M
AUX G1
G2
L L1

In this case, the actuator is managed by a control device, item H/L4651M2, 067553 or
AM5831M2, which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M position, activates
the actuator with address set in A and PL.
The communication between the detector and the associated control device is
established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been configured in the IR detector
by connecting the AUX configurator to the MOD position, and specifying, with numeric
configurators 1-9 in the AUX position, the number of the auxiliary channel. Obviously, in
order to univocally establish the auxiliary channel, also the AUX position of the control
must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
MQ00036-c-EN 29/04/2014
278
Passive IR detector
L4611B NT4611B
067512 N4611B AM5791B
Description
Horizontal adjustment
These devices are the simplified version of sensors item L/N/NT4611, item 675 02 and
item AM5791. They have a fixed level of sensitivity (6 metres). 30° 30°
Also in this case, the passive infrared detector is a volumetric detector with tilting lens,
1
Vertical adjustment
sensitive to the movement of warm bodies. 28°
The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams distributed on 3 levels.
The detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with impulse calculation, in 2
order to reduce the possibility of false alarms. It is available for installation in the high
sections of rooms, at heights between 1.2 and 2 metres. 25°
The position of the lens should then be adjusted based on the characteristics of the room 3
to protect.
Related articles: Front view
Legend
Technical data 1 - Fresnel lens;
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 2 - Covering reducing lid;
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA 3 - Alarm warning LED.
Covering range
Horizontal adjustment
30° 30°
105°
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
0°
Vertical adjustment
2,00
A
C B -25°
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A +2° 28°
1,20 0°
-6° 25°
B
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
MQ00037-c-EN 28/04/2014
279
Passive IR detector
L4611B NT4611B
067512 N4611B AM5791B
Configuration
They require that the zone they belong to and the progressive sensor number within the
zone are assigned. They also require setting of the detection mode. Z Z
N°
MOD
AUX
No.
Z MOD
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to Clamp for burglar
a maximum of 8 zones. alarm BUS
N° Rear view
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on Z
N°
to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 zones. MOD
AUX
MOD
Configurator Mode
Z
0 1 pulse N°
MOD
AUX
1 pulse counter (*)
2 1 pulse with delay
3 pulse counter with delay
(*) The sensor generates an alarm signal based on the detection performed during a
period of 30 seconds.
NOTE: Use the pulse counter function to avoid false alarms caused by thermal variations
(radiators etc.). Z
N°
MOD
AUX
2
Z
N° 1
MOD
AUX
1
MQ00037-c-EN 28/04/2014
280
Double technology
IR+MW detector 5739 40 (White) 067504 HS4613 HC4613 N4613
5739 41 (Magnesium) 067503 HD4613 L4613 NT4613
Description
This device consists of two sensors: one infrared sensor (IR) to detect the presence of warm
bodies, and one microwave (MW) sensor to detect moving bodies.
The combination of these technologies guarantees greater immunity against false alarms.
In fact the device is programmed to give the alarm only if both the detection technologies
are activated, and this guarantees a high standard of safety.
The volume of the protected zone is split into 14 bands on 3 floors.
Due to the fact that the sensors do not operate correctly if their covering ranges overlap 1
those of double technology sensors, the installation of several sensors in the same room is
not recommended.
The detectors, configured in the AUX socket, activate the auxiliary operating modes,
2
assigning an auxiliary channel. The device performs all its burglar-alarm functions, but
when the system is disarmed it activates the corresponding auxiliary channel (unless
separated). The auxiliary function can therefore be excluded by separation of the zone it
belongs to. It also enables activating any auxiliary actuator devices, provided that they have
been configured using the same auxiliary channel.
Note: do not mount in places where there are moving metal parts (e.g. thermoconvectors
or air-moving blades). Z
N°
MOD
AUX
Technical data
3
Max. absorption: 35 mA for the first detector installed, 7 mA for all the others
Legend
Covering range
30° 30° 1. Fresnel lens;
105° 2. Alarm warning LED;
3. Clamp for burglar alarm BUS.
A B A
B B
A A
B B
A A
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
A
1,20
B
C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
MQ00034-d-EN 28/04/2014
281
Double technology
IR+MW detector 5739 40 (White) 067504 HS4613 HC4613 N4613
5739 41 (Magnesium) 067503 HD4613 L4613 NT4613
Configuration
Double-technology detectors require assignment of the appropriate zones and the AUX
progressive number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and If the AUX configurator has been installed in the MOD position, the 1 to 9 value of the
possibly assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel. configurator in this position activates the pre-alarm function, assigning the 1 to 9
Z If no configurator, or one of the 2 to 7 configurators, are present in the MOD position, the
This configurator assigns the number of the appropriate zone to the detector. device only activates the pre-alarm function when the system is disarmed.
Note: to complete the activations using the relay actuator type F or 3479, see the
appropriate technical sheet.
N°
This configurator assigns the progressive number of the detector inside the appropriate EXAMPLE
zone. Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and First sensor belonging to zone 2.
so on to a maximum of 9 sensors (IR detectors and contact interface) for each of the 8 Configurator position Value
zones.
Z 2
MOD N° 1
This configurator sets the sensor detection mode. MOD none
It can be used, for example, when the device is directed towards a possible source of
AUX none
Configurator Mode Example

Example of IR detector with auxiliary configuration. First sensor belonging to zone 2,
0 1 sensitivity level
st
and with high sensitivity, and pre-alarm on auxiliary channel no. 3 with the system
2 2nd sensitivity level disarmed (e.g. activation of bell when someone goes through the area).
3 3rd sensitivity level With the system armed, the device only operates as burglar-alarm sensor.
4 1st sensitivity level with delay.

Configurator position Value
6 2nd sensitivity level with delay.
Z 2
7 3rd sensitivity level with delay.
N° 1
AUX Activation of the pre-alarm function, irrespective of
MOD none
the system status (armed or disarmed). The device
sends an auxiliary type alarm through the specified AUX 3
separated, the auxiliary command is disabled.
High sensitivity (1st level) = maximum coverage 8 metres

Medium sensitivity (2nd level) = maximum coverage 6 metres
Low sensitivity (3rd level) = maximum coverage 3 metres
MQ00034-d-EN 28/04/2014
282
Alarm radio receiver
HC4618 HS4618 N4618
HD4618 L4618 NT4618
Description
The radio receiver, fitted in the MY HOME burglar-alarm system, allows the use of
devices which transmit radio wave signals (volumetric sensors, perimeter sensors,
technical alarm sensors, radio system remote control, radio remote control for remote
assistance) inside the burglar-alarm system, transferring the radio signal on SCS cable
(item L4669S). The radio receiver will thus be connected to the SCS cable like any burglar-
alarm device and must be configured depending on whether it is used with radio sensors
or remote control.
The connection between receiver and radio sensors or remote control does not need
conductors because each device is supplied by batteries and the information is 1 2
transmitted via radio. Front view
NotE: for more information consult the manual supplied with the product.

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1 - Operation indication LED;
- Max. absorption: 15 mA 2 - Reset or programming key.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
Configuration
Z - This configurator assigns the number of the zone it belongs to within the device Z
group(any free zone in the system). Z No.
N°
Configurators 1 - 8 assign the receiver zone within the group of sensors (IR detectors or AUX AUX
interface contacts);
configurator 9 assigns the receiver zone within the group of auxiliary devices (auxiliary Clamp for burglar
channel interface or relay actuator); alarm BUS
no configurator assigns the receiver zone within the group of activators (activator,
divider, zone expander).
Rear view
N° - This configurator assigns the progressive receiver number inside the zone attributed.
Configurator 1 identifies the first device, configurator 2 the second and so on up to a
maximum of 9 expander devices for each of the zones.
AUX - This configurator activates the prealarm (with volumetric and/or perimeter
sensors) or technical alarm function (with technical alarm sensors) and assigns an
auxiliary channel (AUX).
NotE: if the system is configured to have technical alarms, prealarms CANNOT be

Z
generated with the system switched off. N°
AUX
Z
N°
AUX
MQ00049-c-EN 28/04/2014
283
Radio flooding detector
HA4619 HB4619 L4619
Description
This device generates an alarm signal when the contacts of the corresponding sensor
make contact with water.
The signal is then processed by the alarm central unit, which activates the siren and the
Telephone communicator (if installed), for sending a telephone message.
Better protection can be ensured by installing a relay actuator within the Burglar-Alarm
system, which will order an electrovalve to shut off the main water supply in case of
flooding.
Two front pushbuttons can be used to interrupt the alarm signalling and to test the
operation of the sensor. 1
2
Technical data
- Power supply: Battery 3 V type CR2032
Front view 4
- Radio frequency: 868 MHz
(metal, concrete walls and metal plates reduce coverage) 3
- Modulation: FSK
CONFORMITY DECLARATION Flooding detector item HA4619 with front cover plate
Items HA/HB4619 and L4619 comply with the essential requirement of directive 1999/5/
CE as they meet the following standards:
- ETSI EN301 489-3 Legend
- ETSI EN300 220-3
Year of approval of the CE mark in accordance with the above directive: 2007 1 - Reset key;
2 - LED: If the TEST or RESET pushbutton is press for 1 second, the LED will normally flash
twice; if the battery is exhausted the LED will only flash once;
3 - Flooding probe;
Dimensional
Dimensional datadata 4 - TEST pushbutton.
4 4 10
70
item L4619
115
100 100 10
93
92
item HA/HB4619
MQ00056-c-EN 19/05/2014
284
Radio flooding detector
HA4619 HB4619 L4619
Configuration
WARNING: The configuration operations must be performed with the battery disconnected
Z
MOD
AUX
N
Z
Configurator 1 assigns zone 1 to the detector, configurator 2 assigns zone 2 and so on to a
maximum of 8 zones Configurator 9 assigns the device to the group of auxiliary devices.
N
zone.
Configurator 1 identifies the first detector, configurator 2 identifies the second and so on
Internal view Z N° MOD AUX
MOD
Do not configure.
AUX
Pairing remote receivers
1. Switch the system to “maintenance” mode.
2. Press the programming pushbutton of the radio receiver for five seconds, until the red
LED comes on.
3. Press the RESET key for 5 seconds of the receiver.
4. If the pairing of the device has been performed correctly, the red LED of the radio
receiver will go off.
If this does not happen, repeat the procedure from step 3. If the LED flashes, it means
that the device memory is full.
5. To pair other devices, repeat from step 2.
6. Perform self learning of the system from the central unit.
Cancelling remote receivers

1. Switch the system to maintenance mode.
2. Remove the power supply from the receiver.
3. Press and hold the programming pushbutton while reconnecting the power supply to
the radio receiver.
4. After 5 seconds the LED flashes orange. If the pushbutton is released at this time, only
the remote controls are cancelled.
5. After releasing the pushbutton, the LED becomes fixed orange. When the LED goes
off, cancellation has been completed.
6. Perform self-learning of the system from the central unit and exit “maintenance”
mode.
MQ00056-c-EN 19/05/2014
285
Passive IR detector
N4640
N4640B
Description
The passive IR detector is of volumetric type and sensible to movement of warm bodies.
The volume of the protected zone is divided into 14 beams distributed on 3 levels. The
detector works in two different ways: instantaneous or with impulse calculation, in order
to reduce the possibility of false alarms.
It’s available in the version with reduced sizes and is suitable for wall mounted 1
installation in systems preset or not preset for traditional sensors. For the sensor item
N4640 the covering range can be adjusted on three levels (3, 6, or 9 metres), while the
sensor item N4640B has a fixed sensitivity level (6 metres). 2
Technical data
- Max. absorption: 4.5 mA Front view
Covering range Legend

30° 30° 1 - Alarm warning LED;
105° 2 - Fresnel lens.
A B A
B B
A A Dimensional data
B B
A A
35 23
12
10
8
6 C C
m 4 C
2
molla
tamper
60
1,20 A Surface

m
C B mounted
$ % $
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 % %
$ $
MA X MA X % %
$ $

$
%
Slanting P

&
& &
& installation
P

0$; 0$;

MQ00038-d-EN 04/06/2014
286
Passive IR detector
N4640
N4640B
Configuration N4640
number of the sensors in the zone, setting of the detection mode and possibly N°
assignment of an auxiliary prealarm channel.
AUX
Z
N°
zone.
Internal view

Configurator Mode
0 1st level of sensitivity (1 high sensitivity impulse)
but with delay.
but with delay.
6 2nd level of sensitivity (1 medium sensitivity impulse),
but with delay.
but with delay.
AUX Auxiliary function activation. The device, in any system
status (enabled or disabled), sends an auxiliary alarm
to the channel specified in the AUX position. If the
assigned zone is divided, the auxiliary command will
be disabled.
Medium sensitivity = maximum coverage 6 metres
Low sensitivity = maximum coverage 3 metres
AUX
If the AUX configurator has been connected to the position, the 1 to 9 value of
If no configurator, or one of the configurators from 1 to 7 is connected to the

position, the device only activates the auxiliary function when the system is disarmed.
MQ00038-d-EN 04/06/2014
287
Passive IR detector
N4640
N4640B
Configuration N4640
actuators.
To the position connect the ON configurator to enable the time delay function.
AUX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Time 1 min. 2 min. 3 min. 4 min. 5 min. 15 min. 30 sec. 0.5 sec 2 sec.
5 ON 4 1
A
41
PL
M
G1
G2
L L1
item L4671/1

In this case, the actuator is managed by a control device, item H/L4651M2 or AM5831M2,
which, based on its own operating mode, set in its own M position, activates the actuator
with address set in A and PL.
The communication between the detector and the associated control device item H/
L4651M2 or AM5831M2 is established by defining an auxiliary channel that has been
configured in the IR detector by connecting the AUX configurator to the position,
and specifying, with numeric configurators 1-9 in the AUX position, the number of the
auxiliary channel. Obviously, in order to univocally establish the auxiliary channel, also
the AUX position of the control must have the same configurator as the IR detector.
MQ00038-d-EN 04/06/2014
288
Passive IR detector
N4640
N4640B
Configuration item N4640B

This device is the model with preset sensor sensitivity level, item N4640 and it only
performs burglar-alarm system functions as it does not manage auxiliary channels
or automation modes; it requires allocation of the zone it belongs to, the progressive N°
number of the sensors within the zone, and the setting of the detection mode. Z
Z
N°
zone.

Configurator Mode
0 1 pulse
1 pulse counter(1)
2 1 pulse with delay
3 pulse counter with delay
The sensor generates an alarm signal based on the detection performed during a
(1)
period of 30 seconds.
MQ00038-d-EN 04/06/2014
289
BUS cable
L4669S
Description Technical data

The red SCS-BUS cable has been purposely designed and produced for the installation of - Insulation voltage: 300/500 V
burglar-alarm systems This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and - Can be buried: NO;
the operating signals to all system devices. - Reference standards: it complies with the tests required by the following regulations:
The cable consists of a red external sheath and two twisted flexible conductors, with a EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,
section of 0.35 mm2, one yellow and one red. EN50395, EN50396 as described in the document
IMQ CPT 062;
The cable has 300/500 V insulation. Using the clear clamp protections included in all the - External sheath colour: red;
devices, the systems can also be installed in the same boxes and conduits as the power - External sheath diameter: 5.5 +/- 0.1 mm;
lines (110 Vac, 127 Vac and 230 Vac). - External sheath thickness: 0.8 mm;
- External sheath material: PVC (RZ);
WARNING - Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with sheath;
Although the construction of the cable ensures 300/500 V category electric insulation, - Colour of internal conductors: white and blue;
correct system operation is not guaranteed in the following cases, when installed - Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.60 mm;
together with the power cables: - Sheath diameter of internal conductors: PVC (R2);
• in industrial environments; - Conductor materials: red electrolytic copper;
• in residential/service sector environments, when the power cables provide power - Conductor section: 0.35 mm2 (12 x 0.20 mm2);
supply to one of the following: - Operating temperature: 15 - 70°C;
• lifts - Maximum short circuit temperature: 150°C;
• inverter - Coil length: 100 m.
• pumps
• motors and controlled motors
• metal iodines lamps.
The SCS-BUS cable is not suitable for underground installation.
MQ00256-c-EN 09/01/2013
290
Technical sheets - Temperature control
291
Radio outdoor
temperature probe
3455
Description
The outside temperature can be measured by means of this radio probe. The data is then 1
sent through radio waves to the receiving interface, and to the temperature control
system. 99-zone or 4-zone central units can simply display this data. The automations
are reserved just to the 99-zone central unit and can activate controls on the basis of
exceeding particular temperature thresholds set by means of the TiThermo software.
2
These automations also allow the management of enhanced systems with combination
boiler. Up to nine temperature probes can be installed in a system.
The radio probe is practically maintenance-free and is supplied by a small solar cell
installed on the device. Special care should be taken to install the solar cell in positions 3
which can guarantee sufficient irradiation. 4
For applications in badly lit or dark places, where the solar cell cannot supply the
device, power can be supplied by means of a Lithium battery (type LS14250/1/2AA),
to be inserted in the battery compartment. To guarantee the operation of the 5
battery-supplied probe the battery should be replaced at least every 5 years.
Front view
The effective battery lifetime depends on the “data updating time” setting (see
configuration section).
On the probe printed circuit there is a small key to be used during programming and
when the receiving interface is acquiring the radio probe details.
Legend
1. Temperature sensor: to measure the temperature
2. Transmission key: allows the association between radio probe and receiving interface 6
3. Compartment: for lithium battery
4. Solar cell: supplies the entire device
5. Jumpers: to set the temperature update interval
6. IP65 enclosure
Technical data
Side view
- Power supply: - solar cell
- 3.6 V / 1.1Ah type LS14250/1/2AA lithium battery
- Operating temperature: (-25)– (+40) °C
- Measurement field: (-20) – (+60) °C Probe installation
- Transmission power: < 10 mW
- Range: 70 m in free field (metal and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range);
- Protection index: IP65
CE CONFORMITY
89/336/EWG – Electromagnetic compatibility
R&TTE 1999/5/EC – Directive on radio and telecommunication devices
CONFORMITY TO REGULATIONS
ETSI EN 301 489-3
ETSI EN 300 220-3
EN 60669-2-1
EN 60950
EN 60065
EN 60529
NOTE: the probe must be installed in a position away from direct sunlight, as
this may cause a false temperature reading. Avoid both excessively shady and
excessively bright areas.
MQ00182-c-EN 29/04/2014
292
Radio outdoor
temperature probe
3455
Temperature display
4-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT for outdoor

temperature display
C OK
PROBE for temperature INTERFACE for

detection and transmission data reception
OK
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
99-ZONE CENTRAL UNIT for outdoor

temperature display
Automation - threshold exceeded LED
T - C1 - C2
on
t < 3° C
OK
LED
1 2 3 T C2 C1
4 5 6
7 8 9
0 t > 3° C
off
Probe for temperature Interface 99-zone central unit Control implementation

detection and transmission for data reception actuator
TITHERMO for threshold setting

and automation
MQ00182-c-EN 29/04/2014
293
Radio outdoor
temperature probe
3455
Automations - system with integration boiler
RISCALDAMENTO
integration
boiler
switching
valve
chiller
T - C1 - C2
OK
T C2 C1 1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9 99-zone
0
central unit
interface actuator
probe
BUS
Setting the temperature update interval

Jumper sockets
}
The radio probe sends the “temperature” reading to the receiving interface at regular
intervals that can be manually set using the jumpers, which must be connected to the T1
T1 and T2 sockets. The update time is calculated following the formula below: T=T1xT2.
}
The correspondence between the settable times and the jumpers is shown on the
table. When the factory settings are used, the temperature will be updated every 1000
T2
seconds. A change in the factory settings will also entail a variation on the solar cell
recharging time, or the duration of the battery (if applicable).
Jumper/time table
Jumpers T1/T2
1 sec. Factory settings
10 sec.
100 sec. T = 10 x 100 = 1000 sec
MQ00182-c-EN 29/04/2014
294
Radio outdoor
temperature probe
3455
HC/HS 4577 and L/N/NT4577 receiving interface configuration

In order to use a receiving interface and radio probe, configuration must first be
performed, followed by the programming procedure. Only the interface needs
configuring. Up to 2 probes may be combined with each interface, therefore providing
the system with two detection points for each interface. Up to a maximum of 9
temperature probes may be installed in one system. A/-
The configuration sockets on the interface identify the radio probes addresses. They are: PL1/N1 Configurator
A1/-, PL1/N1, M1 for the first address, and A2/-, PL2/N2, M2 for the second address. The M1 socket
two addresses must always be different from each other, PL1/N1 ≠ PL2/N2. Only one A2/-
radio probe may be associated to each address. Only used addresses must be configured. PL2/N2
The interface must be configured in temperature control mode by connecting M2
configurator 1 to M1 and M2. With this mode the A1/- and A2/- sockets are not
used, therefore no configurator needs to be connected.
P back view
Interface
Programming of devices:
After performing the configuration, it will be necessary to associate the radio probe to If necessary repeat the operation to save the code of another probe. If on the other hand
the interface following the programming procedure: an address has already been associated and the procedure is repeated with another
probe, the interface performs an overwriting action, only keeping the last probe in
1) Press the pin pushbutton of the interface for 5 seconds. The red LED turns on. memory. During normal operation, the sending of information from the probe is
Release the pushbutton. The interface LED will flash every two seconds to confirm confirmed by the flashing of the red LED of the interface. A single flashing indicates that
that programming mode is active on the first address (group of configurators PL1/ the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent through
N1, M1). If the second address of the interface is not configured (no configurator is the BUS by a probe associated to the PL1/N1, M1 address. A double flashing indicates
connected to the PL2/N2, M2 positions), go to step 2 of the procedure. that the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent
However, if also the second address must be configured (group of configurators PL2/ through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL2/N2, M2 address. To delete all codes
N2, M2), simply press the pin pushbutton of the interface again. from the interface press the pin pushbutton for 12 seconds. After 5 seconds from pressing
The LED will flash twice in succession every two seconds. the key, the LED will turn on steadily, and after a further 7 seconds, it will start flashing
Every time the pin pushbutton is pressed, the system will switch from the first to the quickly, confirming that all programs have been deleted.
second address and vice versa.
NOTES:
2) After choosing the address, The radio probe should be associated to, within 20 - If the interface configuration is wrong, the red LED will flash. Correct the configuration.
seconds press the transmission key of the probe itself. Pressing the transmission key - If the second interface address has not been configured (no configurator connected to
will send the probe serial code. After receiving the code through the radio signal, the the PL2/N2, M2 sockets), during the programming procedure it will not be possible to
red LED of the interface will quickly flash for 2 seconds, confirming that programming switch to this address, which therefore cannot be programmed.
is complete, and the procedure has been terminated.
MQ00182-c-EN 29/04/2014
295
Air conditioning units control IR emitter
3456
Description
The air conditioning units control IR emitter is a device capable of controlling the air
conditioning units of the air conditioning system by sending infrared controls. All the
controls are sent to the splitter using the Touch Screen, or Multimedia Touch Screen, of Bottom view
the MY HOME system.
The device may be installed inside flush mounted boxes, behind traditional devices, in 1
distribution boards, without using a DIN rail space, or inside the splitter. It is fitted with
an IR transmitter with a two metre wire, for connection to the splitter receiver.
The IR transmitter has sockets for 4 configurators: ZA/A, ZB/PL, N, M. 6
Note (*): The device might not be compatible with some HVAC brands and models. 2
3
Technical data
Operating power supply
with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 15 mA in stand-by 5 4
25 mA during transmission peak

Basic module 1. BUS connection
3. Remote control IR receiver
4. IR transmitter connector
5. Software programming USB connector
6. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future use)
Configuration
The device can be configured in two separate ways:

1. Physical configuration: by connecting the physical configurators to their sockets.
2. Virtual configuration: the device is configured remotely, when no physical configurators
are connected (future use).
1) Basic mode M = 1 2) Advanced mode M = 0

In this mode the device can learn up to 20 controls from the air conditioning unit remote In this mode the IR emitter provides control of the main functions of the air conditioning
control. These can be recalled by all the devices controlling the scenarios (scenario units (temperature, mode, speed and swing) from the Touch Screen and the Multimedia
control, Local Display, Touch Screen, Multimedia Touch Screen, MH200, MHVisual, Web Touch Screen.
server). This mode is available for the air conditioning units listed in the database supplied with
In this mode, the device fully becomes part of the automation system, with A/PL the product.
address (the N configurator must be equal to 0). Acquisition of the control is ensured by If used with the right air conditioning unit model, the following controls are possible:
connecting the device to the PC with the dedicated software. - temperature: adjustment 16 – 30 °C
Using the IR emitter it is possible to acquire the IR controls from the remote control, - mode: auto, heating, cooling, dry and fan
which can then be saved in a personal database. - speed: auto, minimum, medium, maximum
Using the software, each control can be associated to a number from 1 to 20, and then - fins oscillation (swing): on - off
downloaded on the IR emitter.
MQ00357-c-EN 05/06/2014
296
Air conditioning units control IR emitter
3456
Wiring diagrams
IR transmitter connected to the PC for the acquisition of the remote control using the dedicated software
IR transmitter connected to the splitter and the BUS
BUS
MQ00357-c-UK 05/06/2014
297
99-zone central unit
5739 18 (White) 067456
5739 19 (Magnesium) 3550
Description
This central unit can manage temperature control systems up to 99 zones, set the system
and modify the system operating mode. It is more complete than the 4-zone flush
mounted version; in fact just with this central unit it can manage the magnetic contacts
installed on the window frames to activate the energy-saving function (switching OFF
the zones affected by any changes of air).
Equipped with management software with guided menus shown on the display, it 1
allows the user to chose the operating mode, display the temperatures of the various 1 2
zones and display and modify the daily temperature profiles and the weekly programs, OK
while the maintenance menu, reserved for the installer (password protected), allows
access to the system settings (zone configuration, system test, total reset, etc.). 1 2 3
4 5 6
The Central unit can provide both heating and cooling and can manage up to 99 different 3
7 8 9
zones (with one Master probe for each zone plus possible Slave sensors) and up to 9 0
circulation pumps.
A contact can be connected in input for remote control by means of a telephone actuator
to switch from the anti-freeze mode to the automatic mode and vice versa.
By using the serial connector and the TiThermo software, it is possible to program the
unit from a PC.
1
Related articles:
2
801 24 (Flush mounting box)
682 44 (Cover White)
685 44 (Cover Titanium) 3
Legend
1. Graphic display: shows the messages which guide the programming operations Front view
and the system state.
2. Navigation keypad: allows navigation within the menus and confirms or deletes
programming operations.
3. Alphanumeric keypad: allows manual entry of all those programming operations 9
which require the use of numbers and/or symbols. 4
4. Battery compartment: housing for battery item 3507/6. 5
5. Reset pushbutton: pushbutton to reset the hardware.
6. Serial connector: connects to a PC via cable item 335919 (for RS232) or item 3559 6
and 049234 (for USB).
7. Remote control: connection clamp. 7
8. BUS: BUS connection clamp.
9. Switch ON/OFF 8
Technical data
- Operating temperature: 0 – 40 °C 4
- Temperature adjustment range: 3 - 40 °C +/– 0.5 °C
- Size: L=140 mm, H=210 mm, D=35 mm Made in Italy
REMOTE
7
BUS
5
9
OFF
ON
8 6
Rear view
MQ00187-c-EN 29/04/2014
298
5739 18 (White) 067456
5739 19 (Magnesium) 3550
Graphic display Circulation pump

In normal working conditions the Central unit display shows the following information In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be
on the initial page: necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps.
When programming the operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to
connect any special configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the
Operating mode “Pump” item; inside the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by
a circulation pump.
Name of the program Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump
Weekly
being run that hydraulically supply them.
Example
Winter To complete the programming procedure, the pump management mode must also be
State: selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, a cooling, or a combined system.
Wed. 01 Oct 00:01 Winter (heating) Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one “circulation pump” or “several
Summer (Cooling) circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more zone groups.
Date Hour If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation to the opening
of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary, or needed:
- in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
Programming hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
MODE
To complete the learning procedure of all zones within the system, use the item - in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
1 : Weekly
K “Configure Zone” of the “Maintenance” menu. It will be necessary to define if the zone water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
2 : Manual - in system where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
should manage a heating system, a cooling system, or a combined one. Using the same
3 : Scenarios conditioning units or electric heating control).
menu item, also select the type of load to control, choosing between: ON/OFF, OPEN/
4 : Holiday
CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL, and GATEWAY, and indicate which pumps the zone must control,
and the delay. When performing programming operations from the central unit, refer to NOTE: for details of the programming operations to be performed from the central unit
the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself. refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
MANUAL
System withALL ZONES pump
one circulation
K 1 :shown
The system Zone only1has one circulation pump, that only supplies two zones, controlled
2 : Zone
by two solenoid valves.2The pump is managed by a dedicated actuator configured in zone
00. In the same way as the pump, also the two valves are controlled by two different
Manual
actuators. The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves
remains open and will stop when both valves are closed.
BUS
K 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C1 C2 C1 C2
2 4
1 3
ZONE 1
1 2 3 4
Legend
1 2 3 4
C1 C2
1. circulation pump
2. pump actuator
6 3. zone 1 solenoid valve
5 4. zone 1 actuator
5. zone 2 solenoid valve
ZONE 2 6. zone 2 actuator
MQ00187-c-EN 29/04/2014
299
5739 18 (White) 067456
5739 19 (Magnesium) 3550
System with two circulation pumps

The system shown requires two circulation pumps that serve two different zone groups
controlled by their own solenoid valves. The first group pump is managed by a dedicated
actuator configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 1 (N=1). Also the two
valves that control ZONE1 and ZONE2 are managed by their own actuators.
The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves remains open
and will stop when both valves are closed. The second group is similar to the first one,
but the actuator controlling the pump of zones 3 and 4 is configured in zone 00 with
progressive number equal to 2 (N=2). Although belonging to the same system, the two
pump/solenoid valve groups are totally independent from each other (see also actuator
configuration).
BUS
Legend
ZONE 1 1. zone 1 and 2 circulation pump
2. pump actuator
3. zone 3 and 4 circulation pump
4. pump actuator
6. zone 1 actuator
8. zone 2 actuator
ZONE 2 10. actuator zone 3
12. actuator zone 4
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
MQ00187-c-EN 29/04/2014
300
5739 18 (White) 067456
5739 19 (Magnesium) 3550
TiThermo software
TiThermo is the tool used for creating or changing, through a simple and logic graphic - customise the configuration parameters and the operating programs of the central unit
interface, the configuration to be sent to the temperature control system central unit, (e.g. weekly programs, holiday programs)
defining and customising the parameters of the temperature control system and the profiles - create up to 16 scenarios for each operating mode of the system (Heating and Cooling).
of the various operating programs. In each scenario also set different temperatures for each area
Thanks to a dedicated function, the software may also be used to update the central unit - export and/or import profiles and collections (as XML files).
firmware.
The software can be used to: NOTE: for more information on the operation of the application see the manual supplied
- customize the zones with the products.
- manage the actuators, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, cooling,
heating+cooling, no function) and the type of load for the selected function (ON/OFF, The central unit is connected to the PC using cable item 335919 or with item 3559
Open/ Close, Fan-Coil, Gateway) or 049234 (see figure). This accessory is not included with the central unit, and must
- manage the circulation pumps, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, therefore be purchased separately.
cooling, heating+cooling, no function) and the tripping delays
TiThermo screenshots
MQ00187-c-EN 29/04/2014
301
Actuator 2 relays
F430/2
Description
By means of internal relays, this device executes the controls received from the central
unit or the probe. It is needed to control loads such as motorised valves, pumps and
electric radiators.
It has two independent relays which can be used to control two distinct loads with
1 2 3 4
ON/OFF function and to control a single load with open/close function. 1 2 3 4
To manage open/close loads the actuator must be configured with the logical interlock
of the two relays and contact C1 must be considered for the opening control and contact
C2 for the closing control.
C1 C2
1
2

3
4
C1 C2
Front view

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. C1 clamps 1 - 2 relay forcing pushbutton
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc C2 clamps 3 - 4 relay forcing pushbutton
- Maximum absorption relays activated individually): 25.5 mA The forcing pushbuttons do not operate if the OFF configurator is connected to the
- Absorption (relays activated with interlock): 14 mA ZB1 or the ZB2 configurator sockets.
- Absorption in stand-by: 9 mA 2. Yellow LEDs for notification of activation of the corresponding relays.
- Current load of individual relays: 6 A (resistive) e.g. electric radiators 3. Configurator socket.
2 A (inductive) e.g. solenoid valves, pumps 4. Removable clamp for BUS connection SCS.
- Maximum power consumption: 1.7 W
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C
- Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration configurator ZA 1 C1 contact

The item must be configured by connecting the two configurators identifying the socket ZB1 RL1
RL1 N1 2
actuator address and the number of the zone they belong to the ZA and ZB sockets.
In practical terms, the operation is the same as the one performed for the probe, during configurator ZA 3 C2 contact
the definition of the zone. socket ZB2 RL2
A probe and an actuator belonging to the same zone will require the same numeric RL2 N2 4
configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. On the front of the two-relay actuator are five
sockets dedicated to the configurators: The operation of one of the two relays may be excluded. To do this, connect the OFF
ZA, ZB1, N1, ZB2, N2. The configuration sockets are distributed on the two relays in configurator to the socket corresponding to ZB1 or ZB2. The two relays may also be
the following way: used to control a single load with OPEN/CLOSE function, such as, for example, solenoid
ZA ZB1 Relay 1 zone address valves with opening and closing control. For the management of these loads, it will be
N1 Relay 1 progressive zone address necessary to configure the actuator with logic relay interlocking, connecting the same
ZA ZB2 Relay 2 zone address numeric configurator both to ZB and N, therefore ZB1=ZB2 and N1=N2. In using the
N2 Relay 2 progressive zone address contacts, consider contact C1 for the opening control and C2 for the closing control. A
The two relays on the device are independent, and may be used to activate two separate relay configured in zone 00 operates as a circulation pump actuator; for this function,
loads with ON/OFF function, such as: pumps, on/off type motorized valves, and electric the two relays cannot be configured as interlocked.
radiators. The diagram shows the correspondence between the configurator sockets and
the relay contacts.
MQ00184-c-EN 29/04/2014
302
Actuator 2 relays
F430/2
Configurator summary table:

Socket Function Configurator
ZA zone address 0–9
ZB1 Zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - 0 – 9 – OFF
circulation pump mode - OFF zone
N1 progressive zone number - Open/Close contact management - 1–9
circulation pump progressive number
ZB2 Zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - 0 – 9 – OFF
circulation pump mode - OFF zone
N2 progressive zone number - Open/Close contact management - 1–9
circulation pump progressive number
Example 1
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of the solenoid valves (ON/OFF type) in two different zones (zone 1 and zone 2). The progressive zone number is 1.
3
Legend
1. actuator
2 4. zone 1 radiator
5. zone 2 radiator
5
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C1 4
N
C1 C2
C2
L
BUS Actuator configuration

ZA ZB1 N1 ZB2 N2 RL1/C1 RL2/C2
0 1 1 2 1 ON/OFF ON/OFF
MQ00184-c-EN 29/04/2014
303
Actuator 2 relays
F430/2
Example 2
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of two electric radiators within the same zone (zone 4). The progressive zone numbers are 1 and 2.
2 2 Legend
1. actuator
2. electric radiators, zone 4
1
1 2 3 4
2 3 4 C1
N
C1 C2
C2
L
Actuator configuration
BUS
0 4 1 4 2 ON/OFF ON/OFF
Example 3
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of a zone pump (in zone 7). The progressive zone numbers is 1. As relay RL2 is not used, it is excluded.
2 3
4 Legend
1. actuator
2. check valve
3. zone 7 pump
4. radiant panels
1
N
C1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
L
C1 C2
C2 DISCONNECTED

0 7 1 OFF - ON/OFF Excluded
MQ00184-c-EN 29/04/2014
304
Actuator 2 relays
F430/2
Example 4
Configuration and connection of the 2-relay actuator, for the control of two circulation pumps (zone 00). The progressive zone numbers are 1 and 2.
Legend
1. actuator
2. boiler
3. refrigerator (chiller)
4. heating circulation pump
HEATING 5. cooling circulation pump
6. radiator
N 7. fan-coil
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
C1
L
C1 C2
C2 0 0 1 0 2 Pump 1 Pump 2
COOLING
Example 5
Configuration and connection of the 2 interlocking relays actuator, for the control of a solenoid valve with opening and closing control in zone 16.
1 2 3 4
C1 OPEN
1 2 3 4
N
C1 C2
C2 CLOSE
BUS
M 3 4
2
Legend
1. actuator
Actuator configuration 2. solenoid valve with open/close control
ZA ZB1 N1 ZB2 N2 RL1/C1 RL2/C2 3. zone 16 radiator
1 6 2 6 2 OPEN CLOSE 4. zone 16 radiator
MQ00184-c-EN 29/04/2014
305
Actuator 4 relays
F430/4
Description
By means of internal relays, this device executes the controls received from the central
unit or the probe. It is needed to control loads such as 3-speed fan-coils, motorised
valves, pumps and electric radiators.
It has four relays,with independent control but common contacts, which can be used to
control two distinct loads with ON/OFF function and to control a single load with open/
1 2 3 4 5
close function. 1 2 3 4 5
To manage open/close loads the actuator must be configured with the logical interlock
of the two relays and contacts C1/C2 respectively must be considered to open and close
the first valve and contacts C3/C4 to open and close the second valve.
The contacts assume different functions when the actuator is used to control fan-coils.
Contact C1 is an ON/OFF contact and controls the valve. Contacts C2, C3 and C4 control C1 C2 C3 C4
the ventilation minimum, average and maximum speed respectively. The fan speed is 1
selected automatically depending on the difference between the temperature set by the 2
user and the room temperature.
3
4

Front view
C1 C2 C3 C4

- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 1. C1 clamps 1 - 2 relay forcing pushbutton
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc C2 clamps 1 - 3 relay forcing pushbutton
- Maximum absorption relays activated individually): 37.5 mA C3 clamps 1 - 4 relay forcing pushbutton
- Absorption (relays activated with interlock or Fan Coil control): 20.5 mA C4 clamps 1 - 5 relay forcing pushbutton
- Absorption in stand-by: 9 mA The forcing pushbuttons do not operate if the OFF configurator is connected to the
- Current load of individual relays: 4 A (resistive) e.g. electric radiators ZB1, ZB2, ZB3 or the ZB4 configurator sockets.
1 A (inductive) e.g. solenoid valves, pumps 2. Yellow LEDs for notification of activation of the corresponding relays.
- Maximum power consumption: 3.2 W 3. Configurator socket.
- Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C 4. Removable clamp for BUS connection SCS.
Configuration
In the same way as for the 2-relay actuator, it is necessary to connect the two the OFF configurator to the ZB socket corresponding to the relay not being used.
configurators that identify the item address, and the number of the zone the item However, RL1 cannot be excluded.
belongs to, to the ZA and ZB sockets. A probe and an actuator belonging to the same The actuator may also be used to control two single loads with Open/Close function,
zone will require the same numeric configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. such as, for example, solenoid valves with opening and closing control. For the
On the front of the 4-relay actuator are six sockets dedicated to the configurators: ZA, management of these load it will be necessary to configure the actuator with logic
ZB1, ZB2, ZB3, ZB4, N. The configuration sockets are distributed on the four relays in relay interlocking, connecting two consecutive identical configurators in the ZB socket,
the following way: therefore ZB1=ZB2 and ZB3=ZB4. For the use of the contacts consider C1 and C2 for
ZA ZB1 Relay 1 zone address the opening and the closing of the first valve respectively, and contacts C3 and C4 for the
ZA ZB2 Relay 2 zone address opening and the closing of the second valve.
ZA ZB3 Relay 3 zone address The contacts of the relays perform different functions if the actuator is used to control
ZA ZB4 Relay 4 zone address fan-coils. To activate this function, connect 4 identical configurators to the ZB position,
N progressive zone number therefore ZB1=ZB2=ZB3=ZB4.
The relays on the device are independent and may be used to activate four separate The C1 contact is an ON/OFF type contact and controls the valve, controls C2, C3 and C4
loads with ON/OFF function. Therefore, if all ZB configurators are different from each control the minimum, medium and maximum ventilation speeds respectively.
other, the four relays are configured to control four loads in four different zones. The
diagram shows the correspondence between the configurator sockets and the contacts
of the relays. The operation of one or more relays may be excluded. To do this, connect
MQ00185-c-EN 29/04/2014
306
Actuator 4 relays
F430/4
The ventilation speed is selected automatically by the temperature control function common
1
based on the difference between the user set temperature and the room temperature. configurator ZA
This actuator cannot be used to control the system circulation pump (configurator in socket RL1 ZB1 2 C1 contact RL1
zone 00), and to control separate loads belonging to the same zone.
configurator ZA
socket RL2 ZB2 3 C2 contact RL2
configurator ZA
socekt RL3 ZB3 4 C3 contact RL3
configurator ZA
socket RL4 ZB4 5 C4 contact RL4
ZB1 zone address - ON/OFF contact management - Open/Close contact management - Fan-Coil management - OFF zone 0 – 9 – OFF
N progressive zone number 1–9
Example 1
Configuration and connection of the 4-relay actuator, for the control of four solenoid valves (ON/OFF type) in four different zones (zone 11, zone 12, zone 15 and zone 18).
The progressive zone number is 1.
4 9
3 8
Legend
2 7 1. actuator
1 C1
1 2 3 4 5 C2 5. zone 18 solenoid valve
6. zone 11 radiator
1 2 3 4 5
C3 7. zone 12 radiator
C1 C2 C3 C4
8. zone 15 radiator
C4 9. zone 18 radiator
N

ZA ZB1 ZB2 ZB3 ZB4 N RL1/C1 RL2/C2 RL3/C3 RL4/C4
1 1 2 5 8 1 ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF
MQ00185-c-EN 29/04/2014
307
Actuator 4 relays
F430/4
Example 2
Configuration and connection of the 4 interlocking relays actuator for the control of two solenoid valves, with opening and closing control in zones 2 and 3.
The progressive zone number is 2.
Legend
1. actuator
2
M 4. zone 2 radiator
4 5. zone 3 radiator
1 C1 OPEN
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C2 CLOSE
C1 C2 C3 C4
C3 OPEN
C4 CLOSE
3
M 5
L N
BUS
0 2 2 3 3 2 OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE
Example 3
Configuration and connection of the 4-relay actuator, for the control of a 3 speed fan-coil in zone 69. The progressive zone numbers is 4.
2 Legend
1. actuator
2. 2-pipe 3-speed fan-coil
Note
If a fan-coil is used in a heating system, it should be
L N
ensured that the fan does not operate when the water
is cold, to avoid cooling the room rather than heating it.
1 Some fan-coils are fitted with a water temperature probe
C1 SOLENOID VALVE M
for this function. If a fan-coil without fitted sensor is used,
C2 MIN. SPEED an effective solution is to install an immersion thermostat
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
on the water return pipe. The contact of the thermostat

C1 C2 C3 C4
C3 MEDIUM SPEED
controls a remote switch, to which the fan-coil power
C4 MAX. SPEED supplies are connected.
BUS ZA ZB1 ZB2 ZB3 ZB4 N RL1/C1 RL2/C2 RL3/C3 RL4/C4
6 9 9 9 9 4 Valve Minimum Medium Maximum
speed speed speed
fan fan fan
MQ00185-c-EN 29/04/2014
308
Actuator 4 relays
F430/4
Example 4
Configuration and connection of two 4-relay actuators (one for the cooling, and one for The C1 contact of each actuator controls the corresponding solenoid valve, selected by
the heating system), for the control of a 4-pipe, 3 speed fan-coil. For both actuators the the temperature control function based on the system setting (summer or winter). The
corresponding zone is 28. The progressive number for the cooling actuator is 5, while for C2, C3 and C4 contacts of the two actuators must be connected in parallel, to control the
the heating actuator is 6. switching on and the speed of the ventilation system electric motor.
1 5
COOLING
HEATING
RISCALDAMENTO
L N M
3
C1 SOLENOID VALVE Legend

1 2 3 4 5
1. refrigerator (chiller)
C2
1 2 3 4 5
BUS MIN. SPEED 2. boiler

3. cooling actuator
C3
C1 C2 C3 C4
MEDIUM SPEED 4. heating actuator

C4 5. 4-pipe fan-coil
MAX. SPEED
Note
4 If a fan-coil is used in a heating system, it should be
ensured that the fan does not operate when the water
C1 SOLENOID VALVE is cold, to avoid cooling the room rather than heating it.
1 2 3 4 5
Some fan-coils are fitted with a water temperature
C2
1 2 3 4 5
BUS MIN. SPEED sensor for this function. If a fan-coil without fitted
sensor is used, an effective solution is to install an
C3
C1 C2 C3 C4
MEDIUM SPEED immersion thermostat on the water return pipe.

The contact of the thermostat controls a remote switch,
C4 MAX. SPEED to which the fan-coil power supplies are connected.
Cooling actuator configuration

2 8 8 8 8 5 Valve Minimum Medium Maximum speed
speed fan speed fan fan
Heating actuator configuration

2 8 8 8 8 6 Valve Minimum Medium Maximum speed
speed fan speed fan fan
MQ00185-c-EN 29/04/2014
309
8 relay actuator F430R8
Description
This actuator can be used in temperature control systems to control different types of 1
loads based on requirements.
Thanks to the 8 relays it is fitted with, the actuator can control:
• up to 8 On/off valves
• up to 4 Open/Close or 3-point valves
• up to 2 x 2-tube fan-coils with On/Off valves (4+4 relays)
• 1 x 2-tube fan-coil with 3-point valves (5 relays)
• 1 x 4-tube fan-coil with 2 On/Off valves ( relays)
• 1 x 4-tube fan-coil with 2 x 3-point valves (7 relays).
Technical data
Stand by absorption: 15 mA
Operating temperature: (+5) – (+40) °C
Maximum driven power: 4 A (resistive); 1 A (inductive)
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules 4
Configuration
ZA, ZB = Actuator address

ZA N = Progressive zone number
ZB LOAD = Type of load
N
LOAD
LOAD = 0 Control of one 4-tube fan-coil with 2 On/Off valves
OUT1 Fan speed 1 3 2
OUT2 Fan speed 2
OUT3 Fan speed 3
OUT4 Heating valve
OUT5 Cooling valve Legend
OUT6 Not used
1. Outputs 1–8 + 2 common contacts
OUT7 Not used
OUT8 Not used 2. Configurator socket
LOAD = 1 Control of one 2-tube fan-coil with 3-point valves 3. BUS
OUT1 Fan speed 1 4. Pushbuttons
OUT2 Fan speed 2
OUT3 Fan speed 3
OUT4 Valve opening
OUT5 Valve closure
OUT6 Not used
OUT7 Not used
OUT8 Not used
LOAD = 2 Control of one 4-tube fan-coil with 3-point valves
OUT1 Fan speed 1
OUT2 Fan speed 2
OUT3 Fan speed 3
OUT4 Heating valve opening
OUT5 Heating valve closure
OUT6 Cooling valve opening
OUT7 Cooling valve closure
OUT8 Not used
Note: better configuration possibilities, including the management of other types of
loads, or the configuration of the free outputs, are available using MyHOME_Suite (in this
case the described applications must be fully configured using a PC), starting from verion
1.3, which can be downloaded from the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com
MM00779-a-EN 30/09/2013
310
8 relay actuator F430R8
Wiring diagrams
Example of connection of a 4-tube fan-coil with On/Off valves.
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 5
OUT 4
N
230 Vac
L
L1 L2
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
N
OUT 5
OUT 4
F430R8
MM00779-a-EN 30/09/2013
311
Fan-coil actuator with 0-10 V valves F430R3V10
Description 1 2 3 4
DIN modularity actuator to be used in temperature control systems for the control of
2-tube or 4-tube fan coils with 0-10 V valves
It has with 3 relays for the managementof the fan-coil fan, and 2 x 0-10 V outputs for
the control of the valves.
In systems with 2-tube fan-coils the H output is used both for heating and cooling.
In systems with 4-tube fan-coils the H output must be used to control the heating valve,
while the C output for the cooling valve.
The LEDs indicate respectively the status of the valves and the active speed of the fan-
coil fan.
Technical data
Operating temperature: (+5) – (+40) °C 5 5
Maximum current supplied by each 0-10 V output: 1 mA
Maximum driven power for the relays: 4A (resistive); 1A (inductive) 6 6
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
Configuration
ZA, ZB = Actuator address 8 7

ZA
N = Progressive zone number
ZB LOAD = Type of load
LOAD = 0; control of one 4-tube fan-coil with Legend
N 0-10 V valves
LOAD = 1; Control of one 2-tube fan-coil with 1. Common contact
LOAD
0-10 V valves 2. Fan-coil fan speed
3. Output H 0-10 V heating
4. Output C 0-10 V cooling
5. Pushbuttons for the complete opening/closure of the valves, and for changing the
fan speed
Virtual configuration using the MyHOME_Suite software:
6. LED
The device can be configured remotely only if not already physically configured. The 7. Configurator socket
configuration is completed using version 1.3 or higher of the MyHOME_Suite software,
8. BUS
which can be downloaded from the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com.
MM00781-a-EN 24/09/2013
312
Fan-coil actuator with 0-10 V valves F430R3V10
Wiring diagrams
Example of connection of a 4-tube fan-coil with 0-10 V valves.
OUT 3
OUT 2
M 0 – 10 V OUT 1
N
230 Vac
M 0 – 10 V L
L1
OUT 3
OUT 2
OUT 1
N
–
5
+
6
–
+
7 F430R3V10
8
MM00781-a-EN 24/09/2013
313
Actuator for 0-10 V valves F430V10
Description
DIN module actuator for the control of 0-10 V valves in temperature control systems
It has two 0-10 V outputs, two control pushbuttons for manual opening/closing of
each valve and the corresponding status LEDs.
5 6
Technical data
Operating temperature: (+5) – (+40) °C
Outputs: 2 x 0 – 10 V
Maximum current on each output: 1 mA
4
3
Configuration
Physical configuration.
ZA1
ZB1
N1
ZA2
ZB2 2 1
N2
Legend
ZA1, ZB1 = Zone address 1
N1 = Progressive zone number for output 1 1. Configurator socket
ZA2, ZB2 = Zone address 2 2. BUS
N2 = Progressive zone number for output 2
3. LED
4. Pushbuttons
Virtual configuration using the MyHOME_Suite software:
5. Valve 1 output
The device can be configured remotely only if not already physically configured. The 6. Valve 2 output
configuration is completed using version 1.3 or higher of the MyHOME_Suite software,
which can be downloaded from the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com.
MM00780-a-EN 30/09/2013
314
Radio interface
for outdoor temperature probes HD4577 HS4577 N4577
HC4577 L4577 NT4577
Description
The radio interface is indispensable to receive the temperature data transmitted by the
radio probe. Up to two probes can be associated with each interface thus giving the
system two measuring points for each interface. Up to nine temperature probes can be
installed in a system.
Both the interface and the communication probe use radio waves with a frequency of
868 MHz. The maximum distance of communication between the receiving interface and
the temperature sensor is 70 m in free air. This distance is less if there are walls in cement, LED
metal or other material between the devices. programming
pushbutton
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc Front view
- Range: 70 m in free field (metal walls and surround plates A
PL1/N1 configurator
and reinforced concrete walls reduce the range); M1
- Size: 2 flush mounted modules A2/- socket
PL2/N2
M2
Configuration
P BUS
In order to use a receiving interface and radio probe, configuration must first be performed,
followed by the programming procedure. Only the interface needs configuring. Up to 2 probes
may be combined with each interface, therefore providing the system with two detection
points for each interface. Up to a maximum of 9 temperature sensors may be installed in one Rear view
system.
The configuration sockets on the interface identify the radio probes address.
They are: A1/-, PL1/N1, M1 for the first address, and A2/-, PL2/N2, M2 for the second address.
The two addresses must always be different from each other, PL1/N1 ≠ PL2/N2. Only one radio
probe may be associated to each address. Only used addresses must be configured.
The interface must be configured in temperature control mode by connecting If necessary repeat the operation, to save the code of another probe. If on the other hand
configurator 1 to M1 and M2. With this mode the A1/- and A2/- sockets are not used, therefore an address has already been associated and the procedure is repeated with another
no configurator needs to be connected. probe, the interface performs an overwriting action, only keeping the last probe in
the memory. During normal operation, the sending of information from the probe is
Programming of devices: confirmed by the flashing of the red LED of the interface. A single flashing indicates that
the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent through
After performing the configuration, it will be necessary to associate The radio probe to the BUS by a probe associated to the PL1/N1, M1 address. A double flashing indicates
the interface following the programming procedure below: that the radio message has been received, and the “temperature” data has been sent
through the BUS by a probe associated to the PL2/N2, M2 address. To delete all codes
1) Press the pin pushbutton of the interface for 5 seconds. The red LED turns on. from the interface press the pin pushbutton for 12 seconds. After 5 seconds from pressing
Release the pushbutton. The interface LED will flash every two seconds to confirm the key, the LED will turn on steadily, and after a further 7 seconds, it will start flashing
that programming mode is active on the first address (group of configurators quickly, confirming that all programs have been deleted.
PL1/N1, M1). If the second address of the interface is not configured (no configurator
is connected to the PL2/N2, M2 positions), go to step 2 of the procedure. NOTES:
However, if also the second address must be configured (group of configurators - If the interface configuration is wrong, the red LED will flash. Correct the configuration.
PL2/N2, M2), simply press the pin pushbutton of the interface again. - If the second interface address has not been configured (no configurator connected to
The LED will flash twice in succession every two seconds. the PL2/N2, M2 sockets), during the programming procedure it will not be possible
Every time the pin pushbutton is pressed, the system will switch from the first to the to switch to this address, which therefore cannot be programmed.
second address and vice versa.
2) After choosing the address the radio probe should be associated to, within 20 seconds
press the transmission key of the probe itself. Pressing the transmission key will send
the probe serial code. After receiving the code through the radio signal, the red LED
of the interface will quickly flash for 2 seconds, confirming that programming is
complete, and the procedure has been terminated.
MQ00183-c-EN 29/04/2014
315
Thermostat with display H4691 067459
LN4691 64170
Description
Thermostat with display for the control of the room temperature in temperature control 1 2 3
systems.
This device can be used both if a temperature control central unit is present or not
present; when appropriately configured it can be used as:
- MyHOME temperature control system probe;
- Hotel room thermostat; 4
- Residential system thermostat. 12 MODE
It has 4 keys that can be used to select the desired temperature and the various operating
5
modes; when used with fan-coils it can manage the fan speed.
11 +
The thermostat can manage different operating modes: both automatic and manual, in
addition to the Eco, Comfort, Antifreeze/Thermal protection, and OFF. 6
It can also be used in mixed heating/cooling systems, if the two functions are available –
at the same time on the same system.
A contact is also available on the back of the device, to change the operating mode of the 7
thermostat (e.g. window contact, summer/winter switching, etc.). FAN
Technical data 10 9 8
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 13
Absorption: 14 mA with display off
16 mA with low brightness display
30 mA with high brightness display
Size: 2 module flush mounted
Recommended installation height: 150 cm from the ground
Controllable loads: On/Off, Open/Close, 3-point or
0-10V valves.
2-tube and 4-tube fan-coils with
On/Off, 3-point, or 0-10V valves.
Gateway Climaveneta.
Fil Pilote.
Correlated devices
The thermostat must be used with the following actuator devices: 15 14
- F430/2: ON/OFF relay actuator;
- F430/4: ON/OFF 4-relay actuator; Legend
- F430R8: ON/OFF 8-relay actuator;
- F430R3V10: ON/OFF 3-relay actuator with 2 x 0-10V outputs; 1. Heating function
- F430V10: actuator with 2 x 0-10V outputs; 2. Cooling function
- F430FP: actuator for Fil Pilote devices 3. Operating mode icons
4. MODE key: a short pressure changes the mode of operation of the device;
an extended pressure (unless used as MyHOME probe) changes the function
5. + key: increase the set value
6. – key: decrease the set value
7. FAN key: set the fan coil speed on 3 levels + automatic
8. Heating/cooling on indicator
9. Fan coil speed indicator, 3 levels
10. Fan coil in automatic mode indicator
11. Measured (thermometer symbol on) / set (thermometer symbol off) temperature
indicator
12. Unit of measure: °C or °F
14. BUS connection
15. Local contact
MM00789-a-EN 30/09/2013
316
Thermostat with display H4691 067459
LN4691 64170
Configuration COOL= Cooling load. For the configurations from 1 to 9 configure the corresponding
actuator with N=2. In case of CEN configurator the actuator will be N=1.
The thermostat can be configured:
- Through physical configuration, by connecting the configurators to the appropriate Parameter/setting Physical
housings on the back of the device. This quick mode is ideal for basic functions, and configuration
gives the possibility of setting, in addition to the zone address, also a heating load, No device 0
a cooling load, up to 2 system pumps, and a quick function for the remote contact.
- Using MyHOME_Suite (*), where a dedicated wizard will guide the user through the ON/OFF valve 1
procedure for correctly configuring the device. The MyHOME_Suite software gives the Open/Close valve 2
possibility of customising the device and provides a higher degree of functionality,
2-tube fan-coil with ON/OFF valve 3
such as:
- The possibility of changing some default parameters (select the unit of measure for the Gateway 4
temperature, change the permitted operating temperature, manage the backlighting 2-tube fan-coil with 3-point or 0-10V valve 6
level, disable some device pushbuttons, etc.).
- Configure a higher number of loads (up to 9 heating and/or cooling actuators and 9 4-tube fan-coil with ON/OFF valves 7
pumps), and assign slave probes (max. 9). 4-tube fan-coil with 3-point or 0-10V valves 8
- Enable advanced functions, like automatic switching between heating and cooling. 3-point or 0-10V valve 9
- Manage dedicated fan-coil settings (e.g. fan speed change threshold settings, or fan
activation delay, etc.). Same load managed for heating and cooling (2) CEN
- Set a delay or a timeout for the actions generated by the status change of the remote
(2) in case of common heating/cooling load, the configurator set in the HEAT position
contact (in addition to allowing a higher number of combinations than through the
will have to be different from 0 (no device) or 5 (Fil Pilote).
physical configuration).
1.1 ADDRESSING PUMP= Number and types of pumps to control

By connecting two configurators with value 0-9 in the ZA and ZB sockets, it is possible Parameter/setting Physical
to set the device address. The controlled actuators will have to be configured with the configuration
same address.
No device 0
Socket Function Physical configuration
Pump with N= 1 For heating (3)
1
ZA/ZB Zone address from 01 to 99
Pump with N= 2 For cooling 2
1.2 OPERATING MODE
Pump with N= 1 For heating + 3
By configuring the positions TYPE, HEAT, COOL, PUMP and IN, it is possible to set the pump with N= 2 For cooling (3)
desired operating modes and the types of loads to manage.
Pump with N= 1 For both heating and cooling (3) 4
TYPE=Type of operation
Parameter/setting Physical configuration (3) With this mode it is not possible to define the Fil Pilote device in the HEAT position
(configurator 5)
MyHOME temperature control system 0
probe (1)
Hotel room thermostat 1 IN= Function activated by the change of status of the contact on the back of the device
Residential system thermostat 2 Contact status/function Physical
(1) If the device is used as a MyHOME system probe with temperature control central configuration
unit, the subsequent positions HEAT, COOL, and PUMP must not be configured. The OPEN CLOSED
settings for actuators and pumps will be defined directly from the central unit menu.
Contact disabled Contact disabled 0
Thermal protection Return to the previous status 1
HEAT= Heating load. Configure the corresponding actuator with N=1.
Parameter/setting Physical configuration OFF Return to the previous status 2
No device 0 ECO Return to the previous status 3
ON/OFF valve 1 COMFORT Return to the previous status 4
Open/Close valve 2 Switch to heating (4)

Switch to cooling 5
2-tube fan-coil with ON/OFF valve 3 (4) This function cannot be selected when the device is used as probe in MyHOME
Gateway 4 systems with temperature control central unit.
Fil Pilote 5
2-tube fan-coil with 3-point or 0-10V valve 6
4-tube fan-coil with ON/OFF valves 7
4-tube fan-coil with 3-point or 0-10V valves 8 Note (*): - software downloadable from the website
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com;
3-point or 0-10V valve 9 - the functions are available from version 1.3.
MM00789-a- EN 30/09/2013
317
Probe with selector
5739 22 (White) 067457 HC4692 L4692 NT4692
5739 23 (Magnesium) HD4692 HS4692 N4692 AM5872
Description
The device can adjust the room temperature in both winter and summer, varying the
settings locally with respect to those received from the central unit.
The item has a knob for the local temperature selection (limited to ± 3°C with respect to 1
the value set by the central unit), the antifrost mode and the OFF mode. There are two
LED, one green and one yellow, on the front of the item. The green LED indicates that -2 -1
-3
the device is working correctly and the activation of the antifrost mode and OFF of the OF
2
+1
corresponding area. The yellow LED indicates the actuator state and any faults. F
+2
+3
OFF mode
This mode has the maximum priority, whether selected by the probe or set by the central 3
unit; to quit the OFF mode use the device which set it.
4
Antifrost/thermal protection mode Front view
In this position if the Temperature control system is set as heating the probe works in
antifrost mode; if it is set as cooling it works as thermal protection. The probe can also
work in collaboration with other probes in “master” configuration to allow the Central
unit to calculate an average of the temperature over several measuring points. This
function is useful for managing very large rooms, inside which the temperature can vary
appreciably. ZA
ZB
If there is a fault on the central unit, the probe works with the last settings received, SLA
thus continuously maintaining the last temperature determined with summer or winter configurator
setting. socket
If the probe selects the OFF mode this has priority even if the central unit is faulty, thus
the zone controlled by the probe will remain OFF.
The probe can be used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators of the same type, and 8 BUS
slave probes (4693, 573921, 573920 and 067458).
Related articles:
Rear view
685 46 (Cover Titanium)
NOTE: compared with the previous version, the P, MOD and DEL
configurator sockets have been removed.
Legend
1. Key in the low position to enable virtual configuration
2. Knob: for manual temperature setting (± 3°C), to select the antifrost/thermal
protection ( ) mode and the OFF state (forced zone off).
3. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the devices in
the corresponding zone, when it flashes it signals a fault.
4. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active, when it
flashes it indicates that the OFF or antifrost modes are set locally.
Technical data
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS cable: 18–27 Vdc
- Absorption: 6 mA
- Size: 2 modules
- Installation height: 1500 m from the floor
MQ00179-c-EN 21/05/2014
318
Probe with selector
5739 22 (White) 067457 HC4692 L4692 NT4692
Configuration
The probe must always be configured by connecting two configurators to the ZA and ZB probe itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the same
sockets, which identify the device address, and the number of the zone controlled by the zone address.
Socket Function Configurators

ZB zone address 0–9
SLA Master/Slave mode 0–8
The probe can be configured remotely with “Virtual Configuration”. When no physical
configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software version 2.1 must be
used.
Programming
Using the “Configure zones” item of the “Maintenance” menu of the temperature control type of load to control, among the following: ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL. When
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating performing programming operations from the central unit, refer to the installation
system, a cooling system, or a combined one.Using the same menu item, also select the manual supplied with the central unit itself.
Master and Slave probe

A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature number of Slave probes within the zone (8 max). To configure a Slave probe, connect
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points within the configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket. Use the SLA socket to progressively
the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, throughout assign a number to all Slave probes of the zone. During this numbering procedure, it
which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, one probe must is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is respected, without missing
be configured as “Master”, and one or more probes must be configured as “Slave”(max 8). The any numbers. The HC/HS/L/N/NT4692 and AM5872 probe can only operate as
Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, and the temperatures “MASTER” probes. Therefore only the probe without knob, item 4693, may be
measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate operations. Configure used as a “SLAVE” probe.
the Master probe by connecting to the SLA socket a numeric configurator indicating the
Example of configuration of a zone (address 47), with one Master, and three
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to ZONE 47, connect configurators 4 and 7 to the ZA Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of the Master probe (there are three Slave
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. The SLA configurator must be connected to the MOD probes inside the zone); Connect configurators no. 1, 2, and 3 to the SLA sockets of the
sockets of the three Slave probes (definition of Slave probes). three Slave probes respectively (progressive number of the probe within the zone).
MASTER SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 SLAVE 3

-2 -1 PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE
-3
+1 OF
F
+2
+3
t ROOM = 20°C t ROOM = 18°C t ROOM = 19°C t ROOM = 21°C
AVERAGE t = 19.5°C
Master probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4692, AM5872, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573921, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573921, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573921,
573923, 573922 and 067457) 573920 and 067458) 573920 and 067458) 573920 and 067458)
Socket Configurators Socket Configurators Socket Configurators Socket Configurators
ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7
SLA 3 SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
MQ00179-c-EN 21/05/2014
319
Probe with selector
5739 22 (White) 067457 HC4692 L4692 NT4692
Circulation pump Pump switch-on delay

In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be If necessary, it is also possible to set the circulation pump to activate after a certain time
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves. This selection depends on the type
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special of valve installed, and enables the pump to only activate once the valve is fully open. If a
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the “Pump” item; inside time delay of 4 minutes is set, after closing the relay controlling the opening of the zone
the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump. valve, the probe will wait 4 minutes before switching the pump on. A maximum delay
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump of 9 minutes can be set, depending on the time needed for the valve to open. For the
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump opening times refer to the official technical specifications issued by the solenoid valve
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, manufacturer.
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one
“circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more Probe calibration
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation Probes don’t normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary: (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
• in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves); function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
• in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed); • leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
• in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
conditioning units or electric heating control). or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
• for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
the room.
Note: For more details on the calibration procedure and the programming operations
using the central unit, refer to the installation manual of the central unit.
MQ00179-c-EN 21/05/2014
320
Fan-coil probe with selector
067455 HD4692FAN HS4692FAN N4692FAN
5739 25 (Magnesium) 5739 24 (White) HC4692FAN L4692FAN NT4692FAN
Description
The device can adjust the room temperature in both winter and summer, varying the 6
settings locally with respect to those received from the central unit. 5
The item has a knob for the local temperature selection (limited to ± 3°C with respect to
the value set by the central unit), the antifrost mode and the OFF mode. There are two 4
LED, one green and one yellow, on the front of the item. The green LED indicates that
the device is working correctly and the activation of the antifrost mode and OFF of the -3
-2
corresponding area. The yellow LED indicates the actuator state and any faults.
-1
OFF
1
+1
+2
+3
OFF mode
This mode has the maximum priority, whether selected by the probe or set by the central
unit; to quit the OFF mode use the device which set it. 3
Antifrost/thermal protection mode 2

In this position if the Temperature control system is set as heating the probe works in Front view
antifrost mode; if it is set as cooling it works as thermal protection. The probe can also
work in collaboration with other probes in “master” configuration to allow the Central
unit to calculate an average of the temperature over several measuring points.
This function is useful for managing very large rooms, inside which the temperature can
vary appreciably.
If there is a fault on the central unit, the probe works with the last settings received, ZA
ZB
thus continuously maintaining the last temperature determined with summer or winter SLA
configurator
setting.
socket
If the probe selects the OFF mode this has priority even if the central unit is faulty, thus
the zone controlled by the probe will remain OFF.
The probe can be used to control a zone with up to 9 actuators of the same type, and 8
slave probes (4693, 573921, 573920 and 067458). BUS
Related articles
682 41 (White cover)
685 41 (Titanium cover) Rear view
Legend
1. Knob: for manual temperature setting (± 3 °C), to select the antifrost/thermal
protection ( ) mode and the OFF state (forced zone off).
2. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active, when it
flashes it indicates that the OFF or antifrost modes are set locally.
3. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the devices in
4. Key used to enable virtual configuration, and for the switching of the mode and
speed of the fan-coil. Use this key to select between “Automatic” (fan speed
managed by the probe) and “Manual” (fan speed selected among minimum,
medium, and maximum) mode.
5. Red LED: when on, it indicates that “Automatic” mode is active, when off, it
indicates that “Manual” mode is active.
6. Red LEDs: they indicate the fan speed settings: from left to right, the speeds are:
minimum, medium, maximum.
MQ00181-c-EN 29/04/2014
321
Configuration
This probe has been specifically designed to manage 3-speed fan-coils and Climaveneta identifying the address of the device, and the number of the zone controlled by the
fan-coils. The probe only has 3 configurator sockets: ZA, ZB, SLA. The ZA and ZB sockets probe itself.
must always be used for the configuration operations, connecting two configurators, The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the same zone address.

SLA Master mode 0–8
The probe can be configured remotely with “Virtual Configuration”.
When no physical configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software
version 2.1 must be used.
Programming
Using the “Configure zones” item of the “Maintenance” menu of the temperature control Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, among the following:
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL and GATEWAY. When performing programming
system, a cooling system, or a combined one. operations from the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the
central unit itself.

A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature operations. The 4692FAN probe can only operate as Master. Therefore only probe 4693 may
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points be used as Slave. To configure the Master probe, in addition to the zone address, it will be
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, sufficient to connect to the SLA socket a numeric configurator indicating the number of
throughout which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, Slave probes installed within the zone (max 8). To configure a Slave probe, connect the
one probe must be configured as “Master”, and one or more probes must be configured as configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket. Use the SLA socket to progressively assign
“Slave” (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, a number to all Slave probes of the zone. During this numbering procedure, it is essential
and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is respected, without missing any numbers.
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to zone 59, connect configurators 5 and 9 to the ZA be connected to the MOD sockets of the three Slave probes (definition of Slave probes).
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of the Connect configurators no. 1, 2, and 3 respectively to the SLA socket of the three Slave
Master probe (there are three Slave probes inside the zone). The SLA configurator must probes (progressive number of the probe within the zone).

-3
-2 PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE
-1
+1 OFF
+2
+3
t ROOM = 17°C t ROOM = 19°C t ROOM = 21°C t ROOM = 20°C
AVERAGE t = 19.25°C
Master Probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4692FAN, 573924, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573921, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573921, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573921,
573925 and 067455) 573920 and 067458) 573920 and 067458) 573920 and 067458)
ZA 5 ZA 5 ZA 5 ZA 5
ZB 9 ZB 9 ZB 9 ZB 9
SLA 3 MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
MQ00181-c-EN 29/04/2014
322
Circulation pump
When programming the operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:
connect any special configurators: it will be sufficient to use the temperature central - in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
unit. Through the “Pump” item, inside the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
must be served by a circulation pump. Using the programming procedure, set a logic - in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
link between the zones, and the pump that hydraulically supplies them. To complete water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
the programming procedure, the pump management mode must also be selected, thus - in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
defining if the pump supplies a heating, a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on conditioning units or electric heating control).
the needs of the hydraulic system, one “circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps”
may be installed, to supply one or more zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set
a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation to the opening of the zone valves.
Probe calibration
Probes don’t normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
(perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
• leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
the room.
MQ00181-c-EN 29/04/2014
323
Probe without selector
067458 HD4693 HS4693 N4693
5739 21 (Magnesium) 5739 20 (White) HC4693 L4693 NT4693
Description
The device can be used to control the room temperature, based on daily rhythms, both in
winter and in summer. On the front of the device are a green and a yellow LED. The green
led indicates that the device is working correctly. 1
The yellow LED indicates the status of the actuators, and any possible fault on the same.
The front of the item does not have any controls. This makes the device ideal for
installation in public places, so that any improper intervention may be prevented. The
anti-freeze/thermal protection and OFF modes can only be selected from the central unit.
OFF mode
Set this mode to turn the corresponding zone off. 2
Antifrost/thermal protection mode 3

By selecting this mode, if the temperature control system is set for heating, the probe Front view
operates in anti-freeze mode. If the system is set for cooling, the probe operates in
thermal protection mode. The probe can also operate together with other probes of the
same type in “slave” or “master” configuration, to enable the central unit to calculate an
average of the temperatures taken from several detection points. This function is useful
for the management of very large areas, throughout which the temperature may change
consistently. In case of central unit fault, the probe will continue to work implementing ZA
ZB
the last settings received, and therefore the last temperature set in the summer or winter MOD
programs. However, the OFF mode also has priority in case of central unit fault. Therefore, SLA configurator
in this case the zone controlled by the probe will stay off. The probe can be used to control socket
a zone with up to 9 actuators and 8 slave probes of the same type.
Related articles
BUS
685 48 (Cover Titanium)
Rear view
Legend
NOTE: compared with the previous version, the P and DEL configurator sockets
1. Key in the low position to enable virtual configuration
have been removed.
2. Yellow LED: when it shines steadily or it is OFF it signals the state of the actuators in
3. Green LED: when it shines steadily it indicates that the device is active.
Technical data
- Absorption: 6 mA
- Size: 2 modules
- Installation height: 1500 m from the floor
MQ00180-c-EN 29/04/2014
324
067458 HD4693 HS4693 N4693
Configuration
The probe must always be configured by connecting two configurators to the ZA and ZB probe itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be configured with the same
sockets, which identify the device address, and the number of the zone controlled by the zone address.
MOD Master/Slave mode 0 - SLA
SLA Master/Slave mode 0–8
The probe can be configured remotely with “Virtual Configuration”. When no physical
configurators are available, a PC with Virtual Configurator software version 2.1 must be
used.
Programming
Using the “Configure zones” item of the “Maintenance menu” of the temperature control Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, among the following:
system central unit, it will be possible to define if the zone should manage a heating ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL. When performing programming operations from
system, a cooling system, or a combined one. the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.

A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature operations. The probe can operate as Master if configurator 0 is connected to the MOD
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points socket, and a configurator indicating the number of SLAVE probes present inside the
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, zone (max 8) is connected to the SLA socket. The same probe can operate as Slave if a
throughout which the temperature may change consistently. To activate this function, configurator marked as SLA is connected to the MOD socket, and a configurator with the
one probe must be configured as “Master”, and one or more probes must be configured as progressive SLAVE probe number within the ZONE is connected to the SLA socket. During
“Slave” (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average between its own temperature, this numbering procedure, it is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence is
and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and then performs the appropriate respected, without missing any numbers.
Slave probes.
To define the probes as belonging to ZONE 47, connect configurators 4 and 7 to the ZA the Master probe (there are three Slave probes inside the zone); connect configurators
and ZB sockets of the 4 devices. Connect configurator no. 0 to the MOD socket of the no. 1, 2, and 3 to the SLA socket of the three Slave probes respectively (progressive
Master probe. The SLA configurator must be connected to the MOD socket of the three number of the probe within the zone).
Slave probes (definition of Slave probes). Connect configurator no. 3 to the SLA socket of
SLAVE 3
MASTER SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 PROBE
PROBE PROBE PROBE
t ROOM = 21°C
t ROOM = 20°C t ROOM = 18°C t ROOM = 19°C
AVERAGE t = 19.5°C
Master Probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573920, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573920, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573920, (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693, 573920,
573921 and 067458) 573921 and 067458) 573921 and 067458) 573921 and 067458)
ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7
MOD 0 MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
SLA 3 SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
MQ00180-c-EN 29/04/2014
325
067458 HD4693 HS4693 N4693
Circulation pump Pump switch-on delay

In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be If necessary, it is also possible set the circulation pump to activate after a certain time
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the delay, in relation to the opening of the zone valves. This selection depends on the type
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special of valve installed, and enables the pump to only activate once the valve is fully open. If a
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the “Pump” item; inside time delay of 4 minutes is set, after closing the relay controlling the opening of the zone
the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump. valve, the probe will wait 4 minutes before switching the pump on. A maximum delay
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump of 9 minutes can be set, depending on the time needed for the valve to open. For the
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump opening times refer to the official technical specifications issued by the solenoid valve
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, manufacturer.
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one
“circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more NOTE: for details of the programming operations to be performed from the central unit
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation refer to the installation manual supplied with the central unit itself.
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary:
- in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves);
- in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed);
- in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air
conditioning units or electric heating control).
Probe calibration
Probes don’t normally require calibration; however, in particular installation situations
(perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat sources, etc.), the
temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate calibration
function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
• leave the probes connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for at least 2
hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by opening
or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near them;
the room.
MQ00180-c-EN 29/04/2014
326
4-zone central unit
HC4695 L4695 NT4695
HD4695 HS4695 N4695 AM5875
Description
1
This central unit can manage MY HOME temperature control systems with up to 4 zones,
with a maximum of 9 circulation pumps. It can control heating or cooling systems and
can set the system and modify the system operating mode.
The central unit is made up mechanically of two parts: a base to fasten on the supporting 6 2
frame for wall mounted boxes to which the bus is connected and a removable front cover
for easy programming with the settings required. The device communicates with and
is supplied by the bus, while the two AA batteries supply power when the removable
part is not inserted in the supporting frame. The central unit has a probe which already 5 C OK 3
represents a system zone and the configuration sockets are in fact on the back part.
Another three probes can be connected to reach the absolute number of zones which
Plug-in section 4
the system can manage in this case (a maximum of 4 zones in total). Coming with
front view
management software with guided menu shown on the display, it lets the user select
the operating mode, display the temperatures of the various zones and display and
modify the daily temperature profiles and the weekly programs; the maintenance menu,
7
reserved to the installer and code protected, allows access to the system settings (zone
configuration, system test, total reset, etc.).
The temperature central unit has a graphic display with blue back-lighting in the
AXOLUTE series and green back-lighting in the LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH and Màtix
series. By means of the six keys on the device front cover all the functions can be used 8
interacting with the various menu items. The complete programming of the central unit
by PC can be activated through the serial connector and the TiThermo BASIC software.
9
Legend
Plug-in section
1. Graphic display: displays the system state and guides the programming operations. back view
2. Selection keys: can set the operating mode and select the functions.
3. OK key: to access the main menu or confirm the selection displayed.
4. Sensor: to measure the room temperature.
5. C key: to cancel the selection. 10
6. Scroll keys: to modify the temperature using the main screen; ZA
ZB 11
to scroll the menu items. SLA
7. Connector: connection to the electronics in the back base.
8. Serial connector: for connection to the PC and use of TiThermo BASIC.
9. Battery compartment: socket for 2 AA 1.5V batteries.
10. Screw: to block central unit extraction. 12
11. Configurator socket: socket of the configurators for the combined probe.
12. BUS: connection for cable bus.
Fixed section
back view
Technical data
- Power supply from SCS BUS: 27 Vdc and 3 Vdc (2 AAA type, 1.5 V batteries)
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Summer/Winter
- Absorption: 30 mA with the light on system state
- Absorption: 8.5 mA with the light off 18.0°C
- Operating temperature: 0 – 35 °C measured
- Size: 2 modules weekly 20.6°C temperature
- Installation height: 1500 m from the floor program
daily profile
02 : 45 Mar 22 Ago
Graphic display
During normal operation the central unit graphic display shows the system basic hour date
information, while the screen light stays off. When a key is pressed, the display illuminates
and the central unit is ready to implement any instructions entered by the user.
MQ00178-c-EN 29/04/2014
327
4-zone central unit
HC4695 L4695 NT4695
HD4695 HS4695 N4695 AM5875
Removable system
The central unit is made up of a base for the connection to the system bus cable and a
removable front cover with batteries. The system so formed lets the user perform the
programming operations and replace the batteries easily.
Configuration
Differently from the 99 zone version, the 4 zone flush mounted central unit must
Base
be configured. This central unit is fitted with an integrated temperature probe, and
therefore it must be configured. The configuration sockets on the back of the central unit
are in fact intended and reserved for the integrated probe. They are: ZA, ZB and SLA.
The ZA and ZB sockets must always be used for the configuration operations, connecting
two configurators that identify the address, and the number of the zone controlled by
the probe itself. It is not necessary to start with zone 01, although it is fundamental
that the values of the subsequent zones are immediately after those of the central unit
itself. The configuration procedure requires the completing of the operations using the
“Configuration” menu of the central unit, and the activation of the “Learning” function.
In fact, the search within the system is performed on 3 zone addresses that follow the
one assigned to the central unit itself. The actuators controlled by the probes must be
configured with the same zone address. Removable
front cover

SLA Master mode 0–8
Zone 12
central unit Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15
18.0 °C
probe probe probe
23.7°C
+2
+2
+2
+3
+3
+3
+1 +1 +1
OFF OFF OFF

13 : 38 Ven 07 Gen
-1 -1 -1
-2
-2
-2
-3
-3
-3
C OK
Power supply
BUS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 Zone 15

actuator actuator actuator actuator
MQ00178-c-EN 29/04/2014
328
4-zone central unit
HC4695 L4695 NT4695
HD4695 HS4695 N4695 AM5875
Programming 4 zone central unit calibration

The central unit must be used to set the operating mode of the integrated probe fitted The 4 zone central unit does not normally require calibration: however, in particular
inside. Using the “Configuration” item of the “Maintenance” menu, define if the zone installation situations (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat
should manage a heating system, a cooling system, or a combined one. sources, etc.), the temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate
Using the same menu item, also select the type of load to control, choosing between: calibration function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
ON/OFF, OPEN/CLOSE, 3SP FAN-COIL and GATEWAY. When performing programming Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
operations from the central unit, refer to the installation manual supplied with the • leave the 4 zone central unit connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for
central unit itself. at least 2 hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by
opening or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near it;
Master and Slave probe • for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
A probe can operate in conjunction with other probes so that an average temperature the room.
calculation can be performed, based on measurements taken from several points
within the same zone. This function is useful for the management of very large areas, Note: For more details on the calibration procedure and the programming operations
throughout which the temperature may change consistently using the central unit, refer to the installation manual of the central unit.
To activate this function, one probe must be configured as “Master”, and one or more
probes must be configured as “Slave” (max 8). The Master probe calculates the average
between its own temperature, and the temperatures measured by the Slave probes, and
then performs the appropriate operations. The integrated probe fitted inside the central
unit can only operate as Master. Therefore, for the slave function, only probe item 4693
may be used. In addition to the zone address, in order to configure the integrated probe
as Master it will be sufficient to connect a numeric configurator to the SLA socket, which
should indicate the number of Slave probes within the zone, up to 8 maximum.
To configure a Slave probe, connect the configurator marked as SLA to the MOD socket.
Use the SLA socket to progressively assign a number to all Slave probes of the zone.
During this numbering procedure, it is essential to start from no. 1, and that the sequence
is respected, without missing any numbers.

PROBE PROBE PROBE PROBE
CENTRAL
UNIT
C OK
t ROOM = 21 °C t ROOM = 18 °C t ROOM = 19 °C t ROOM = 20 °C
AVERAGE t = 19.5 °C
Central unit/Master Probe Slave 1 probe Slave 2 probe Slave 3 probe

(HC/HS/L/N/NT4695, AM5875) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693) (HC/HS/L/N/NT4693)
ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7 ZB 7
SLA 3 MOD SLA MOD SLA MOD SLA
SLA 1 SLA 2 SLA 3
MQ00178-c-EN 29/04/2014
329
4-zone central unit
HC4695 L4695 NT4695
HD4695 HS4695 N4695 AM5875
Circulation pump System with a circulation pump

In addition to controlling the zone valves, for some types of systems it will also be The system shown only has one circulation pump, that only supplies two zones, controlled
necessary to control one or more water circulation pumps. When programming the by two solenoid valves. The pump is managed by a dedicated actuator configured in zone
operating mode of the circulation pumps is not necessary to connect any special 00. In the same way as the pump, also the two valves are controlled by two different
configurators: it will be sufficient to use the central unit through the “Pump” item; inside actuators. The circulation pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves
the “Maintenance” menu, select the zones that must be served by a circulation pump. remains open and will stop when both valves are closed.
Using the programming procedure, set a logic link between the zones, and the pump
that hydraulically supplies them. To complete the programming procedure, the pump
management mode must also be selected, thus defining if the pump supplies a heating, 4 zone central unit calibration
a cooling, or a combined system. Depending on the needs of the hydraulic system, one The 4 zone central unit does not normally require calibration: however, in particular
“circulation pump” or “several circulation pumps” may be installed, to supply one or more installation situations (perimeter walls, north or south facing walls, when close to heat
zone groups. If necessary, it is also possible to set a “pump switch-on delay”, in relation sources, etc.), the temperature value measured may be corrected using the appropriate
to the opening of the zone valves. In the following cases, pump control is not necessary, calibration function, which can be found in the central unit menu.
or needed: Before performing the calibration operation, ensure the following:
- in systems where the pump is always in operation (thanks to water recirculation • leave the 4 zone central unit connected and powered with the hydraulic system off for
hydraulic systems, or the presence of three-way valves); at least 2 hours. During this time, avoid any changes in the room temperature (e.g. by
- in systems where the pump is managed automatically (it comes on by itself when opening or closing windows, doors, etc.), and avoid standing near it;
water is required, and turns off again when all valves are closed); • for the calibration use a calibrated sample thermometer, correctly positioned inside
- in systems where the pump has simply not been installed (for example for air the room.
conditioning units or electric heating control).
BUS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
C1 C2 C1 C2
2 4
1 3
ZONE 1
1 2 3 4
Legend
1 2 3 4
C1 C2
1. Circulation pump
6 2. pump actuator
4. zone 1 actuator
ZONE 2 5. zone 2 solenoid valve
6. zone 2 actuator
MQ00178-c-EN 29/04/2014
330
4-zone central unit
HC4695 L4695 NT4695
HD4695 HS4695 N4695 AM5875
System with two circulation pumps

The system shown requires two circulation pumps that serve two different zone groups The second group is similar to the first one, but the actuator controlling the pump
controlled by their own solenoid valves. The first group pump is managed by a dedicated of zones 3 and 4 is configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 2 (N=2).
actuator configured in zone 00 with progressive number equal to 1 (N=1). Also the two Although belonging to the same system, the two pump/solenoid valve groups are totally
valves that control ZONE1 and ZONE2 are managed by their own actuators. The circulation independent from each other (see also actuator configuration).
pump will remain active until at least one of the two valves remains open and will stop
when both valves are closed.
BUS
Legend
ZONE 1 1. zone 1 and 2 circulation pump
2. pump actuator
3. zone 3 and 4 circulation pump
4. pump actuator
6. zone 1 actuator
8. zone 2 actuator
ZONE 2 10. actuator zone 3
12. actuator zone 4
ZONE 3
ZONE 4
MQ00178-c-EN 29/04/2014
331
4-zone central unit
HC4695 L4695 NT4695
HD4695 HS4695 N4695 AM5875
TiThermo Basic software

TiThermo Basic is the tool used for creating or changing, through a simple and logic - manage the circulation pumps, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating,
graphic interface, the configuration to be sent to the temperature control system central cooling, heating+cooling, no function) and the tripping delays
unit, defining and customising the parameters of the temperature control system and - customise the configuration parameters and the operating programs of the central
the profiles of the various operating programs. unit (e.g. weekly programs, holiday programs)
Thanks to a dedicated function, the software may also be used to update the central - export and/or import profiles and collections (as XML files).
unit firmware.
The software can be used to: NOTE: for more information on the operation of the application see the manual supplied
- customize the zones with the products.
- manage the actuators, selecting the type of function to be assigned (heating, cooling,
heating+cooling, no function) and the type of load for the selected function (ON/OFF, The central unit is connected to the PC using cable item 335919 or with item 3559
Open/ Close, Fan-Coil, Gateway) (see figure). This accessory is not included with the central unit, and must therefore be
purchased separately.
item 3559
ART. 3559
TiThermo Basic screenshots
MQ00178-c-EN 29/04/2014
332
Technical sheets - Load control management and Consumption display
333
Pulse counter interface
3522N
Description
Front view
The device detects, counts and processes the information (water, gas, etc.) received from
meters with pulse outputs, and makes it available to the SCS BUS.
The processing and accounting functions are: 4
- calculation of the instantaneous value (flow rate - unit/h): the distance between two
consecutive pulses. If the distance between two pulses exceeds 30 seconds, the value of
the flow rate will be 0. The formula to calculate the flow rate is as follows: Flow rate =
6 1
(3600 / distance between two pulses) * (multiplication factor/divisor). For the details,
please see the "Configuration" chapter.
- saving the following data to the internal memory:
- Number of pulses accumulated on an hourly basis for the last 12 months
- Number of pulses accumulated on a daily basis for the past 2 years 5
- Number of pulses accumulated on a monthly basis for the past 12 years.
The interface can be installed inside flush mounted boxes, behind traditional devices or
even in distribution boards, without using a DIN rail space.
In order to allow the device to archive consumption information, the system must be
2
fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g. Touch
Screen). If this information is not available, the pulse counter interface will be unable
to archive the data, but will continue calculating the instantaneous values (flow rate).
The pulse counter interface has a bay for 5 configurators: A1, A2, A3, MUL and DIV.
NOTE: The counter cannot detect any pulses shorter than 60ms (30 ms pulse length, 30
3
ms pause).

Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 21 – 27 Vdc 1. Pulse input
Power consumption on standby: 17 mA max The stated polarity must be observed with Open drain and Open collector counters.
Operating temperature: 0 – 40°C 2. Opto-isolated pulse input repetition
3. LED
steady green: device ON
Dimensions red ON steady/OFF steady: pulse detection (each time a pulse is received the status
Basic module: - Length: 40 mm passes from ON steady to OFF steady and vice versa).
- Width: 40 mm flashing green 500ms/500ms: problem on the bus (low BUS voltage or voltage drop
- Height: 23 mm detected).

red and green flashing irregularly: configuration error.
flashing red and green 128ms/128ms: not configured.
4. Button
6. SCS BUS connection
Configuration
The device can be configured in two ways: sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the MYHOME_Suite software
- Physical configuration, inserting the configurators in the sockets: package.
A1/A2/A3 device address (A1 for hundreds, A2 for tens, A3 for units).
The maximum number of configurable addresses is 127.
MUL (multiplication factor to be applied to each pulse received), DIV (indicates the
number of pulses emitted by the meter before the pulse counter interface saves a pulse).
- Virtual configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from www.
homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many more
options than the physical configuration.
MQ01007-a-EN 07/06/2014
334
Pulse counter interface
3522N
Physical configuration
1.1 MUL position 1.2 DIV position

The configurator in the MUL position specifies the multiplication factor to be applied to The configurator in the DIV position specifies how many pulses must be measured by
the single pulse, as specified in the following table: the interface to produce a valid effective pulse for energy accounting, as specified in the
following table:
Configurator on MUL Multiplication factor Configurator on DIV Divisor

0 x1 0 /1
1 x2 1 /10
2 x5 2 /100
3 x10 3 /1000
4 x20 4 /2
5 x50 5 /20
6 x100 6 /200
7 /2000
Example: The water volume meter provides 1 pulse every ten litres. We want to save the litres to Example: The water volume meter provides 1 pulse every half litre. We want to save the litres to
the pulse counter interface and make them available on the SCS BUS. We put configurator 3 into the pulse counter interface and make them available on the SCS BUS. We put configurator 4 into
position MUL. The pulses measured by the counter are multiplied by 10 and saved in the pulse position DIV. For every two pulses the meter emits, the pulse counter interface saves one pulse.
counter interface.
The MUL and DIV configurator can be used simultaneously to meet every specific need.
Warning: The maximum number of pulses the interface can save in 1 h is equal to 65536 * to the memory of the pulse counter interface. We configure MUL=6 and DIV=0. The maximum
(divisor / multiplication factor). number of pulses the meter emits must be 65536 * (1/100) = 655 pulses/h. Should this value be
For example: The counter provides 1 pulse per hundred litres and we want to save the litres exceeded, the pulse counter interface would in any case make 655 pulses/h available on the BUS.
Virtual configuration
For the configuration mode, please refer to the MYHOME_Suite software package and to
the "Function Descriptions" help section within the application itself.
Procedure for deleting measured data

At any time you can reset the cumulative value of the number of pulses measured by the 1. Press the button on the interface for at least 20 seconds and release it when the two
interface. The procedure is as follows: green and red LEDs flash.
2. The data of the readings saved by the interface are deleted.
Wiring diagrams
BUS SCS
Note: Observe the polarity with

Open drain and Open collector
Counter counters.
with pulse output
Warning: The pulse counter interface must be installed as close as possible to the power supply cause the green LED to flash to signal the installation error. The device will work properly, but will
unit, to ensure a high BUS voltage and enable correct management of memory savings in case of not guarantee correct saving and recovery of data in case of BUS failure.
power failure. If the supply voltage is insufficient (below 21 Vdc), the pulse counter interface will
MQ01007-a-EN 07/06/2014
335
Electricity meter
with three inputs
F520
Description
The SCS device measures currents and voltages of separate lines (up to 3), connecting Front view
at most three toroids to the appropriate inputs (one toroid, item 3523, supplied as 1
standard).
The meter processes and saves the following variables:
- instantaneous power in W;
- total accumulated energy in Wh;
The device has an internal memory that can store:
5 2
- cumulative energy on an hourly basis for the last 12 months;
- cumulative energy on a daily basis for the past 2 years;
- cumulative energy on a monthly basis for the last 12 years.
In order to allow the device to archive consumption information, the system must be
fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g. Touch
Screen). If this information is not available, the meter will be unable to archive the data,
and will continue calculating the values of the instantaneous variables (power).
The device has a footprint of 1 DIN module and has a housing for 5 configurators: A1, A2,
A3-Ta, A3-Tb, A3-Tc.
3
Technical data
Current draw: 35 mA max
Rated current: 16 A
Maximum current: 90 A
Operating temperature: 5 – 40°C View from above
Dimensions
1 DIN module
6
Legend
1. 230 Vac connection

2. Pushbutton for the deletion of cumulative energy data
3. Configurator socket door
4. SCS BUS connection
5. User interface LED, SEE TABLE
6. Ta, Tb, Tc connectors for toroids, item 3523
MQ00358-c-EN 07/06/2014
336
Electricity meter
with three inputs
F520
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: The maximum number of addresses is 127.
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. WARNING: The A3-Ta configurator cannot be zero, unlike configurators A3-Tb and A3-
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from Tc, which can have a zero value (if the corresponding input is not managed). The meter
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many must be installed as close as possible to the power supply unit, to ensure a high BUS
more options than the physical configuration. voltage and enable correct management of memory savings in case of power failure.
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in If the supply voltage is insufficient (below 21 Vdc), the meter will cause the green
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the LED to flash to signal the installation error. The device will work properly, but will not
MYHOME_Suite software package. guarantee correct saving and recovery of data in case of BUS failure.
Procedure for the deletion of the cumulative energy data:
The physical configuration of the device is done by connecting the physical 1 Press and hold down the button; after about 20 seconds, the orange LED will flash
configurators to their sockets. quickly; release the button.
The meter has a housing for five configurators: 2 All the cumulative energy data are reset.
- A1 for hundreds
- A2 for tens
- A3 Ta for units
- A3 Tb for units
- A3 Tc for units
The combination of the configurators defines:
- A1/A2/A3-Ta address of meter A
- A1/A2/A3-Tb address of meter B
- A1/A2/A3-Tc address of meter C
1.1 Addressing

Address 0 - 255 A1, A2, A3Ta = 1-127
A1, A2, A3Tb = 1-127
A1, A2, A3Tc = 1-127
LED signals according to the status of the electricity meter:
Device status LED
Normal operation GREEN

BUS problem (BUS voltage insufficient, or voltage drop detected) Flashing GREEN 500 ms/500 ms
Installation error (230 Vac not detected) Flashing RED 100 ms/900 ms
Configuration error ORANGE flashing irregularly on GREEN
Not configured ORANGE flashing 128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
MQ00358-c-EN 07/06/2014
337
Electricity meter
with three inputs
F520
Wiring diagrams
Connection of the meter to the bus, the line, and the toroid
230 Vac
C16
N L
BUS
MQ00358-c-EN 07/06/2014
338
Load control central unit
F521
Description
The central unit for load management is an SCS device that measures the power Front view
consumed by the electric system and controls the state of the Load Management system 1
actuators, to prevent the risk of the electric meter tripping.
The device can manage up to 63 actuators (electric loads) per phase.
The central unit is also capable of processing and saving currents and voltages, to provide
information on energy and power:
- instantaneous power in W; 5 2
- total accumulated energy in Wh;
The device has an internal memory that can store:

- cumulative energy on an hourly basis for the last 12 months;
- cumulative energy on a daily basis for the past 2 years;
- cumulative energy on a monthly basis for the last 12 years.
This information is then made available on the user interfaces, and is displayed through
instantaneous values, totalizers and graphs.
In order to allow the central unit to archive consumption information, the system must 3
be fitted with a device capable of supplying current date and time information (e.g.
Touch Screen). If this information is not available, the meter will be unable to archive
the data, and will continue calculating the values of the instantaneous variables (power).
4
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc View from above
Rated current: 16 A
Maximum current: 90 A
Dimensions
6
1 DIN module
Legend
1. 230 Vac connection

2. Pushbutton for the start procedure and deletion of cumulative energy data
3. Configurator socket door
4. SCS/BUS connection
6. Toroid connection, Art.3523
MQ00360-c-EN 09/06/2014
339
F521
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: The load control central unit has a bay for five configurators, which define:
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. - A1/A2/A3 address of the central unit (A1 for hundreds, A2 for tens, A3 for units);
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from The maximum number of addresses is 127.
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many - P contractual power Pnom
more options than the physical configuration. - TOL Tolerance
1.1 Addressing

Address 1-127 A1, A2, A3: 1-127
1.2 Contractual power

Function Parameter / setting P Contractual power Approximate value in
PNOM(kW) Amperes at 230 Vac *)
Contractual power (Pnom) 100 W - 25500 W (steps of 100) 0 3 13
1 1.5 6.5
2 4.5 20
3 6 26
4 9 40
5 10.5 46.5
6 12 52
7 14 61
8 15 65
9 18 78
To configure the measured phase, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration NOTE (*): The reference value for the load control thresholds is that of the contractual power in
kW. The Ampere value can be used as a general indication to help the installer in those cases when
the service provider supplies the current information.
1.3 Contractual power tolerance

Function Parameter / setting TOL Tolerance
Contractual power tolerance From -20% to +20% (steps of 1%) 0 0
1 -5%
2 -10%
3 -15%
4 -20%
5 5%
6 10%
7 15%
8 20%
MQ00360-c-EN 09/06/2014
340
F521
Load control actuators acquisition

Once the installation stage has been completed, the central unit must acquire the turns green, and the central unit starts operating correctly.
actuators on the bus; unless this operation is carried out, the device will continue The procedure for the acquisition is inhibited if the central unit is not installed correctly
signalling lack of information (steady orange LED), and no load control function will be (voltage on the bus too low, or no 230V), or if an overload is present; it is therefore only
carried out. possible to complete the acquisition procedure if the LED is steady orange (installation
The procedure for the acquisition of the actuators on the BUS is as follows: correct but no actuator acquired), or steady green (system already configured and actu-
1. Press and hold down the button; after about 10 seconds, the red LED will light up; ators acquired).
release the button. If the supply voltage is insufficient (below approximately 21V), the central unit will cause
2. The red LED flashes quickly and the central unit interrogates the system to identify the the green LED to flash to signal the installation error: the device will work properly, but
actuators installed. will not guarantee correct saving and recovery of data in case of BUS failure.
3. Once the procedure has been completed, if no actuators have been found the
acquisition failed notification remains active (orange LED on steady), otherwise the LED
Procedure for the deletion of the cumulative energy data:

1. Press and hold down the button; after about 10 seconds, the red LED will light up; keep 2 After another 10 seconds, the orange LED will flash quickly; release the button.
on holding down the button. 3. All the cumulative energy data are reset.
LED signals according to the status of the load control central unit:
Device status LED
Normal operation (below threshold with all loads enabled) GREEN

Current threshold exceeded RED
System not acquired ORANGE
Current system acquisition Flashing RED 100 ms/100 ms
BUS problem (BUS voltage insufficient, or voltage drop detected) Flashing GREEN 500 ms/500 ms
MQ00360-c-EN 09/06/2014
341
F521
Wiring diagrams
Load control central unit connection 230 Vac
C16
N L
BUS
MQ00360-c-EN 09/06/2014
342
Actuator 16A with current sensor
F522
Description
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with zero crossing functionality, Front view
intended for the load control and/or automation functions.
1
In load control mode:
The actuator will be given a priority indicating the tripping order that will be followed by the
F521 load control central unit (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled if the threshold is
exceeded). The actuator is fitted with a current sensor for the measurement of the controlled
load consumptions, as well as for the display of the instantaneous consumption, and two 6
energy totalizers that can be reset by the user at any time. 2
The device also measures the residual current to allow displaying the diagnostics on the user
interfaces (this feature is only available by connecting the optional external toroid 3523 to 3
the actuator).
Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to re-enable the load for 4 hours after
disabling by the central unit.
4
In automation mode, the actuator can perform the following functions:
- All operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception of
those requiring the use of two interlocked relays (rolling shutters).
In mixed load control and automation mode, the following rules are followed:
The local button performs the load control management function (forcing/end of forcing)
- If the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the 5
Automation system.
- If the load is DISABLED by the load control central unit, the status of the relay does not
follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by a command, View from above View from below
ENABLING or FORCING, from load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation commands in
memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required by the last automation
command. 7
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management func-
tion is implemented, with the need, via automation commands, of performing hourly load
8
scheduling. If during the DISABLING stage the relay is switched OFF due to the scheduling
settings, when re-enabling takes place it will stay switched OFF.
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load even if there is no voltage on the 1
SCS BUS (and subsequent device reset). 5
Technical data
Range of measurement: 200 mA – 16 A
Power/Consumption of driven loads: Incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 10 A / 2300 W Legend
LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps 500 W /
Max 10 lamps 1. 230 Vac connection
Linear fluorescent lamps and electronic transformers 2. Button for load forcing
4 A / 920 W 3. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future use)
Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cosφ 0.5 / 920 VA 4. Configurator socket
5. BUS connection
7. Toroid connection (3523) to measure the residual current
8. Load connection
Dimensions
1 DIN module
MQ00361-d-EN 09/06/2014
343
F522
List of Functions

1. LIGHT SWITCH
2. LOAD CONTROL ACTUATOR
Configuration

www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering
many more options than the physical configuration.
package.
1. Lights actuator
1.1 Addressing

To configure the group address 0-255, use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
1.2 Mode
The actuator performs all the operating modes that can be configured on the control for this to be reached as automation actuator. In order to display the instantaneous
devices, with the exception of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays. and cumulative consumptions of the controlled load (saved inside the actuator), it will
Moreover further operating modes with the configurator in position M of the same be necessary to configure also P1 and P2. In this case P1 and P2 do not indicate the
actuator are listed in the table below. cut-off priority, but the address to be entered in the software programs in order to make
In the A and PL positions it will be necessary to indicate the device addresses in order it possible to display consumptions on the dedicated pages.

OFF Delay = 0
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Master PUL M=1 1 minute
Slave actuator. 1) OFF Delay = 1 - 255 M=2 2 minutes
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", "Load status upon central unit Note 1): Only for a point-point type control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates;
enabling" and to select the type of load (Actuator, Lamp, Valve, Differential Reset, Fan, the Slave actuator deactivates after the time set with the configurators has elapsed. In the Off
Irrigation, Controlled Outlet, Lock) use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. delayed mode, the master sends the Off command after a period of time set using the 1 - 4
configurator connected to M as shown in the table.
MQ00361-d-EN 09/06/2014
344
F522
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in automation mode:
Device status LED
Load OFF GREEN

Load ON ORANGE
2. Load control actuator
2.1 Load control management mode:

In the P1 and P2 positions it will be necessary to indicate the priorities from 01 to 63, in PF
the power factor (see table), the A, PL and M positions must be configured equal to zero.

Priority 1-63 P1,P2: 01-63
To use "Phase" (Single, 1, 2 and 3), "Type of load", "Load status upon central unit
enabling" and "AC or DC voltage" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
Power factor
Function Parameter / setting Power Typical loads 1)
factor
Power factor % 0-100 % PF=0 0.92 vacuum cleaner, microwave,
(default) TV
PF=1 1 oven, iron, electric stoves,
hair straightener, hot loads,
electron. transformers,
Toroid. transformers
PF=2 0.85 CFL lamps
PF=3 0.8
PF=4 0.75 Washing machines, dish-
washers, desktop PCs
PF=5 0.7
PF=6 0.65
PF=7 0.6 Other electronic devices
(home theater, DVD recorder,
PF=8 0.55
notebook PC, etc.)
PF=9 0.5
To use "Phase" (Single, 1, 2, 3), "Load Type" (Single Phase, Three Phase), "Load status Note 1): The parameters listed in the table are only indicative.
upon central unit enabling" (Previous state, Off) to select "AC or DC voltage", the
selection of the voltage to be measured (automatic or from 1 to 255V), "Upper threshold
for diagnosing the residual current" and "Power threshold on standby for energy
management actuators" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00361-d-EN 09/06/2014
345
F522
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in load control management
mode:
Device status LED
Enabled ORANGE
Enabled with consumption less than 50 W ORANGE flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF on GREEN
Forced ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Disabled RED
2.2 Lights and load control management mode:

In positions P1 and P2 priority from 01 to 63 must be indicated (see table above), in A and
PL you need to indicate the address of the device, as specified on page 2.
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in lights control and load
control management mode:
Device status LED
Enabled + ON ORANGE
Enabled + OFF GREEN
Enabled + ON with consumption less than ORANGE flashing 900 ms ON/100 ms OFF on GREEN
50 W
Disabled RED
Forced + ON ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Forced + OFF ORANGE flashing 1s/1s
Common LED notifications:
Device status LED
MQ00361-d-EN 09/06/2014
346
F522
Wiring diagrams
Actuator connection: WARNING: Cables carrying high currents installed

230 Vac vertically near the actuator (< 5 cm) may cause false
measurements of the integrated current sensor. In this
case move the cables away and keep the phase and
the neutral coupled.
C16
BUS
3523 (optional)
LOAD
MQ00361-d-EN 09/06/2014
347
Actuator 16A
F523
Description
The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay with zero crossing functionality, intended for Front view
the load control management and/or automation functions. 1
The actuator is capable, in an isolated manner, of assessing the frequency (50 Hz) and
voltage (230 Vac)

The actuator will be given a priority indicating the tripping order that will be followed by the
F521 load control central unit (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled if the threshold is 6
exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used in all the configuration 2
software programs. Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to re-enable the load
for 4 hours after DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load forcing previously set. 3

- All operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception of
4
those requiring the use of two interlocked relays;
- Possibility of group configuration (G)
- Additional modes using the M configuration socket.
In mixed load control and automation mode, the following rules are followed:
- If the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the
Automation system. 5
- If the load is DISABLED by the load control central unit, the status of the relay does not
follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by a command,
ENABLING or FORCING, from load control management. View from above View from below
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation commands in
memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required by the last automation
command.
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management
function is implemented, with the need, via automation commands, of performing
hourly load scheduling. If during the DISABLING stage the relay is switched OFF due to the 7
scheduling settings, when re-enabling takes place it will stay switched OFF.
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load even if there is no voltage on the 1
SCS BUS (and subsequent device reset). 5
The device has a footprint of 1 DIN module and has a housing for 6 configurators: A, PL, G,
M, P1, P2
Technical data
Current draw: 10 mA max Legend
Operating temperature: 0 – 40°C 1. 230 Vac connection
Power/Consumption of driven loads: Incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 10 A / 2300 W 2. Button for load forcing
LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps 500 W / 3. Virtual configuration pushbutton (future use)
Max 10 lamps 4. Configurator socket
Linear fluorescent lamps and electronic trans 5. BUS connection
formers 4 A / 920 W 6. User interface LED, SEE TABLE on following pages
Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cosφ 0.5 / 920 VA 7. Load connection
Dimensions
1 DIN module
MQ00362-d-EN 09/06/2014
348
Actuator 16A
F523
Configuration
The device can be configured in two ways: For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in
1.1 Addressing
Groups Group 1 - Group 10=0-255 G=0-9
1.2 Mode
1.2.1 Lights control

M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", to define the load to be controlled Note 1): In the Master and Master PUL mode you can set an OFF delay of 0-255 seconds (via
and the "closed/open" state of the relay after a reset, use MYHOME_Suite virtual MYHOME_Suite) and of 1-4 minutes using the physical configuration. Only for a point-point type
configuration. control. With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after
1.2.2 Load control command

Priority 1-63 P1,P2: 01-63
To use "Phase" (Single, 1, 2 and 3), "Type of load", "Load status upon central unit
enabling" and "AC or DC voltage" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00362-d-EN 09/06/2014
349
Actuator 16A
F523
Device status LED status
Load OFF GREEN

Load ON ORANGE
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in load control manage-
ment mode:
Enabled ORANGE
Forced ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Disabled RED
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in automation and load
control management mode:
Enabled + ON ORANGE
Enabled + OFF GREEN
Disabled RED
Forced + ON ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN
Forced + OFF ORANGE flashing 1s/1s
MQ00362-d-EN 09/06/2014
350
Actuator 16A
F523
Wiring diagrams
Actuator connection:
Note: For loads with current draw greater than 16 A add a supporting relay between the ac-
230 Vac tuator and the load.
C16
BUS
LOAD
MQ00362-d-EN 09/06/2014
351
Energy Data Logger
F524
Description Lower view 1

The energy data logger is a device that can be used to:
- Display on the PC or other device (e.g. Smartphone) consumption/production data,
recalling the web pages using an Internet Browser:
- Concentrate and save data consisting of 10 separate energy lines maximum. The lines
can be the electric power lines, by connecting F520 meters, or an F521 Central unit for
load management, or lines for water, gas, or heat consumption, by connecting 3522
pulse counter interfaces. 5
- Have a more detailed recording of electric data (using the Web pages included in the
device it is possible to download an excel file to have in hand every 15 minutes details 2
of each single electric line).
- Set several time bands for a more detailed conversion of the electric power value
into an economic value (it is in fact possible to configure up to 8 different tariffs. E.g.
two-hourly tariff, three-hourly tariff). For water and gas lines there are monetary 3
conversion values without time bands.
- Export the data to an excel file
- Have a simple data backup: The device features a housing for a micro SD memory card,
4
on which consumption details for each individual line are saved daily.
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc
Current draw: 30 mA
4
Dimensions
1 DIN module
The device is configured using the WEB pages in the device. For the activation and the 1. Ethernet cable connection
setup of the WEB pages refer to the CD supplied. 2. Button
WARNING: To activate the Energy Data Logger functions, the date and time must be set 3. Micro SD memory card socket door
(from WEB pages or other device). 4. SCS BUS connection
5. Network/device status LED
MQ00521-b-EN 09/06/2014
352
2-module flush-mounted actuator 16A
HC4672N HS4672N HD4672N
L4672N N4672N NT4672N

The device is an actuator with 1 bistable relay sensor with local pushbutton for load
forcing/local control for the Automation and/or Load control management functions.
The actuator will be given a priority indicating the tripping order that will be followed
by the F521 load control central unit (e.g. Priority 1 will be the first load disabled if the
threshold is exceeded). This priority coincides with the address that will be used in all
the configuration software programs. Using the forcing pushbutton it will be possible to
re-enable the load for 4 hours after DISABLING by the central unit, or remove the load
forcing previously set.
- All operating modes that can be configured on the control devices, with the exception
of those requiring the use of two interlocked relays; 1
- Possibility of group configuration (G)
- Additional modes using the M configuration socket.
In mixed load control and automation mode, the following rules are followed: 3 2
- If the load is ENABLED or FORCED, the status of the relay follows the commands of the
Automation system.
- If the load is DISABLED by the load control central unit, the status of the relay does Rear view
not follow the commands of the Automation system, but can only be re-enabled by a
command, ENABLING or FORCING, from load control management.
During disabling, the actuator keeps the statuses requested by the Automation
commands in memory. After RE-ENABLING the relay is placed in the status required by A
L PL
the last automation command. G 4
This function has been conceived for applications where the load control management 7 M
function is implemented, with the need, via automation commands, of performing P1
P2
hourly load scheduling. If during the DISABLING stage the relay is switched OFF due to
the scheduling settings, when re-enabling takes place it will stay switched OFF. 6
L1
The bistable relay enables preserving the status of the load even if there is no voltage on 5
the SCS BUS (and subsequent device reset).
The device consists of 2 modules, so that it can be installed in supports of the Living,
Light, Light Tech and Axolute series, and is provided with a bay for 6 configurators: A,
PL, G, M, P1, P2.

Operating power supply 1. Local pushbutton for load forcing/local control
with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 2. Red LED
Current draw: 10 mA max 3. Green/red two-colour LED
Operating temperature: 0 – 40°C 4. Configurator socket
Power/Consumption of driven loads: Incandescent lamps and halogen lamps 10 A / 5. BUS connection
2300 W 6. Load connection
LED lamps and compact fluorescent lamps 500 W / 7. Phase connection
Max 10 lamps
Linear fluorescent lamps and electronic transformers
4 A / 920 W
Ferromagnetic transformers 4 A cosφ 0.5 / 920 VA
Dimensions
2 flush-mounted modules
MQ00363-d-EN 09/06/2014
353
HC4672N HS4672N HD4672N
L4672N N4672N NT4672N
Configuration
The device can be configured in two ways: For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in
1.1 Addressing

Groups Group 1 - Group 10=0-255 G=0-9
1.2 Mode
1.2.1 Automation

Master Actuator - Cyclical ON/OFF Master M=0
OFF Delay = 0
Master Actuator with OFF control delayed on the corresponding Master PUL M=1 1 minute
Slave actuator. 1) OFF Delay = 1 - 255 M=2 2 minutes
M=3 3 minutes
M=4 4 minutes
To use the "Actuator as a slave with PUL function", to define the load to be controlled Note 1): Only for a point-point type control.
and the "closed/open" state of the relay after resetting the actuator, use MYHOME_Suite With the OFF control the Master actuator deactivates; the Slave actuator deactivates after the time
virtual configuration. set with the configurators has elapsed.
In the Off delayed mode, the master sends the Off command after a period of time set using the
1 - 4 configurator connected to M.
1.2.2 Load control command

Priority 1-63 P1,P2: 01-63
To use "Phase" (Single, 1, 2, 3), to select the "Load Type" and to select the "Load status
upon central unit enabling" use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration.
MQ00363-d-EN 09/06/2014
354
HC4672N HS4672N HD4672N
L4672N N4672N NT4672N
Device status Two-colour LED Red LED
Load OFF GREEN OFF

Load ON ORANGE OFF
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in load control management
mode:
Enabled ON ORANGE OFF

Enabled OFF GREEN OFF
Forced ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN OFF
Disabled GREEN ON steady
3) Automation and load control management mode:

In positions P1 and P2 priority from 01 to 63 must be indicated, in A and PL you need to
indicate the address of the device.
LED signals according to the status of the actuator in automation and load control
management mode:
Enabled + ON ORANGE OFF

Enabled + OFF GREEN OFF
Disabled GREEN ON steady
Forced + ON ORANGE flashing 1s/1s on GREEN OFF
Forced + OFF ORANGE flashing 1s/1s OFF
Not configured ORANGE flashing OFF

128 ms/128 ms on GREEN
Configuration error ORANGE flashing OFF
irregularly on GREEN
MQ00363-d-EN 09/06/2014
355
HC4672N HS4672N HD4672N
L4672N N4672N NT4672N
Wiring diagrams
Actuator connection:
230 Vac
C16
230V
LOAD
N L
A
L PL
G
M
P1
P2
L1
BUS––BUS
SCS SCS
Note: For loads with current draw greater than 16 A add a supporting relay between the actuator and the load.
MQ00363-d-EN 09/06/2014
356
Load control panel
HD4673 HS4673 N4673 067206 573985
HC4673 L4673 NT4673 067207 573991
Description Front panel with no Cover

The load control panel is a device that enables displaying the status of the loads 1 2
controlled by the load control central unit, item F521, and force their operation inde- 1 2
pendently from the central unit itself. It is therefore possible to:
- Force the priority of the load: in this case the central unit cannot disable the load for 4 3
hours. 6 3
- Re-enable a load disabled by the central unit: the duration of this operation lasts for 4
hours, unless the button is pressed manually.
The device consists of 2 modules, so that it can be installed in supports of the Livinglight 5 4
and Axolute series. It has 4 buttons on the front for forcing the load and 4 red LEDs that 5 6 4
indicate the status of the load:
- OFF with load ON
- ON steady, load disconnected due to overload. Rear
- ON flashing (1s ON, 1s OFF), load forcing.
- ON, flashing at 1 s in programming phase and flashing at 125 ms in self-learning
phase.
The load control panel is equipped, at the front, under the cover, with a programming
button and, at the back, it has a bay for 7 configurators: P1‑ab, P2‑a, P2‑b, P1‑cd, P2‑c, P1-ab
P2‑d, M.
P2-a
P2-b
P1-cd
P2-c
7
P2-d
M

Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1. Button a
Max. current draw: 7 mA ; Operating temperature: 0 – 40°C 2. Button b
3. Programming/load status indication LED
4. Button d
5. Button c
6. Programming/self-learning button
8. BUS clamp
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: 2) Press the button (a, b, c, d on the panel) that you want to assign to the load, the LED
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. assigned to it will begin to flash with a frequency of 125 ms, while the other LEDs of the
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from device will switch off.
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com; this mode has the advantage of offering many 3) Press the button of the actuator that you want to assign to the load control panel.
more options than the physical configuration. 4) Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all the buttons (including any button that you have already
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in assigned in case you want to change it).
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the 5) Briefly press the programming/self-learning button to exit programming.
WARNING: The socket of configurator M must be configured on 1 and all the other sockets
Self-learning configuration P1‑ab=P2‑a=P2‑b=P1‑cd=P2‑c=P2‑d=0.
To assign each of the buttons on the load control panel to the actuator of the load to be
controlled, the procedure is as follows:
1) Press the programming/self-learning button; all the LEDs will start blinking (1s ON,
1s OFF).
MQ00709-c-EN 07/06/2014
357
Load control panel
HD4673 HS4673 N4673 067206 573985
HC4673 L4673 NT4673 067207 573991
Virtual and physical configuration
Virtual configuration (MYHOME_Suite) Physical configuration1)

Priority 0-63 P1 - ab address of tens for the loads assigned to buttons “a” and “b”, values from
0 to 6.
P2 - a address of units for the load assigned to button “a”, values from 0 to 9.
P2 - b address of units for the load assigned to button “b”, values from 0 to 9.
P1 - cd address of tens for the loads assigned to buttons “c” and “d”, values from
0 to 6.
P2 - c address of units for the load assigned to button “c”, values from 0 to 9.
P2 - d address of units for the load assigned to button “d”, values from 0 to 9.
M=0,1; mode, value 0, the device can be physically configured; value 1, the
device can be configured with the self-learning procedure.
To use "Phase" (Single, 1, 2, 3), use MYHOME_Suite virtual configuration. Note 1): For example: if I have to control the actuators with priority 5, 6, 12, 13, the load control
panel must be configured in the following way: P1-ab=0; P2-a=5; P2-b=6; P1-cd=1; P2-c=2; P2-
d=3. In this case button "a" is assigned to the actuator with priority 5, button "b" the actuator with
priority 6, button "c" the actuator with priority 12 and button "d" the actuator with priority 13.
In the load control system the highest priority that can be configured on the actuators is 63, so if at
P1-ab the connected configurator is 6 at P2-a or P2-b the connected configurator can be at most 3.
MQ00709-c-EN 07/06/2014
358
Gateway
GATEWAY
Description
This device represents the interface between the MY HOME Temperature control system
1
and the Climaveneta IDRORELAX system.
The item allows the passage of the controls produced by the bus system toward the
fan-coil. It is necessary to consider one for each fan-coil, thus correctly scaling the bus
system as regards absorption and configuration.
As a matter of fact, the item is housed inside the fan-coil during the production phase
thus it is already connected to it by means of the connector located at the top of the front
side. Basically, after performing the hydraulic and electrical connection, you will only
need to connect the bus using the appropriate clamp.
Legend
1. Connector: for Climaveneta fan-coil connection
2. Configurator socket: socket for the configurators 5
3. Removable connector clamp for SCS BUS connection 4
4. LED: not used.
5. Key: not used.
3 2
Technical data
- Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Front view
Configuration
The item is the interface that can be found on the Climaveneta Chiller and the Fan-Coil. It Depending on needs, temperature control automations may activate certain actions with
is necessary for the connection to the temperature control BUS. As for the actuators, also certain temperature conditions. For example, in case thresholds that may be manually
for this device it will be necessary to connect to the ZA and ZB sockets two configurators set are exceeded, the temperature control system may automatically switch the settings
that identify the address, and the number of the zone it belongs to. from summer to winter, and vice versa. On the front of the interface are four sockets
In practical terms, the operation is the same as the one performed for the probe, during dedicated to the configurators:
the definition of the zone. A probe and a Gateway belonging to the same zone will ZA ZB zone address
require the same numeric configurators in the ZA and ZB sockets. N progressive zone number
The TYPE socket must be configured to indicate the type of load to be managed. TYPE type of load to control (Fan-Coil or Chiller)
If the Gateway manages a Fan-Coil, the numeric configurator 0 must be connected to the
TYPE socket, If it manages a Chiller, numeric configurator 1 will be required. NOTE: Gateway is a Climaveneta product that can already be found on fan-coils. For
When the Gateway is configured for the management of the Chiller, it will be possible to further information and for the technical documentation of the Climaveneta IDRORELAX
read the external temperature coming from the Climaveneta Chiller. system, contact the Customer Service Toll Free number 800.019.190 (8.30-12.30
This information may be simply displayed, or , in case the system is managed by the 99 and 14.00-18.00 Monday to Friday - calls are free of charge).
zone central unit, item 3550, it may be used to program and activate temperature control
automations.

ZA Zone address 0–9
ZB Zone address 0–9
N Progressive zone number 1–9
TYPE Fan-Coil management 0
Chiller management 1
MQ00186-c-EN 29/04/2014
359
Technical sheets - Video door entry sytem
361
TECHNICAL SHEETS
A/V SCS/BUS cable (white) 336904
Description
This cable is used for the distribution of the power supplies and the operating signals to
all BUS system devices.
The cable consists of a white external sheathing and two twisted flexible conductors
with a section of 0.5 mm2, one brown and one brown/white.
The cable is sold in 200 m coils.
It is thus suitable to be used:
- in the open air, inside trunkings, passage-ways and pipes
- inside walls with suitable pipes.
- laid underground by means of suitable pipes
The white SCS-BUS cable is suitable for underground installation
Technical data Installation notes

Insulation voltage: 450/750 V Underground cable installation
Can be buried: YES (see installation notes) The 336904 BUS SCS cable can be installed underground (protected using appropriate
External sheath colour: white (RAL 9010) piping), together with other signalling cables, provided the voltage is <50V.
External sheath diameter: 5.0 +/- 0.1 mm It is however strictly forbidden to install the 336904 cable in the same conduit as power
External sheath thickness: 0.7 mm supply cables with voltages >50V. Failure to comply with the installation requirements
External sheath material: PVC (RZ) will relieve BTicino of all responsibilities for the operation of the system installed.
Number of internal conductors: 2 unshielded twisted flexible conductors with
sheath Installation together with other cables
Colour of internal conductors: brown – brown/white Although the construction of the white cable guarantees the necessary electrical
Sheath thickness of internal conductors: 0.40 mm insulation level for installation together with 450/750 V system cables, it is however
Sheath diameter of internal conductors: 1.70 mm not capable of guaranteeing immunity from any electromagnetic disturbances that may
Sheath material of internal conductors: XLPE polyethylene occur when installed in the same conduits used for the power supply cables.
Conductor material: red electrolytic copper It is therefore strongly recommended that the white BUS/SCS cable and the power
Conductor section: 0.50 mm2 (16 x 0.20 mm2) supply cables are installed in separate conduits.
Coil length: 200 m

Reference standards: - It complies with the tests required by the following standards:
EN60811, EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, EN50265-2-1, EN50395, EN50396 as described
in the IMQ CPT 062 document.
Marks obtained:
BT00660-a-EN
362
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Wall mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel 342991 - 342992
Description
Wall mounted 2-wire pushbutton panel with Zamak front cover, colour camera, and 1
night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available.
The camera can be swivelled by +/-15°, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Blue LED backlit name plate 2
Related items
346250 (gate release relay module)
3
8 4
Technical data
7
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc
Stand by absorption: 20 mA 5
Max. operating absorption: 240 mA
Operating temperature: (-25) - (+70)°C
PI against mechanical impact: IK07
Dimensional data 6
106 Legend
mm
1 - White LEDs for night lighting
2 - Colour camera with camera slant adjustment horizontally and vertically by ±15°
3 - Loudspeaker
4 - Configurator socket
5 - Call keys
6 - Microphone
185 160 ÷ 165 7 - Clamps for BUS and door lock connection: the module allows to control an electric
mm cm door lock directly connected to the clamps S+ S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA
holding current 30 Ohm max)
8 - Microphone and loudspeaker volume adjustment
35
mm
BT00613-a -EN
363
TECHNICAL SHEETS
342991 - 342992
Configuration T - door lock relay timing
The device must be configured as follows: configurator number

0= No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
P - entrance panel number configurator
The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number as
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. 4 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt.
The entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or main) entrance panel.
S - type of call signal
N - call number The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons, and the audio One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
or video handsets. Table for SPRINT handset call signal
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of
the speaker module. In secondary entrance panels, the number of the first riser handset Configurator 0 1 2 3
must be inserted in N. Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems S=9 configure the general call.
BT00613-a -EN
364
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Flush mounted
LINEA 2000 METAL entrance panel 2 343001 - 343002
2
8 3
Description 7 4
1
Flush mounted 2-wire audio and video speaker module with Zamak front cover, colour
camera and night viewing white LED light. One and two-family version available. 5 5
The camera can be swivelled by +/-20°, both horizontally and vertically.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current). Flush mounted box supplied 6
as standard.
2 2
Related items 8 3
346250 (gate release relay module) 7 4
5 5
Technical data
Stand by absorption: 40 mA Zamak front without panel 6
PI against mechanical impact IK10
Sensor: 1/3”
9 10 11
Lens: f: 4,3 mm; F: 1.5 mm
Interlace: 2:1
Resolution: 330 horizontal lines
Night lighting: white LEDs
Brightness adjustment: automatic
J2
14
P
Dimensional data
N
TS
136 mm BUS PL S+ S−
9 10 11
163 mm
Rear view 13 12
J2
14
P
N
TS
Legend
1 - Loudspeakers BUS PL S+ S−
2 - White LEDs for night lighting
3 - Green LED for door status notification
4 - Microphone
5 - Call keys
BT00614-a -EN
6 - Colour camera
13 12
7 - Green LED: put through call notification
Red LED: busy system notification
8 - Green LED: active communication notification
9 - Microphone volume adjustment
10 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
11 - J2: when connected, two columns of call pushbuttons are active, when disconnected
only one
12 - Door lock connection and local open door pushbutton
13 - Connection to the 2-wire SCS BUS.
365
TECHNICAL SHEETS
343001 - 343002
Configuration
The device must be configured as follows:
P - entrance panel number

The configurator in seat P of the speaker module assigns to it a recognition number
inside the system. The numbering of the entrance panels must always start from P=0.
N - call number 1
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel pushbuttons and the audio
handsets or video handsets. In the common entrance panels made with pushbutton
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module. The number of the first riser
handset must be inserted in the local entrance panels in N.
T - door lock relay timing

configurator number
0= No
1 2 3 4* 5 6 7
2
configurator
as
4 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt.
* Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated.
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured with
MOD=5.
S-type of call signal with entrance panel door lock opening notification beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets. Installation
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels. The camera must not be installed in front of intense light sources, or in locations where
the subject might be backlit. To avoid these problems try to change the installation
Table for SPRINT handset call signal height of the camera, normally from 160-165 cm, to a height of 180 mm, and to
direct the lens downwards so that the shooting quality may be improved. In low light
Configurator 0 1 2 3 conditions, the picture of the colour camera may be reproduced with a lower colour
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone rendition, in order to ensure the possibility to better identify the subject. For optimum
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz rendition, it is however recommended that an extra light sources is installed in scarcely
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz illuminated locations.
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=9 configures the general call and
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0. Flush mounted box
S-type of call signal without entrance panel door lock opening notification Frame
beep
The configuration of S determines the call tone of the SPRINT handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels. Speaker module
Table for SPRINT handset call signal
BT00614-a -EN
Configurator 4 5 6 7
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone
1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz 1200Hz
600Hz 0 Hz 2400Hz
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, the S configurator associates the Protrusion from
Entrance panel to the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose the wall: 21 mm
between 16 different bells. In one-family systems, S=8 configures the general call and
the handsets ring, the same as with the S=0.
366
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Polyx Memory Display 344163

2 WIRE wall mounted speaker phone video handset with audio and video memory.
With 3.5” colour LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for
the management of the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system, 1
temperature control, sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. With video door entry 12
system answering machine with call memory function.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, connection with entrance panel, and
answering machine status. It can be wall mounted using the appropriate bracket 2
(supplied).
Programming and configuration using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied
3
with the product. 11
10 4
Related items 9 5
346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of the
video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary.
8 7 6
Back view
Technical data
Stand-by absorption: 10 mA 13
Max. operating absorption: 330 mA 14
Operating temperature: 0 - 40 °C 17 15
16
Dimensional data
168 mm 30 mm
Legend
1. Microphone
150 mm 2. 3.5 “ LCD colour display
3. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
4. Entrance panel/camera scrolling activation key
5. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
6. Connection status LED
7. Loudspeaker
8. Door lock status LED
BT00639-a -EN
9. Door lock activation key

10. Audio video answering machine status LED
11. Answering machine key: enable/disable the answering machine function
(if enabled by the menu)
12. Bell exclusion notification LED
13. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
15. Additional power supply connector (1-2)
16. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
17. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection
367
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344163
Configuration
Polyx Memory Display can be configured in two different modes:
- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection);

- Advanced configuration (using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software supplied).
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
own housing on the back of the device itself. the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration - create customized menus;
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended. - customize text messages;
- access all home automation functions.
Connection to the PC
To transfer the configuration performed using the TiPolyxMemoryDisplay software
or to update the firmware, connect POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY to the PC using the
USB-miniUSB cable.
PM
N
N – handset number
The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed.
USB-miniUSB
P – entrance panel association
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
to activate before pressing the key and which door lock is activated when the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.
M – operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions
BT00639-a -EN
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).
To ensure that the communication is successful, the POLYX MEMORY DISPLAY must
be powered and not physically configured.
368
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Inductive LOOP module 344165
Description
2 WIRE inductive LOOP module to be used with Polyx Memory Display 344163 video
handset, to enable use by people wearing hearing aids (fitted with T selector).
The device must be configured with the same address (N) of the corresponding video
handset. Wall mounted installation without the need of accessories.
WARNING: The inductive loop module must only be activated AFTER establi- 1
shing the connection of the associated video handset to the entrance panel.
Technical data
2
Power supply dal SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
Dimensional data
88 mm 24,5 mm
3
N
122 mm
8 4
ON
OFF
5
7
ON OFF 6
1. Activation key
2. Status signalling LED: green flashing = call notification
green steady = connection established
N * 3. Configurator socket
4. Jumper, to be removed to enable additional power supply connection
BT00640-a -EN
5. Additional power supply connection clamps

N = associated video handset number 6. Microphone
The N configurator assign to the device the same number of the handset of the associa-
ted video handset (configure with the same N of the video handset).
8. 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
(*) = Not used
369
TECHNICAL SHEETS
LIVINGLIGHT VIDEO DISPLAY 344400 - 344401

2-WIRE hands free video handsets for flush mounted installation or in FLATWALL
column. 2.5” colour LCD display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the
management of the following applications: video door entry system, temperature control,
sound system, scenarios and anti-intrusion. Signalling LEDs for: call exclusion, door status,
and connection to the entrance panel. Firmware update/programming USB port. Suitable
for flush mounted installation using item 506E boxes. To be completed with dedicated 1
10
front covers and LIVINGLIGHT front cover plates. Programming and configuration using the
TiLivingLightDisplay software supplied with the product.
Related items 9
2
506E 3+3 modules flush mounted box
344413 LIVINGLIGHT front cover - White 3
344411 LIVINGLIGHT front cover - Tech 8 4
344412 LIVINGLIGHT front cover - Anthracite
LNA4826... Front cover plate, 3+3 modules, square (see LIVINGLIGHT finishes)
LNB4826... Front cover plate, 3+3 modules, elliptical (see LIVINGLIGHT finishes)
LNC4826... Front cover plate, 3+3 modules, AIR (see LIVINGLIGHT AIR finishes)
7 6 5
Technical data Rear view

Dimensional data
344400
106 mm 10,5 mm
15 13
2,5” 14
117 mm
Legend
1. 2.5” colour LCD display
31 mm 2. Loudspeaker
344401
119 mm 5 mm 3. Bell exclusion notification LED
4. Audio connection activation / deactivation key
BT00638-a -EN
6. Entrance panel / camera cycling activation key

2,5”
8. Door lock activation key
121 mm 9. Navigation keys and confirmation inside the icon menu
10. Microphone
11. Mini-USB connector for PC connection
13. Clamps for the connection of the 2-WIRE SCS BUS
31 mm
15. Additional power supply connection clamps (1 - 2)
370
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344400 - 344401
Configuration
LIVINGLIGHT VIDEO DISPLAY can be configured in 2 different modes: The advanced PC configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user
with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators)
- Advanced configuration (using the TiLivingLightDisplay software supplied with - create flexible menus
the product). - customize text messages
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to Connection to the PC
the appropriate socket on the back of the device itself. If the apartment interface, item To transfer the configuration performed using the software, or to update the firmware,
346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of the video handset using the connect LIVINGLIGHT VIDEO DISPLAY to the PC using the USB-mini cable.
software supplied is recommended.
WARNING: The device configuration made using configurators CANNOT BE MODIFIED

using the menu.
3
2
USB-miniUSB
N - handset number
The N configurator assigns each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive mode. Handsets with parallel
connection (max 3 are allowed inside the apartment without item 346850) must be
configured with the same N configurator. Additional audio handsets, video handsets
and/or bells can be installed in parallel to the basic video handset.
P - entrance panel association

The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel that switches
itself on when the pushbutton is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton is pressed.
BUS
BT00638-a -EN
M - operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable To ensure that communication is successful, the video handset must be
preset functions (see manual supplied with the product). powered and NOT physically configured.
371
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Audio
POLYX 344082
Description
1
2 WIRE handsfree handset for wall mounted installation.
It’s fitted with keys for: EP activation/cycling, door lock release, staircase light switching
on and 4 programmable keys, which operating mode is set through the configuration.
Specific audible and visual signals mean that it is also suitable for use by disabled people.
Fixing bracket supplied.
10 2
Technical data
9 3
Stand by absorption: 5 mA 8 4
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C 7 5
Dimensional data
Front 6
124,5 mm 30 mm
11 12
ON
128 mm
BUS OFF 5 1
14
N
N
P M
P M
13 ART.344082
Rear view
Legend
1 - Call signalling LED
2 - Loudspeaker
3 - Staircase light key
4 - Loudspeaker volume adjustment
BT00641-a -EN
5 - Connection key+ LED

6 - Microphone
7 - Door lock key + LED
8 - Bell volume adjustment and exclusion + LED
9 - EP Activation/cycling
10 - 4 programmable keys (through configuration)
11 - Clamps for the connection to the 2 WIRE BUS
12 - Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
14 - Clamps for the connection of the Floor call auxiliary services and extra bell
372
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
Configuration Configurator in P key ( ) function

0-9 Entrance panel audio activation
N - handset number (configured with P=0-9)
Assigns to each handset an identification number within the system. The handsets
must be configured in progressive order. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are
allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be configured using the same Configurator in P key function
N configurator. 0-9 Opening of the EP door lock
(configured with P=0-9)
The P configurator identifies the associated EP, or the first entrance panel on which the
The handset offers the possibility to select among 16 types of bells with pre-programmed
audio is activated when the ( ) key is pressed, as well as which door lock is activated
ringtones, which can be associated to the following type of calls:
when the key is pressed while the handset is idle.
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0 - S=4)
M - Operating mode of the keys
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S=0 - S=5)
In addition to the door lock opening key and the staircase light key ( ), the
- Intercom call
handset also has 4 programmable keys ( - - - ).
- Floor call
These keys may be associated to different operating modes (e.g. activation of external
(See the bell programming table in the following pages)
actuators, intercom, activation of additional EPs, etc., based on the type of configurator
connected to M).
BT00641-a -EN
373
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
Configuration
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable keys:
MODE KEY FUNCTION NOTES
MOD =
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
2 EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of
3 the actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=5), or activation of door
lock actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+1)
EP door lock release (configured with P+2), directly, without call, or activation of the
4 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+2 and MOD=5), or activation of door lock
actuators 346230-346260 (configured with P+2)
MOD = 1
1 Intercom on itself, it sends the call to all handsets with the same address.
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=2
2 Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface. 2 2 2
3 EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the

MOD = 2 N=1 N=3 N=2 N=1 N=3 N=1
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface. 1 1 1
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=2
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
BT00641-a-EN
2 2 2
374
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
MOD = 3 N=1 N=5 N=2 N=1 N=3 N=1 N=4 N=1 N=5 N=1
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface. 1 1 1 1 1
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=5 N=3 N=2 N=4 N=2 N=5 N=2
N =1 N =3 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=5 N=4 N=3 N=5 N=3
N=1 N=4 N=2 N=4 N=3 N=4 N=4 N=5 N=5 N=4
MOD = 4 1 EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=1
or intercom among apartments without apartment interface. 2 2
MOD = 5 EP door lock release (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of
BT00641-a -EN
375
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
MOD = 6 1 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module (SCENARIO 1)
2 Activation of the scenario saved in the scenario module (SCENARIO 2)

N=1 N=3 N=2 N=1 N=3 N=1
MOD = 7
Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
1 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
1 1 1
N=1 N=2 N=2 N=3 N=3 N=2
Intercom inside the apartment, in systems with apartment interface item 346850,
2 or intercom among apartments without apartment interface.
2 2 2
MOD = 1 1 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
EP activation (configured with P+1), directly, without call, or activation of the
2 actuator, item 346200 (configured with P+1 and MOD=9)
N=1
MOD = 12
1 Intercom between apartments, in systems with apartment interface, item 346850
1
N=2
BT00641-a-EN

2
376
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082

N=1
MOD = 13
1
N=2

2
N=3

3
N=4

4
3 General Intercom, sends a call to all the handsets of the system.
BT00641-a -EN
377
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
Configuration
A B C D E
0 0 20 40 60 80
1 0 30 50 70 90
0 1 21 41 61 81
0 2 22 42 62 82
1 2 32 52 72 92
20 = B
0 3 23 43 63 83
40 = C
1 3 33 53 73 93
+ 60 = D
0 4 24 44 64 84
80 = E
0 5 25 45 65 85
0 6 26 46 66 86
1 6 36 56 76 96
0 7 27 47 67 87
0 8 28 48 68 88
A Configuration selected for the operation of the keys (see previous pages)
B Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + OFFICE function
C Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + PAGING function
D Configuration selected for the operation of the keys + HANDSFREE function (Can be activated only on a single device for each unit system)
E Configuration selected for the operation of the keys, OFFICE and PAGING function
BT00641-a-EN
378
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
OFFICE FUNCTION DETAIL
With the function active, when a call is received from

the entrance panel, the video handset rings and the
associated door lock is automatically released, without
the need for pressing the door lock release key on the
handset.
3
1
CLAK
To ENABLE the function EXIT

Led ON EXIT
Led ON EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
>3s BEEP
BEEP
>3s BEEP
>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function Led ON
Led ON EXIT
Led ON EXIT
Led ON EXIT
EXIT
BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
>3s BEEP
>3s BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
BT00641-a -EN
>3s
>3s BEEP
WARNING: the “OFFICE” function cannot be activated together with the “DOOR STATUS” function.
379
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
DOOR Status function PUSH TO TALK function

This function notifies the status of the door lock. If open, the “door lock LED” flashes, if If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will
closed, the LED stays off. be possible to enable the “PUSH TO TALK” function, which will provide a better quality
NOTA: è attivabile solo se l’impianto lo prevede; NON è attivabile contemporaneamente of communication.
alla OFFICE function. To enable the PUSH TO TALK function during the conversation proceed as follows:
- Press the Connection key for at least 2 seconds, to enable the communication with the
PAGING function entrance panel.
This function can be used to send voice messages using the microphone of the device The LED stays green.
through the speakers of the sound system. To activate briefly press the ”Connection” key - Release the key to listen to the entrance panel. The LED turns red.
while the device is in the idle condition. The activation of the function is confirmed by the - To end the connection press the Connection key briefly. The LED turns off.
green LED coming on. To DISABLE the function press the ”Connection” key again.
HANDSFREE function
The HANDSFREE function automatically activates the microphone and the loudspeaker
when a call is received, without the need for pressing the Connection key to answer (the
connection is automatically established when the call is received).
To ENABLE the function

BEEP EXIT
BEEP EXIT
>3s
>3s
To DISABLE the function BEEP

BEEP
BEEP EXIT
BEEP EXIT
>3s
>3s
Enable/disable key sound
In the base configuration, when a key is pressed, a beep is emitted. This function may be
disabled/enabled with the following procedure:
To ENABLE the function BEEP

BEEP
>3s
BT00641-a -EN
>3s
To DISABLE the function BEEP

BEEP
BEEP
BEEP
>3s
>3s
380
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344082
OK
1 OK
1 1
Programming of bells
1 OK
OK
111 12 OK
11 OK
Bell selection from MAIN ENTRANCE PANEL (S=0) 1 21 OK
11
1 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 1 211 EXIT
OK
>3s 11
111 16 21
16 12 OK
OK
EXIT
OK
OK
>3s 111 12 EXIT
>3s 111 11222
16
17 EXIT
OK
OK
OK
OK
>3s 11 17 EXIT
>3s 111211 12112
16 OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s 111211 17 OK
>3s 211
16
EXIT
OK
>3s 11 171 OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s
1112221 21221
17 EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 1112112 17 122 OK
OK
EXIT
122 1721 OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s 12 OK
EXIT
Bell selection from SECONDARY ENTRANCE
>3s PANEL (S=1)
>3s 11221 17
17221
>3s 122 17 12 EXIT
OK
OK
>3s 221 17 EXIT
>3s 12122 17 2212 OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 222 16
1
17 22 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 122 16
17
17
EXIT
OK
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 22123 1
17 1 OK
EXIT
>3s 2123 1621 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 222
21
17
17 OK
17
1612 OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s 22332 2121 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 222323 16
17 12 OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s 2333 17211 OK
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s 12
222111
>3s 17 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 22332 17
17 EXIT
>3s 2323 17
17 12 OK
OK
EXIT
INTERCOM CALL bell selection >3s 3 17 2212
EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s 23233 171 EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 3333
23
1222
17
17
17
OK
OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
1 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 33324 17
121121
EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 17
17 EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 32343 17
21
16 EXIT
OK
OK
>3s 333 17
1612 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 3334443 17
222111
EXIT
OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 334 16
17 12 OK
EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s 33444 17212 EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s 443 16 122 OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s
33344 17
17 211 EXIT
OK
>3s 17
16 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s 4 17 2 EXIT
12121
>3s 4334 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 444
17
17 OK
EXIT
EXTERNAL INTERCOM CALL bell selection
>3s 121
17 OK
EXIT
OK
3 17
17
OK
OK
EXIT
(only with interface item 346850) >3s
>3s 444344 121122 OK
EXIT
>3s 43444 17
17 EXIT
OK
>3s 44
212
17
OK
OK
EXIT
17121 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s 4444 2 OK
>3s
>3s 4 17
171211 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 44 16 2 OK
OK
EXIT
OK
44 16
172121 EXIT
OK
EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 121 OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s
4444 17
16
172211 OK
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 17 21
EXIT
OK
17 EXIT
122212
>3s OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 44 16
17 OK
EXIT
>3s 1
17 21 OK
EXIT
OK
OK
4 16 EXIT
OK
BT00641-a -EN
>3s
>3s 4 11221
17 EXIT
EXIT
FLOOR CALL bell selection >3s
>3s 1721 EXIT
EXIT
OK
>3s
>3s 4 17
22
17 EXIT
>3s 17
171 EXIT
OK
EXIT
>3s
>3s 21222
17 OK
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s 17
17 1 OK
EXIT
17
172 EXIT
EXIT
EXIT
>3s
>3s
>3s 1
>3s 16
17
1722 EXIT
>3s
16
17 2 EXIT
>3s 16 EXIT
>3s 17
16 EXIT
>3s
16
381
TECHNICAL SHEETS
CLASSE 100 A12B

Handsfree internal unit 344252

2 WIRE audio handsfree internal unit for wall mounted installation.
Keys available: auto-switching on / cycling, door lock release, staircase lights control, and
handsfree connection.
Depending on the configurator connected to (M), the same keys will perform different
functions (see the specific configuration section). 1
LED used for: call exclusion, door status, connection with the entrance panel. Adjustments 2
11
for: speaker volume, and call tone volume/exclusion (16 different ringtones available).
For the installation to the wall, the bracket supplied must be used.
3
9 4
Related items
5
344552 Table top support 8
6
10
Rear view 7
Technical data
13 14
15
12
Dimensional data
A C
Legend
1. Red LED for call exclusion notification
2. Bell volume adjustment/call exclusion
3. Incoming audio volume adjustment
B 4. Operating status two-colour red/green LED
5. Door lock key
6. Operating status two-colour red/green LED
BT00754-a -EN
7. Communication enabling/disabling key

8. Entrance panel/cycling key
9. Staircase light switching on key
10. Microphone
11. Loudspeaker
A B C 12. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
90 mm 140 mm 27 mm 13. Configurator socket
14. Clamps for the connection of an external call to the floor pushbutton
382
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344252
Configuration
The device must be only physically configured.

N - handset number
The configurators connected to the N sockets of the device assign an identification
N P M
number within the system to each handsfree internal unit. The handsets must be
configured in progressive order. Handsets with parallel connection (max 3 are allowed
inside the apartment without item 346850) must be configured with the same N
configurator. Additional audio handsets, handsfree internal unit and/or bells can be
installed in parallel to the basic handsfree internal unit.

The configurators connected to the P sockets of the device identify the associated
EP, which is the first entrance panel that switches itself on when the pushbutton
is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock is activated when pressing the
pushbutton while the handsfree internal unit is idle.
M – operating mode
The configurator connected to the M socket of the device assigns the operating
modes to the 4 programmable keys based on the following indications.
Below are the various operating modes that can be assigned to the 4 programmable
keys:
MODE KEY FUNCTION
Activation of the EP (configured with the same P) directly without call.

M = 0 (with key tone active)
Cycling of EP and cameras installed in the system. Direct call to the switchboard, if present in the system.
Audio enabling / disabling following a call.
Direct EP door lock activation (EP configured with the same P), or activation of the EP door lock upon connection.
Staircase light switching on.

BT00754-a -EN
EP door lock activation (EP configured with P+1), directly without call, or activation of an actuator 346200 (configured with P+1
and MOD=5), or activation of a door lock actuator 346230 - 346260 (configured with P+1).
383
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344252
Configuration
MODE KEY FUNCTION
M = 2 (with key tone active) Internal intercom. It sends the call to all the handsets with the same address.

Internal intercom. It sends the call to all the handsets with the same address.
“PRESET INTERCOM” function with intercommunicating call to the Handset configured with N=1.
M = 4 (with key tone active) From the system handsets it is possible to send an intercom call to the handset configured with N=1.
The entrance panel configured with N=1 can intercom calls, but is UNABLE to send them.
M=5 As M=0 but with key tone disabled

BT00754-a -EN
PUSH TO TALK function

If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy position, during the conversation it will be possible to enable the “PUSH TO TALK” function, which will provide a better quality of communication.
To use the PUSH TO TALK function, during a conversation proceed as indicated below.
During a conversation press the conversation key for >2 minutes: the LED switches ON green, and communication from the handsfree internal unit to the entrance panel is established; when the
communication key is released, the LED turns red and communication from the entrance panel to the handsfree internal unit is established. To terminate the conversation press and release the
conversation key.
TIME-OUT and conversation times are respectively: 30” after the call, 1’ after the start of the conversation.
384
TECHNICAL SHEETS
344252
Programming of bells LED notifications
The handsfree internal unit offers the possibility to select among 16 types of Door lock status and/or door status red LED notifications:
bells with programmed ringtones, which can be freely associated to the following
type of calls: LED ON steady = door lock pushbutton pressed;
- Calls from the entrance panel (configured with S = 0); LED ON flashing = door open;
- INTERCOM call; LED OFF= door closed.
- Floor call.
Selection of the call bells from the main EP (S = 0).
NOTE: The door status function notifies the status of the door lock. If open the “LED door lock”
flashes, and if closed, the LED stays off.
This function is only available in preset systems.
1
Operating status two-colour (red/green) LED notifications:
LED ON steady (green) = conversation active;

LED ON flashing (green) = call active or intercom call forwarded;
2
LED ON flashing (red) = programming procedure being performed.
RED RED
LED LED
ON OFF
> 3s
16
Preset intercom / intercom call bell selection.
RED RED
LED LED
ON OFF
> 3s
16
Floor call bell selection.
1
BT00754-a -EN
RED RED
LED LED
ON OFF
> 3s
16
385
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Iryde Touch Phone 345020 - 345021

2 wire telephone and video handset for wall mounted installation (with optional 1 2 3
bracket, item 345024) or table-top version (with optional support, item 345023). It has
a 16/9, 4.3” LCD colour touch screen display with icon navigation menu, which can be
customised using a PC for the management of the functions:
- telephone;
- video door entry
- MY HOME automation: temperature control, sound system, automation scenarios,
burglar alarm.
The device also features: 4
- backlit keypad with blue LED.
- handset with magnet for logic release functions through the Hall sensor fitted inside
the base, with extendable spiral cable. On the back of the receiver is a loudspeaker for
the handsfree function.
Programming and configuration using the TiIrydeTouch Phone software supplied with
the product.
Technical data 6 5
Maximum absorptions from the BUS: Keypad
- Standby 35 mA and up to 160 mA when the telephone 7 8
functions are used.
- ON 350 mA
- With additional power supply (1-2) 20 mA
Legend
10
1. Handsfree loudspeaker .,?
2. Handset
3. LCD colour touch screen display: it displays the user menus and shows the images 11
recorded from the entrance panel and from other cameras
4. Handsfree microphone
12
5. Backlit keypad
6. Mini USB PC connection
7. Call forwarding and repeat/pause telephone function keys 13
8. Telephone address book key
9. EP switching on and camera cycling key
10. Stair lights switching on key 14
11. Call exclusion key: press once to disable the ringtone (telephone and video door entry
system), and press again to enable. Steady red LED with ringtone disabled, flashing for
incoming call and ringtone disabled Rear view
15 16 17 18
12. Handsfree enable/disable key. Green LED when enabled
13. Main EP door lock release key. Notification LED:
14. - off when the door lock is idle and the door is locked, red when the door is open PSTN
ART. 345021
BUS 2 1
BT00650-a -EN
15. - red flashing when the Office function is active OFF
16. * and # keys used for telephone services

ON
17. Line termination ON/OFF switch 19

N PM
18. PSTN telephone line or PABX switchboard connector

19. 2 wire video SCS/BUS connector
20. 1-21) power supply connector
22. Bracket fixing screw.
Note: 1) The telephone functions are still ensured in case of power cut to the SCS/BUS, 20
provided that an additional power supply is present. (1= –; 2= +)
386
TECHNICAL SHEETS
345020 - 345021
Dimensional Data Configuration

Iryde Touch Phone can be configured in two different modes:
- Basic configuration: when switched on for the first time, the product asks the
user to select the language. After this has been done, if no physical configurators are
present, the device displays a main page showing the video door entry system icon
(inside which, standard door entry system commands can be found: camera, door
lock release, intercom, automatic cycling), the telephone icon, and the settings icon.
The basic configuration can also be performed using physical configurators: N (address
120 of the device within the video door entry system), P (address of the EP associated to the
mm device)
- Configuration using the PC: using the TiIrydeTouchPhone software, it gives the
possibility of configuring the main menu page without being limited to a pre-set number
235 mm 22 mm
of functions. Each function may be customised in terms of type, parameter, and text.
PC configuration provides:
- better flexibility in the creation of the menu;
- customisation of text;
- functionalities for the management of the MY HOME automation systems.
Rules, certification, marks
Iryde Touch Phone 345020 – 345021 complies with the 1999/5EC directive, certified
following the current regulations listed below:
• EN 60950-1:2006-04 + EN 60950-1/A11:2009-03
• EN 50090-2-2/Ec:1997-03 + EN 50090-2-2/A1:2002-01+ EN 50090-2-2/A2:2007-04
Main functions
• Simultaneous switching on with additional power supply: it is possible to connect up
to 4 ITPs with no additional power supply. In case of simultaneous switching on of several
menus, display brightness limitation occurs. In system with or without PABX switchbo-
ard, where however the PSTN telephone line and the SCS BUS are connected using
the star wiring solution, the image from the camera is visible on all the ITPs, provided
that these are powered individually using the additional power supply (item 346020).
In general, when installing systems in apartments with ITPs connected to the telepho-
ne line, the installation of the apartment interface, item 346850, is also required.
BT00650-a -EN
• Home automation functions: using the software, it is possible to configure the

pages for the control of the home automation systems installed inside the home.
The available pages are: alarms (alarm log display), sound system (programming of
the rooms and source names), temperature control (management of the 4 zone and 99
zone system), execution of scenarios.
• Ringtones: stored in the ITP, can be associated to specific events: door entry system,
telephone, and intercom call, alarms, etc. The ringtones are played by the loudspeaker
used for the handsfree function. It is possible to update the ringtones, with Wav or
MP3 files, using the configuration software.
387
TECHNICAL SHEETS
345020 - 345021
- Address book: using the telephone menu, the address book can be used for the
following functions: add a contact, delete a contact, change a contact, select and
call a contact, customise a contact by associating a photo to the number (using the
software), management of several numbers (max 3) for each contact.
Telephone services
• Calling a number on the PSTN line: using the appropriate keypad command, the • Automatic redial of the last external number.
user can select the PSTN telephone line on which to make the call. ITP is capable of
selecting a telephone number on the PSTN line in touch tone mode (DTMF). • Putting a call on and off hold on the telephone line: the extension engaged in the
call can put the user of the PSTN line on hold by pressing the “R/HOLD” key. While on
• Calling a number on the private, or system, address book using the PSTN line. hold the extension can:
- enable a permitted service.
• Pager: Press the dedicated icon to communicate with handsets and telephones with - restart the conversation by replacing the handset (call return).
handsfree function. - restart the conversation on hold by pressing the “R/HOLD” key again.
• Answering incoming calls. • Answering a second call.
• Differentiated call: when a call arrives, the user has the possibility of distinguishing • Transfer without consent in case of free tone: in case of installation with PABX,
between type of calls (intercommunicating, from the outside line, or video door entry after pressing “R” and selecting the number of the extension to which to transfer the
system call), by using different sound tracks. conversation, the user can replace the handset once a free tone is heard.
• CID service: upon arrival of a PSTN line call, the caller number or name is displayed (if • Transferring a door entry system and DOSA outside line call: in case of installation
the number is included in the address book), together with the photo of the caller (if with PABX.
present in the private address book). The availability of the service is subjected to the
activation of the function for forwarding information by the central unit. • DISA service, selection of the handset from the outside line using the voice
menu: in case of installation with PABX.
• Extension call (intercommunicating call): possibility for the extensions to talk to
each other. The selection of the extension to call can be made in two ways: • Day/lunchtime/night scenarios for the various telephone lines: in case of
- by entering on the code of the extension to call on the keypad (from 401 to 408) installation with PABX.
- by selecting the extension to call from the menu, and then pressing “OK” to confirm
the call
• General call of all the extensions: it is possible to make an announcement on all

CTB and ITP extensions using the loudspeaker on the bases of the telephones. To
activate the service lift the handset and press the dedicated icon. The first telephone
engaging the line enters in conversation with the caller, excluding all the other
extensions called. If no answer is received within the activation time, the service is
interrupted and the caller receives a time-out tone. The service can be interrupted by
replacing the handset. Press the “pager” key during the activation time or when the
time-out tone is heard from the handset to reactivate the service. The microphone
used for the pager function can be the handset or the handsfree microphone.
BT00650-a-EN
388
TECHNICAL SHEETS
345020 - 345021
Wiring diagrams
One-family system without PABX
Telephone line
BUS BUS
ON
a b OFF
IN
PLT1
OUT
a b
PLT1
PSTN 345020 PSTN 345020
PSTN PSTN
OFF OFF
BUS 345020 BUS 345020
346000
346830
BUS BUS
TK PI
Entrance
panel PS
BUS 2 1
BT00650-a -EN
BUS
230 Vac
ITEM DESCRIPTION Quantity

PLT1 Protection of telephone line 1
345020 Iryde Touch Phone 4
346830 Video adapter 1
346000 AV Power supply, 230 V 1
389
TECHNICAL SHEETS
345020 - 345021
One-family system with PABX 230 Vac
346020
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
ON 1
2
PSTN BUS
345020*
ON ON
PSTN BUS BUS PSTN
345020* 345020*
ON ON
PSTN BUS BUS PSTN
345020* 345020*
Telephone
110-240 Vac line
346830 346000
BUS BUS
TK PI a b a b
IN IN
Speed Full Link Aux System
345829
10W39 06
PLT1 PLT1
PABX 288 exp
PRI: 110 - 240V~
210 - 130mA
50/60 Hz
PS PD max 13W
OUT OUT
a b a b
BUS 2 1 PLT1 PLT1

230 Vac 345829
BT00650-a -EN
Entrance
panel
Fax Telephone
Cordless
ITEM DESCRIPTION Quantity

PLT1 Protection of telephone line 2
345020 Iryde Touch Phone 5
346830 Video adapter 1
346000 AV Power supply, 230 V 1
Note (*): configure the ITPs (using the Menu or the Software) to recognise that the 345829 Switchboard 1
PABX switchboard is present 346020 Power supply 1
390
TECHNICAL SHEETS
230 V A/V SCS/BUS power supply 346000
Description
2 wire system power supply unit, to be used in audio systems together with 2 wire
speaker modules, or with the universal speaker unit, item 346991, for the installation
of systems with up to 100 entrance panels (56 when item 346991 is used), as well as
in video or mixed audio/video systems, when using video adapter item 346830, or
the audio/video node item F441, or the multichannel matrix F441M. The device is
also suitable as a power supply for sound systems. Additionally, it can also be used 346000
as supplementary power supply (output 1 – 2) for local supply to advanced preset

handsets. It must be powered at 230 Vac. On the output it provides two power supply
outlets, which can be used in alternative to each other, but not both at the same time
(27Vdc 1.2 A BUS clamps, and 1-2 27Vdc 1.2 A clamps). It is electronically protected
(without fuse) from short-circuit and overload.
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI.
The power supply unit is inside a 8 DIN modules rail enclosure, and its installation must BUS 2 1
be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured. 3
Dati tecnici
PRI (Power supply Vac input): 2 1
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 Vac
Rated current: 230 – 250 mA
Working voltage range: 207 – 253 Vac
Legenda
Working frequency range: 50 – 60 Hz
Input power at full load: 44.9 W (max) 1. Output connection clamps 1=GND – 2=+27Vdc
Dissipated power: 11.5 W (max) 2. SCS/BUS output connection clamps
Input power without load: 4.2 W (max)
3. 230 Vac input connection clamps
SEC (Vdc output):
Rated voltage (BUS): 27 Vdc +/- 0,1 Vdc
Rated voltage (1-2): 27 Vdc +/- 0.1 Vdc (1=** - 2=**)
Rated power: 32.4 W
Standards, Certifications, Marks Comply with the following installation requirements:
Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4 (punto 411.1.2.5) - The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.
- It must be kept away from water drips and sprays.
Marks obtained : - Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least
3 mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used
both to disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.
Dimensional data
8 DIN modules
BT00655-a -EN
391
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Additional power supply

230 V 346020
Description
2 DIN module devices which allows to: 1
- locally supply the single video door entry handsets and entrance panels.
- supply some accessories of the Communication and MY HOME catalogues (ex: Web
server, A/V server, scenario programmers, 2 WIRE/IP interface, switch 10/100, ADSL
modem router, Hub-TV and SCS modulator).
It is a double insulation safety device in accordance with CEI.
The power supply is enclosed by a 2 DIN module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation PR I
must be in accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured.
Technical data 346020

PRI: 220 - 240V~
PRI (AC power supply input) 175-165mA
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 Vac 50/60Hz
Rated current: 180 – 190 mA 1-2: 27Vdc

600mA
2
Working frequency range: 47 – 63 Hz
Input power at full load: 20 W max
Dissipated power: 3.8 W (max.) 1- 2
Performance at full load: 80% typ.
Power in stand by: <1W
Integrated fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (CANNOT BE REPLACED)
1 - 2 (DC output):
Rated voltage: 27 V +/- 100 mV 3
Rated power: 16.2 W
Standards, Certifications, Marks Legend

Standards: CEI EN60065 1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps
2 - Operating status notification LEDs:
(GREEN ON) – normal operation of the power supply
Dimensional data
(RED ON) – output current overload
2 DIN modules 3 - Output 1 – 2 connection clamps
Comply with the following installation requirements:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures

- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3
mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used to
BT00659-a-EN
disconnect the power supply from the mains, and to protect it.
392
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Mini power supply 230 V 346030
Description
1
2 DIN module device for:
- basic video door entry systems (e.g. apartment intercom)
- mini SOUND SYSTEMS (absorption up to 600 mA).
It is a double insulation safety device.
The power supply is inside a module plastic rail enclosure, and its installation must be in
accordance with the regulations of the country of use.
The device must not be configured. PRI
Technical data
PRI (AC power supply input):
Rated voltage: 220 – 240 Vac
Rated current: 200 - 190 mA
Working frequency range: 47 – 63 Hz 2
Input power at full load: 21.5 W max
Dissipated power: 5.3 W (max.)
Performance at full load: 80% typ.
SCS A-V SCS
Power in stand by: <1W
Integrated fuse (PRI side): F1 T2A 250V (Cannot be replaced)
SCS A-V; SCS:

Rated voltage: 27 V +/- 100 mV 4 3
Rated current: 0 – 0.6 A WARNING : THE (SCS - AV) AND (SCS) OUTPUTS CAN BE USED AT THE
Rated power: 16.2 W SAME TIME IN RESPECT TO THE MAXIMUM CURRENT ABSORPTION OF
600 mA
Legend
Standards: CEI EN60065 - CEI 64-8-4
1 - 230 Vac input connection clamps 50-60 Hz
2 - Operating status notification LEDs:
Dimensional data (GREEN ON) - normal operation of the power supply
2 DIN modules (RED ON) - output current overload
3 - SCS output connection clamps (BUS 27V)
4 - SCS AV output connection clamps (27 V)
Comply with the following installation requirements:
- The power supply must always be installed in appropriate enclosures.

- Do not to obstruct the air vents.
BT00658-a -EN
- A double-pole thermal magnetic circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3

mm must be used, positioned near the power supply. The circuit breaker is used both to
disconnect the power supply from the electric network, and to protect it.
393
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Actuator 346200
Description
Relay actuator for digital systems. It allows to switch on lights, to open gate door locks,
to control other devices and to repeat call on bell (badenia type). MOD M N/P T
4
Technical data
Contact output: 230 Vac - 6 A resistive - 2 A inductive (cosϕ = 0.5)
SELV device 1 1
3 2
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
Legend
1 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire BUS and power supply 1 - 2
2 - Clamps for the connection of the load to be controlled
3 - Clamps for the connection of an additional pushbutton
BT00664-a-EN
394
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346200
Configuration
MOD M N/P T
The device must be physically configured in terms of: 4
MOD = Operating mode

The configurator in MOD establishes the operating mode of the actuator (see following
5
tables)
M = number of the riser

In systems with several risers, it identifies on which riser the actuation must be
performed
N/P = Handset/Entrance panel number

It defines the association with the Handset or the EP address from which the actuation
must be performed.
T = relay closure time delay

The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay (see corresponding
table).
MOD = 0 - Staircase light from any handset and EP

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset and the light MOD M N/P T
key on the entrance panel

- Customize the time through the configurator T. T = 0 closes the contact for 30”
MOD = 1 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from

handset unit Example
- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of the handset belonging to MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
a group
- Customize the time through the configurator T. 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
- Insert in M the ten and the units of the first handset of the group
Tens Unit Door lock control from the light key of the
- Insert in N/P the ten and the units of the last handset of the group handsets configured from 1 to 12
Unit Tens
NOTE: a group is a sequence set of handsets. T = 1 closes the contact for 1”
MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all riser handsets

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the staircase light key of all riser handsets Example
- Customize the time through the configurator T. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Connect the M configurator of the system expansion interface, item 346851
(configured with MOD = 5) to M 2 2 1 9
Tens Staircase light control from all handsets of
Unit the riser 19
T = 0 closes the contact for 30”
BT00664-a-EN
MOD = 2 - Staircase lights from all entrance panel (if fitted with the
corresponding key) MOD M N/P T
- With (MOD = 2) the actuator activates when the light pushbutton of any (preset)
entrance Panel is pressed 2 4
Not inserting the configurator
- Customize the time through the configurator T. corresponds to insert 0
395
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346200
MOD = 3 - Sundry services from single handset

- The actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one handset. Example
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay
3 1 3 1 5 1
Unit Door lock control from the light key of the
Tens handset configured with 15
T=1 closes the contact for 1 s
MOD = 4 - Staircase light from EP

- With (MOD = 4) the actuator is enabled by pressing the light pushbutton of only one Example
entrance panel. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Customize the time through the configurator T.
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the handset that controls the relay 4 5 4 3 5
Unit Door lock control from the light key of the
Tens handset configured with P=3
T=5 closes the contact for 1 min
MOD = 5 - Door lock control from all handsets

- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. The actuator is enabled by pressing Example
the door lock pushbutton of all handsets. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Put in N/P the ten and the units of the associated entrance panel that controls the door 5 1 5 2 1
lock.
Door lock control of the entrance panel
Unit
configured with P=2 from the door lock
Tens pushbutton of all the associated handsets
MOD = 5 - Door lock control from PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys

- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. Example
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system.
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of 5 1 5 21
the P configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the door lock.
Door lock control by pressing the key
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the 4 2 of the 4 keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT
additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating technical sheets. P+1
configured with P = 0)
P+2
P+3
P+4
MOD = 7 - Light on for illumination of the viewing field

BT00664-a -EN
At the same time as sending a call from the entrance panel or activating a camera (N/P Example
configuration), the actuator also closes the contact, keeping it closed until: MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- if the call is answered, the contact opens when the communication is terminated or
the conversation timeout activates (<1 min.) 7 7 2
- if the call is not answered, the contact opens after 30 seconds (at the end of the call
forwarding timeout). Closing of contact upon call from the
The number of the EP or camera to EP configured with P=2.
associate to the actuator The contact opens after the call is
terminated or after 30 seconds
(if there is no answer)
396
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346200
MOD = 9 - Sundry services (door lock/open the gate/staircase light) from

PIVOT/SWING/POLYX handsets additional keys Example
- Direct door lock opening with handset in pause. MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
- Insert in N/P the address that the actuator must take inside the system. 9 2 9 3 2
The N/P value inserted in the actuator must be between P + 1 and P + 4 of the P
Device control by pressing the key 2 of the 4
configurator P inserted in the handset which controls the service. keys set for PIVOT (PIVOT congured with P = 2)
P+1
For further information on the configurations of the SWING/POLYX handsets and the T=2 closes the contact for 3 s
P+2
4 additional keys set for PIVOT make reference to the relating sections configurations. P+3
P+4
MOD = SLA - Call repetition on Badenia bell

- Repeat the calls coming from the entrance panel on Badenia bell. Example
- Customize the time through the configurator T (Accepted configurators are: 1, 2, 3, 4 MOD M N/P T MOD M N/P T
and 8). S S
- Insert in N/P the tens and units of the handset associated to the function. L
A
3 L
A
1 6 3
* The SLA configurator must be bought separately from the configurator kit Unit The Badenia bell rings for 6 seconds each
(item 3501K). Item code for SLA configurator: item 3501/SLA. time there is a call addressed to the handsets
Tens configured with N=16
T =3 the Badenia bell rings for 6 s and stops
when the call is answered
T configuration (timing)
The T values mentioned in the examples are only an indication of the times commonly T configurator Time
used for the different applications.
By inserting in the T socket a configurator (as mentioned in the table) the relay door none 3 min.
locking time can be customized. 1 1 sec.
2 3 sec.
3 6 sec.
4 10 sec.
5 1 min.
6 6 min.
7 10 min.
8 pushbutton
9 cyclic (ON/OFF)
BT00664-a-EN
397
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346200
Wiring diagram
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
BUS IN BUS OUT

NC C NO
230V~
6A
A A 2A
= 0,5
SELV
2-wire standard wiring diagram
Bus PI
2
Bus TK 2
346000 346200
BUS BUS
TK PI
PS
BUS 2 1
5 6 7 8 NC C NO
346830 1 2 3 4
230V a.c.
~
C NO
2
BT00664-a -EN
398
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Door lock actuator 346230
Description
2-wire system door lock actuator.
It can be used to actuate an electrical door lock without the need for a local transformer, 1
activated by a dedicated handset key.
In systems with handsets with specific LED, it enables to perform the “LOCK STATUS” 1 2 PL S+ S-
function when a CISA ELETTRIKA door lock is used.

346230
Related items
346240 CISA ELETTRIKA door lock accessory
Technical data J J

P T M M M
P P
2
Contact load (PL/S+): 6 A – 24 Vac max (cosϕ=1)

2 DIN modules 1 - Clamps for the connection of door lock and additional pushbutton
3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamps
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of:
P - Associated entrance panel number

A configurator like the one connected to P of the entrance panel must be connected to J J
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator P T M M M
must be connected to P. P P
T - Door lock relay timing

The configurator connected to T sets the relay closing time delay as shown in the
The accessory item 346240
following table:
18V 4A
must be fitted inside the
configurator number door lock.
0= No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
configurator
as
4 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 8 sec. 10 sec.
pushbutt. 1 2 PL S+ S-
ELETTRIKA
M - Operating mode
M=0 - Door lock relay standard operation
M=1 - Door lock relay operation + “door lock status control” – only with handsets fitted
J J
BT00665-a -EN
with door lock status LED and specific CISA ELETTRIKA door lock with Accessory item P T 1 M M
P P
346240.
J J
J M
J
P T M1 M
1 2
P P
M=4 - With interface 349410 only it enables: M=1

- with analogue system and audio Tersystem, the direct control of the electrical door lock
- with videoporter 2000, the call to the switchboard
JMP - Jumpers to be removed when an auxiliary transformer is used (4A max.)
399
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346230
Wiring diagram - 2-wire standard Wiring diagram - with auxiliary transformer
BUS-SCS BUS-SCS
*A 18 V - 4 A impulsivi
250 mA di mantenimento *A
*A = pulsante apertura
serratura
1 2 PL S+ S- 1 2 PL S+ S-
346230 346230
J J J J
P T M M M P T M M M
P P P P
346000 346000 V~
Rimuovere i jumpers
J J
*A= pulsante apertura M M
serratura P P
BT00665-a-EN
400
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Door lock relay 346250
Description
Relay module for gate opening to be used only with audio/video SFERA New, SFERA
ROBUR, SFERA Classic item 342560, LINEA 2000, LINEA 2000 METAL and MINISFERA
entrance panels. S- S+ C NC NO
It allows to open door locks (NOT managed by BUS) by means of the above mentioned
entrance panels (NOT fitted with relay). The device must not be configured.
Related items
341000 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur BASIC speaker phone module) 1 2
341100 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur speaker phone module)
341200 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur audio video module)
341300 (SFERA New - SFERA Robur wide angle audio video module)
342560 (SFERA Classic audio/video speaker module) Legend
342702 (MINISFERA audio speaker module) 1 - Clamps for connection to the entrance panel
342708 (MINISFERA video speaker module) 2 - Clamps- contacts for connection to the electrical door lock
342911/21 (LINEA 2000 audio EP)
342951/61 (LINEA 2000 video EP)
342971/72 (LINEA 2000 METAL audio EP)
342981/82 (LINEA 2000 METAL b/w video EP)
342991/92 (LINEA 2000 METAL colour video EP)
343001/02 (LINEA 2000 METAL flush mounted EP)
Connection example
BUS
PL
S+ 346250
S-
A
S- S+ C NC NO
NO 24 Vac/24 Vdc
NC 24 Vac
C 24 Vac
D - EP - relay distance
BT00669-a-EN
Max. distance (D) depending on the cable used
TYPE OF CABLE mm² BTicino BTicino mm²

CABLE SECTION 0.28 Item 336904 Item L4669 1
D 30 m 50 m 30 m 100 m
A = door lock release pushbutton
401
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Timed door lock

actuator 346260
Description
Timed door lock actuator for 2 WIRE system.
1 2
It can be used for switching the lights on, opening gates, or manage electromagnetic
door locks, timed door opening, and door status (with NC contact).
The DOOR STATUS function can only be used with door entry systems and video door
- TMP PL RC C NC NO/S+ S-
entry systems fitted with signalling LEDs, and when a magnetic door status contact is
present. ART. 346260
It may also be used in systems integrated with an appropriately configured ACCESS T= -5 +45°C
IP 30
CONTROL system.
7
Technical data 6
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 5 SCS J J
M M 3
P P
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C - TMP PL RC
Dimensional data 4
4 DIN modules WARNING: if the TMP and RC contacts are not used,
short circuit TMP and RC with (-)
Legend
1 - Door status connection clamps:
(-) Common
(TMP) Anti tamper line contact (normally closed on -)
(PL) Door opening pushbutton contacts (normally open on -)
(RC) Door status magnetic contact (normally closed on -)
2 - Electromagnetic door lock connection clamps:

(C) Common
(NC) Normally closed contact
(NO/S+) Normally open contact
(S-) Contact for door lock power supply from BUS (to be used with NO/S+)
4 - Notification orange LED: on when the relay is active
(flashing orange + red LEDs for open door notification)
6 - Notification red LED: flashing in case of system tampering
7 - Door opening local pushbutton
BT00666-a-EN
402
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346260
Configuration
P M R T J1 J2
P - Associated entrance panel number J J
A configurator like the one inserted in P of the entrance panel must be connected to A B C M M
P P
this socket. When the actuator is associated to the main entrance panel, no configurator
must be connected to P.
A = DO NOT USE (access control only)
B - C = P CONFIGURATOR SOCKETS
M = Operating mode
Assigns the operating mode to the internal relay of the actuator, based on the following
table:
M= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Management of Signal
YES YES repetition YES YES NO NO
access control
Management of 2 WIRE NO NO NO YES YES YES YES
video door entry system
Normally Normally closed. Signal Normally Normally closed. Normally Normally

Actuator relay status open Electromagnetic repetition open Electromagnetic open closed
door lock door lock
R = Enabling/disabling of the anticipated relay switching function(1)
Configurator 0 1
Advance of closing Enabled (2 sec.) Disabled
T = Door lock relay timing
Configurator
Configurator 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time
Time sec.
sec. 44 11 10
10 20
20 40
40 60
60 90
90 180
180
J1 - J2 = Jumpers for the selection of the door lock power supply

CONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY THE BUS
DISCONNECTED = DOOR LOCK POWERED BY AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
Note:
(1) If enabled, 2 seconds after the opening of the entrance, anticipated relay switching (3) In this mode, the software forces the relay to perform the opposite operation
occurs, irrespective of the T time set (this function can be used with door status (positive safety). The NO contact stays in the closed status, and is opened in order to
magnetic contact and for T = s). open the door (passage). In case of power cut from the main power line (230 Vac),
the relay opens, and the door lock opens, even if the power supply line of the door
BT00666-a -EN
(2) The device supplies the NC and NO contacts of the internal relay. It is therefore locks is fitted with a back-up battery.
possible, also with M = 0, to use the internal relay as normally closed.
It must be noted that in case of power cut from the power line (230 Vac), the relay (4) Operation as signal repeater. In case of system intrusion or opening of a door,
stays normally closed and, if the power supply of the electric door lock is fitted with the relay output can also activate an external notification device (sound or visual
a back-up battery, the door lock stays closed. notification), based on the time value set in T.
(5) Integration mode between video door entry system and access control (see
instructions of item 348000).
403
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346260
Connection example
S2
A 18 V 4 A
EP: P=1
P N T S
1
BUS - TMP PL RC C NC NO/S+ S-
H
TK BUS
ART. 346260
T= -5 +45°C
IP 30
*
A = Door lock pushbutton in the entrance-hall
*S+ S- = 18V 4A impulsive 250mA
BUS BUS
holding current
346000 TK PI
J J
BUS PL S+ S- SCS M M P M R T J1 J2
P P
J J
BUS 2 1
PS
15 M M
P P
A
S1 230 Vac 346830
BT00666-a -EN
404
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Video adapter 346830
Description
2 WIRES video adapter that must be used wih the power supply item 346000 in the 1 2
installation of video systems (or audio/video combined), video door entry systems and
sound systems.
Allows the connection to its 3 BUS clamps. Hence it is possible to realize installations
with 2 video entrance panels and 1 riser and installations with 1 video entrance panel
and 2 risers. BUS BUS
TK PI
The device must be installed next to the system power supply item 346000.
Related items
PS
346000 (2 WIRE system power supply)
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc 3
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C

2 DIN modules. 1 - BUS TK output towards the EP (fixed clamp entrance panels)
2 - BUS output towards the handsets (fixed clamp handsets)
3 - BUS PS input from the power supply (removable clamp)
BT00661-a-EN
405
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Floor call
interface 346833
Description
Floor call interface which allows, by means of a traditional pushbutton, to make the
following functions:
- general floor call 1
- addressed floor call
- staircase light switching on
- Door lock opening (with specific actuator)
- associate the video image to the call to the floor
WARNING: the maximum connection distance between the interface and the
connected pushbuttons must not exceed 3 metres.
Technical data

1 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
BASIC plastic enclosure 2 - Clamps for the connection to the 2-wire BUS
3 - Clamps for the connection of the pushbuttons / contacts (connect a pushbutton
40 mm 18 mm
between PL1 and C and one between PL2 and C)
40 mm
Configuration
N = address of the handset to call

(To be used only with MOD = 0)
P = address of the entrance panel associated to the door lock to open

(To be used only with MOD = 2 and MOD = 3)
MOD = Operating mode

the configurator connected to MOD assigns the operating modes to the pushbuttons
BT00673-a-EN
connected between (PL1 and C) and (PL2 and C), as shown in the table:
MOD N P PL1 PL2

0 Handset address (00-99) - Addressed floor call Staircase lights from Handset with 00
1 - - General floor call Staircase lights from Handset with 00
2 - Door lock address (00-95) Door lock opening Staircase lights from Handset with 00
3 - Door lock address (00-95) Door lock opening Door lock opening (P+1)
4(*) Handset address (00-99) Camera address (00-95) - -
(*): see installation notes on next page.
406
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346833
Note installative
The MOD = 4 configuration mode enables associating the video image of a camera to the
call to the floor generated by the off-door pushbutton.
To use this function correctly, the following must be taken into account:
- The involved handsets, the 346833 interface, and the camera must be physically
connected on the same SCS BUS.
- In multi-family systems connect the involved devices downstream the apartment
interface item 346850 - (cameras and handsets are local resources of the individual
user).
- The active function keeps the SCS BUS busy for approximately 30”, during which no
other call can be forwarded. If the handset connects, the BUS will be busy until the
TIME OUT period elapses, or the handset itself is disconnected.
- Only the following 2-wire BTicino cameras that can be used for this function: 391670
– 391657 – 391658 – 391659 – 391667 – 391668 - 391669 – 391661 – 391662 –
391663.
BT00673-a-EN
407
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Floor shunt 346841
Description
The floor distribution block can be used for video door entry systems with a star 1
distribution of the wiring.
The distribution block is in a plastic enclosure with much reduced dimensions for easier
positioning (above all during the refurbishments) even with the installation inside flush ART. 346841
mounted boxes.
It is also possible to install systems with combined wiring risers, where a part can be of
IN/OUT type and the other part is used for the floor distribution block.
The device automatically adapts the video signal.
Max. 3 devices (handsets, bells or additional bells) can be connected on the same output. 2

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1 - 4 outputs (P1, P2, P3, P4) - handset BUS
Stand by absorption: 15 mA 2 - Input/output of riser (IN-OUT) on the same pair of clamps
Dimensional data
BASIC plastic enclosure

40 mm 18 mm
ART. 346841
40 mm
BT00672-a -EN
408
Video door entry system
Apartment interface 346850

Interface to be used for the installation (inside the apartment/home) of a dedicated
2 WIRE system separated from the apartment complex riser. The system downstream 1
the interface (inside the apartment/home) can include dedicated entrance panels
and cameras, and if required can also be integrated with the MyHOME automation
applications. Intercom calls inside or outside the apartment are also possible.
346850
INT
2
Technical data
3
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc EXT
ON
Dissipated power: 2,25 W
Stand by absorption: from the INT connection 15 mA 7 ON OFF
from the EXT connection 5 mA

Operating maximum absorption: from the INT connection 50 mA
from the EXT connection 30 mA
6 5

4 DIN modules 1. Clamp for the connection of the apartment 2 WIRE system
2. Interface status notification LED:
- Flashing green LED = STAND BY
- Fixed green LED = EXT-INT connection active
3. Video signal status notification LED:
- Green LED = OK
- Green/red LED = operation close to the limit
- Red LED = no video signal or limits exceeded
4. Not used
5. Configurator socket: N = interface address, M = 3 (connected at the factory)
6. Clamp for the connection to the 2 WIRE riser
BT00662-b-EN 21/05/2013
409
Apartment interface 346850
Configuration
The device must be physically configured in terms of : Installation example
N = device ID number
The configurator assigns to the interface a unique handset number inside the system.
M = Operating mode
(M=3) - Standard factory configuration
(M=4) - If one or more internal units with local power supply are installed inside the
apartment/home, a configurator 4 must be connected to M.
N = 13 IN T 346850
ON
EXT
ON OF F
N M 2 N = 12
3
system identification N M operating mode
number on the
handsets side 3
N M N = 12
NO
No handset within the system
123 N=1 can be configured with N = 12
N M
123 2 WIRE riser
the interface must

be considered as
handset number 12
BT00662-b-EN 21/05/2013
410
TECHNICAL SHEETS
System expansion
interface 346851
Description
Interface in DIN modular enclosure, used to increase the performance of the 2 WIRE
system in one-family or apartment installations. It enables creating 2 WIRE risers with 1
entrance panels at the bottom of the stairs, independent audio and video, as well as
providing expansion for: regeneration of the video signal and extension of distances for
a further 200 meters (cable item 336904 required), increase of the number of devices
that can be connected to the BUS, and use of up to a maximum of 3 interface modules
connected in cascade. 346851
2
3
ON
Technical data 4
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 7 ON OFF
Dissipated power: 2.25 W (max) *

Absorption:
IN clamp (configuration Mod = 0)
IN clamp (configuration Mod = 2 - mod = 7)
Legend
IN clamp (configuration Mod = 5 - mod = 6) 1. OUT clamps for the connection of the output SCS BUS
Stand by absorption: 5 mA 2. Interface status notification LED:
Max. operating absorption: 30 mA - green flashing = STAND BY
OUT clamp (configuration Mod = 0) - green steady = IN - OUT connection active
Stand by absorption: 50 mA 3. Video signal level notification LED:
Max. operating absorption: 50 mA - green steady = operation OK
OUT clamp (configuration Mod = 2 - mod = 7) - green / red = operation nearing the limit
Stand by absorption: 30 mA - red steady = no video signal or limit exceeded
Max. operating absorption: 50 mA 4. Presetting - Not used
OUT clamp (configuration Mod = 5 - mod = 6) 5. Configurator socket - the socket marked with the asterisk * is NOT USED
Stand by absorption: 15 mA 6. SCS/BUS IN connection clamps
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
BT00663-a -EN
411
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346851
Configuration
The device must be configured with physical configurator connection to the
appropriate sockets as follows:
M = progressive number within the system

The configurator connected to the M sockets (from 1 to 99) assigns an identification
number within the system to the interface. Addresses in M with (MOD = 0 - MOD
= 2 - MOD = 7) and (MOD = 5 - MOD = 6) ARE NOT IN CONFLICT. M MOD *
MOD = operating mode

* Not used
The configurator connected to the MOD socket of the interface defines its operating
mode as follows:
MOD = 5 - Independent risers MODE
MOD = 0 (no configurator connected) - Galvanic separation MODE
MOD = 6 - Extended riser MODE
MOD = 2 - ENTRANCE PANEL line EXPANSION MODE
MOD = 7 - Extended riser expansion MODE
MOD = 2 (entrance panel line expansion)
MOD = 0 (galvanic separation) This mode is used in systems with interface connection between the entrance panel
This configuration mode is used to double the line length or to increase the system and the F441 audio/video node, to extend the entrance panel line – see the following
performance - see the following example: example:
BUS PI BUS
HANDSET To the handsets/interfaces
346851 346000
=– F441 346000
M
=2
OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4
346851
BUS BUS PRI
N
MOD = –
NF
TK PI 346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
CEBEC
2-1 }
BUS 27V 1,2A
IP30 PRI
N NF
OUT 346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
CEBEC
BUS
}
2 - 1 27V 1,2A IP30
ON
ON
IN
PS
ON OFF
BUS 2 1
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 SCS BUS 2 1
230 Vac
346830 230 Vac
200 m
346851 line B
=– 346851
M
=1 346851
346851
MOD = – 346000
ON OFF
ON
=–
ON OFF
ON
M
ON OFF
PRI
346000
N NF
ON OFF =1 346000
MOD = 2
CEBEC
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
BUS
}
2 - 1 27V 1,2A IP30
EP
BUS
BUS
PE
PRI
N NF
BUS 2 1 EP
BUS
346000
PRI 230 V~ 50 - 60 Hz 260 mA
BUS
}
2 - 1 27V 1,2A
CEBEC
IP30
BUS
PE
230 Vac
346830 BUS 2 1
346830
BT00663-a -EN
200 m
BUS BUS BUS BUS 230 Vac
TK PI line A TK PI
WARNING
PS PS
WARNING

After the system expansion module item
346851, 200 metres of line B are available
After the system expansion module item 346851 200
(interface 346851 - Furthest Handset). metres of line B are available (interface 346851 - Furthest
A maximum of 3 interfaces item 346850 and Handset). A maximum of 3 interfaces item 346850 and
item 346851 can be installed in cascade. Only M - interface progressive item 346851 can be installed in cascade. Only 2 of them
2 of them will regenerate the signal. number (from 1 to 99) will regenerate the signal.
412
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346851
MOD = 5 (independent risers)

This mode is used to create systems with 2 WIRE risers, with independent audio and
video (39 risers maximum) - see the following example:
The handsets connected to the single riser will be identified at the main entrance panel by the
M configurator of 346851 x 100 + the N configurator of the single handset.
M MOD Riser 7
5
Riser No. Independent riser 2 Handset 18
interface N = 18
718 2
Riser Riser Riser
1 2 3
2 2 2 346851
M=7
MOD = 5
346851
M=1 M=2 M = 39 ON
Mod = 5 Mod = 5 Mod = 5

346851 346851 346851
ON OFF
2 2
ON ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
2 2 2 2 Main entrance
panel 2 wire backbone
2 wire backbone
As far as the EP is concerned, the handset is number 718: this is the M of 346851 (7) x 100 + N
of the handset connected to the riser (18).
(7 x 100) + 18 = 718
NOTE:
A maximum of 3 interfaces item 346850 and 346851 can be installed in cascade. Only 2
of them will regenerate the signal.
BT00663-a-EN
413
TECHNICAL SHEETS
346851
MOD = 6 (extended riser)

MOD = 7 (extended riser expansion)
These configuration modes offer the possibility of riser line expansion up to the logic When interface item 346850 is not used, this 100 handsets line limit will be further
limit of 300 riser handsets (3 lines of 100 handsets each). reduced (refer to the system technical guide for more information).
The limit of 100 handsets for each line is subjected to the use of apartment interface Interface item 346850 CANNOT be installed on the last line. It is possible to cross up to
item 346850. 3 interfaces item 346850 and 346851 connected in cascade.
BUS PI BUS PI
Handsets Handsets Handsets Handsets Handsets

(301 – 399) (101 – 399) (601 – 699) (401 – 699) (701 – 999)
346851 346851
=– =–
M M
=3 346851
=6 346851
MOD = 7 MOD = 7
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF
346850 346850 Note 1: maximum 3 interfaces

item 346850 and 346851 can be
INT 346850 INT 346850 installed in cascade. Two of them
will regenerate the signal.
ON ON
EXT EXT
Handsets Handsets
ON OF F ON OF F
2 2
(201 – 299) (501 – 599)
2 2 Note 2: for this type of systems we
recommend that you contact your
346851 346851 local technical support service
=– =– representative.
M M
=2 346851 =5 346851
MOD = 7 MOD = 7
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF
346850 346850
INT 346850 INT 346850
ON ON
EXT EXT
Maximum 100 interfaces item 346850
Handsets 2 Handsets 2
ON OF F ON OF F
(101 – 199) (401 – 499)

2 2
346851 346851 346851

=– =– =–
M M M
=1 346851 =4 346851 =7 346851
MOD = 6 MOD = 6 MOD = 6

BT00663-a -EN
ON
ON ON
2 2
EP BUS
(Main Entrance Panel)
414
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Coaxial - 2 WIRE
interface 347400
Description
Interface used for connecting the cameras with 12 Vdc power supply (max. absorption 1
150 mA) and coaxial video output (1 Vpp @ 75 ohm) to the 2-wire video BUS.
The interface provides direct power supply to the camera.
the device can be used as an interface for the separate camera; to associate a camera to
an audio entrance panel simply configure both the camera and the entrance panel using
the same configurator in P. 2
Technical data
Max. operating absorption: 210 mA - see note (*)
Operating temperature: (-20) – (+70)°C
Distance
347400 - COAX cameras
(*) note: max. 150 mA when the interface supplies power to the 12 V camera 4 3 max. 3 m
Dimensional data
Legend
BASIC plastic enclosure
2 - Configurator socket (to access remove the upper plastic protection cover)
40 mm 18 mm 3 - Clamps for the connection of the camera power supply (12 Vdc - 150 mA max.)
4 - Clamps for the connection of the camera video signal output
40 mm
BT00670-a-EN
415
TECHNICAL SHEETS
347400
Configuration
P N Z M A PL
P = camera address
The configurator in seat P of the interface assigns to it a recognition number inside
the system. The interface is considered as a video entrance panel, therefore it must be
configured with a progressive number in relation to (P) of the entrance panel.
N = address of the handset called in case of alarm

In those systems integrated with Bticino burglar alarm systems, the configurator
connected to N of the interface, determines which handset must be called in case of
alarm occurred in the Z zone configured in the interface. Then, the handset will display
the images of the interface associated to the Z zone.
Z = zone of the burglar-alarm system associated to the camera
M = Operating mode
M = 0 - standard operation
M = SLA - Configuration for association to several audio EP PI M= SLA
A/PL = Address of the SCS light actuator connected to the camera PI - PN = Range of audio EP associated
S
Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera to the camera (max 5).
P N Z L A PL
In systems integrated with BTicino automation applications, the configurator connected A
to A/PL of the interface associates the switching on of the camera with the activation of
a SCS actuator configured with the same A/PL. PN
(Example: switching on of lights to illuminate the field of view, only with camera active).
BT00670-a-EN
416
TECHNICAL SHEETS
347400
Configuration
Interface Interface
EP 1 EP 2 CAM. 1 CAM. 2
P N T S P N T S P N Z M A PL P N Z M A PL
1 2 3
System with 2 video EP and 2 cameras.
Interface Interface
CAM. 1 CAM. 2
P N T S P N Z M A PL P N Z M A PL
1 1 2
System with audio EP and 2 camera (CAM. 1 associated to the EP)
P N Z M A PL
S P N Z M A PL
1 2 L S
A PI PN L
A
Pi: address of the first audio EP

Pn: address of the last audio EP
BT00670-a -EN
BUS BUS
TK PI
346000
346000
PS
BUS 2 1
P=0 P=1 P=2 346830
Coupling the switching on of the camera with several audio EP (max. 5)
417
TECHNICAL SHEETS
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY 349311 - 349312 - 349313
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation. With 2.5” colour LCD
display with PC customisable OSD navigation icon menu for the management of the
following MY HOME applications: video door entry system, temperature control, sound
system, automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion. LED signalling for: call exclusion,
door status, and connection to the entrance panel. 1
Suitable for flush mounted installation using item 506 boxes. To be completed with front
cover plate (all those suitable for item 506E of the AXOLUTE series). 10
Programming and configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the
product. 9
2
3
Related items 8 4
item 506E 3+3 modules flush mounted box
item PB526 3+3 modules plasterboard box
item HA/HB4826... 3+3 modules front cover plate (see AXOLUTE finishes) Front view 7 6 5
item 349319 VIDEO DISPLAY table-top base

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 1 - 2.5” colour LCD display
Stand by absorption: 10 mA 2 - Loudspeaker
Max. operating absorption: 320 mA 3 - LED for call exclusion notification
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C 4 - Connection key; enable/disable the connection
5 - Connection status LED
Dimensional data 6 - Entrance panel and cycling activation key
7 - Door lock status LED
8 - Tasto Door lock opening
105,5 mm 9,5 mm 9 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
10 - Microphone
2,5”
118 mm
1
2
30,2 mm
AXOLUTE
127 mm
5 1 2 BUS 3
OFF
ON
4
BT00636-a -EN
141,5 mm
Rear view
Legend
1 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
Maximum space requirement with front cover plate 2 - Configurator socket
3 - 2 WIRE SCS/BUS connection clamps
4 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
5 - Clamp for connection of the additional power supply
418
TECHNICAL SHEETS
349311 - 349312 - 349313
Configuration
AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY can be configured in 2 different modes: The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software (CD supplied),
provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with the possibility to:
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators) - create customized menus;
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied with the - customize text messages;
product. - access all home automation functions.
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry To transfer the configuration performed using the TiAxoluteDisplay software, or to
functions. This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the update the firmware, connect AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY to the PC using an USB-miniUSB
appropriate sockets on the back of the device itself. cable.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of
the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
WARNING: The configuration of the device is performed using configurators and

cannot be changed from the menu.
1
BUS
To ensure that the communication is successful, AXOLUTE VIDEO DISPLAY must be

powered and not physically configured.
3
P M
N
N - numero del Handset


itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video handset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
BT00636-a -EN
M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
functions (see manual supplied with the product).
419
TECHNICAL SHEETS
AXOLUTE
Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION 349320 - 349321
Description
2-wire speaker phone video handset for wall mounted installation. With 8” colour LCD
display, backlit capacitive keypad with soft touch controls and PC customisable OSD
navigation icon menu for the management of the following MY HOME applications:
video door entry system, temperature control, sound system and multimedia,
automation (scenarios) and anti-intrusion. 1
In systems integrated with the sound system, the VIDEO STATION behaves as an
amplifier, enabling playback of all audio/video sources connected to the system.
LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status, and connection to the entrance panel. 2
It can be integrated with MY HOME, also in combination with the Multimedia interface,
item 3465 - (in this case, allow for a local video door entry system power supply). 3
Suitable for wall mounted installation using the special bracket (supplied as standard).
Programming and configuration using the TiNighterandWhiceStation software supplied
with the product. 4
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Front view
Operating temperature: 5 - 40°C Legend
1 - 8“ LCD colour display
Dimensional data 2 - Microphone
3 - Navigation keys and confirmation inside the menu
4 - Led and video door entry function keys
230 mm 25 mm
Rear view
305 mm
7 1
6
5
3 3
3 3
4
BT00633-a -EN
Legend
2 - Mini-USB connector for PC connection
3 - Loudpspeakers; for the broadcasting of voice and stereo sound
4 - Screw used to fasten the Video Station to the metal base
5 - Additional power supply connection clamps
6 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire SCS BUS
7 - Line termination ON/OFF micro switch
420
TECHNICAL SHEETS
349320 - 349321
The advanced PC configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation

Configuration
software (CD supplied), provides the user with a higher degree of customisation, with
AXOLUTE Nighter & Whice VIDEO STATION can be configured in 2 different modes: the possibility to:
- create flexible menus
- Fast configuration (through the connection of physical configurators) - customize text messages
- Advanced configuration using the TiAxoluteNighterAndWhiceStation - access all home automation functions
software (CD supplied)
Fast configuration enables the user to access the menu of the video door entry functions. To transfer the configuration performed using the
This is the standard configuration using configurators to be connected to the appropriate TiAxoluteNighterAndwhiceStation software, or to update the firmware,
housing on the back of the device itself. connect Axolute Video Station to the PC using the USB-mini cable.
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed in the apartment, configuration of the
video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
WARNING
The device configuration made using configurators
CANNOT BE MODIFIED from the software.
BUS
To ensure that communication is successful, Axolute Video Station

must be powered and not configured physically.
N - numero del Handset


itself on when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock
with idle video hanset is activated, when the pushbutton ( ) is pressed.
BT00633-a -EN
M - Operating mode
The M configurator identifies the main menu of the device and therefore all the usable
functions (see manual supplied with the product).
421
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Axolute Etèris Video Display 349340

2 WIRE speaker phone video handset for flush mounted installation. With 2.5” colour
LCD display with PC customisable icons OSD navigation menu for the management of
the following MY HOME applications: Video door entry system, temperature control,
sound system, scenarios, burglar alarm. LED signalling for: call exclusion, door status,
connection with entrance panel. Flush mounted / plasterboard installation using the
appropriate boxes.
To be completed with dedicated front cover and front cover plate available in the Axolute 10 1
white, anthracite, and tech colour variants. Programming and configuration using the
TiAxoluteMemoryDisplay software supplied with the product.
9
2
3
Related items 8 4
528W Flush mounted box
PB528W Plasterboard box
349243 White front cover
349241 Axolute tech front cover 7 6 5
349242 Anthracite front cover
Back view
HW4826HD White front cover plate
HW4826HC Axolute tech front cover plate
HW4826HS Tech front cover plate
346020 (additional 2 DIN modules power supply) - optional, for local powering of
the video handset, when maximum installation distances are necessary. 11
12
Technical data
Stand-by absorption: 10 mA
Max. operating absorption: 320 mA 15 13
14
Dimensional data
Legend
1. 2.5 “ LCD colour display
128 mm 29 mm
2. Loudspeaker
3. Bell exclusion notification LED
4. Audio connection activation/deactivation key
6. Entrance panel/camera scrolling activation key
BT00637-a -EN

128 mm 8. Door lock activation key
9. Navigation and confirmation keys in the icon menu
10. Microphone
11. Mini USB connector for connection to the PC
31 mm 14. Line termination ON/OFF micro-switch
15. Additional power supply connection clamps (1-2)
422
TECHNICAL SHEETS
349340
Flush mounted box 528W Plasterboard box PB528W
128,5 mm 58 mm 116,5 mm 58 mm
TOP TOP TOP
128,5 mm 116,5 mm
TOP TOP TOP
Configuration
Axolute Etèris Video Display can be configured in two different modes: The PC advanced configuration using the software (CD supplied), provides the user with
the highest degree of customisation, with the possibility of:
- Quick configuration (with physical configurator connection)
- create customized menus;
- Advanced configuration (using the TiAxoluteDisplay software supplied)
- customize text messages;
The quick configuration enables the user to access the video door entry system function
menu. This is the standard configuration with configurators to be connected to their Connection to the PC
own housing on the back of the device itself. To transfer the configuration performed using the software, or to update the firmware,
If the apartment interface, item 346850, is installed inside the apartment, configuration connect Axolute Etèris Video Display to the PC using the USB-miniUSB cable.
of the video handset using the software supplied is recommended.
3
2 USB-miniUSB
N – handset number
The N configurator assigns to each video handset an identification number within the
system. The handsets must be configured in progressive order.Handsets with parallel
BT00637-a -EN
connection (max 3 are allowed inside apartments without item 346850) must be
configured using the same N configurator. In parallel with the main video handset,
additional handsets, video handsets and/or bells may be installed.
The P configurator identifies the entrance panel associated, or the first entrance panel
to activate before pressing the key and which door lock is activated when the key
is pressed while the video handset is idle.
M – operating mode To ensure that the communication is successful, the video handset must be
The M configurator identifies the main menu page and therefore the preset functions powered and not physically configured.
that may be used (see manual supplied with the product).
423
TECHNICAL SHEETS
SFERA NEW - SFERA ROBUR

Audio video module 351200

1 2 1
Audio/video module for the installation of 2 WIRE colour video systems.
With Colour camera with 1/3” sensor and white LEDs for the lighting of the shooting
field. Mist prevention heating resistance. Loudspeaker and Microphone volume
adjustments. It can manage up to 98 pushbutton calls using the additional double
row pushbutton modules. Horizontal and vertical camera position adjustment, 12 3
+/- 10° in both directions. It offers the possibility of opening an electrical door lock
directly connected to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding current 4
30 Ohm max) and of connecting a local door lock release pushbutton on clamps PL. 8
5
Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front LEDs for the notification of the
11 6
operating status: door lock release, communication active, call put through, and
system busy. Integrated optic sensor for the switching on of the night backlighting.
To be completed with surround plate. The device must be configured physically or 7 7
using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software.
Related items 10 9 8
Rear view
351201 Sfera New A/V front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
351202 Sfera New A/V front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
351203 Sfera New A/V front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
13
351211 Sfera New A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allmetal (IK 08)
351212 Sfera New A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allwhite (IK 08)
351213 Sfera New A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton - Allstreet (IK 08)
351221 Sfera New A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allmetal (IK 08) 18
351222 Sfera New A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allwhite (IK 08)
351223 Sfera New A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column - Allstreet (IK 08)
351205 Sfera Robur A/V front cover (IK 10)
351215 Sfera Robur A/V front cover, 1 pushbutton (IK 10)
351225 Sfera Robur A/V front cover, 2 pushbuttons on double column (IK 10)
17
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc 16 15 14
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs off): 15 mA
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs on): 20 mA Legend
Max. operating absorption: 140 mA 1. Loudspeaker
Colour sensor: 1/3”
2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the advanced
Lens: F2.5 f3.3 mm
configuration and device firmware update
Resolution: 330 TV lines (horizontal)
Illumination of the viewing field: white LED 3. Microphone volume adjustment
Brightness adjustment: Automatic 4. LED for door status notification. GREEN ON = door open
Interlace: 2:1 5. LED for communication status notification. GREEN ON = active communication
Mist prevention heating resistance 6. LED for system status notification. GREEN ON = put through call
Operating temperature: (-25) - (+70)°C RED ON= busy system
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled): IP 54 7. Call pushbuttons
Dimensional data 8. White LEDs for night lighting of the shooting field
9. Light sensor for automatic switching on of the night backlighting
BT00597-a -EN
115 mm 10. Colour camera

11. Microphone
12. Loudspeaker volume adjustment
13. Connector for the connection of the 352700 teleloop module
14. Plug-in clamps for the connection and control of the electrical door lock
91 mm (18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 ohm max)
15. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local door lock release pushbutton
16. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local power supply and the 2 WIRE SCS BUS
17. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
424
TECHNICAL SHEETS
351200
Configuration
The device must be configured. The configuration can be performed in two ways :
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection

Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign P N S T M J1 J2
Mode 1
Mod 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets

The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
N - call number
handsets or video handsets. M - enabling/disabling of call tones, door lock release tones night lighting
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of management always ON
the speaker module. The number of the first riser handset must be inserted in the local
entrance panels. The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the entrance panel call and door
lock release tones . It also gives the possibility of enabling night backlighting always ON
S - type of call signal (light sensor disabled) according to the following table:
The configuration of S determines the call tone of handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Configurator M=0 M=1 M=2 M=3
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, S associates the Entrance panel to Tone status All tones Door lock tone Call tone All tones
enabled disabled disabled disabled
the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose between 16 different
preset bells.
For the SPRINT handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to the following table: Configurator M=4 M=5 M=6 M=7
Configurator 0 1 2 3 Night All tones Door lock tone Call tone All tones
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone backlighting enabled disabled disabled disabled
status + + + +
1200 Hz 1200 Hz 1200 Hz 1200 Hz
backlighting backlighting backlighting backlighting
600 Hz 0 Hz 2400 Hz always ON always ON always ON always ON
In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.
J1 - activation of call pushbutton columns
T - door lock relay timing The J1 configurator gives the possibility of managing the Call pushbuttons of the speaker
module as follows:
Configurator number
J1 CONNECTED = Only the right pushbutton column is enabled
0=no configurator 1 2 3 4* 5 6 7
J1 DISCONNECTED = Both pushbutton columns are enabled (right + left)
as
BT00597-a -EN
4 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 6 sec 8 sec 10 sec

pushbutt. J2 - additional EP power supply
Configurator J2 gives the possibility of enabling the additional power supply (1-2) of the
*Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max, after which standby mode is activated. speaker module in the following mode :
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200
J2 CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
configured with MOD=5.
J2 DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled
425
TECHNICAL SHEETS
351200
CONFIGURATION - Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and of the speaker module.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
the TiSferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The disassemble the device.
software gives the possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware
Warning: In order to correctly send the configuration to the device, jumper (J1) must be removed. Also ensure that there are no configurators connected to the socket on the back of
the module.
Camera shooting field
(115 cm) - (96°)

(351300)
(60 cm) - (60°)
(351200)
50 cm
160 cm
(105 cm)
(92°)
BT00597-a -EN
(351200)
(240 cm)
(135°)
(351300)
426
TECHNICAL SHEETS

Wide angle audio and video module 351300

1 2 1
Wide angle audio/video module for the installation of 2 WIRE colour video systems.
With Colour camera with 1/3” sensor and white LEDs for the lighting of the shooting
field. Mist prevention heating resistance. Loudspeaker and Microphone volume
adjustments. It can manage up to 98 pushbutton calls using the additional double
row pushbutton modules. It offers the possibility of opening an electrical door lock 12 3
directly connected to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding current
30 Ohm max) and of connecting a local door lock release pushbutton on clamps PL. 4
Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front LEDs for the notification of the 8
5
operating status: door lock release, communication active, call put through, and
11 6
system busy. Integrated optic sensor for the switching on of the night backlighting.
To be completed with surround plate. The device must be configured physically or
using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software. 7 7
Related items
351301 Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover - Allmetal (IK 08) Rear view 10 9 8
351302 Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
351303 Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
351311 Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover with 1 pushbutton - Allmetal (IK 08) 13
351312 Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover with 1 pushbutton - Allwhite (IK 08)
351313 Sfera New wide angle A/V front cover with 1 pushbutton - Allstreet (IK 08)
351321 Sfera New wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row - Allmetal (IK 08) 18
351322 Sfera New wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row - Allwhite (IK 08)
351323 Sfera New wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row - Allstreet (IK 08)
351305 Sfera Robur wide angle A/V f/cover (IK 10)
351315 Sfera Robur wide angle A/V f/cover with 1 pushbutton (IK 10)
351325 Sfera Robur wide angle A/V f/cover with 2 pushbuttons on double row (IK 10)
17
Technical data
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs off): 15 mA 16 15 14
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs on): 20 mA
Max. operating absorption: 140 mA Legend
Lens: F2.5 f1.8 mm 1. Loudspeaker
Resolution: 330 TV lines (horizontal) 2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the advanced
Illumination of the viewing field: white LED configuration and device firmware update
Brightness adjustment: Automatic 3. Microphone volume adjustment
Interlace: 2:1 4. LED for door status notification. GREEN ON = door open
Mist prevention heating resistance 5. LED for communication status notification. GREEN ON = active communication
Operating temperature: (-25) - (+70)°C 6. LED for system status notification. GREEN ON = put through call
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled): IP 54 RED ON= busy system
7. Call pushbuttons
Dimensional data
8. White LEDs for night lighting of the shooting field
115 mm 9. Light sensor for automatic switching on of the night backlighting
BT00598-a -EN
10. Wide angle colour camera

11. Microphone
13. Connector for the connection of the 352700 teleloop module
14. Plug-in clamps for the connection and control of the electrical door lock
91 mm (18 V 4 A impulsive 250 mA holding current 30 ohm max)
15. Plug-in clamps for the connection of the local door lock release pushbutton
427
TECHNICAL SHEETS
351300
Configuration
The device must be configured. The configuration can be performed in two ways :

Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign P N S T M J1 J2
Mode 1
Mod 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets

The configurator in socket P of the speaker module assigns to this a recognition number
N - call number
handsets or video handsets. M - enabling/disabling of call tones and door lock release tones, and management
In common entrance panels made using pushbutton modules, 1 must be inserted in N of of night backlighting always ON
the speaker module. The number of the first riser handset must be inserted in the local
entrance panels. The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the entrance panel call and door
lock release tones. It also gives the possibility of enabling night backlighting always ON
S - type of call signal (light sensor disabled) according to the following table:
The configuration of S determines the call tone of handsets.
One can thus differentiate the calls from different entrance panels.
Configurator M=0 M=1 M=2 M=3
For the SWING, PIVOT, POLYX and AXOLUTE handsets, S associates the Entrance panel to Tone status All tones Door lock tone Call tone All tones
enabled disabled disabled disabled
the bell programmed in the same apartment. It is possible to chose between 16 different
preset bells.
For the SPRINT handsets, S sets the call ringtone, according to the following table: Configurator M=4 M=5 M=6 M=7
Configurator 0 1 2 3 Backlighting status All tones Door lock tone Call tone All tones
Type of bell 2-tone 2-tone 2-tone One-tone enabled disabled disabled disabled
1200 Hz 1200 Hz 1200 Hz 1200 Hz + + + +
600 Hz 0 Hz 2400 Hz backlighting backlighting backlighting backlighting
always ON always ON always ON always ON
In one-family systems S=9 to configure the general call.
J1 - activation of call pushbutton columns
T - door lock relay timing The J1 configurator gives the possibility of managing the Call pushbuttons of the speaker
module as follows:
Configurator number
J1 CONNECTED = Only the right pushbutton column is enabled
0=no configurator 1 2 3 4* 5 6 7
J1 DISCONNECTED = Both pushbutton columns are enabled (right + left)
as
BT00598-a -EN
4 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 6 sec 8 sec 10 sec

pushbutt. J2 - additional EP power supply
Configurator J2 gives the possibility of enabling the additional power supply (1-2) of the
*Operation as pushbutton for 10 sec. max after which standby mode is activated. speaker module in the following mode :
To extend operation time over 10 seconds, use actuator item 346200 configured
J2 CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
with MOD=5.
J2 DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled
428
TECHNICAL SHEETS
351300
Configuration
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and of the speaker module.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
the TiSferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The disassemble the device.
Warning: In order to correctly send the configuration to the device, jumper (J1) must be removed. Also ensure that there are no configurators connected to the socket on the back of
the module.
(115 cm) - (96°)

(351300)
(60 cm) - (60°)
(351200)
50 cm
160 cm
(105 cm)
(92°)
BT00598-a -EN
(351200)
(240 cm)
(135°)
(351300)
429
TECHNICAL SHEETS

Nameplate module 352200

Nameplate module normally used for displaying the house number or other notifications
(e.g. Legend for calls using digital pushbutton panels, opening/closing times, etc.).
Connection using the appropriate multicable supplied. Night backlighting controlled by
the speaker module or the audio/video module connected.
To be completed with surround plate.
Related items 1
352201 Sfera New nameplate front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
352202 Sfera New nameplate front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
352203 Sfera New nameplate front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
352205 Sfera Robur nameplate front cover (IK 10)
Technical data
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs off: 0 mA Rear view
Stand by absorption with backlighting LEDs on: 6 mA
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled): IP 54

1. Area used for entering information
115 mm 2. Connector for the connection to subsequent modules
3. Connector for the connection to previous modules
91 mm
BT00601-a -EN
430
TECHNICAL SHEETS

N&D and wide angle camera module 352400

Night & Day and wide angle camera module for the installation of colour video systems. 1 2
Fitted with 1/3” sensor with N&D function and automatic removal of the IR filter.
IR LED for the lighting of the field of view. Mist prevention heating resistance.
Automatic brightness adjustment. Connection to the speaker module (351100) using the
multicable supplied. To be completed with surround plate.
The device must not be configured.The device must not be configured.
4 4
Related items
352401 Sfera New front cover for N&D and wide angle camera - Allmetal (IK 08)
352402 Sfera New front cover for N&D and wide angle camera - Allwhite (IK 08)
352403 Sfera New front cover for N&D and wide angle camera - Allstreet (IK 08)
352405 Sfera Robur front cover for N&D and wide angle camera (IK 10)
3
Technical data Rear view

Lens: F2.5 f1.85 mm
Resolution: 330 TV lines (horizontal)
Illumination of the viewing field: LED IR
Brightness adjustment: automatic
Interlace: 2:1
N&D function with automatic IR filter removal:
Mist prevention heating resistance:
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled): IP 54 5

1. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : device firmware update
115 mm 2. Night & Day camera
3. Light sensor
4. IR LED for night lighting of the field of view
5. Connector for the connection of the speaker module 351100
91 mm
BT00602-a -EN
431
TECHNICAL SHEETS
352400
It is possible to update the device Firmware using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software The software gives the possibility of updating the firmware of the speaker module.
(which can be downloaded free of charge from the www.bticino.com). For the connection The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module gives the
to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the device.
( 115 cm) - (96°)

50 cm
160 cm
(240 cm) - (135°)

BT00602-a -EN
432
TECHNICAL SHEETS

Display module 352500

Graphic display module to be used with speaker module 351100 or with audio/video
modules 351200 – 351300 (connection using the multicable supplied). It can operate in 1 2
two modes: call from address book, or digital call. The call from the address book gives the
possibilityofsendingthecallbyscrollingonthe displaythenames associatedtotheresidents.
It is possible to store up to 4000 residents names. Using the keypad module item 353000
it is also possible to directly call the apartment by entering the number corresponding 3
to the resident. The digital call is also performed using the keypad module item 353000
by entering the numerical code. It is recommended that one or more nameplate
modules, item 352200, are installed at the side of the pushbutton panel to display the 4
correspondence between the numerical codes and the names of the users. It is possible
to program the names in the address book in two different ways: manual inclusion using
the pushbuttons of the display module or inclusion using a PC with the TiSferaDesign 5
software installed, by downloading the file to the display module (RECOMMENDED).
System power supply cuts do NOT cause the loss of memory data. To be completed with
surround plate. 6
Related items Rear view

352501 Sfera New display front cover - Allmetal (IK 08)
352502 Sfera New display front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
352503 Sfera New display front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
352505 Sfera Robur display front cover (IK 09)
Technical data
Display type: Negative transflective
FSTN 7
Display resolution: 160 x 240

1. Graphic display
115 mm 2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : programming of residents address
book and device firmware update
3. Residents names scroll pushbutton (UP)
4. Residents names scroll pushbutton (DOWN)
5. Confirmation pushbutton – send call (OK)
91 mm 6. Quick scroll pushbutton
BT00603-a -EN

433
TECHNICAL SHEETS
352500
It is possible to program the residents address book and update the device Firmware using The software gives the possibility of updating the device and download the residents
a PC and the TiSferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the address book.The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module
www.bticino.com). gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the
For the Connection to the PC, use a USB - mini USB cable. device.
BT00603-a -EN
434
TECHNICAL SHEETS

Inductive loop and control speech synthesis module 352700
Description
Front view
Inductive loop and control speech synthesis module, to be used with the 351100 1 2
speaker module or with audio/video modules 351200 - 351300, to enable use by
people wearing hearing aids (fitted with T selector). It is connected to the speaker
module using the appropriate multicable supplied. To be completed with surround
plate. The device can be configured either physically or using the PC and the 3
TiSferaDesign software.
Related items
352701 front cover for the Sfera New inductive loop and control speech synthesis -
Allmetal (IK 08)
Allwhite (IK 08)
Rear view
Allstreet (IK 08)
352705 front cover for the Sfera Robur inductive loop and control speech synthesis
(IK 10)
Technical data
6 5 4

1. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : configuration and device firmware
115 mm update
2. Loudspeaker
91 mm 6. Connector for the connection of the speaker module
BT00604-a -EN
435
TECHNICAL SHEETS
352700
Configuration
The device must be configured.
The configuration can be performed in two ways:
D
L M
Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection L
Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign
Mode 1
Mod 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets:
The configurator connected to the L socket defines the language for the control speech
synthesis.
L- Selection of the speech synthesis language:

The configurator connected to the L socket defines the language for the control speech
synthesis as for the following table:
Configurator Language
none default language (English)
1 English
2 French
3 Italian
4 Spanish
5 German
6 Flemish
7 Portuguese
DL - Selection of the default speech synthesis language:
The configurator connected to the DL socket defines the default language for the control
speech synthesis. The default language is selected from the preloaded language pack, as
for the following table:
Configurator Language
none 1st language of the preloaded language pack
1 2nd language of the preloaded language pack
2 3rd language of the preloaded language pack
3 4th language of the preloaded language pack
BT00604-a -EN

M - Operating mode:
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the operating mode of the device as
indicated below:
M = O (no configurator) - Inductive loop and control speech synthesis both enabled
M = 1 - Inductive loop enable, control speech synthesis disabled
436
TECHNICAL SHEETS
352700
Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC
and the TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com). For the connection to the PC, use a USB - mini USB cable. The
of the speaker module. The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the
speaker module gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need
to disassemble the device.
Notes on the use of the inductive loop
Switch the selector of the acoustic device to the T position
cm
40
25-
35 c
m
BT00604-a -EN
To ensure correct magnetic coupling between the device and the acoustic device, we
recommend a position in front of the device, at a distance of 25-35 cm.
It is reminded that the presence of metal and background noise generated by

electric/electronic devices (e.g. computer) may compromise the performance and
the quality of the coupling device.
437
TECHNICAL SHEETS

Keypad module 353000

Door lock release keypad module. It is fitted with relay with contacts (C – NC – NO) and 1
clamps (CP- P1 – P2) for the connection of a local door lock release pushbutton.
The numerical code for the opening of the door lock can be programmed using the
keypad itself, or using a PC after downloading the module programming file. It also has a
programming reset pushbutton and LEDS for the visual notification of the access status.
Night backlighting with LEDs. To be completed with surround plate. It is connected to the 2
other modules using the appropriate multicable supplied. The device may also be used as
a stand alone unit with independent power supply and operation.
Configuration performed using physical configurators, or a PC with the TiSferaDesign 8 3
software installed.
Related items
4
353001 Sfera New keypad front cover - Allmetal (IK 08) 5
353002 Sfera New keypad front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
353003 Sfera New keypad front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
353005 Sfera Robur keypad front cover (IK 09)
7 6
Rear view
Technical data
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs off): 10 mA
Stand by absorption (with backlighting LEDs on): 25 mA
12
11
10 9

1. LEDs for night backlighting
115 mm 2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : download/upload the
configuration and device firmware update
3. RESET pushbutton
4. Red LED for access status notification Red LED ON = access denied
5. Green LED for access status notification Green LED ON = access granted
91 mm 6. Cancel pushbutton (C)
BT00605-a -EN
7. Pushbutton for the selection of the door lock release code

8. Numeric keypad used for entering the codes
9. Plug-in clamps (CP – P1 P2) for connection of the additional local pushbutton
10. Plug-in clamps (C – NC – NO) for local relay contacts and connection to the 2 WIRE
SCS BUS
438
TECHNICAL SHEETS
353000
Configuration
The configuration of the device is different depending on the type of installation:
• Device installation inside a SFERA NEW pushbutton panel in 2 WIRE SCS
systems. A B C M T
• installation as STAND ALONE device
In both cases, the configuration can be performed in two ways:
• Mode 1 - with physical configurator connection
• Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign
Mode 1 Mode 2
Mod 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets. Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and
the TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the
www.bticino.com).
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION FOR INSTALLATION WITH A SFERA NEW EP: For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The software gives the pos-
sibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware of the speaker module.
A + B + C - Not used The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module gives the
possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble the device.
M - Operating mode - Not used
T -local relay time delay – NOT USED

(the time delay of the local relay is set by the T configurator connected to the speaker
module or to the audio video module used).
PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION IN STAND ALONE INSTALLATION:
A + B + C - progressive address of the device

The configurators connected to the A B C sockets assign a progressive address to the
device inside the system (range 000 – 999).
Example : A+B+C = 003 - device 003 of the system.
M - Operating mode - Not used
T – local relay time delay

BT00605-a -EN
following table:
0 = no
Configurator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
configurator
Contact closing
4’’ 1’’ 10’’ 20’’ 40’’ 1’ 1.5’ 3’
time
439
TECHNICAL SHEETS
353000
Wiring diagram- Installation with SFERA NEW EP

Example of installation of the keypad module inside a 2 WIRE SFERA NEW pushbutton panel with SCS BUS NOT CONNECTED to the keypad module
2 WIRE A/V module
Configure as indicated on the

device technical sheet
BUS TK - 2-WIRE SCS
Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA

holding current 30 Ohm max
A + B + C - DO NOT CONFIGURE
M - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T - DO NOT CONFIGURE
Wiring diagram- STAND ALONE installation

Example of STAND ALONE installation connection with the SCS BUS connected to the keypad module.
Keypad module
Modulo tastiera 353000
A + B + C = 003
(SCS device No. 3)
T = 2 (contact closed for 10”)
Contact load:
8 A 30 Vdc
8 A 30 Vac cos@ 1
BT00605-a -EN
3.5 A 30 Vac cos@ 0.4
SCS BUS
440
TECHNICAL SHEETS

Badge reader module 353200
Description
Front view
RFID badge reader module for the release of the door lock by swiping 1 2
the badge. It manages up to 20000 badges. It’s fitted with relay contacts
(C – NO - NC) and clamps (CP - P1 - P2) for the connection of a local door release pushbutton.
The badge for the release of the door lock can be programmed from the module itself,
or using a PC after downloading the module programming file.
3
It also has a programming reset pushbutton and LEDS for the visual notification of
the access status. Night backlighting a LEDs. To be completed with surround plate.
It is connected to the other modules using the appropriate multicable supplied. The 5
device may also be used as a stand alone unit with independent power supply and
operation.
4
Configuration performed using physical configurators, or a PC with the TiSferaDesign
software installed.
Related items
353201 Sfera New badge reader front cover - Allmetal (IK 08) Rear view
353202 Sfera New badge reader front cover - Allwhite (IK 08)
353203 Sfera New badge reader front cover - Allstreet (IK 08)
353205 Sfera Robur badge reader front cover (IK 09)
348200 badge - black
348201 badge - red
348202 badge - green 10
348203 badge - blue
348204 badge - orange
348205 badge - grey 9
348206 badge - yellow
8
Technical data
Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 7 6
Stand by absorption
(with backlighting LEDs off): 75 mA
Stand by absorption
(with backlighting LEDs on): 85 mA Legend
Max. operating absorption: 105 mA 1. RESET pushbutton
Operating temperature: (-25) – (+70) °C 2. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC : programming and device
Protection index (pushbutton panel assembled): IP 54 firmware update
3. Red LED for access status notification. Red LED ON = access denied
Dimensional data 4. Green LED for access status notification. Green LED ON = access granted
5. Antenna
115 mm 6. Plug-in clamps (CP - P1 - P2) for the connection of an additional pushbutton and
tamper
BT00606-a -EN
7. Plug-in clamps (C – NC – NO) for local relay contacts and connection to the 2 WIRE
SCS BUS
91 mm
441
TECHNICAL SHEETS
353200
Configurazione
The configuration of the device is different depending on the type of installation:
- device installation inside a SFERA NEW pushbutton panel in 2 WIRE SCS systems,
A B C M T
- installation as STAND ALONE device.
In both cases, The configuration can be performed in two ways:

Mode 2 - with PC and software TiSferaDesign
Mode 1
Mod 1 requires the physical connection of the configurators to their sockets. Physical configuration in stand alone installation:
Physical configuration for installation with a sfera new ep: A + B + C - progressive address of the device
The configurators connected to the A B C sockets assign a progressive address to the
A + B + C - NOT USED device inside the system (range 000 – 999).
Example: A+B+C = 003 – device 003 of the system.
M - operating mode, badges management
The configurator connected to the M socket sets the badges management mode as M - operating mode, badges management
indicated below: The configurator connected to the M socket sets the badges management mode as
indicated below:
M = 0 - management of badges with manager MASTER ONLY
The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) are used both for the management of M = 0 - management of badges with MANAGER MASTER ONLY
PASSEPARTOUT badges (max. 100) and for the management of the RESIDENTS max The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) are used both for the management of
(max. 5) of each apartment. PASSEPARTOUT badges (MAX. 100) and for the management of the RESIDENTS badges
(max. 5) of each apartment.
M = 1 - badges management with APARTMENT MASTER
The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) directly manage the PASSPARTOUT badges M = 1 - badges management with APARTMENT MASTER
(max. 100) and the APARTMENT MASTER badges (max. 4000); the APARTMENT MASTER The MANAGER MASTER badges (max. 20) directly manage the
badges manage the RESIDENTS badges (max. 5) of the corresponding apartment. PASSPARTOUT badges (max. 100) and the APARTMENT MASTER badges
(max. 4000); the APARTMENT MASTER badges manage the RESIDENTS badges (max. 5)
T -local relay time delay – NOT USED of the corresponding apartment.
(the time delay of the local relay is set by the T configurator connected to the speaker
module or audio video module used). T – local relay time delay
BT00606-a -EN
following table:
Configurator 0 none 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Contact closing
4” 1” 10” 20” 40” 1’ 1.5’ 3’
time
442
TECHNICAL SHEETS
353200
Mode 2
Mode 2 requires advanced configuration of the device, performed using a PC and the
TisferaDesign software (which can be downloaded free of charge from the www.bticino.com
).
For the connection to the PC use a USB - mini USB cable. The software gives the
possibility of configuring, programming, and updating the firmware of the speaker
module. The presence of the mini USB connection of the front of the speaker module
gives the possibility of performing these operations without the need to disassemble
the device.
Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram- Installation with SFERA NEW EP

Example of installation of the RFID module inside a 2 WIRE SFERA NEW pushbutton panel with SCS BUS NOT CONNECTED to the RFID module
2 WIRE A/V module

WARNING: Irrespective of the position of the SFERA NEW
modules, the RFID module must the FIRST DEVICE connected
Configure as indicated on the to the advanced speaker module or to the audio/video module.
device technical sheet Any other modules (e.g. pushbuttons) must be connected after
the RFID module.
BUS TK - 2-WIRE SCS
Electrical door lock

18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding
current 30 Ohm max
Pushbutton
module
BT00606-a-EN
A + B + C - DO NOT CONFIGURE
T - DO NOT CONFIGURE
NOTE: the M = 0 configuration (no configurator
connected), only enables management of RESIDENTS badges.
To add and/or delete residents badges, the badge programmed
as MANAGER MASTER badge is required.
443
TECHNICAL SHEETS
353200
Wiring diagram- STAND ALONE installation

Example of STAND ALONE installation connection with the SCS BUS connected to the RFID module.
A + B + C = 003
(SCS device No. 3)
T = 2 (contact closed for 10”)
Contact load:
8 A 30 Vdc
8 A 30 Vac cos@ 1
3.5 A 30 Vac cos@ 0.4
SCS BUS
NOTE: The M = 1 configuration also gives the possibility of

managing APARTMENT MASTER badges. To add and/or delete
residents badges, the badge programmed as APARTMENT
MASTER badge is required.
BT00606-a-EN
444
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Flush mounted 391657-391658-391659

2 wire indoor colour camera 391661-391662-391663
Description
2 wire indoor colour camera for video monitoring system functions. Flush mounted
or wall mounted installation using the dedicated accessories of the AXOLUTE, LIVING,
LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
1
Related items
The device must be completed with the accessories and the front cover plates of the
AXOLUTE, LIVING, LIGHT, LIGHT TECH residential series.
Refer to the corresponding catalogues.
P
N 2
Z
M
A
PL
Technical data
3
Sensor: from 1/3” colour CCD
Lens: “semi pin-hole” 3.7 mm
Interlace: 2:1
Legend
Scanning: Standard CCIR
Horizontal frequency: 15625 Hz 1 - Microphone
Vertical frequency: 50 Hz 2 - Configurator socket
Image elements: 537 (H) x 597 (V) 3 - 2 WIRE BUS connection clamp
Horizontal resolution: 380 TV lines at the image centre
Video signal: PAL compatible
Minimum illumination: 5 lux
Dimensional data Camera adjustment
65 mm 43 mm
+ 30°
43 mm
+ 25°
- 30°
- 25°
BT00679-a-EN
445
TECHNICAL SHEETS
391657-391658-391659
391661-391662-391663
Configuration
P – Camera address
The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
NOTE (*) : connect an OFF configurator here to disable the microphone

(function available for cameras configured from 0 to 9, for other cameras the
microphone cannot be excluded).
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on

Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
with parallel connection.
M A/PL
M = 0 Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
M = 1 - 9 Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
P N Z M A PL
*
BT00679-a-EN
446
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Outdoor 2-wire
colour camera 391670
Description
2-wire compact outdoor (IP65) colour camera.
It can be used for video monitoring system installations, or for turning audio systems
into video systems, using a separate camera.
WARNINGS : do not point the camera towards the sun or towards light sources.
Technical data P N Z M A PL
Enclosure: aluminium
Sensor: 1/3” CMOS colour
Max. operating absorption: 65 mA Configuration
Lens: f: 6 mm; F: 2.3 mm
Image elements: 628 (H) x 586 (V) The device must be physically configured in terms of:
Horizontal resolution: 330 TV lines at the image centre
Minimum illumination: 2 Lux F=2.0 P – Camera address
Operating temperature: (-20) – (+70) °C; RH 95% max The configurator assigns to the camera the address inside the apartment.
N – Address of the handset called in case of alarm
Dimensional data Z – Zone of the alarm system the camera is associated to
M – Mode of operation when a camera is switched on

38 mm 98 mm
Each time a camera is switched on (call, selfswitching on, alarm) the MY HOME
actuator and the scenario configured in A and PL are activated. When the camera is
switched off, the associated actuator also switches off, while the scenario remains
active.
If an actuator used by the automation system is also associated to the camera, the
actuator will switch itself off when the camera is switched off, even if it was already
on when the camera came on. To avoid this problem, the load should be activated
using an actuator item F411/2, configuring different PL and setting the contacts
85 mm
with parallel connection.

M A/PL
M = 0 Address of the SCS control device associated to the camera
M = 1 - 9 Address of the scenarios module associated to the camera
M = SLA Configuration of the audio entrance panel associated to the camera
(see following details)
M = SLA
S
PI PN L A PL
A
BT00678-a -EN
Pi - Pn = range of audio EP associated to the camera (max.5)
PI - PN = Audio entrance panels associated to the camera (max. 5)

PI = Address of first associated EP
PN = Address of last associated EP
A/PL = Address of the SCS control associated to the camera
447
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Audio/video node F441
Description
The audio/video node is a mixer device enabling distribution of up to 4 sound sources or
1
2-wire audio/video risers.
The 4 outputs will all have the same signal coming from the input selected among the
4 available.

WARNING : Connections using both screw clamps and patch cords at the same
time are NOT possible.
2
Technical data
Absorption from BUS: 20 mA
Dissipated power: 0.5 W
Number of inputs available: 4 4 3
Number of outputs available: 4

6 DIN modules 1 - Output clamps (OUT1 - OUT2 - OUT3 - OUT4) for the connection of 2-wire video risers
or amplifiers
2 - Sockets for patch cord connection
3 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
4 - Input clamps (IN1 - IN2 - IN3 - IN4) for the connection of sound sources or entrance
panels / cameras
BT00674-a-EN
448
TECHNICAL SHEETS
Multi-channel matrix F441M
Description
The multi-channel matrix is a device which can distribute up to 4 stereo sound sources
1
and a video signal from entrance panels or cameras simultaneously.
The matrix is made up of 8 inputs and 8 outputs (to wire 8 rooms). OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8
Video entrance panels and cameras (first 4 inputs) and stereo sound sources (last 4
inputs) can be wired in input.
On each output of the matrix there is a clearly separate room.
The rooms must be set in ascending order (room 1 - OUT, room 2 - OUT 2 etc.).
The stereo signals are distributed at the same time and independently on any output.
However, it is not possible for the audio signals of two separate sound sources to be
mixed on the same output branch.
The stereo signal of a sound sources and the video signal of one of the 2-wire video TK1 TK2 TK3 TK4 S1 S2 S3 S4 BUS
door entry sources can travel at the same time on the same branch (entrance panel or
camera).
The device must not be configured. 4 3 2

Power supply from SCS BUS: 18 - 27 Vdc 1 - Clamps for the connection of the amplifier and the video door entry system handsets.
Absorption da BUS: 46 - 60 mA 2 - Clamps for the connection of the SCS BUS
Dissipated power: 1.5 W 3 - Clamps for the connection of the input sound sources (S1-S2-S3-S4)
Operating temperature: 5 – 45 °C 4 - Clamps for the connection of the 2-wire cameras / entrance panels (TK1-TK2-TK3-TK4)
Number of inputs available: 8
Number of outputs available: 8
Dimensional data
10 DIN modules
BT00675-a -EN
449
Technical sheets - Sound system
451
Insulator for sound sources
3495
Description
The insulator for sound sources is a device which can adapt the audio signal from the
external sound sources to the Sound system keeping the BUS with SELV features. The
insulator for sound sources must always be used when the sound source is not battery
powered. The device is made up of 4 female RCA clamps divided between “IN” and “OUT”. L L
Connect the external sound source on the “IN” clamps, and connect the stereo interface 1 2
to the “OUT” clamps, (RCA input item HC/HD/HS/L/N/NT4560, AM5740, 067301 and R R
573926/27).
IN OUT

“IN” clamps: RCA female impedance 680 Ω 1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input
“OUT” clamps: RCA female impedance 680 Ω 2. RCA female connectors for stereo interfaces (inputs RCA).
Response in frequency at mW/600 Ω: 60 Hz-20 kHz RCA-RCA cable supplied.
Response in frequency at mW/600 Ω: 30 Hz-20 kHz
IN/OUT insulation: 1500 Vrms
MQ00001-d-EN 24/04/2014
452
IP Touch Screen
adapter
3496
Description
This accessory, to be used in conjunction with TOUCH SCREENS can be used to play
remote audio files found on the server (e.g. on the PC connected to the local network), or
audio IP Contents (e.g. radio streaming), through 2 wire stereo sound systems. By using
the RJ45 connection of the TOUCH SCREEN, and connecting this to the local network
linked to the PC, server etc., the TOUCH SCREEN adapter sends the audio files of the
various devices towards the Sound System.
Installation mode
H/HW4890
LN4890/A
AM4890
067292
573958
3496
Ethernet (1) BUS (2) (3)

F441
F441M
NOTE: (1) cable connection to the local LAN network.

(2) the BUS line output must be connected to the mixers item F441 or item F441M, or to the power supply line of the BUS themselves. In case of integration with the
Automation system, it may be connected to the automation BUS.
(3) when connected to the F441M matrix, the device cannot be wired to the “S1” clamp of the sound sources.
MQ00007-c-EN 24/04/2014
453
RCA input
5739 26 (White) 673 01 N4560 HC4560 HS4560
5739 27 (Magnesium) L4560 NT4560 HD4560 AM5740
Description
1 2
The device allows the interfacing and adaptation of the signal level of an external
stereo audio source. It is connected with the audio signal by means of two RCA female
connectors (red = right channel; white = left channel) on the front of the device. There is
also a knob to adjust the input signal sensitivity and two LEDs to indicate the device state
(ON/STANDBY) and the correct adjustment. S
M1 5
Connections: M2
- directly to the RCA input, if the sound source is battery powered

- through the sound source insulator (item 3495), if the sound source is powered by the
mains network (230 Vac or 127 Vac).
6
Related articles
4 3
Technical data
Power supply: 18-27 Vdc from BUS Legend
Absorption in stand-by: 12 mA 1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input
Operating temperature: 5 °C-45 °C 2. sdjustment knob for the audio output to the BUS
RCA input impedance: 14 kΩ 3. LED for audio adjustment on the BUS:
Input sensitivity: 100 mVrms-1 Vrms • off: no audio signal
TYP channel balancing: ± 0.5 dB • green: signal with minimum level
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB • ﬂashing orange: best adjustment
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz-20 kHz • steady orange: signal too high
4. dtate indication LED:
• green: standby
Dimensional data
• orange: device ON
Size: 2 DIN modules 5. configurator socket
6. removable clamp for BUS connection
Configuration
S: 1-4 local address of the source
MQ00018-d-EN 31/10/2013
454
Stereo control
L4561N
Description
The device manages and interfaces an external stereo audio source
(e.g. Hi-Fi system) with infrared remote control and only one IR detector.
The device can save and reproduce the controls given by the stereo source remote control.
The controls saved by the stereo control are sent to the external stereo control through
a cord with infrared transmitter (supplied). In this way one can, by means of the various 6
L R
control devices (special controls and Touch Screen, etc...) and the amplifiers, manage the
5 1
switching on of the saved stations and activation of a CD reader and change the CD track. TX-IR
On the front of the stereo control there are pushbuttons which, with the aid of an
2
indication Led, adjust the audio signal entering the device.
Stereo control must be programmed using the configuration software supplied with the
product. During normal operation of the stereo control, when the device activates the
Hi-Fi, the loudspeakers directly connected to the system also come on. When the last
amplifier goes off, following an OFF control, the loudspeakers also go off, but the HI-FI
system remains active for one minute.
Note (*): The device might not be compatible with some remote control brands and 4 3
models

Power supply: 18-27 Vdc 1. RCA female connectors for stereo audio input
Max. absorption: 40 mA 2. Keys, LED and sensors to adjust the output audio on the BUS
Absorption in stand-by: 12 mA 3. configurator soket
Operating temperature: 5 °C - 45 °C 4. Mini-USB input for device programming
Signal learning capacity: 20 kHz–80 kHz 5. Jack input for connection of cable with IR detector (supplied)
RCA input impedance: 14 kΩ 6. Clamp for connection of the stereo control to the BUS by patch cord
Input sensitivity: 20 mVrms-1 Vrms
TYP channel balancing: ± 0.5 dB
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz-20 kHz
Dimensional data
Size: 4 DIN modules
Configuration
S1: 1-4 local address of the source
M1: 1-4 Configuration of how many devices must be controlled inside the same
device, Max 4 (example HI-FI systems with radio, cd reader etc...).
M2: 1-6 time which elapses between a control and the next during the source L R
switching on sequence (see instruction sheet). TX-IR
When using the multichannel matrix, item F441M, the configuration must
be M=1 (management of one source only).
LH
RH
MQ00014-f-EN 05/06/2014
455
Flush mounted stereo amplifier
L4562 H4562
067555 AM5742
Description
This device amplifies the stereo signal on the BUS and controls up to two loudspeakers
with impedance between 8-16 Ω. On the front the amplifier has two pushbuttons which 1 2 7
can: switch the loudspeakers ON/OFF, adjust the volume in output, change the audio
source and cycle the saved stations (for the radio) or change the CD tracks. Correctly
configured the amplifier can have two modes:
LEFT
- “FOLLOW ME” mode: function which allows the same music in another room after the - +
A
PF
M1
amplifier of the room previously occupied has been switched off and switching on the M2
amplifier on the room you are now in.

- “NO FOLLOW ME” mode: when another amplifier is switched on, on changing room,
- +
the source configured the same as the configurator (inserted on M2) inserted on the RIGHT
amplifier switches ON, not necessarily the source which was being listened to before.
By using the “+” input of one channel and the “-” input of the other channel, it is possible
to install only one loudspeaker and create a monophonic system.
4 3 5 6
Related articles
Axolute, LivingLight button covers
1-module button covers art. L/N/NT4911... (art. L4562) or art. HC/HD/HS4911... (art. H4562)
Arteor button covers

Legend
5739 66, 5739 64 (White cover)
5739 67, 5739 65 (Magnesium cover) 1. control to switch on the amplifier (simple touch) and increase the volume
(extended pressure)
Céliane button covers 2. control to cycle and activate the available stereo sources
682 63, 682 64 (White cover) 3. control to scan the stations saved (for the radio)
685 63, 685 64 (Titanium cover) 4. control to switch off the amplifier (simple touch) and decrease the volume
680 83 (White front finishing frame) (extended pressure)
683 83 (Titanium front finishing frame) 5. screw clamps for connection of the loudspeakers
6. removable clamp for BUS connection
7. configurator socket
Technical data
Power supply: 18-27 Vdc Configuration
Max. absorption: 250 mA with 8 Ω loudspeaker on 2 L-R outputs
130 mA with 8 Ω loudspeaker on 1 L-R output A: 1-9 address of the amplifier room
130 mA with 16 Ω loudspeaker on 2 L-R outputs PF: 0-9 amplifier address
90 mA with 16 Ω loudspeaker on 1 L-R outputs M2: - (no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which
40 mA (MUTE)* was on is activated, “FOLLOW ME” mode
Absorption in stand-by: 6 mA 1-4 when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
Operating temperature: 5 °C - 45 °C as that set on the device itself switches on (example amplifier with M2=2,
Power (on 8Ω): 2 Wrms (1 Wrms+1 Wrms) in this case the source with S=2 will switch on), “NO FOLLOW ME” mode.
16 Wpmpo (8 Wpmpo+8 Wpmpo)
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz–20 kHz
TYPS distortion: 0.1%
Noise signal ratio: 68 dB
* take into account this value when the Sound system is integrated with the 2-WIRE
video door entry system.
Dimensional data
Size: 2 modules
MQ00008-c-EN 05/06/2014
456
Flush mounted loudspeakers
067303 HC4565 HS4565 N4565
573977 HD4565 L4565 NT4565
Description
Flush mounted loudspeakers for flush mounted installation. No support required.
Related articles
flush mounted boxes:
art. 506E and art. PB526 (only for HC/HD/HS4565 and L/N/NT4565)
art. 89379 and 89279
Technical data
Type: wide band
Power: 6 Wrms/12 W musical
Impedance: 16 Ω
Frequency range: 160 -16 kHz
Sensitivity: 80 dB (1 W/1 m)
120,5
Dimensions115
120,5 120,5
115 115
120,5
115
120,5
120,5
115
115
L/N/NT4565 HC/HD/HS4565
128
128 128
128
128
128
573977-067303
MQ00003-c-EN 05/06/2014
457
False ceiling mounted loudspeakers
L4566/10
Description
20 W ceiling mounted loudspeakers. Thanks to its small size (diameter 10 cm) and easy
hooking (by springs) the loudspeaker can be installed with just a few operations.
Technical data
Type: wide band
Impedance: 8Ω
Frequency range: 200 - 20 kHz
Feature: loudspeaker to be installed on the ceiling
Weight: 400 g
Dimensional data
Mounting hole diameter: 90 mm
External diameter: 100 mm
Depth: 57 mm
Dimensions
133 100
52
66
57
68
MQ00006-c-EN 24/04/2014
458
False ceiling mounted loudspeakers
L4566
Description
100 W loudspeaker for false ceiling installation, suitable for installation in large rooms.
Technical data
Type: 2 way coaxial
Impedance: 8Ω
Feature: loudspeaker to be installed on the ceiling
Weight: 1.7 kg
Dimensional data
Mounting hole diameter: 210 mm
External diameter: 240 mm
Depth: 140 mm
Dimensions
Ø 240 mm 157 mm
Ø 205 mm
MQ00010-c-EN 24/04/2014
459
Wall mounted loudspeakers
L4567
Description
Reduced thickness loudspeakers (37 mm thickness only), for direct wall installation.
Technical data
Type: 2 ways
Impedance: 8Ω
Feature: shallow loudspeaker to be installed on the wall
(complete with fastening screws and 4 m of cable)
Weight: 1 kg
Dimensional data
Size: 184x271x37 mm (lxhxd)
MQ00005-d-EN 24/04/2014
460
Outdoor loudspeakers
L4569
Description
2 way loudspeaker with IPx4 protection index, black colour, impedance 8 Ω, power
140 W. This particular loudspeaker may be installed outdoor using the brackets provided.
Technical data
Type: 2 separate ways
Impedance: 8Ω
Feature: outdoor loudspeaker
Weight: 4.4 kg
Protection index: IPx4
Dimensional data
Dimensions
265 208
60
100 215
50 300
MQ00009-c-EN 24/04/2014
461
Flush mounted loudspeakers
5739 28 (White) 067304
5739 29 (Magnesium) H4570
Description
100 W, 8 Ω impedance, flush mounted loudspeaker, for installation inside boxes with flush
mounting (such as MULTIBOX art. 16104 for loudspeaker H4570).
Preset for back installation of a DIN amplifier, item F502.
Technical data
Type: 2 separate ways
Impedance: 8Ω
Weight: 1.74 kg
H4570
Dimensional data
Depth of the flush mounted box: 80 mm
Dimensions and installation mode
256
347
item 16104
MQ00011-c-EN 05/06/2014
462
Radio tuner
F500N
Description
The radio tuners item F500N can receive FM radio stations. The front pushbuttons and
the backlit display adjust the device locally, save 15 radio stations and display RDS
messages and the tuned frequency. 1
It is also capable of performing two types of station searches: manual and automatic.
2
The device can be managed (switching ON and OFF, frequency change, etc.) both locally
and remotely (via the SCS BUS) using the flush mounted amplifier, or the MY HOME
control devices (e.g. Touch Screen and Local Display).
In order to receive the radio channels correctly the type of antenna used must be
selected: if the F500N is installed in a zone of the building with sufficient signal 3
8
strength, the wire antenna can be used. If the signal strength inside the building is not
sufficient, the external antenna can be used (e.g. antenna installed on the roof), using
the coaxial connector and the appropriate adapter cable. The type of antenna is selected 4
using the configurator.
7
Technical data
Max. absorption: 20 mA @27 V – 25 mA @18 V 5
Absorption in stand-by: 5 mA @27 V – 9 mA @18 V 6
Dissipated power: 0.5 W
FM reception band: 87.5 – 108 MHz
Antenna to be connected
Maximum level (*): 70 dBμV Legend
Minimum level (*): 40 dBμV (mono) - 50 dBμV (stereo) 1. Wire antenna
(*) The maximum and minimum levels that must be guaranteed at the antenna socket 2. MCX connector for the outdoor antenna (e.g. roof antenna) (*)
for correct FM band reception. 3. Green LED on steady: good quality signal reception
4. Red LED on steady: stereo reception (mono reception when off)
Dimensional data 5. Configurator socket
4 DIN modules 6. Removable 2 pole connector for the connection to the SCS BUS of the sound system
7. Radio tuner programming and radio program scanning keys
Configuration
Frequency decrease
Frequency increase
Selection/storage of stations (short/extended pressure)
S MEM ANT
Frequency scanning mode: manual/automatic
Press at the same time for 5 seconds to store the station in the memory
S: 1 – 4 local address of the source 8. LED backlit display for the display of frequency, RDS messages, and stored stations
MEM: number of stations that can be stored (*) Cable with MCX-F connector supplied as standard.
Configurator No. of stations
– 5
2 10
3 15
ANT: this indicates the type of antenna used by the radio

Configurator Type of antenna
– Indoor (wire)
1 Outdoor (Coax)
MQ00391-b-EN 22/04/2014
463
Amplifier for DIN rail
F502
Description
1 2
This amplifier, fitted with hooking device for installation on DIN rail, is particularly suited
for non residential applications, or in more general terms, where there are no space
constraints inside distribution boards/switchboards. Directly powered by the power line
voltage, the low level of current consumption on the BUS makes multiple installations
possible (max. 40 amplifiers and 80 loudspeakers). Depending on its configuration, a
stereo or a mono signal can be set on the output towards the loudspeakers. Loudspeakers
with both 8 Ω and 16 Ω impedance may be connected to the amplifier. The device may be
controlled using either its own keys, the TOUCH SCREEN, or special controls.
6
Technical data 5
BUS voltage: 18-27 Vdc

Power supply: 110-230 Vac (50 – 60 Hz)
Absorption on the BUS: 5 mA
Absorption on the line: 110 mA (at 110 Vac) – 56 mA (at 230 Vac)
Dissipated power: 2W
4 3
Power (on 8 Ω): 2 Wrms (1 Wrms+1 Wrms)
16 Wpmpo (8 Wpmpo+8 Wpmpo)
Legend
MIN channel balancing: ± 1.5 dB 1. clamp for connection of the power supply
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz–20 kHz (su 8 Ω) 2. clamps for loudspeaker connection
3. configurator socket
Dimensional data 4. removable clamp for BUS connection
5. the LED under “ON/OFF” indicates the amplifier state: if it is off there is no BUS, if it is
Size: 4 DIN modules green the device is in Stand-By, if it is orange the amplifier is on. The LED under “PO-
WER” indicates: when off, no power line voltage is detected, if it is RED the amplifier
Configuration is powered.
A: 1-9 address of the amplifier room 6. pushbuttons for local switching on or off of the amplifier (simple touch), and for
PF: 0-9 amplifier address volume adjustment (prolonged pressure).
M1*: - (no configurator) volume level equal to 20% and “MUTE” mode:
in this mode, when the video door entry system is being used the volume
of the sound sources will be decreased
1 volume level equal to 20% but “MUTE” mode not available”
2 volume level equal to 50% and “MUTE” mode: in this mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources will
be decreased
3 volume level equal to 50% but “MUTE” mode not available
4 volume level equal to 100% and “MUTE” mode: in this, mode, when the
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources stereo cable
110–230 Vac
will be decreased
(50–60 Hz)
M2: - (no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which
was on is activated, “FOLLOW ME” mode
1-4 when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
as that set on the device itself switches on (example amplifier with M2=2,
in this case the source with S=2 will switch on), “NO FOLLOW ME” mode.
M3 - (no configurator) working correctly
1 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the LEFT channel
2 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the RIGHT channel
3 the amplifier reproduces a monophonic signal on both the loudspeaker
outputs
* this mode can only be activated when the Sound System is integrated with the 2-wire
BUS
audio and video door entry system. This combination allows the “pager” function and
the volume level is set via the configurators.
MQ00015-e-EN 24/04/2014
464
Power amplifier
F503
Description
1 2 3 4 5
The stereo amplifier, item F503, ensures accurate reproduction of the sound signal, both
from the SCS/BUS and, in alternative, from the AUX input (MP3 or CD player, etc.). The
wide range of adjustments of high and low tones available, the 10 preset equalisation
levels, as well as the additional 10 levels that can be customised by the customer, the
virtual surround, to name a few, ensure pleasurable listening in each room, following + − + − AUX
PRI LEFT RIGHT OUT
the taste of the user. Each parameter can be displayed on the OLED graphic display.
All the adjustments are performed using the keys of the amplifier, or remotely using the
Touch Screen devices.
OK C
Technical data
BUS voltage: 18 – 27 Vdc
Power supply (PRI): 110 – 240 Vac @ 50 – 60 Hz
Absorption on the BUS: 12 mA
Absorption on the line: 85 mA (at 110 Vac) – 45 mA (at 230 Vac) SCS AUX
IN
Dissipated power: stand-by 3.5 Wmax - ON: 13 Wmax @ 1 kHz

input tone
Potenza (su 8 Ω): 60 Wrms (3 Wrms + 30 Wrms) 480 Wpmpo
(240 Wpmpo + 240 Wpmpo) 10 9 8 7 6
Low tones adjustment: ±20 dB max A
High tones adjustment: ±20 dB max
PF
Frequency range @ -3 dB: 20 Hz–20 kHz (on 8 Ω) M1
AUX input: 1 Vrms max M2
M3
AUX Output: 1 Vrms max, @Rout = 600 Ω
Equalisation adjustment: ±8 dB max

10 DIN modules 1. 110 – 230 Vac power supply clamps
2. Graphic OLED display
3. Left channel loudspeaker connectors
4. Right channel loudspeaker connectors
5. AUX audio output (for the connection use a 3.5 mm stereo jack)
6. AUX audio input (for the connection use a 3.5 mm stereo jack)
7. Selection and navigation keys
9. SCS audio input (sound system BUS/SCS)
10. Status LEDs*
* The LEDs are under the plastic front cover plate, and can only be seen when the device is on:
- Upper LED (power supply status), blue for STAND BY/ purple for ACTIVE
- Lower LED (110 to 230 Vac power supply), blue for power supply PRESENT
MQ00271-c-EN 21/05/2014
465
Power amplifier
F503
Description
To access the configurator sockets remove the protection cover. A description of the 4
volume level equal to 100% and “MUTE” mode: in this, mode, when the
configurators is printed on the inside of the cover. video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources
will be decreased
SLA amplifier slave operation mode:
M2: - (no configurator) when the amplifier is switched on, the last source which
A PF M1 M2 M3
was on is activated, “FOLLOW ME” mode
1-4 when the amplifier is switched on, the source with the same configuration
as that set on the device itself switches on (example amplifier with M2=2,
in this case the source with S=2 will switch on), “NO FOLLOW ME” mode.
A: 1-9 address of the amplifier room M3 - (no configurator) working correctly
PF: 1-9 address of the amplifier sound source: 1 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the LEFT channel
M1**: - (no configurator) volume level equal to 20% and “MUTE” : 2 both the outputs reproduce the signal received on the RIGHT channel
mode: this mode, when the video door entry system is being used the 3 the amplifier reproduces a monophonic signal on both the loudspeaker
volume of the sound sources will be decreased outputs
1 volume level equal to 20% but “MUTE” mode not available”
2 volume level equal to 50% and “MUTE” mode: in this mode, when the ** This mode can only be activated when the Sound System is integrated with the 2-wire
video door entry system is being used the volume of the sound sources will audio and video door entry system. This combination allows the “pager” function and
be decreased the volume level is set via the configurators.
Wiring diagrams
Wiring diagram with SCS BUS connected (the power amplifier plays back Wiring diagram with SCS BUS disconnected (the power amplifier is independent
the sources from the 2-wire sound system). from the SCS BUS and plays back the source connected to the AUX IN input).
110 – 230 Vac 110 – 230 Vac

(50 – 60 Hz) (50 – 60 Hz)
PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
OUT PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
OUT
PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
OUT PRI + LEFT − + RIGHT − AUX
OUT
Sound source
(CD player, iPOD)
OK C OK C
OK C OK C
AUX AUX
SCS IN SCS IN
AUX AUX
SCS IN SCS IN
Note: The desired input, SCS or AUX IN, must be selected using the local keys (see the installation manual for the correct procedures).
MQ00271-c-EN 21/05/2014
466
Technical sheets - Residential structured cabling
467
Patch module
F550C6
Description
Patch module fitted with Toolless connector for the capping of the cable from the user 1
socket. Possibility of device rotation to accept wiring cables coming either from the top
or the base of the electric distribution board.
Fitted with visual indicator, for the identification of the service transmitted.
Connects to other data network devices using patch cords L4665L20 and L4665L40.
Related items
FLAT L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cords
Technical data
2
Category: 6
Dimensional data
1 DIN module
Fitting and installation
Device rotation for best positioning based on the side the wiring is coming 3
from.
Legend
1. RJ45 input port
2. Visual indicator
3. RJ45 output port
MQ00321-b-EN 22/04/2014
468
Patch module
F550C6
Wiring
OK
1
NO
OK
2
NO
OK 4 NO
MQ00321-b-EN 22/04/2014
469
5 port switch
F551
Description
Front view
Device use for distributing the data network to several points of the home.
It has 5 RJ45 ports (1 input and 4 outputs) and supports 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet
connections, automatically adapting to the maximum speed supported by the network
terminals connected to each port. Should It be necessary to extend the home data
network to more than 4 terminals, a port may be connected to a second switch.
For the connection use patch cords L4665L20 and L4665L40.
Related items
Power supply F552
Technical data
Power supply voltage: 9 Vdc
Absorption: 220 mA
Transmission speed: 10/100 Mbit/s
Side view 1
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
2
Bottom view
5 4
Legend
1. RJ45 output ports
2. Orange LED: - OFF: speed 10Mbit/s
- ON: speed 100Mbit/s
3. Green LED: - flashing: data transmission
- ON: device active
4. Electric power supply connector (F552)
5. RJ45 input port
MQ00322-b-EN 21/05/2014
470
5 port switch
F551
Wiring diagram
Patch module
F550C6
Patch cords
L4665L20 L4665L40
Switch Power supply

F551 Power
F522
LAN input
Connection of the switches in series, to increase the number of LAN lines available on the output
LAN input
MQ00322-b-EN 21/05/2014
471
Power supply
F552
Description
DIN modularity device for providing power supply to the Switch, item F551.
1
Related items
Switch F551
Technical data
Power
Power supply voltage: 115 - 230 Vac 50 - 60 Hz
Output voltage: 9 Vdc 2
Maximum current delivered: 1.6 A
Dimensional data
1.5 DIN modules
Fitting and installation

The installation must be performed in accordance with current local regulations.
- The device must be installed inside appropriate containers;
- It must not be exposed to water drips or sprays;
- Do not obstruct the air vents; 3
- In order to ensure overload and direct contact protection, it must be powered using a
two-pole circuit breaker with contact separation of at least 3 mm, located nearby the
device.
Legend
1. Clamps for the connection of the device power supply
2. 230 V network present LED
3. Power line voltage connection clamps
MQ00323-b-EN 22/04/2014
472
TV/SAT distribution frame
F553
Description
1
This device, which does not require electric power supply, is used for the distribution of
the television signal to 6 TV/SAT jacks. Front view
It is fitted with an F type input connector for the signal from the TV switchboard, and of
six output connectors, for the connection of the TV/SAT jacks, which must have electric
features compatible with the device, and be of the “shunted” type.
The distribution frame is supplied with 3 plugs in case protection of the unused outputs
is required.
Related items
Shunted TV/SAT jacks HC/HS/L/N/NT4202D, HC/HS/L/N/NT4269F, A/AM5173D,
A/AM5175D, C4202D
Technical data
Frequency range: 5 - 2400 MHz
Impedance: 75O Ohm
1 2 1
Direct loss (db): Top view
Frequency (MHz) Type Max.
5 - 470 13 13.5
470 - 862 13 14
950 - 2150 16 17
Return loss- (db):

Frequency (MHz) Type Max.
5 - 40 11 10
40 - 1000 13 14
1000 - 2150 15 14
2150 - 2400 15 14
Standards, Certifications, Marks Bottom view

EN 50083
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
Legend
1. F type output connector
2. F type input connector
MQ00324-b-EN 24/04/2014
473
TV/SAT distribution frame
F553
Wiring diagram
TV TV
SAT
Shunted TV/SAT jack
Type 4214D
Distribution
frame
Television
SAT antenna
MQ00324-b-EN 24/04/2014
474
Telephone distribution frame
F555
Description
Front view
Device with two input ports and eight RJ45 output ports for the distribution of one or 2
telephone lines in the following way:
- one telephone line can be shunted on all the output ports;
- two telephone lines can be shunted on two groups of output ports.
The selection of the mode of shunting is made using the changeover switch, as shown
in the following table:
IN OUT
1 2 3 4
L1+L2
5 6 7 8 L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
L1+L2 1 x x x x
2 x x x x
1
1 x x x x x x x x
L1 Top view
In alternative to the connection using the RJ45 connector, the input line cables may also
be connected using traditional screw clamps.
Should it be necessary to distribute more than eight telephone lines, a second similar
device may be connected in cascade to the main distribution frame.
Related items
L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cord
Technical data
Operating temperature: 5 – 40 °C Bottom view
Dimensional data
4 DIN modules
5 4 3 2
Legend
1. RJ45 ports, output telephone line
2. RJ45 port, line 2 input
3. RJ45 port, line 1 input
4. Screw clamp, line 2 input
5. Screw clamp, line 1 input
MQ00325-b-EN 22/04/2014
475
Telephone distribution frame
F555
Wiring diagram
Diagram for the shunting of one telephone line Diagram for the shunting of two telephone lines
Line 2
To tel. No. 5, 6, 7 and 8
Telephone No. 4 To tel. No. 1, 2, 3 and 4
Telephone No. 3 Telephone No. 4
Telephone No. 1
Line 1
L1+L2
L1 L1+L2
L1+L2 L1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L1+L2
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1
L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
Input telephone
line Telephone line Telephone line
1 input 2 input
“In series” connection of the distribution frames to increase the number of available
telephone lines
To the telephones To the telephones
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
L1+L2
L1
L1 L2 L1 L2
Input telephone line
MQ00325-b-EN 22/04/2014
476
xDSL filter with telephone distribution frame
F558
Description
Front view
This device, with one input port and four output ports, RJ45 type, performs a double
action:
- it makes the ADSL signal intended for a modem available to an output port;
- it makes the telephone signal intended for the other three telephone lines available to
the other three output ports.
In alternative to the RJ45 connector, the input telephone line can also be connected
using a traditional screw clamp.
The filter is compatible with ADSL, ADSL2+, VDSL and VDSL2 standards.
If more than three telephone lines are required, it will be possible to use the device
in conjunction with the F555 telephone distribution frame using patch cords L4665L20
and L4665L40.
LINE
Related items
Telephone distribution frame F555
Top view
L4665L20 and L4665L40 patch cord
PHONE 2 PHONE 3
Technical data
1 1
Audio frequency range: 0.3 - 3.4 kHz
Bandwidth splitter from continuous current up to 16 kHz

1 2
DSL frequency range: 32 kHz - 30 MHz
PHONE 1 MODEM
Input signal rated voltage: 21 mV pp - 5.4 Vpp
Telephone call voltage: 40 - 150 Vrms

Line impedance: 250 - 75O Ohm
Bottom view
DSL loss (db):
Frequency Type
32 kHz - 138 kHz > 45
138 kHz - 30 MHz > 55
3

2 DIN modules 1. RJ45 port, output telephone line
2. RJ45 port, output ADSL line to the modem
3. Screw clamp for input telephone line
4. RJ45 port for input telephone line
MQ00326-b-EN 22/04/2014
477
Technical sheets - System integration and control
479
Scenario Module
F420
Description
Up to 16 scenarios may be saved in the scenario module, with up to 100 controls each. The
scenarios can also give door entry and video door entry controls for one-family systems
to switch on the staircase lights and open the door lock. If installed in large systems
with gateway F422 in logical expansion, the module can save automation controls for
the system where it is installed. On the front cover of the item there are two keys and
two LEDs. The first pushbutton (padlock) locks or unlocks the programming procedure
avoiding involuntary operations such as cancelling the scenarios and the corresponding
LED indicates the status: green programming possible, red programming blocked, DEL
amber temporary block. The second pushbutton (DEL) cancels all the scenarios, the 6 1
LED underneath indicates that the cancellation has taken place or that the device is
performing the learning procedure.
5 2
4 3
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc Front view
Current draw: 20 mA
Size: 2 DIN modules Legend
1. Scenario cancellation pushbutton
2. Scenarios/learning reset LED
4. BUS
5. Programming status LED
6. Lock/unlock programming pushbutton
MQ00067-d-EN 05/06/2014
480
Scenario Module
F420
Configuration
If the device is installed in a My Home system it can be configured in two ways: If the module does not receive any input for 30 minutes from the start of the learning
- PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION, inserting the configurators in position. procedure, programming will automatically be interrupted. If you want to delete a scenario
- Configuration via MYHOME_Suite software package, downloadable from completely, press and hold down the corresponding button for approximately 10 seconds.
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com. To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed for
For a list of the procedures and their meanings, please refer to the instructions in 10 seconds, the yellow “reset scenarios” LED flashes quickly. Once the operations have been
this sheet and to the "Function Descriptions" help section in the performed lock the programming by pressing the lock/unlock pushbutton for at least 0.5
MYHOME_Suite software package. seconds, so that the corresponding LED becomes red.
The combination of the scenario module with a control device is ensured by assigning to NOTES:
both items the same address. This is identified by the configurators with a numeric value Inside the system itself one Scenario module can be programmed at a time as the other
for position A = 0-9 and position PL = 1-9. Several scenario modules may be installed in devices are temporarily locked; during this phase the “programming status” LED becomes
one system, allocating a different address to each module. orange signalling the temporary Lock. During the learning procedure and when there
are timed controls or group controls, the Scenario module does not save events for 20
Scenario programming seconds. You must thus wait before continuing with creating the scenario. During the
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the scenario learning procedure only the changes of status are saved. It is important to
programming mode of the Module item F420 so that the status LED is green (press the configure the scenario module with a different A and PL address to that of an actuator.
lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the If the configuration is wrong the Programming status LED flashes ORANGE. In case of
following operations: “virtual” configuration the LED flashes RED.
1) Press one of the four scenario control keys the scenario should be paired with for 3
seconds. The corresponding LED starts flashing.
2) Set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation,
Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions.
3) Confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the corresponding key on the control to exit
programming mode.
4) To change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
starting from point 1.
To recall an already set scenario, briefly pressing the corresponding button on the control is
enough.
1.1 Addressing

MQ00067-d-EN 05/06/2014
481
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
Description
The gateway is an interface that provides communication among different BUS systems.
The interface has two BUS clamps, IN and OUT. On the front is a C key for virtual configu-
ration and a LED for the notification of:
- correct power supply and configuration (ON steady) 5
- BUS not detected (OFF)
- configuration not detected or incorrect configuration (flashing). OUT
The device may operate in six different modes:
- Physical expansion: can increase the total BUS length or exceed the current draw limit
of 1200 mA for the individual power supply unit.
- Logical expansion: can increase the number of devices of a system, which is 175 (max 11 C
in rooms defined with A = 0 to 10 and 16 light points with PL = 0 to 15). 4
Address A = 0, PL = 0 is not permitted.
3
- Burglar alarm/automation interface: it allows communication between these two sys-
tems. IN
- Public riser: it provides alarm event supervision for the common parts of the video door
entry system. 2 1
- Galvanic separation: can interface two different functions (eg: Sound System with Au-
tomation).
- Physical separation: brings together the features of the Physical expansion mode and
the Galvanic separation mode. It can be used for systems with devices preset for virtual
configuration.
NOTE: Regardless of the interface mode of use, it must be taken into account that
the two Buses connected constitute at all effects two systems, and, as such, they Legend
must be subjected to all existing sizing and installation rules.
Technical data
2. BUS
Power supply via SCS BUS: 27 Vdc 3. Signalling LED
4. Button for future use
IN clamp current draw: 25 mA
OUT clamp current draw: 5 mA 5. OUT clamp
Dissipated power with max. load: 1W
Dimensions
Size: 2 DIN modules
Configuration
The interface is configured only with the physical configuration. Sockets l1, l2, l3, and l4 are used to uniquely identify, using numerical configurators, the
addresses of the interfaces inside the system.
I1 I2 I3 I4 MOD
1) “Physical expansion” operating mode - configurator MOD = 1 -
With the interface configured in this mode, it will be possible to extend the physical limit - On the output BUS (OUT) the addresses must be between A=3 / PL=3 and A=9 /PL=9 or
of the maximum length of the BUS, or exceed the limit of 1200 mA delivered by the indi- the address of the next interface. As it can be seen from the example, all the automation
vidual power supply, but not the maximum number of actuators (max. 175). The positions BUS 1 addresses are lower than that of the interface, while all the automation BUS 2
identified with I1 and I2 must not be configured. The “separation address” between the addresses are higher; the interface address therefore separates all the addresses of which
two buses connected to the interface must instead be defined in positions I3 and I4. Sup- the complete system might be made up of into two or more blocks.
posing as in the example that I3=3, I4=2:
- On the input BUS (IN) the addresses must go from A=0 / PL=1 and A=3 / PL=1;
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
482
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
Installation example
A/PL = 33  53 2 A/PL = 78  175 (*) 4
Automation Automation
OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT
C I1 = – C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = 3 I3 = 5 I3 = 7
IN IN IN
I4 = 2 I4 = 4 I4 = 7
MOD = 1 MOD = 1 MOD = 1
IN IN IN
A/PL = 01  31 1 A/PL = 55  76 3
Note (*): maximum number of addresses available with virtual configuration of the devices.
Installation rules: - The web server and the scenario programmer must be installed on the BUS line with the
- Configure both I3 and I4 with configurators from 1 to 9, to set the separation between lowest addresses (system 1 on the drawing).
the two Buses. - All control devices configured for sending Point-Point, Room, Group, and General con-
- I1 and I2 must not be configured. trols may be connected to any branch of the system (no.1 or no. 2), without limitation,
irrespective of their respective addresses in the A and PL positions.
- If several interfaces are installed in series, the addresses of the devices between one in-
terface and the other must be within those of the two interfaces (see system example). - The above also applies to actuators configured in “slave” operating mode.
- In this mode, it is not possible to install two interfaces in parallel on the same BUS. - Interface F422 allows Point-Point, Group, Room, and General controls to travel through
the various systems. It is therefore possible to install, for example, in system no. 2 a
- It is possible to install up to four interfaces in series, which subdivide the system in 5
control configured as A=1 and PL=5 that will control actuator A=1 and PL=5 installed
separate sections, individually powered.
in system no. 1.
- The scenario module, the memory module, the IR emitter for the control of air con-
- Within the system, no device must be configured with the same address as the interface.
ditioning units, and the devices that can be configured in self-learning mode, must
be installed on the BUS section corresponding to the own local address (e.g. if the
scenario module is configured as A=0/PL=1, it will have to be placed on system
no. 1 - see system example).
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
483
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
2) “Logic expansion” operating mode - configurator MOD = 2
This mode enables separation of control systems, with each of them therefore capable A typical example may be a large villa on several floors: A system may be installed for
of using all the addresses available. It is therefore possible to connect several systems to each floor, all connected to each other through another system operating as a riser. The
an automation BUS, with each system having all the 175 addresses available. The BUS to positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while in the l4 position,
which all others are connected therefore operates as main riser. This BUS must necessari- the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) connected to the riser must be configured.
ly belong to an automation system. It is recommended that this mode is used for systems
installed in large villas or in the service/industrial sector.
Installation example
A/PL = 01  99 (*) 1 A/PL = 01  99 (*) 2 A/PL = 01  99 (*) 3
Automation Automation Automation
OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT
C C C
I1 = – I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
IN I3 = – IN I3 = – IN I3 = –
I4 = 1 I4 = 2 I4 = 3
MOD = 2 MOD = 2 MOD = 2
IN IN IN
Main riser
Note (*): maximum number of addresses available with physical configuration. Maximum 175 addresses may be managed with virtual configuration.
Installation rules:
- Configure I4 with configurators from 1 to 9 to number the Buses connected to the riser. - From the main riser (IN clamp), arrive the general controls (rolling shutters and lights),
- I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured. group controls (this allows a minimum centralisation of the controls, using standard
devices of the control system), and power management controls (to allow positioning
- The BUS of the individual system connected to the main riser must be connected to the
of the power management central unit on the riser). On the other hand, point-point
OUT clamp of the interface.
controls are stopped by the interface, and therefore remain inside the individual sys-
- The main riser must consist of an Automation system in which, in addition to the cor- tem, including the riser. The controls of all systems other than automation, including
responding control devices and actuators, it will also be possible to install the Energy AUXILIARY controls, travel in the two directions without any processing. In order to
management central unit, temperature central unit, and the MH200N scenario pro- send controls from one system to the other, the special controls H4651M2, L4651M2,
grammer. AM5831M2 and 067553 may be used in extended control mode.
- In this mode up to nine interfaces may be connected to the main riser; it is possible to - The interface address cannot be the same as that of other devices (e.g. configure the
manage up to ten systems as if they were a single one. Each system connected to the interface l1= -, 12= -, 13= -, l4=1 and MOD = 2, if a scenario module is configured
riser can have all 81 addresses allowed. with A = - and PL = 1).
- The web server and the scenario programmer must be installed on the BUS line with
the lowest addresses (system 1 on the drawing).
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
484
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
3) “Public riser” operating mode - configurator MOD = 3
This mode is indicated when display of burglar alarms and technical alarms are required,
generated within the common sections, using a switchboard, item 346310, installed on
the backbone or the riser of the video door entry system.
Simple diagram for the display of alarms on common parts
Riser 1 Riser 2 Riser 3
OUT OUT OUT
ON ON ON
IN IN IN
OUT
287 I1 = –
I2 = –
&
I3 =
*
I4 =*
MOD = 3
,1
Burglar Alarm System

IN
(contact interfaces, gas/
For the electric diagram see the switchboard
Common system section water sensors, etc.) technical sheet.
Installation rules:
• On the common sections it is possible to connect contact interfaces, or technical alarms
(gas/water leak), up to a total of 9 auxiliary channels; these must be connected to the
IN clamp of interface item F422.
(*) Use a free address of the video handset.
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
485
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
4) “Interface between burglar alarm and automation/video door entry system/ 5) “Galvanic separation” operating mode
sound system” mode - configurator MOD = 4 - configurator MOD = no configuration
This mode can be used to interface the Automation system to the burglar alarm system, This configuration enables keeping the power supplies of the two buses separate, allow-
to facilitate interaction and exchange of information between the two BUS. Thanks to ing interfacing of different My Home functions (e.g. sound system and automation). In
this function, it is possible to remotely control the automation system using the tele- some cases, the use of this interface is necessary (for example when the sound system
phone communicator. The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, is installed). In other cases installation alternatives are possible; for example, it will be
while in the l4 position, the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) must be configured. possible (but not compulsory) to install Temperature Control on a separate BUS, and in-
terface it with Automation using an interface in Galvanic Separation mode.
The positions identified with l1, l2 and l3 must not be configured, while in the l4 position,
the address of the interface (l4 from 1 to 9) must be configured.
Installation example Installation example
Burglar alarm Sound system
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN I4 = 1 IN I4 = 1
MOD = 4 MOD = –
IN IN
Automation
Video door entry system Automation
Sound system
Installation rules: Installation rules:

- Configure l4 with configurators from 1 to 9. - Configure l4 with configurators from 1 to 9.
- I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured. - I1, I2 and I3 must not be configured.
- The BUS of the Burglar Alarm system must be connected to the OUT clamp of the in- - The Automation BUS must be connected to the IN clamp. The other systems must be
terface. connected to the OUT clamp (e.g. Sound System).
- It is not possible to connect other interfaces to the Burglar Alarm system, to physically - It is not possible to connect several Automation systems to the same Sound System.
extend the BUS, or to increase the maximum number of devices. - Thanks to this mode, using the Web Server A/V it is possible to control a one-family
- Only one interface may be connected to the Burglar Alarm system. It is therefore not system (a video door entry system and an Automation system, at the most subdivided
possible to connect together two Automation systems through the Burglar Alarm sys- into lines, following the physical and/or logic expansion mode procedure).
tem. - The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system.
- Installation of the Automation system actuators within the Burglar Alarm system is
not allowed.
- The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system.
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
486
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
6) “Physical separation” mode - configurator MOD=6
This mode brings together the features of the “physical expansion” mode and the “gal- In view of the above, it will no longer be necessary to indicate the system separation
vanic separation” mode. address in positions I3 and I4; therefore, the interface will have to be configured by as-
Each system may be connected to both the OUT and the IN clamps of the interface and, signing any address from 01 to 99, including any address already used by actuator de-
differently from what is required for “physical expansion” MOD=1, the addresses of the vices installed in the connected systems. If several interfaces are used, these must have
devices of the two systems may be selected freely. different addresses.
A/PL = 15 A/PL = 26 A/PL = 48 A/PL = 27 A/PL = 35 A/PL = 78
System No. 2 System No. 3
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN
I4 = 1 I4 = 2
MOD = 6 MOD = 6
IN IN
A/PL = 11 A/PL = 35 A/PL = 62
Automation
System No. 1
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
487
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
The use of the interface with this mode may be useful to keep the Automation system
and the Temperature control system separate (for example when using independent
power supplies).
Automation
OUT
OUT
C I1 = –
I2 = –
I3 = –
IN
I4 = 1
MOD = 6
IN
Energy
management
Installation rules: Configuration:

- Each individual system connected to the IN or OUT clamps of the interface must be powered For correct operation, the interface must be configured to:
by its own power supply. - define its address within the system;
- It is possible to use up to 4 interfaces in MOD=6 for the connection of the Automation and/ - acquire the address of the devices of the systems connected to the IN and OUT clamps.
or Energy Management, and Temperature Control systems to each other. Configuration of the interface address:
- In case of cascade connection of several Automation and/or Energy management, and The device may be configured in 3 different modes:
Temperature Control systems, each individual system must be connected to the OUT clamp - using numerical configurators, 0 to 9, in positions I3 and I4;
of one interface and the IN clamp of the other. Therefore, do no connect the system to the - using the Virtual Configurator application as indicated in the software User Manual;
two interfaces only using the OUT clamps. - using the “self-configuration” procedure as indicated below:
- Do not configure positions l1 and l2. 1. press the interface pushbutton for a few instants; the LED flashes slowly.
- In positions l3 and l4, address l3=0 to 9 and l4=1 to 9 of the interface must be specified. 2. press the pushbutton again; the LED flashes quickly and the device starts the self-
This address may also correspond to that of other actuator devices installed in the connected configuration procedure.
systems. If several interfaces are installed, these must have different addresses. 3. Once the configuration procedure has been completed correctly, the LED comes on steady.
- The interface does not use any addresses of the Automation system. Repeat this operation for all the interfaces in MOD-6 of the system.
- The scenario module and the devices that can be configured in self-learning mode can
be connected to any branch of the system (no. 1 or no.2). The memory module must be
connected to the system connected to the OUT clamp of the last interface.
- All control devices configured for sending Point-Point, Room, Group, and General controls Acquisition of the addresses of the connected devices:
may be connected to any branch of the system (no.1 or no. 2), without limitation, This procedure must only be carried out after the configuration of the interface address (or
irrespective of their respective addresses in the A and PL positions. several interfaces, as applicable). It is possible to select one of two modes:
- The above also applies to actuators configured in “slave” operating mode. - using the Virtual Configurator application as indicated in the software User Manual;
- Interface F422 allows Point-Point, Group, Room, and General controls to travel through the - pressing the interface pushbutton for at least 2 seconds. Any other interfaces in MOD=6
various systems. It is therefore possible to install, for example, in system no. 2 a control installed in the system will automatically acquire the configuration of the devices.
configured as A=1 and PL=5 that will control actuator A=1 and PL=5 installed in system Before performing this operation check that all system interfaces and actuators have their
no. 1. addresses configured.
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
488
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
7) Use of interfaces with different modes
For home automation systems of a certain complexity, several systems may be integrat- If necessary, each of these can be expanded (physical expansion mode) or interfaced
ed with interfaces configured in different modes. For example, it is possible to create with the Video Door Entry System or the Sound System using other interfaces. For exam-
a system with three interfaces for the connection of two Automation systems and one ple, in case of a villa consisting of several large floors.
Burglar alarm system to one single riser.
Example No. 1
Automation Burglar alarm
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN
I4 = 2 I4 = 1
MOD = 6 MOD = 4
230 Vac
IN IN
Automation
OUT
OUT
C I1 = –
I2 = –
I3 = –
IN
I4 = 1
MOD = 2
IN
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
489
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
Example no. 2: system with logic expansion
A/PL = 01  31 1a A/PL = 33  53 1b A/PL = 55  175 1c

Automation Automation Automation
(low addresses) (intermediate addresses) (high addresses)
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
C C
I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
IN I3 = 3 IN I3 = 5
I4 = 2 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 MOD = 1
IN IN
Main riser
OUT OUT OUT OUT
OUT OUT OUT OUT
C I1 = – C I1 = – C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = – I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = – I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN IN IN
I4 = 1 I4 = 2 I4 = 1 I4 = 1
MOD = 2 MOD = 2 MOD = 4 MOD = –
IN IN IN IN
2 3 Sound
Automation Automation Burglar alarm
system
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
490
SCS/SCS
gateway
F422
Example no. 3: system without logic expansion
A/PL = 33  53 1b A/PL = 55  175 1c

(intermediateaddresses) (high addresses)
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
C C
I1 = – I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
IN I3 = 3 IN I3 = 5
I4 = 2 I4 = 4
MOD = 1 MOD = 1
IN IN
A/PL = 01  31 1a
Automation
(low addresses)
OUT OUT
OUT OUT
C I1 = – C I1 = –
I2 = – I2 = –
I3 = – I3 = –
IN IN
I4 = 1 I4 = 1
MOD = 4 MOD = –
IN IN
Sound
Burglar alarm
system
MQ00280-e-EN 07/06/2014
491
OPEN-BACNET Gateway
F450
Description
Front view
OPEN-BACnet gateway for control via MyHome Touch Screen of Air Conditioning, Fan
Coils, Air Treatment Units (ATU), VAV and underfloor heating via BACnet protocol.
1
Technical data 2
Power supply via SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 3

Dimensions
6 DIN modules
Configuration
4
The device is configured with the TiOpenBacnet software package thanks to a LAN
connection (with crossed cable if the connection between the PC and the gateway is di-
rect without using
a HUB/SWITCH) or via a generic cable with USB and mini USB connectors. Legend
1. RJ 45 for 10/100 Mbit Ethernet LAN

2. USB port for configuration via PC and firmware upgrading
3. User interface:
- System: When the power supply is connected, it comes on, goes off, and then
comes on again, to indicate that the gateway is working
- Speed: Connection Speed: on = 100 Mbit; off = 10 Mbit - Link: ON it indicates the
presence of the Ethernet network
4. 2-wire BUS for connecting to the BUS
MQ01008-a-EN 07/06/2014
492
Audio/Video Web Server
F454
Description
1 2 3
Audio/Video Web Server for local and remote control of MY HOME applications using
dedicated web pages. ETHERNET
The Web Server can also be used as a gateway for the management of the system using
devices like PCs and Smartphones, and for virtual configuration, using a dedicated
software.
Technical data
Absorption: 125 mA max (with active video interface)
SCS AI SCS AV
Dimensional data
6 DIN modules 5 4
The audio/video web server is configured using the TiF454 software thanks to a LAN 1. RJ 45 for 10/100Mbit Ethernet LAN
connection (with cross-over cable if the connection between PC and F454 is direct, 2. Under the door are:
without using a HUB/SWITCH) or using a standard USB and mini USB cable. - USB ports for PC configuration and Firmware update
- RESET pushbutton
- Serial connector RS232
3. User interface:
- Speed: Connection speed; ON = 100 Mbit;
OFF = 10 Mbit
- Link: ON it indicates the presence of the Ethernet network
- System: when the power supply is connected, it comes on, goes off, and then
comes on again, to indicate that the web server is working
4. 2-wire BUS for video door entry system connection
5. 2-wire BUS for burglar alarm system
MQ00519-b-EN 17/04/2014
493
0672 67 MH4892
0672 68 MH4893

1 2
with 16:9 10” LCD screen and new graphic interface:
- management of all My Home and Video door entry system functions
- navigation by rooms
- management of multimedia contents through USB connection, SD Card, LAN network, or IP
- management of customised profiles 9 3
- possibility of customising background images 8 4
Installation: the device is suitable for wall mounted installation using the bracket 7 5
supplied. 6
Available in white and in black. No additional surround plate needed.
Technical data
Local power supply (1 – 2): 22–27 Vdc
Local max. absorption (1 – 2): 370 mA Rear view
10 12 14 15
Max. absorption from SCS BUS: 50 mA 11 13
OFF ON
SCS
AUDIO
OUT BUS 2 1
ETH
16 17 16

1. Microphone
A C 2. 10” touch screen colour LCD display
3. Call answer pushbutton
4. Door lock release
5. Switching on/Camera scrolling
6. Monitor off
7. USB connector
B 8. Mini-USB connector for the connection to the PC
9. Secur Digital memory card connector
11. Sound system output connector
12. 2 WIRE video BUS/SCS connector
13. 1 - 2 power supply connector
14. LAN connection signalling LED
A B C 15. RJ45 connector for Ethernet connection
315 mm 200 mm 24 mm 16. Loudspeakers
17. Safety spring
MQ00758-b-EN 17/12/2013
494
0672 67 MH4892
0672 68 MH4893
Configuration
must be configured using the software.
In order to receive/transfer the configuration performed, or to update the firmware, connect the device to the PC using one of the following solutions:
- USB-miniUSB cable;
- Ethernet cable.
USB connection Ethernet connection
OFF ON
SCS
AUDIO
OUT BUS 2 1
ETH
1 2 3 4 5 6
DC - In
Switch
For the configuration download the software from the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com
MQ00758-b-EN 17/12/2013
495
0672 67 MH4892
0672 68 MH4893
Wiring diagram
Ethernet cable
230 Vac
PR I
OFF ON
SCS
AUDIO 346020
OUT BUS 2 1 PRI: 220 - 240V~
175-165mA
50/60Hz
1-2: 27Vdc
600mA
ETH
1- 2
F441M 346020
Multichannel matrix 346000
0634 35
0634 42
Power supply
BUS SCS Audio
MQ00758-b-EN 17/12/2013
496
Touch Screen
067292 H4890 LN4890 LN4890A
078479 573958 HW4890 AM5890
Description
Touch Screen is a device that enables controlling the MY HOME and Lighting
Management functions, by means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on a 3.5”
touch screen LCD display.
The device can be used to manage the automation, lights, temperature control, sound
system, burglar-alarm, energy management, and scenario functions.
For each application, it is possible to manage up to 20 actuations (for example 20
actuators, 20 amplifiers, etc.). 1
Technical data
Operating power supply with SCS BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc 18 – 27 Vdc
Absorption: 80 mA
Dimensional data
Size: 3+3 flush mounted module
Installation
Touch Screen can be installed very easily on the wall using a box and integrates
perfectly with any domestic room thanks to its compatibility with all cover plates of the
Axolute, Living and Màtix civil series.
Touch screen
2 3
Legend
1. USB connector for programming and firmware update
2. RJ45 Ethernet connector
3. Clamp for SCS BUS connection
MQ00699-b-EN 17/04/2014
497
Touch Screen
067292 H4890 LN4890 LN4890A
078479 573958 HW4890 AM5890
Configuration
Touch Screen is programmed by connecting it to a PC using the interface cable, Based on the requirements of the customer, it is possible to create a new configuration,
item 335919 (RS232 version), 3559 (USB version), or an Ethernet cable, and the or manage an existing one. The program also gives the possibility of configuring extra
TiTouchScreen software. Touch Screen functions, such as scenarios with logic or time conditions, the display of
the time and the date, and the setup of a protection password.
The software creates a link between the preconfigured icons, which will be shown on It is also possible to define the graphic style of the icons to complement the look of the
the Display, and the functions that must be managed and performed by the devices device. For further information refer to the software documentation.
of the Automation and lighting, Sound, burglar-alarm, temperature control, energy
management and scenario systems.
Connection to the Personal Computer
USB/mini USB
Crossover type
Ethernet cable
Connection to the Personal Computer for HW4890
USB/mini USB
MQ00699-b-EN 17/04/2014
498
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
Description
Local Display is a device that gives the possibility of 4 home automation functions by
means of simple and intuitive icons displayed on a 1.2” OLED display with touch screen
technology.
It can be used to manage the temperature control, sound system, energy management,
and scenario functions. 1
The back of Local Display has a USB socket, which can be used to connect the device
to a PC, to update the configuration, the set of characters, and the icon, as well as the
firmware.
Technical data Front view

- Power supply from BUS: 18 – 27 Vdc
- Stand-by Absorption: max 10 mA @ 27 Vdc
max 15 mA @ 18 Vdc
- Operating absorption: max 50 mA @ 27 Vdc
max 70 mA @ 18 Vdc
- Operating temperature: 5 – 35 °C 2
- Size: 2 flush mounted modules
Configuration 5 3
Local Display may be configured in two ways:
- physical configuration, by connecting the configurators to the appropriate sockets. Rear view
This mode gives the possibility of configuring with basic parameters only 1 function
4
to manage, among the ones listed below. For the configuration of the advanced
parameters use the software.
- from the PC, using the dedicated software. This mode gives the possibility of
configuring all the parameters, for the management of 1 to 4 functions listed Legend
below.
1. OLED technology Touch Screen
3. BUS clamp
Avaible functions
4. Clamp for the connection of the external temperature probe
- Scenario control 5. USB connector
- Temperature control with external probe
- Temperature control with probe
- Sound system
- Consumption display
- Load management
- Advances scenario (with scenario programmer installed in the system), to be
configured using the software only
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
499
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
Installation Main functions that can be set using the software

Local Display is installed using a traditional procedure, using a box, support, and cover Main possible functions using the software:
plate; the device is not fitted with a temperature probe. Therefore, it will not be necessary - selection of the operating mode to set for the device, temperature control, scenarios,
to comply with the probe installation requirements. sound system, load management, consumption display.
The recommended installation height is 150 - 160 cm. - configuration of the settings of the probe and of its parameters;
- definition of the type of temperature central unit;
- parameters for the measurement of energy production, or consumption costs;
Local Display physical configuration - configuration of the general device parameters;
- icon style definition.
- Scenario control mode - FUN = 1
Thanks to this mode, it will be possible to manage and change 4 different associated
scenarios of the scenario module, and activate them by pressing one of the 4 icons shown on
the display.
A Room 0 – 9, room of the scenario module item

PL Light point 1 – 9, light point of the scenario module
MOD Mode 1 – 4, scenario number (*)
FUN Function 1
(*) Correspondence among the 4 icons and the numbers of the scenarios that can be
saved in the scenario module
Configurator MOD Icon 1 Icon 2

1 Scenario 1 Scenario 2
2
3
4
Scenario 5
Scenario 9
Scenario 13
Scenario 6
Scenario 10
Scenario 14
scenario 1
1 2 scenario 2
Configurator MOD
1
2
3
Icon 3
Scenario 3
Scenario 7
Scenario 11
Icon 4
Scenario 4
Scenario 8
Scenario 12
scenario 3
3 4 scenario 4
4 Scenario 15 Scenario 16
Scenario programmer NOTE: Once the operations have been performed lock the programming, pressing the
In order to program, change or cancel a scenario, it is necessary to enable the lock/unlock pushbutton, of the senario module, for at least 0.5 seconds, so that the
programming mode of the SCS/SCS Module so that the status LED is green (press the corresponding LED becomes red.
lock/unlock key on the Scenario Module for at least 0.5 seconds); continue with the
following operations: To delete a scenario, proceed as follows:
1) press one of the four control keys the scenario should be associated to for 3 1) the scenario module must be enabled for programming.
seconds. The screen shows the name and icon of the selected scenario and 2) press the pushbutton of the scenario you want to cancel for at least 7 seconds; The
the programming bar, to indicate that the learning procedure has started
display will confirm that the scenario has been deleted and return to the main screen.
If the device does not receive any input for 30 minutes from the start of the learning
procedure, programming will automatically be interrupted; To erase the entire memory keep the DEL pushbutton on the Scenario module pressed
2) set the scenario using the corresponding controls for the various Automation, for 10 seconds, the yellow “reset scenarios” LED flashes quickly.
Temperature control, Sound system, etc. functions;
3) confirm the scenario by quickly pressing the display
4) to change or create new scenarios to be linked to the other keys, repeat the procedure
starting from point 1.
To call a set scenario just press its pushbutton on the control quickly.
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
500
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
– Sound system control mode - FUN = 2

With this mode, for the associated amplifier the user can control the switching ON or OFF, 1
the volume, the cycling through the sources, and their management (where allowed).
Information on the currently active source is also displayed.
In this mode the parameters that can be configured are the local address of the display (which 7 2
must coincide with the A/Pf address, and the M1 mode of the associated amplifier), and the ON
name of the sources that can be controlled.
A Room 0 – 9, amplifier room

RDS
PF Loudspeaker 1 – 9, Amplifier loudspeaker 2
MOD Mode 0 – 8, Source switching ON (*)
6
106.70 3
FUN Function 2
5 4
OFF
NOTA (*): If M=0, source 1 is switched on without first switching OFF the sources (follow-me mode).
Functions Legend
A quick pressure of keys 5 and 7 will respectively switch ON and OFF the associated 1. Indication of the amplifier status or radio frequency
amplifier. If the associated amplifier is on, an extended pressure of keys 5 and 7 may be 2. Cycling of sources (radio/aux)
used to adjust the volume, the intensity of which will be displayed by means of an icon 3. Active source indication
5. A short pressure of keys 2 and 4, will respectively cycle through the sources installed in 4. Change radio station
the system, and launch a control for the currently active source. If the associated amplifier 5. Associated amplifier OFF and volume decrease
is off and no source is on, the screen 6. Volume level indication
will not show any information. Press key 4 for 3 seconds to configure the alarm clock (see 7. Associated amplifier ON and volume increase
the user manual for details).
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
501
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
- Temperature control probe mode with external probe - FUN = 3

Warning: the physical configuration can only be performed if the system includes a
99-zone temperature central unit.
An external temperature probe, with the following characteristics, can be connected on

the back of Local Display:
- 10 KΩ at 25 °C BETA 3435 temperature
- max. length of the connection 10 metres probe
Local Display shows the temperature value measured by the external probe, the set
temperature value, and the local selector adjustment. The operations that may be
performed by user are:
- variation of the temperature set using the local selector,
- FAN-COIL speed management, BUS - SCS
- operating mode management.
ZA Zone address 0 – 9, Local Display address

ZB Zone address 1 – 9, Local Display address
MOD Mode 0 – 8, Slave probe number
FUN Function 3
For simple systems, where each zone controls at most one heating actuator and one air For more complex systems, the probe can memorize the actuators to activate, and the
conditioning actuator, both of the ON/OFF type, and on a system with only one pump pumps to control on the BUS. The programming operation must be completed directly
per function, the confi guration of the system can be performed by simply connecting from the central unit. The central unit can also be used for the calibration of the probe.
the confi gurators that identify the address of the device and, in case of probe, indicate During the system setting stage, it will be necessary to specify the actuators used for
the number of slaves present. the heating system, and those used for the air conditioning system, as they operate in
a complementary way.
Legend
1. Set temperature
2. Fan-Coil adjustment 2
11
3. Fan-Coil speed indication
4. Temperature variation indication + 2
5. Fan-Coil operation indication
10
25.5° 2 3
6. Change operating mode 4
7. Measured temperature
8. Decrease temperature
9. Operating mode indication
9
26.3° 5
10. System status indication 8 6

11. Increase the temperature
Functions 7
A short pressure of keys 8 and 11 can be used to locally change the temperature by
+/-3 °C, in relation to the settings received from the central unit. A short pressure of
key 6 can be used to select the mode of operation, cycling through the OFF, antifreeze/
thermal protection, and automatic statuses respectively. Each mode of operation is
identifi ed by a diff erent icon. A short pressure of key 2 will force the speed the fan-coils,
cycling through speed 1, 2, 3 or automatic.
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
502
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
- Temperature control probe mode with probe - FUN = 4

Warning: physical configuration can only be used if a 99-zone temperature control
central unit is installed in the system
This mode is different from the previous one in the fact that the external probe is not
connected to Local Display. Being unable to autonomously establish the temperature, the local selector, and the change of status of the probe. In this mode, the parameters
it must be associated to at least one probe. The user is shown the temperature value that can be configured are the local display address (which must coincide with the
measured by the associated probes, the set temperature value, and the adjustment of ZA/ZB address of the associated probe), the type of control of the pump, the type of
the local selector. mode, and the number of slave probes.
The possible operations for the user are the adjustment of the set temperature using
ZA Zone address 0 – 9, probe address
ZB Zone address 1 – 9, probe address
MOD Mode 1 – 8, Slave probe number
FUN Function 4
For simple systems, where each zone controls at most one heating actuator and one air For more complex systems, the probe can memorize the actuators to activate, and the
conditioning actuator, both of the ON/OFF type, and on a system with only one pump pumps to control on the BUS. The programming operation must be completed directly
per function, the confi guration of the system can be performed by simply connecting from the central unit. The central unit can also be used for the calibration of the probe.
the confi gurators that identify the address of the device and, in case of probe, indicate During the system setting stage, it will be necessary to specify the actuators used for
the number of slaves present. the heating system, and those used for the air conditioning system, as they operate in
a complementary way.
Example of configuration of a zone (address 47) with Local Display and probe
Local Display Probe Slave

Local Slave
Socket Configurator Socket Configurator
display probe
ZA 4 ZA 4
ZB 7 ZB 7
MOD 1 MOD SLA
FUN 4 SLA 1
Functions
A short pressure of keys 8 and 11 can be used to locally change the temperature by
+/-3°C, in relation to the settings received from the central unit. A short pressure of key 6
can be used to select the mode of operation, cycling through the OFF, antifreeze/thermal
protection, and automatic statuses respectively.
Each mode of operation is identified by a different icon. A short pressure of key 2 will
force the speed the fan-coils, cycling through speed 1, 2, 3 or automatic.
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
503
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
- Energy Management Mode – consumption display FUN=5

It is possible to display the consumptions and the production of several energies of the For each line, the consumptions and the instantaneous, daily, monthly, and annual
system, with monitoring of up to a maximum of ten lines. economic evaluation are displayed.
It will be possible to set two maximum consumption values, with the device emitting
Warning: with physical configuration, only the consumptions of one line can be visual and sound notifications if these are exceeded. In this case, the displayed value will
displayed. be green when below both limits, yellow when one has been exceeded, and red when
both have been exceeded.
ZA Line address 0–9

ZB Line address 1–9
MOD Type 0 = ELECTRICITY
1 = WATER
2 = GAS
3 = DHW
4 = HEATING/COOLING
FUN Function 5
Functions
Once the device has been configured, it will be possible to scroll through the various lines
using icon 4. For each measurement interface, by pressing briefly icon 3 it will then be
possible to display the consumptions or the economic evaluation. 4 Kw 1
m3 D/M/Y
Press and hold down icon 3 to access a submenu where it will be possible to change the
basic value of the economic evaluation. Total D
Consumption and economic evaluations are themselves split into: instantaneous, daily
(D), monthly (M), annual (Y). It is possible to scroll through these settings using icon 1.
Press and release icon 2 to access a submenu that can be used to set the time, the date,
115.4
the threshold levels (if enabled), and the possibility of enabling or disabling the beep kwh
emitted when the threshold is exceeded.
3 $ 2
Legend
1. selection of display times
2. setting of the functions (time, date, max. power, etc.)
3. economic display of the consumptions
4. selection of the lines to display
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
504
Local display
067271 067272 HD4891 HC4891 HS4891
573716 573717 L4891 N4891 NT4891
- Load Management Mode

This mode, only available if Local Display is configured using the software, gives the
possibility of displaying loads, with their priority levels, and force their activation. The
device can manage up to 20 loads; if these are connected to actuators with current
sensor it will be possible to display other load information, like the instantaneous power
4
ON 1
consumption.
When the central unit for load management intervenes on a load, the device (if enabled
6
during the configuration) notifies the event with an indication on the display and an
audible notification.
Oven
Functions 3 i 2
After the configuration of the device it will be possible to select the various loads using
icon 1.
Icon 4 is disabled until the moment the central unit disables the load; when this happens,
the icon becomes active, and can be selected to force the activation of the load.
In this condition, icon 3, used to intervene on the status of the load, is disabled.
Legend
However, if icon 4 is disabled, it will be possible to select icon 3 to pre-force the load,
and avoid disconnection in case of intervention of the central unit when consumptions 1. selection of the load to control
are exceeded. 2. display of consumption data and device setup
If the loads are connected to actuators with current sensor, use icon 2 to access a 3. activation/deactivation of the load
submenu that can be used to display the instantaneous power consumption, as well as 4. forced activation of the load disconnected by the energy management central unit,
information form the line total consumption meters. While in this submenu, you can use due to consumptions being exceeded.
the RESET icon to reset the meters. Press key 2 for 3 seconds to access the menu used for
setting the time, the date, and the sound notification (beep).
- Advanced CEN Scenario mode

For systems with scenario programmers, Local Display can be used to enable 1 of the 4
scenarios displayed. This is done using the associated icons.
1 2
This function is only available if Local Display has been configured using the software.
1
3 4
Legend
1. scenario indication icon
MQ00692-b-EN 17/04/2014
505
Scenario programmer
MH200N
Description
This device can be used to manage up to 300 simple and advanced scenarios.
Thanks to the scenario programmer, the MY HOME system can perform certain actions,
not only following a command from the user, but also when external events occur, such Bottom view
as the opening of a door, or a signal generated by light or temperature sensors.
1
The execution of an advanced scenario based on a set time and date, or the arming/
disarming of the burglar alarm system, may initiate, for example, the simulation of a
presence inside the home, by automatically activating the rolling shutters or the lights
at certain preset times, when no one is in fact at home.
The scenarios are programmed on the device using the TiMH200N software that can be
found in the CD supplied. The installation of the scenario programmer, item MH200N
only requires the connection to the power supply and to the MY HOME automation BUS. Front view 2
Thanks to the possibility of connection to the Ethernet network, the device is also
suitable for advanced applications, like:
- Use as SCS/LAN Gateway device for: 3 3

- Managing or configuring the MY HOME system with the MHVisual program and
Virtual Configurator respectively, installed on PCs connected to the network; 1 2 1
- Displaying the status of a scenario through web pages (enabled/disabled);
- Managing new functions relating to the 4 zone temperature control system and
current sound system and automation devices (new F503 amplifier, 100 level
dimmer, lighting sensor);
- Managing the burglar alarm system (arming and disarming) based on events.
Top view
Related items
Power supply 27 Vdc 346020
4
Technical data
5
Power supply: 27 Vdc 6
Dimensional data
Legend
6 DIN modules
1. Connection to the PC serial port
2. Reset key
3. Status LED
4. Power supply (Item 346020)
5. BUS
6. Ethernet network RJ45 connector
MQ00319-b-EN 22/04/2014
506
Scenario programmer
MH200N
Configuration
Personal Computer
For the configuration of the device the TiMH200N program must be used, for creating with TIMH200N software
scenarios (actuation of light points, rolling shutters, etc.) of different degrees of
complexity, based on time events or events detected on the system (alarms, pushbuttons
pressed, etc.). If the scenario is activated by a control device (configured with M=CEN), it
will be possible to associate the corresponding key to the scenario itself.
The scenarios are grouped in a collection directly saved in the project.
The collection enables saving several scenarios, with only the required ones being
activated.
The project created must then be transferred (downloaded) to the scenario programmer.
This is done by connecting the device to the PC using a crossover type Ethernet cable (see
figure). In alternative, it is also possible to update MH200N remotely. To do this, both
the IP address and the OPEN password must be known (see manual found inside the CD
supplied with the device).
3559
In the same way, it is possible to upload the files from the device to check the saved
configuration. The TiMH200 program also enables updating the unit permanent base
MH200 software, by downloading any new versions published on the Bticino website
(Update Firmware).
CEN operating mode
This special mode is used for managing MH200N scenario programmers, by manually
activating the control device or the MY HOME automation range set by connecting the
CEN configurator in M.
The association between the key (upper or lower) of the control device and the scenario
to be activated, is obtained using the MiMH200N software. For example, it is possible to
activate two independent scenarios using the special H/L4651M2, AM5831M2, 067553
control, using the T1 (upper) and T2 (lower) pushbuttons. For the correspondence
between the control keys and the scenarios to activate see the table below. MH200N scenario
In addition to the listed devices, the CEN operating mode may be managed using the programmer
Touch Screen, the Multimedia Touch Screen, the Web Server, and a Personal Computer
with the MHVisual supervision software installed.
NOTE: The control devices configured with M=CEN mode can be connected to any point
of the system; The address specified in the A and PL positions must be different from the
addresses assigned to the actuators.
Type of control Configuration Identification of scenario activation keys
T1
067553, H/L4651M2 and AMS831M2 special control A=0-9; PL=0-9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=-; LIV2=-; SPE=-;I=-
T2
Basic control for 2 independent loads, 067552, A=0-9; PL1=0-9; M1=CEN; A2=-; PL2=-; M2=- T1
H/L4652/2 and AM5832/2
T2
A=0-9; PL1=0-9; M1=CEN; A2=-; PL2=-; M2=CEN T2
T1
T4
T3
Basic control for 3 independent loads, 067554, A=0-9; PL=0-9; M=CEN; LIV1/AUX=-; LIV2=-; SPE=-;I=- T2 T3
H/L4652/3 and AM5832/3 T1
T6
T3 T4
MQ00319-b-EN 22/04/2014
507
Scenario programmer
MH200N
Assembly, installation Configuration
Install the wiring in an ordered way. Note: connect the E46ADCN power supply of the automation system and the 346020
power supply of the Scenario Programmer to a standard double-pole switch.
230 Vac
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
OK
PRI
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
E46ADCN
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
NO
Automation BUS
Do not place devices that may generate electromagnetic interferences near

the Scenario Programmer.
346020
PRI
NO
346020
NO
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA
MQ00319-b-EN 22/04/2014
508
BTicino SpA
Viale Borri, 231
www.bticino.com
21100 Varese - Italy
BTicino S.p.A. reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet
AD-ITMH14ST/GB - Edition 08/2014 and to communicate, in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
Technical sheets 2014
SHEETS
TECHNICAL

BTCINO Devices

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BTCINO Devices

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BTicino SpA

Viale Borri, 231

Technical sheets 2014

Load control management and Consumption display

VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYTEM

RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURED CABLING

SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND CONTROL

ITEM N° PAGE ITEM N° PAGE ITEM N° PAGE

Index MyHOME III

This document collects all product Product description;

The technical sheets may also be viewed

VI MyHOME Technical sheets

Dimensional data Legend

Technical data Switch

Technical sheets MyHOME VII

SALES INFORMATION ESTIMATE SERVICE TECHNICAL SERVICE SALES SUPPORT

BUILDING BLOG MYOPEN COMMUNITY

PROMOTIONS MY HOME PRO

BTicino on the social media

YOUTUBE - BTICINO PROFESSIONAL FLICKR - IMAGE CHANNEL TWITTER BTICINO

183 mm Rear view

“Push and Learn” self-learning type. 3

Description Front view

Incandescent Fluorescent Ferromagnetic

230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA

– Connect a load before performing any “scenario” learning procedure.

Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic

Dimensional data Wiring diagram

Description Front view

230 Vac 1000 VA Legend

Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic Detail point 1

max. 500 W 500 W 500 VA 500 VA

Incandescent Fluorescent Ferromagnetic

Use of the device in bistable mode

Opening and closing the rolling shutter:

Shutter control Shutter control

Adjustment of the blade position:

Use of the device in monostable mode

Opening and closing the rolling shutter:

Shutter control Shutter control

Saving the rolling shutter position:

Connection to a two-way switch Connection to two pushbuttons

Definition of the interface operating mode

1. Press the two pushbuttons on the interface for at least 5 seconds.

Wireless movement detector RF ZigBee surface mounting

Description Front view

Technical data Internal view

Description Front view

Dimensional data Rear view

Description Front view

12 Vdc 12 Vac transformer

Description Front view

Technology: Radio 2.4 GHz standard ZigBee®

Incandescent Ferromagnetic Electronic 5

Incandescent Fluorescent Ferromagnetic

230 Vac 2500 W 1250 W 1250 W 250 VA

Size: 2 flush mounted modules

Description Front view

Incandescent Fluorescent Ferromagnetic

230 Vac 2 x 1000 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 500 W 2 x 100 VA

Incandescent Halogen Ferromagnetic Electronic 6 5

“Push and Learn” self-learning type.

Description Front view

Select the operating mode